advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 1004
㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Before You Start Legal Notices Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images Using the e-Manual How to Use the e-Manual Operating Environment Installing the e-Manual Uninstalling the e-Manual Screen Layout of the e-Manual Top Page Topic Page Site Map Search Method Viewing the e-Manual Disclaimer Copyright Trademarks Important Safety Instructions Installation Power Supply Handling Maintenance and Inspections Consumables About This Printer Printer Specifications Introduction of the Optional Accessories Names and Dimensions of Each Part Control Panel Introduction of the Utilities Energy-saving Mode Cautions for Handling the Printer Consumables Maintenance Toner Cartridge Replacement Attention (Toner Cartridge) Replacing Toner Cartridges Storing Toner Cartridges Adjusting the Printing Position Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source Moving the Printer Cleaning and Maintaining the Printer Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration) Specifying Times and Performing Automatic Calibration Automatically Performing Calibration Immediately after the Printer Is Turned ON If You Want to Adjust Color Balance Adjusting the Density of Each Color for Density Level Cleaning the Inside of the Printer Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer 㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 41 42 43 47 49 52 55 57 58 59 61 62 64 66 69 70 71 73 78 81 82 85 87 89 91 93 94 Cleaning the Outside of the Printer Attention (Cleaning) Location of the Serial Number Printer Installation Attention (Printer Installation) Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site Removing the Packing Materials Installing the Paper Feeder Installing the Printer Installing ROM Installing ROM Checking the ROM Installation Removing ROM Installing SD Card Installing SD Card Checking the SD Card Installation Removing SD Card Specifying the Printer's Initial Settings Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language Specifying a Type of Printer Driver Connecting to a Computer Installing the Software For Windows Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver Installation Other Software Program(s) For Macintosh Installation Basic Printer Operations Usable Paper Precautions for Paper Printable Area Paper Loading and Output Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Attention (Paper Drawer) Loading Custom Size Paper Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray Attention (Multi-purpose Tray) Registering the Paper Size and Type Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing Attention (Printer Driver Configuration) Turning the Printer ON/OFF Attention (Turning the Printer ON/OFF) Online and Offline Canceling a Job Operations from the Computer Canceling from the Printer Control Panel Outputting Data (Forced Output) Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) 㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 96 98 99 100 101 103 105 108 113 116 117 121 123 124 125 129 131 132 133 135 137 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 152 154 156 158 161 162 165 168 169 171 176 177 180 181 183 184 186 188 190 Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) Checking the Printer Status Printing on Various Types of Paper Printing on Plain Paper, Heavy Paper, or Index Card Printing on Transparencies (B&W Printing Only) Printing on Labels Printing on Envelopes Printing on Custom Size Paper Paper Loading Orientation Useful Printing Functions Printing from a Computer (Windows) Printing Fundamentals Printing Configuring the Default Print Settings Setting the Printer Options Viewing the Online Help Printing Functions Common Functions [Page Setup] Tab [Finishing] Tab [Paper Source] Tab [Quality] Tab [Device Settings] Tab Scaling Documents Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing) Booklet Printing Poster Printing Watermark Printing Setting the Color Mode for Printing Combining and Printing Multiple Files Selecting a Profile for Printing Registering a Profile for Printing Printing from a Computer (Macintosh) Printing Fundamentals Printing Configuring the Default Page Settings Setting the Printer Options Verifying the Printer Information Manually Setting the Printer Options Viewing the Online Help Viewing the Driver Guide Printing Functions Common Functions [Layout] Preferences Pane [Finishing] Preferences Pane [Paper Source] Preferences Pane [Quality] Preferences Pane 㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 191 192 193 194 196 197 198 200 201 203 205 206 207 209 211 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 223 225 228 229 231 233 235 237 240 241 242 243 244 247 249 250 254 257 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 [Special Features] Preferences Pane 266 Scaling Documents 267 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 269 1-sided and 2-sided Printing 271 Setting the Color Mode for Printing 274 Using [Presets] for Printing 275 Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods) 277 Functions Which Can Be Specified from the Control Panel 278 Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print) 280 Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function 282 Printing the PS/EPS File Using the Direct Print Function 292 Printing the TIFF/JPEG File Using the Direct Print Function 296 Printing the XPS File Using the Direct Print Function 303 Direct Printing from Command Prompt 312 Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) 313 Printing Directly from USB Memory Device 314 Print Setting Menu List 317 Changing the Default Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria 320 Remove the USB Memory Device 321 Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print) 323 How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print 325 Attention (How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print) 329 Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually 330 Printing the E-mail Receive Log List 333 Attention (Printing E-mail Sending/Receiving History) 335 When E-mail Print Fails 336 Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client 339 Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print) 341 Attention (Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print)) 343 Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) 344 Performing a Stored Job Print Using the Control Panel of the Printer 345 Displaying or Operating the Jobs Stored in a Box (Resume/Delete) 347 Automatically Deleting Files Stored in a Box 351 Changing the Box Settings 354 Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt Printing) 358 Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer) 359 Checking Your Network Environment 361 Example of a Windows Network 362 Example of a Macintosh Network 364 Example of a UNIX Network 365 Example of a Network Using a Variety of Computers 366 Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) 367 Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode 368 Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up) 369 Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 371 Setting the Spooling Function 375 Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (the Settings to Be Performed First) 376 Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 378 Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time 382 㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up) Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication Setting TLS Authentication Information Setting TTLS/PEAP Authentication Information Network Setting Items Initializing the Network Settings Initializing the Network Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel Checking the MAC Address Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4) Setting the IP Address Using the Printer's Control Panel Setting the Printer to a Static IP Address Determining Which IP Address to Assign to the Printer Setting the IP Address Using the ARP/PING Commands Setting the IP Address Using NetSpot Device Installer Configuring the Protocol Settings Attention (Protocol Settings) Setting IP v. 6 Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing Features of LPD Features of RAW Features of IPP/IPPS Features of WSD Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW) Values for Setting a Port Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS) Obtaining the Public Key for This Printer When Using SSL Encrypted Communication Connecting the Printer (WSD) Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) Attention (NetWare Network Settings) Configuring NetWare Configuring the Protocol Settings Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) Attention (SMB Network Settings) Configuring the Protocol Settings Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk) Macintosh Network Settings Configuring the Protocol Settings FTP Client (Macintosh) Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing Managing the Printer Software That Can Be Used for Managing the Printer Remote UI Starting the Remote UI Attention (Remote UI) Enabling the Remote UI 㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 383 385 389 401 402 408 414 427 428 429 433 434 435 438 440 441 443 444 469 471 479 480 481 482 483 484 491 492 498 500 501 502 503 507 512 513 514 523 527 528 530 536 538 539 540 541 542 544 545 Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page) Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links FTP Client NetSpot Device Installer Managing Print Jobs Attention (Job Manager) Control Panel Setting Attention (Control Panel Setting) Setting Items [Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Network] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options) [Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options) [Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options) [Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options) [Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) [Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options) [Setup] Menu ([PS] Options) [Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Check Counter] Options) [Utility Menu] Menu [Job] Menu [Reset] Menu [Select Feeder] Menu Checking the Number of the Printed Pages Importing and Exporting Settings Initializing the Settings Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel Checking the Printer Settings Setting the Administrator Password Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information Sleep Mode Auto Shutdown Specifying an ID for Each Department Register/Update Software Function Available Functions Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) Downloading the Manuals and Related Software Updating the Firmware Managing the Register/Update Software Function Security Settings Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings 㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 547 568 571 574 575 578 579 581 582 583 587 589 593 595 599 600 603 604 605 607 610 613 617 621 622 623 625 626 627 629 631 635 636 638 640 643 647 650 654 656 657 658 659 662 668 669 679 682 683 Restricting the Users Who Can Access Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function) Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print Setting Keys and Certificates Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI Newly Creating a Key and Its Certificate Installing a Key/Certificate File on the Printer Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer Checking a Certificate Deleting a Key and Its Certificate Setting CA Certificates Displaying the [CA Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI Installing CA Certificate Files on the Printer Registering CA Certificates in the Printer Checking CA Certificates Deleting CA Certificates Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function Selecting Keys and Certificates Changing the Remote UI Settings Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function Displaying the [IPSec Settings] Page on the Remote UI Adding a New Security Policy Editing Security Policies Enabling IPSec Encryption Communication Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display MEAP Available Functions Launching and Closing SMS Before Launching SMS (Preparation) Setting Up HTTP Communication Launching SMS (Log in) Attention (Launching SMS (Log in)) Closing SMS (Logging Out) MEAP Application Settings Installing MEAP Applications Attention (Installing MEAP Applications) Uninstalling MEAP Applications Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications Starting MEAP Applications Stopping MEAP Applications Checking the Details of MEAP Applications MEAP Application License Settings Adding License Files Disabling License Files Downloading Disabled License Files Deleting Disabled License Files Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications 㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 694 699 703 707 711 715 716 718 723 725 728 730 731 732 734 736 737 739 740 741 744 748 749 751 759 761 763 768 769 771 772 773 775 779 780 781 784 787 788 790 791 792 794 796 797 800 803 806 809 System Settings Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order Checking Login Services Setting Enhanced System Applications Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications Starting Enhanced System Applications Stopping Enhanced System Applications Installing Enhanced System Applications Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications Checking Information Checking System Information Checking Application Information Checking License Files Changing the SMS Password Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information Managing MEAP Application Log Data Downloading Log Data Deleting Log Data List of Error Messages (MEAP) Errors Relating to the [Login] Page Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page Other Errors Troubleshooting Printing Cannot Be Performed Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection) Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection) Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server) The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed The Printer Takes a Long Time to Start the Print Job You Cannot Turn the Printer ON All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off You Cannot Install the Printer Driver The Printer Is Not Recognized Automatically The Printer Cannot Be Searched for You Cannot Uninstall the Printer Driver The Printer Driver Settings Cannot Be Changed "Profiles" Cannot Be Selected or Edited The Status of the Paper Feeder Cannot Be Obtained Automatically Paper Jams Attention (Paper Jams) Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray) 㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 812 813 815 817 818 819 820 821 824 825 826 828 829 830 832 834 835 837 839 840 842 844 849 850 852 857 859 860 861 862 863 864 869 875 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 889 891 893 894 895 Checking Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer 896 Clearing Paper Jams (Output Area, Right Cover Area, Duplex Unit Area, or Drawer 1/2) 898 Clearing Paper Jams (Drawer 2 Cover) 904 Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Fixing Unit) 906 The Message Indicator Is On 909 A Message Appears in the Control Panel 913 Poor Printout Results 931 Paper Curls 933 Paper Creases 934 White Streaks (Lines) Appear 935 Color Streaks (Lines) Appear 936 Streaks (Lines) Appear in Gradated Portions 937 Uneven Gloss, Streaks, or Flaws Appear on Dense Color Areas 938 Printing Is Uneven 939 Printed Pages Have White Specks 940 The Toner Does Not Fix onto the Paper Well 941 The Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks 943 Smudge Marks of Spattering Toner Appear around the Text or Patterns 944 The Back of the Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks 945 The Overall Print Result Is Dark 946 Residual Images Appear on Non-printed Areas 947 White Dust Is Attached to the Printed Transparencies 948 The Overall Print Result Is Faint 949 Thin Lines Are Faded or Halftone Images Are Faint 950 Colored Lines and Text Appear Faded 951 Colored Text Appears Blurred 952 Data Is Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Due to Color Mismatch 953 Thin Lines or Fill Patterns Are Not Printed with the Specified Colors or Do Not Appear At All 954 Shaded Patterns Are Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) 955 Photographs and so on Are Printed in Different Colors from Those Displayed on the Monitor 956 Fill Patterns and Borders Are Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Even When the 957 Same Color Is Specified for Them Square Areas That Cannot Be Seen on the Display Appear around Lines or Text and Are Printed in 958 a Different Color from the Other Areas Superimposed Diagrams Are Not Printed in the Correct Color 959 The Printing Position Is Skewed 960 A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed 961 Data Is Reduced and Printed 962 The Next Page Is Printed from Halfway across the Previous Page 963 Printed Data Lies outside Paper 964 Blank Paper Is Output (Nothing Is Printed on the Paper) 965 The Overall Surface of the Paper Is Printed in a Particular Color 966 The Last Page Cannot Be Printed 967 Unreadable Characters Are Printed 968 The Printout Is Different from What Is Displayed on Screen (Windows XP and Server 2003) 969 The Flap of the Printed Envelope Sticks 970 Multiple Sheets of Paper Are Fed at a Time 971 Printed Bar Codes Cannot Be Scanned 972 Paper falls out of the output tray 973 Other Problems 974 㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The Keys on the Control Panel Do Not Function The SD Card Cannot Be Used Jobs Cannot Be Saved SSL Cannot Be Enabled When SSL Is Enabled, the Remote UI Does Not Start, or the IPP Printing Cannot Be Performed The Printer Cannot Be Accessed from the Remote UI or Network Related Utility Software Restricting the Users Is Not Possible If You Cannot Solve a Problem Appendix Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows For Windows 8/Server 2012 Users The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode Font Samples Office Locations 㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 993 994 996 998 1004 07YL-000 Before You Start Legal Notices Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images Using the e-Manual 㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-001 Legal Notices Product Name Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name(s) in parentheses ( ) may be registered instead. LBP7780Cx (F163800) EMC requirements of EC Directive This equipment conforms with the essential EMC requirements of EC Directive. We declare that this product conforms with the EMC requirements of EC Directive at nominal mains input 230 V, 50 Hz although the rated input of the product is 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz. Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical EMC requirements of EC Directive. Laser Safety This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825-1:2007 and EN60825-1:2007. This means that the product does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external covers, except as directed by the equipment's manuals. The label shown below is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1 APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 PRODUCTO LÁSER DE CLASE 1 APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASER-TUOTE LASERPRODUKT KLASS 1 CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. International ENERGY STAR Program As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR 㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Program for energy efficiency. The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations. WEEE Directive European Union (and EEA) only. These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or your national laws implementing those Directives. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/environment. (EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein) License Notice This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST ® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST: Copyright © (2013) Monotype Imaging, Inc. IPv6 Ready Logo The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2 established by the IPv6 Forum. 㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-002 Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance. Paper Money Travelers Checks Money Orders Food Stamps Certificates of Deposit Passports Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) Immigration Papers Identifying Badges or Insignias Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) Selective Service or Draft Papers Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies Stock Certificates Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner 㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-003 Using the e-Manual Even if you do not have the supplied CD-ROM at hand, you can view the e-Manual any time if you install it on your computer beforehand. For the efficient use of the e-Manual, you can use several search tools to find the desired content. How to Use the e-Manual Operating Environment Installing the e-Manual Uninstalling the e-Manual Screen Layout of the e-Manual Top Page Topic Page Site Map Search Method Viewing the e-Manual <To find the desired content> Selecting between the category icons From the top page, select a category icon you want. "Top Page" Searching from the site map On the site map, you can view the list of whole sections of the e-Manual sorted by category. You can directly display sections in a category. "Site Map" Whole text search function You can search by keyword in the e-Manual. You can display the desired description from the search results by entering a keyword you want to search. This function supports AND search. "Search Method" 㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-004 How to Use the e-Manual Click the following links to see the system requirements to use the e-Manual and how to install/uninstall the e-Manual. Operating Environment Installing the e-Manual Uninstalling the e-Manual 㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-005 Operating Environment You need a Web browser to use the e-Manual. Operation of the following Web browsers is guaranteed. Windows Internet Explorer 6.0/7.0/8.0/9.0/10.0 Firefox 2.x/3.x/4.x/5.x/6.x/7.x/8.x/9.x/10.x/11.x/13.x/14.x/15.x/16.x/17.x Macintosh Safari 3.x/4.x/5.0/5.1/6.x Firefox 2.x/3.x/4.x/5.x/6.x/7.x/8.x/9.x/10.x/11.x/13.x/14.x/15.x/16.x/17.x NOTE Enabling the script function Enable the script function for a Web browser before using the e-Manual. 㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-006 Installing the e-Manual Install the e-Manual included in the supplied User Manual CD-ROM on your computer using the following procedure. For Windows 1 Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 2 Perform the following procedure. (1) Select your language. (2) Click [Install]. If the above screen does not appear "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" If the [AutoPlay] dialog box appears Click [Run Maninst.exe]. If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears Click [Yes] or [Continue]. (3) Read the License Agreement, and then click [Yes]. ĺ The installation starts. Wait until the following screen disappears. (It may take a long time to install the e-Manual.) 㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Displaying the e-Manual Double-click [LBP7780C e-Manual] created on the desktop. When a security protection message appears Perform the following procedure. 1. Click the information bar, and then select [Allow Blocked Content] from the pop-up menu. 2. Click [Yes]. NOTE Displaying the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM You can also display the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM without installing it in the computer you are using. 1. Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 2. Select your language. 3. Click [Display manual]. Depending on the operating system you are using, a security protection message is displayed. Allow the contents to be displayed. For Macintosh 1 Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 2 Drag and drop the [uk_LBP7780C_Manual] folder into a location where you want to save it. NOTE Displaying the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM You can also display the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM without installing it in the computer you are using. 1. Insert the supplied User Manual CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 2. Double-click the [uk_LBP7780C_Manual] folder. 3. Double-click [index.html]. 㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-007 Uninstalling the e-Manual The process of removing the e-Manual to restore the computer to the same state as before the e-Manual was installed is referred to as uninstallation. To uninstall the e-Manual, perform the following procedure. For Windows Delete the files in the following locations manually. Manual folder The "uk_LBP7780C_Manual" folder in "C:\Documents and Settings\(user name)\My Documents\Canon\LBP\Manuals" The "uk_LBP7780C_Manual" folder in "C:\Users\(user name)\Documents\Canon\LBP\Manuals" The "LBP7780C e-Manual" shortcut icon on the desktop For Macintosh Delete the [uk_LBP7780C_Manual] folder manually which is copied during the installation. 㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-008 Screen Layout of the e-Manual This section describes the screen layout of the e-Manual. The page displayed right after the e-Manual starts is called "Top Page" and the manual description is called "Topic Page" in this section. "Site map" is displayed from [Site map] which is located on the upper right of the e-Manual. The search panel is used to make search through the e-Manual. The screen layout is different for each page, so click the following links to see the instruction. Top Page Topic Page Site Map Search Method 㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-009 Top Page (1) [Handling the Printer] This section describes the precautions and maintenance methods for handling the printer, and so on. (2) [Printing] This section describes a variety of printing methods, such as basic printing and advanced one that uses the various printing functions. How to load paper is also described here. (3) [Configuring and Managing the Printer] This section describes how to specify the network settings, how to manage the printer, and so on. (4) [Frequently Asked Questions] Frequently asked questions are featured. For details on the solutions for the other problems, see [Troubleshooting]. (5) [Installation] This section describes how to install this printer, how to install the printer driver, and so on. (6) [Search] The search panel is displayed by entering keyword(s) and clicking [ For details, see "Search Method." (7) [Top] The top page of the e-Manual is displayed. (8) [Site map] The entire contents of the e-Manual are displayed. (9) [Help] How to use the e-Manual is displayed. (10) [Disclaimers] The disclaimers are displayed. (11) [Copyright] The information of copyrights is displayed. (12) [Trademarks] The trademarks are displayed. (13) [Third Party Software] The information about the third party software is displayed. (14) [Office Locations] 㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ]. Inquiries for this printer are displayed. 㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00A Topic Page (1) Chapter contents This is the list of the contents in the chapter. Clicking each item displays the description in the topic page. ] to expand a menu, and click [ ] to collapse a menu. Click [ Alternatively, click [ Expand all ] to expand all menus, and click [ Collapse all ] to collapse all menus. (2) Topic page The descriptions of each item are displayed. The current location of the displayed topic is displayed at the upper left of the topic page. Click a link to move to a higher level. (3) [Chapter] menu You can select a different chapter from the pull-down menu. (4) [Contents] tab Click to display the chapter contents panel. (5) [Search] tab Click to display the search panel. For details, see "Search Method." (6) [ ] Click to display or hide the chapter contents panel/search panel. (7) [Previous]/[Next] Click to move to the previous or next topic. (8) [Print this topic] Prints only the topic page currently displayed. (9) [Print all] Prints all the contents in a chapter. 㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00C Site Map (1) Categories Shows the chapters of the e-Manual. Click an item to view the detailed list of the chapter. (2) Whole contents Shows the all chapters and sections of the e-Manual. Click an item to view the contents. 㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00E Search Method (1) Search Entering a character string in [Search] on the top page or in the [Keyword] text box on the search panel and then ] displays the search results. clicking [ The AND search is available in the e-Manual so you can refine the search results by entering two or more keywords. When entering keywords, enter a space between the keywords. Example: Toner Replacement (if you want to display pages which include words, "Toner" and "Replacement") (2) Search result The search results for a keyword are displayed. If there are more than 10 search results, you can see the other results by clicking [ ], [ ], or the number which is located below the result. (3) [Search options] Click to display the search options. The search options can be used to specify the chapter to search, case sensitivity, and whether to differentiate between one- and two-byte characters. Click [Search with these conditions] to search with the specified conditions. 㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00F Viewing the e-Manual Symbols Used in the e-Manual The following are descriptions of warnings and cautions used in the e-Manual to explain handling restrictions, precautions, and instructions that should be observed for your safety. WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings. CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions. IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property. NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended. Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations. Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual The following are examples of how control panel keys and on-screen buttons are depicted in the e-Manual. Type Depiction in the e-Manual Example Control panel keys [Key icon] + (Key name) [ Buttons on computer operation screen and so on [Button name and so on] [OK] ]( : Job Status/Cancel) Screenshots Used in the e-Manual The contents of the screenshots used in the e-Manual are the default settings. Depending on the system configuration, the contents of the screenshots may partly differ. The functions of the printer driver may be changed due to upgrade. Illustrations Used in the e-Manual Although the power cord used in this manual is as the one in the following illustration, the form of the power cord may differ depending on the country or region. 㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Abbreviations Used in the e-Manual Abbreviations of Operating Systems In the e-Manual, operating systems are abbreviated as follows. Microsoft Windows XP operating system Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista operating system Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 operating system Windows 7 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows operating system Windows 㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00H Disclaimer The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL. 㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00J Copyright Copyright 2013 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc. 㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00K Trademarks Canon, the Canon logo, LBP, NetSpot, MEAP, the MEAP logo, and PageComposer are trademarks of Canon Inc. Adobe, Adobe Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Apple, AppleTalk, Mac OS, Macintosh, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. EtherTalk and LocalTalk are trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation. This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. UFST: Copyright© 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc. Copyright© Unpublished Work of Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright© 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593; 6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries. All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter. Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language. Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. 㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00L Important Safety Instructions Read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the printer. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user and other persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also, as it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty. Installation Power Supply Handling Maintenance and Inspections Consumables 㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00R Installation WARNING Do not install the printer in a location near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not place the following items on the printer. Necklaces and other metal objects Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the power switch (1) and disconnect the interface cables if they are connected (2). Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet (3) and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When installing or removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn the printer OFF, unplug the power plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the printer. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. CAUTION Do not install the printer in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the printer to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury. The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the printer. Never place the printer on a soft surface, such as a bed, sofa, or rug. Blocking the slots can cause the printer to overheat, resulting in a fire. Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock. A damp or dusty location A location exposed to smoke and steam, such as near a cookery or humidifier A location exposed to rain or snow A location near a water faucet or water A location exposed to direct sunlight A location subject to high temperatures A location near open flames When installing the printer, gently lower the printer to the installation site so as not to catch your hands between the printer and the floor or between the printer and other equipment, as this may result in personal injury. When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly by following the instructions in the e-Manual. If not connected properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock. Be careful when handling the main board or the ROM. Touching the main board or the sharp parts such as the edges of the ROM may result in personal injury. When moving the printer, follow the instructions in the e-Manual to hold it correctly. Failure to do so may cause you to drop the printer, resulting in personal injury. "Moving the Printer" 㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00S Power Supply WARNING Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord or pull on or excessively bend it, as this can cause electrical damage, resulting in fire or electrical shock. Keep the power cord away from all heat sources. Failure to do so can cause the power cord insulation to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a loose connection and cause overheating, which could result in a fire. The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on, fixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock. Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this can result in electrical shock. Do not plug the power cord into a multi-plug power strip, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not bundle up or tie up the power cord in a knot, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock. Insert the power plug completely in the AC power outlet. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock. If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the power cord, it may damage the power cord or the wires inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a fire. Avoid the following situations: Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently. Tripping over the power cord. The power cord is bent near the connection part, and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the connection part. Applying a shock to the power connector. Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock. CAUTION Do not use a power supply voltage other than that listed herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power plug. Do not pull on the power cord, as this may expose the core wire of the power cord or damage the cord insulation, causing electricity to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you may be unable to unplug it in an emergency. 㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00U Handling WARNING Do not disassemble or modify the printer. There are high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the printer which may result in a fire or electrical shock. Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly. Do not allow children to touch the power cord, cables, internal gears, or electrical parts. If the printer makes an unusual noise or emits smoke, heat, or an unusual smell, immediately turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the interface cables if they are connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use can result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not use flammable sprays near the printer. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Always turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power plug and interface cables before moving the printer. Failure to do so can damage the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after moving the printer. Failure to do so can result in an overheating and fire. Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the printer. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or other flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, and so on) inside the printer. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the interface cables if they are connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this can result in electrical shock. CAUTION Do not place heavy objects on the printer. The object or the printer may fall, resulting in personal injury. Be careful when handling the main board or the ROM. Touching the main board or the sharp parts such as the edges of the ROM may result in personal injury. Turn OFF the power switch when the printer will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight. Turn OFF the printer and unplug the power plug if the printer will not be used for an extended period of time, such as for several days. Open or close covers and install or remove drawers gently and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your fingers. Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the printer is not printing, the roller may suddenly rotate and catch your hands or clothing, resulting in personal injury. Do not take your hands off the transport guide until it moves back to its original position when tilting the transport guide toward you. The transport guide may snap back to its original position, and this may result in personal injury. The output slot is hot during and immediately after printing. Do not touch the area surrounding the output slot, as this may result in burns. Printed paper may be hot immediately after being output. Be careful when removing the paper and aligning the removed paper, especially after continuous printing. Failure to do so may result in burns. The laser beam used in the printer can be harmful to human bodies. The laser beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover, so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during normal printer operation. Read the following remarks and instructions for safety. 㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Never open covers other than those indicated in this manual. Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit. If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes. 㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00W Maintenance and Inspections WARNING When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the printer and computer, remove the interface cables, and then unplug the power plug. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock. Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet periodically and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to remove all dust and grime. In damp, dusty, or smoky locations, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp, which can cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire. Clean the printer with a well wrung out cloth dampened with water or mild detergent diluted with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Some areas inside the printer are subject to high voltage. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the printer, as this can result in burns or electrical shock. Do not dispose of used toner cartridges or waste toner containers in open flames. This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges or the waste toner containers to ignite, resulting in burns or fire. If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge. Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after cleaning the printer. Failure to do so can result in an overheating and fire. Check the power cord and plug regularly. The following conditions may result in fire, so contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. There are burn marks on the power plug. The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken. The power is turned OFF or ON when bending the power cord. The coating of the power cord is damaged, cracked, or dented. A part of the power cord becomes hot. Check regularly that the power cord, plug, and connector are not handled in the following manner. This may result in a fire or electrical shock. The power connector is loosened. The power plug is loosened. Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy object or by fixing it with staples. The power cord is tied in a bundle. A part of the power cord is put in an aisle. The power cord is put in front of the heating appliance. CAUTION Never attempt to service this printer yourself, except as explained in this manual. There are no user serviceable parts inside the printer. Adjust only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty. The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns. 㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat emitted from the fixing unit and its surroundings for a prolonged period of time. Doing so may result in low temperature burns, even though you did not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings directly, as this may result in burns. If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that any pieces of paper do not remain inside the printer according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your hands forcibly in the parts other than those directed on the screen. Failure to do so may result in burns or injuries. When removing jammed paper or replacing the toner cartridge or waste toner container, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner, making it impossible to remove the toner stains. When removing jammed paper, be careful not to allow the toner on the paper to scatter. The toner may get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper. When removing the toner cartridge or waste toner container, remove the toner cartridge carefully so as to prevent the toner from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge or waste toner container. The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. If toner leaks from the toner cartridge or waste toner container, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately. 㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00X Consumables WARNING Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or fire. Do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed to open flames. This may cause the toner or paper to ignite, resulting in burns or fire. When disposing of a toner cartridge or waste toner container, place the toner cartridge or waste toner container into a bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and then dispose of the toner cartridge or waste toner container according to local regulations. If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge. CAUTION Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables, such as a waste toner container, out of the reach of small children. If the toner or other parts are ingested, consult a physician immediately. Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge or waste toner container. The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. If toner leaks from the toner cartridge or waste toner container, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately. 㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-00Y About This Printer Printer Specifications Introduction of the Optional Accessories Names and Dimensions of Each Part Control Panel Introduction of the Utilities Energy-saving Mode Cautions for Handling the Printer Consumables 㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-010 Printer Specifications Hardware Specifications Type Desktop Page Printer Printing System Semiconductor laser + xerographic system Toner fixing system On-demand fixing system Resolution 600 dpi Black and white printing: 32 pages/min. (1-sided printing) 27.6 pages/min. / 13.8 sheets/min. (2-sided printing) Color printing: 32 pages/min. (1-sided printing) 27.6 pages/min. / 13.8 sheets/min. (2-sided printing) Printing speed (Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m²), when printing A4 size paper continuously) The print speed may drop depending on the paper settings for the size, type, orientation, and number of copies. 39 seconds or less Warm up time (Time from power on to printer ready) Recovery time (Time from the sleep mode to printer ready) First print time (When performing 1-sided printing on A4 size paper and outputting facedown) Paper size May vary depending on the usage conditions, such as the availability of the optional accessories and installation environment. 7 seconds when the printer is in Sleep Mode 1 (the Printer Sleep mode) 30 seconds or less when the printer is in Sleep Mode 2 (the Deep Sleep mode) * * It is the default setting. For details on [Sleep Mode], see "Sleep Mode." May vary depending on the output environment. Black and white printing: 10.2 seconds or less Color printing: 10.4 seconds or less May vary depending on the output environment. Drawer 1 Standard sizes: A4, B5, A5, A6, Letter, Executive Statement and 16K Custom paper sizes *1 : In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 101.6 to 215.9 mm *2 ; Long edges 148.0 to 297.0 mm *3 Drawer 2 (Optional) Standard sizes: A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Foolscap and 16K Custom paper sizes *1 : In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm Multi-purpose tray 㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Standard sizes: A4, B5, A5, A6, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, Foolscap, 16K, Index Card, Envelope DL, Envelope No.10, Envelope ISO-C5, and Envelope Monarch Custom paper sizes *1 : In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 76.2 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 355.6 mm *1 Width must not be greater than length (height). *2 When width is 215.9 mm, max length is 279.4 mm. *3 When length is 297.0 mm, max width is 210.0 mm. Paper capacity Drawer 1: Approx. 500 sheets Drawer 2 (Optional): Approx. 500 sheets Multi-purpose tray: Approx. 100 sheets 2-sided printing Standard sizes: A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Foolscap, 16K Custom paper sizes: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm Paper output Face-down Approx. 200 sheets Actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation environment and paper type to be used. Output capacity Noise (measured in accordance with ISO 7779, declared noise emission in accordance with ISO 9296) LwAd (declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB)) During standby: 5.3 B or less * During operation: 7.0 B or less LpAm (declared A-weighted sound pressure level (bystander position)) During standby: 32.4 dB * During operation: 52 dB * Operating environment Temperature range: 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F) Humidity range: 20 to 80% RH (no condensation) Operating environment (Printer unit only) Power supply Power consumption (at 20°C (68°F)) Indicates the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779 absolute criteria for the background noise level. 220 to 240 V (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±2 Hz) Maximum: 1,270 W or less Average during operation: Approx. 580 W Average during standby: Approx. 35 W Average during Printer Sleep Mode (Sleep Mode 1): Approx. 10 W Average during Deep Sleep Mode (Sleep Mode 2): Approx.1 W * When the main power switch is turned OFF: 0.1 W or less * It is the default setting. For details on [Sleep Mode], see "Sleep Mode." Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is inserted in the AC power outlet. To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Toner cartridge 㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Canon Canon Canon Canon Canon Consumables Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge 732 732 732 732 732 H Black Black Yellow Magenta Cyan For details on the yield, see "Replacement Timing" in "Consumables." Waste toner container WASTE TONER BOX WT-723 For details on the yield, see "Replacement Timing" in "Consumables." Printer unit and included parts Printer unit (excluding the toner cartridges and drum cartridge): Approx. 31.5 kg Toner cartridge: Approx. 1.0 kg Consumables and optional accessories Toner cartridge (each standard capacity) (Canon Genuine Cartridge): Approx. 1.0 kg Toner cartridge (high capacity) (Canon Genuine Cartridge): Approx. 1.0 kg Paper Feeder Unit PF-723A (including the paper drawer): Approx. 8.0 kg Weight Controller Specifications CPU 528 MHz + 264 MHz Memory (RAM) capacity 768 MB Host interface USB interface: Hi-Speed USB (3) (1 front and 2 back) Network interface: Shared 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T (RJ-45) Full duplex/Half duplex User interface LCD: 132 x 65 dots F-STN liquid crystal display LED indicator: 8 Operation key: 12 ROM slot 1 SD card slot 1 Software Specifications Built-in control command Built-in fonts Printable area PCL5c, PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, UFR II, PDF, and XPS PCL: 93 Scalable fonts, 10 Bitmap fonts PS: 136 standard fonts PCL5c/PCL6: Data cannot be printed within a 4.2 mm margin (10 mm margin for envelopes) on all sides of the paper. UFR II/PS: Data cannot be printed within a 5 mm margin (10 mm margin for envelopes) on all 㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 sides of the paper. For details, see "Printable Area." Network interface Supported protocol TCP/IP (Frame type: Ethernet II) AppleTalk NetWare SMB (option) Print application LPD RAW IPP/IPPS FTP WSD 㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-011 Introduction of the Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are available to make full use of the printer functions. For the optional accessories, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Paper Feeder You can load up to 500 sheets of plain paper (75 g/m²) of the following sizes in the paper feeder. Standard sizes A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Foolscap, and 16K Custom paper sizes In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm Paper Feeder Unit PF-723A IMPORTANT Use a paper feeder designed for this printer. Be sure to use a paper feeder designed for this printer. NOTE How to install the paper feeder "Installing the Paper Feeder" Barcode ROM The following function is available by installing Barcode Printing Kit-F1. <Bar code fonts for bar code printing> OCR-B Symb. FontInform Symbole stethos BarDIMM ©1997 USPS ZEBRA+4Stat 㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Barcode Printing Kit-F1 NOTE How to install Barcode Printing Kit-F1 "Installing ROM" SD Card You can use an SD card that can be built in the printer to save the received print jobs temporarily. By installing the SD card, you can use various functions such as print job spooling, encrypted secured print, secured print, and electronic sort. Before you dispose of this product, prevent personal information from being leaked by physically destroying the product. NOTE How to install the SD card "Installing SD Card" 㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-012 Names and Dimensions of Each Part Part Name Front View NOTE About the film attached to the control panel Remove it before using the panel. (1) Power Switch (4) Control Panel (7) Right Cover (2) Front Cover (5) Output tray (8) Ventilation Slots (3) Paper Drawer (6) USB memory connector (9) Multi-purpose Tray (10) Lift Handles Rear View (1) Slot Cover (5) LNK Indicator (Green) (9) (2) USB Connector (for USB devices) (6) SD Card Slot Cover (10) Ventilation Slots (3) USB Connector (for connecting to computer) (7) LAN Connector (11) Power Socket (4) ACT Indicator (Green) (8) Lift Handles Interior View 㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Rating Label (1) Waste Toner Container (4) C (Cyan) Toner Cartridge Slot (7) ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit (2) Y (Yellow) Toner Cartridge Slot (5) K (Black) Toner Cartridge Slot (8) Secondary Transfer Roller (3) M (Magenta) Toner Cartridge Slot (6) Fixing Unit Multi-purpose Tray (1) Auxiliary Tray (2) Tray Extension (3) Paper Guides Paper Drawer (1) Lock Release Lever (2) Paper Guides (3) Paper Level Indicator 㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Dimensions of Each Part Printer Standard configuration With the paper feeder installed Paper Feeder Unit PF-723A 㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-013 Control Panel The control panel has the indicators and display which show the printer status and the keys for the printer operation. Indicators Name Status Online (The printer can receive print data from the computer.) (Online) indicator is off If the printer enters Sleep Mode, the even when the printer is online. (1) Online Indicator Refer to "Online and Offline" (On) A paper source is selected. (5) Paper Source indicators (On) Printing cannot be performed because no paper is loaded. The paper drawer is not installed. (For the multi-purpose tray, the indicator comes on even when no paper is loaded.) "Paper Loading and Output" (Blinking) The printer is ready to print. (8) Ready Indicator (On) The printer is preparing to print. (Blinking) A problem has occurred and printing cannot be performed. (If the printer enters Sleep Mode when it is offline, the (Message) indicator comes on even when no problem is occurring.) (9) Message Indicator (On) The printer is receiving data. Data remains in the printer memory. (10) Job Indicator (On) The printer is processing data. (Blinking) 㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "The Message Indicator Is On" (17) Main Power Indicator The power of the printer is ON. (On) Keys Name Function (When the printer is online) Function (When the printer is offline) Function (While the menu is displayed) Switches between online and offline. The printer is online when the indicator under the key is on and is offline when the indicator is off. ]( : Online) in this manual. This key is indicated as [ (1) ( : Online) (2) ( : Job Status/Cancel) If pressed when the (Job) indicator is on or blinking (When data is being processed or received), displays the job list. Select a job from the list to cancel the job. ]( : Job Status/Cancel) in This key is indicated as [ this manual. Does not function. The log in screen for using MEAP functions is displayed. (3) (Log In/Out) If you press this key while logging in, you will log out of the printer. ,WZLOOWUDQVLWLRQWRWKH0HQX6FUHHQ:KHQHYHUWKHNH\LVSUHVVHGWKH3ULQWLQJ6FUHHQVZLWFKHVWRĺ0($3$SSOLFDWLRQ ĺ0($3$SSOLFDWLRQ«0($3$SSOLFDWLRQĺ86%'LUHFW3ULQWĺ3ULQWLQJ6FUHHQĺ0HQX6FUHHQ ]( : Application) in this manual. This key is indicated as [ (4) ( : Application) If department ID management is set and you are not logged in to the printer, the log in screen before the MEAP application display is displayed. (7) ( Displays the [Select Feeder] menu. Specify which paper source is used to print between the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray and the paper ]( : Feeder size. This key is indicated as [ Selection) in this manual. Does not function. Displays the [Utility Menu] menu. Prints information about the printer settings including the current settings. This key is indicated as [ ]( : Utility) in this manual. Does not function. Goes back up the previous hierarchy. This key is indicated ] in this manual. as [ Does not function. Selects the next upper item in the same hierarchy. When the setting value is numeric, increases the value. If you keep holding down the key, the speed of the value increasing is increased depending on the ] in this manual. item. This key is indicated as [ : Feeder Selection) (11) ( : Utility) Displays the [Job] menu. You can print various ]( : log lists. This key is indicated as [ (12) ( : Job) Job) in this manual. (13) ( Does not function. Goes back up the previous hierarchy. This key is ]( : Back) in this manual. indicated as [ Does not function. Executes the selected item. Otherwise, goes down the hierarchy. This key is indicated as [OK] in this manual. Displays the [Reset] menu. Performs the printer reset operation, the print data output, and the shutdown operation. ]( : Reset) in this manual. This key is indicated as [ Selects the next lower item in the same hierarchy. When the setting value is numeric, reduces the value. If you keep holding down the key, the speed of the value decreasing is increased depending on the item. : Back) (14) (OK) (15) 㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ( : Reset) (16) ( : Settings) (18) This key is indicated as [ Displays the [Setup] menu. Configure the printing environment including the layout adjustment and scaling print ]( : Settings) in this output. This key is indicated as [ manual. ] in this manual. Goes down the hierarchy. This key is indicated as [ ] in this manual. Makes the printer to enter or recover from Sleep Mode. ] (Energy Saver) in this manual. This key is indicated as [ (Energy Saver) Display The display on the printer's control panel is as shown in the following. It displays the printer status, messages, items and settings of the menu functions. When the printer is ready to print When operating the printer using the control panel (1) Status/Operation Field Displays the printer status and print mode. (2) Paper Source/Paper Size Field Displays the size of paper in the currently selected paper source using an abbreviation. The names of the following paper sizes are indicated by an abbreviation. (Legal: LG, Letter: LT, Executive: EX, Statement: ST, Envelope DL: DL, Envelope No.10: CO, Envelope ISO-C5: EC5, Envelope Monarch: MO, Index Card: IC, Custom Size: 80 to 99, Custom SizeR: 80R to 99R, Mixed Sizes: FR) (3) Toner Remaining Field Displays the amount of toner remaining. 㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-014 Introduction of the Utilities The following useful utilities are available to perform the printer management and so on. You can specify the various settings or operate the printer from a remote location. "Remote UI" By accessing and operating the printer from the Web browser via a network, you can manage the printer using a computer in a remote location. You can perform various operations, such as checking the current printer status or job logs and specifying various settings. No specific software is needed. The Remote UI can be operated in a Web browser. You do not need specific software to operate the Remote UI. Central management of all the printer settings with the administrator password Only the administrator can configure the settings or perform the operations related to the printer management by setting the administrator password. You can specify the network settings at a time. "FTP Client" By accessing the FTP server of the printer, you can specify the network settings, security settings, and so on. Because the setting items are listed in a file, you can specify multiple items all at once. No specific software is needed. You can operate the FTP Client using the Command Prompt supplied with Windows. You do not need specific software to operate the FTP Client. You can check the various printer statuses. "NetSpot Device Installer" You can view the list of statuses of the Canon devices on a network easily. Also, you can change the default network settings or basic protocol settings. 㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You do not need to install NetSpot Device Installer. NetSpot Device Installer is software included in the supplied CD-ROM. You can start NetSpot Device Installer directly from the CD-ROM without installing it. You can also install NetSpot Device Installer on a computer. 㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RY Energy-saving Mode You can reduce power consumption of the printer efficiently by using a sleep mode or by shutting down the printer when it is not used for a certain time. Sleep Mode You can configure the printer to enter the sleep mode when data is not sent from the computer or when the printer status remains as it is longer than the specified time. Auto Shutdown You can configure the printer to shut down when the specified time is elapsed after entering the sleep mode. 㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-015 Cautions for Handling the Printer This printer consists of various electronic and precision optical parts. Read the following section so that you can handle the printer properly. Before handling the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions." Do not place any objects other than printing paper on the printer, trays, or covers. This may result in damage to the printer. Avoid shaking the printer. This may result in poor print quality or damage to the printer. Do not leave any covers open longer than required. Exposing the printer to direct sunlight or strong light may result in deterioration in print quality. Do not open the covers on the printer during printing. This may result in damage to the printer. Handle each cover gently when opening or closing it. Failure to do so may result in damage to the printer. If you want to put a cover on the printer to prevent dust from entering the printer, turn the power OFF and allow the printer to cool down sufficiently before covering the printer. If you do not plan to use the printer for a long period of time, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Do not use or store the printer in a room where chemicals are used. 㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-016 Consumables The following consumables are provided for this printer. Purchase them at your local authorized Canon dealer. Use the following table as rough guides to replace consumables. However, you may need the replacement earlier than the described lifetimes depending on the printer installation environment, paper size, or document type. Consumables Replacement Timing Canon Cartridge 732 H Black Average yield: 12,000 sheets *1 *2 Canon Cartridge 732 Black Average yield: 6,100 sheets *1 *2 Replacement Method "Replacing Toner Cartridges" Canon Cartridge 732 Yellow Canon Cartridge 732 Magenta Canon Cartridge 732 Cyan Average yield: 6,400 sheets *1 *2 WASTE TONER BOX WT-723 Approximately 18,000 pages (when performing 1-sided printing on A4 size paper) *1 The average yield is on the basis of "ISO/IEC 19798"* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. * "ISO/IEC 19798" is the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for color printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components" issued by ISO (International Organization for Standardization). *2 When the toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon, the following messages will appear in the control panel. "Toner Cartridge Replacement" IMPORTANT About replacement toner cartridges or waste toner containers For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges or waste toner containers is recommended. Model Name LBP7780Cx Model Name LBP7780Cx Supported Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Canon Canon Canon Canon Canon Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge 732 732 732 732 732 H Black Black Yellow Magenta Cyan Supported Canon Genuine Waste Toner Container WASTE TONER BOX WT-723 Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges or waste toner containers. Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges and waste toner containers in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridge or waste toner container may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge or waste toner container. 㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit. NOTE Toner, Toner Cartridge and Waste Toner Container Availability Toner cartridge and waste toner container for this machine will be available for at least seven (7) years (or any such longer period as required by applicable laws) after production of this machine model has been discontinued. 㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-018 Maintenance Toner Cartridge Replacement Replacing Toner Cartridges Storing Toner Cartridges Adjusting the Printing Position Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source Moving the Printer Cleaning and Maintaining the Printer Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration) If You Want to Adjust Color Balance Cleaning the Inside of the Printer Cleaning the Outside of the Printer Location of the Serial Number 㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SS Toner Cartridge Replacement Toner cartridges are consumable products. When the toner cartridge is almost empty, a message is displayed on the display. Take action according to the message. For details on the toner cartridge yields and replacement toner cartridges, see "Consumables." Message 16 <Toner Color>* toner cart. will soon reach lifetime. When message is displayed and cause The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon Description and Solutions You can continue printing. Have ready a replacement toner cartridge of the color that is displayed. We recommend that you replace the toner cartridge before printing a large amount of data. The printer stops printing. You can continue printing by pressing [ <Toner Color>* toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime. The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon 1G Change <Toner Color>* toner cartridge recommended. The toner cartridge has reached the end of its life Toner cart. lifetime <Toner Color>* The toner cartridge has reached the end of its life ]( : Online). Have ready a replacement toner cartridge of the color that is displayed. We recommend that you replace the toner cartridge before printing a large amount of data. You can continue B&W printing. Replacing the toner cartridge for the displayed color with a new one is recommended. The printer stops printing. You can continue printing by pressing [ ]( : Online). Replacing the toner cartridge for the displayed color with a new one is recommended. The printer stops printing. You can continue printing by pressing [ <Toner Color>* cartridge parts lifetime reached. Change recommended The toner cartridge parts have reached the end of their lives Online). Continuing to use these cartridges may cause the printer to malfunction, so replacing these cartridges with new cartridges is recommended. 9G <Toner Color>* Cart. parts life reached. Chg. recmnd. If there is a possibility that the toner cartridge parts have reached the end of their lives You can continue to print, but this may cause the printer to malfunction. Replacing these cartridges with new cartridges is recommended. Re-insert or change the <Toner Color>* toner cartridge. If there is a possibility that the toner cartridge is not installed correctly The printer stops and you cannot continue printing. Remove the toner cartridge that is the color displayed and set it correctly. If after that the message is still displayed, replacing this cartridge with a new one is recommended. Insert <Toner Color>* toner cartridge. A toner cartridge has not been set Set a toner cartridge of the color that is displayed. Check the location where the <Toner Color>* toner cartridge is set. The toner cartridge is not set in the correct position Remove the toner cartridge that is the color displayed and set it in the correct position. 㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ]( : * <Toner Color> is displayed as C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow) or K (black). When the toner is low, whether "16 <Toner Color> toner cart. will soon reach lifetime." or "<Toner Color> toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime." will be displayed depends on the "Warning Step" setting under the Setup Menu. The printer's default settings are set so that "16 <Toner Color> toner cart. will soon reach lifetime." is displayed. See "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" for details on the "Show Warnings" settings. 㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-019 Attention (Toner Cartridge) Before replacing the toner cartridge, see "Important Safety Instructions" and "Storing Toner Cartridges." IMPORTANT About replacement toner cartridges For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended. Model Name LBP7780Cx Supported Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Canon Canon Canon Canon Canon Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge 732 732 732 732 732 H Black Black Yellow Magenta Cyan Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges. Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge. For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit. Hold the toner cartridge properly. When handling the toner cartridge, hold it properly as shown in the figure. Do not place it vertically or upside-down. Do not touch the electrical contacts (A) or the toner cartridge memory (B), and do not open the drum protective shutter (C). Touching the electrical contacts (A) or the toner cartridge memory (B) may cause damage. Also, print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the photosensitive drum inside the toner cartridge. Do not touch or open the drum protective shutter (C). Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (D). This may result in damage to the cartridge. 㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Other precautions Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or strong light. Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the toner cartridge. Condensation (water droplets on the inside or outside) may form on the toner cartridge when it is brought into an environment with a sudden change in temperature or humidity. When moving a new toner cartridge to a location with change in temperature, leave the cartridge in the protective bag at the new location for two or more hours to allow it to adjust to the new temperature. Do not leave the front cover open for a long time with the toner cartridge installed. Keep toner cartridge away from products that generate magnetic waves, such as a computer or computer display. NOTE About the packing materials The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice. 㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01A Replacing Toner Cartridges Before replacing toner cartridges, see "Attention (Toner Cartridge)." 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull out the toner cartridge to be replaced. (1) Hold the handle. (2) Pull out the toner cartridge. 3 Take out the new toner cartridge from the protective bag. You can open the protective bag with your hands from the notch. Keep the protective bag. Do not discard it. You will need it when you remove the toner cartridge for printer maintenance or other purposes. 㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Shake the toner cartridge five or six times as shown in the figure to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge. Do not remove the drum protective cover (A). 5 Holding the tab (A), remove the drum protective cover. Keep the removed drum protective cover. You will need it when you remove the toner cartridge for printer maintenance or other purposes. 㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Install the toner cartridge. Fit the projection (A) of the toner cartridge into the guide (B) on the printer unit to install the toner cartridge. Push it into the printer firmly. IMPORTANT Precautions when installing toner cartridges The position of the toner cartridges in the printer is determined by the toner color. Install the toner cartridges in the slots that have labels of the same color. 7 Close the front cover. If you cannot close the front cover Make sure that the toner cartridges are installed in the printer properly. Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as this may damage the printer. 㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01C Storing Toner Cartridges Be careful of the following points when storing a new toner cartridge or handling a toner cartridge that was taken out of the printer for maintenance or moving the printer. IMPORTANT Precautions when storing toner cartridges To use toner cartridges in a safe and trouble-free manner, store them in a place that fulfills the following conditions. Do not store toner cartridges in a location exposed to direct sunlight. Do not store toner cartridges in a location subject to high temperature or humidity or in a location with dramatic changes in temperature or humidity. Storage temperature range: 0 to 35°C (32 to 95°F) Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (no condensation) Do not store toner cartridges in a location exposed to corrosive gases, such as ammonia, salt air, or large amounts of dust. Keep toner cartridges out of the reach of small children. Store toner cartridges in the same orientation as when they are installed in the printer. Do not store toner cartridges vertically or upside-down. When removing the toner cartridge which is being used from the printer Immediately attach the drum protective cover (A), and put it in the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth. About a new toner cartridge Do not take a new toner cartridge out of the protective bag until it is ready to be used. NOTE About condensation Even when toner cartridges are stored within the recommended humidity range, water droplets may form on the inside or outside of the cartridges when moved to an environment with a sudden change in temperature or humidity. The formation of water droplets is called condensation. Condensation will adversely affect the quality of toner cartridges. 㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01E Adjusting the Printing Position If you want to adjust the printing position for all the jobs You can adjust the printing position for all the jobs at once. "Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs" If you want to adjust the printing position for each paper source You can adjust the printing position for each paper source by printing the Position Adjustment Print. "Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source" 㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01F Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs Perform [Offset Y] and [Offset X] using the control panel of the printer. IMPORTANT Confirm the adjustment result. If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing position, the part will be missing in the print result. NOTE Adjustable area You can adjust the printing position between -50.0 and +50.0 mm for both the vertical direction and horizontal direction. 1 Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 Select [Layout] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select a position you want to correct. If specifying the setting for [Offset Y] 1. Select [Offset Y] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 2. Specify the target numeric value using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ], the setting value increases by 0.1 mm, and each time you press [ Each time you press [ 㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ], the setting value decreases by 0.1 mm. Also, if you keep pressing [ increasing or decreasing the value. ] or [ ] without releasing your finger, you can keep ĺ The setting value is changed. If specifying the setting for [Offset X] 1. Select [Offset X] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 2. Specify the target numeric value using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ], the setting value increases by 0.1 mm, and each time you press [ ], the setting value Each time you press [ ] or [ ] without releasing your finger, you can keep decreases by 0.1 mm. Also, if you keep pressing [ increasing or decreasing the value. ĺ The setting value is changed. 㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01H Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source If the printing position is skewed when printing from a certain paper source, you can adjust the position from the control panel. IMPORTANT Confirm the adjustment result. If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing position, the part will be missing in the print result. NOTE Be careful of the orientation for 2-sided printing The orientation of the images on the reverse pages varies depending on the printing orientation or setting for [Binding Location]. Checking the Printing Position Perform the Printing Position Adjustment Print and check the position and direction to be adjusted. IMPORTANT Adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing Set [2-Sided Printing] to [On] in advance. 1 Press [ ]( : Feeder Selection). 2 Select [Paper Source] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select the paper source that you want to check the printing position using [ press [OK]. When adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, select the desired paper source. [Drawer 2] is displayed only when the optional paper feeder(s) is (are) installed. 㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] and [ ], and then 4 Press [ ]( : Online). 5 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 6 Press [ ]( : Utility). 7 Select [Printing Pos. Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 8 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ The Printing Position Adjustment Print is printed. The top of the output paper is the top of the Printing Position Adjustment Print. Next, check the printout results and specify the direction and position to be adjusted in "Adjusting the Printing Position" (See the next item). 㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Adjusting the Printing Position Next, check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and specify the direction and position to be adjusted. The measurements of printed on paper are as the following: This section describes the setting procedure for the following Printing Position Adjustment Print printed with Drawer 1 specified, as an example. In this case, adjust "Y position" by "-5.0 mm" because the printing position of (A) should be moved upward by 5 mm IMPORTANT Adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing Adjust the printing position of the first page using [Offset Y (2-Sided)] and [Offset X (2-Sided)]. The printing position of the second page depends on the settings for each paper source. NOTE Adjustable area The printing position can be adjusted within a range from -5 to +5 mm in the vertical direction. The printing position can be adjusted within a range from -2.22 to +2.22 mm in the horizontal direction. 1 Press [ The ]( : Online). (Online) indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel. 2 Press [ ]( : Settings). 3 Select [User Maintenance] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Select [Adj. Start Position] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select the direction and paper source that you want to check the printing position using [ ], and then press [OK]. ] and [ 6 Specify the target numeric value using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and select the numerical value to adjust the position. Each time you press [ ], the value increases in +0.1 mm increments, and each time you press [ ], the value ] or [ ], the value changes consecutively. decreases in -0.1 mm increments. If you keep holding down [ 7 Press [ ]( : Online). 㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 9 Press [ ]( : Utility). 10 Select [Printing Pos. Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 11 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. The Printing Position Adjustment Print in which the setting is changed is printed. Check the printout results to confirm the printing position. To make further adjustment, repeat Steps 1 to 11. 㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01J Moving the Printer When changing the location of the printer or moving the printer for maintenance, be sure to perform the following procedure. For details on the installation site, see "Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site." Before moving the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions." 1 Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer. Shut down the printer before turning it OFF. For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF." <How to disconnect the cable or cord> * USB cable * (2) Turn the computer OFF. (3) Disconnect the cable from the printer. LAN cable * (4) Disconnect the cable from the printer. Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet. (6) Disconnect the cord from the printer. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. 2 Carry the printer unit to the installation site. After confirming that the covers and trays are closed, carry the printer with two or more people by holding the lift handles on the lower portion of the printer and lifting it up at the same time. Check the weight of the printer and then start to carry it, making sure that you can hold it safely. "Printer Specifications" 㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If the optional paper feeder is installed Remove the paper feeder from the printer, place the paper feeder on the new installation site, and then carry the printer to the site. Removing the paper feeder from the printer may be difficult. Be careful when removing the paper feeder from the printer. Do not carry the printer with the paper feeder installed. If you do so, the paper feeder may drop resulting in personal injury. For details on the procedure for installing the paper feeder, see "Installing the Paper Feeder." 3 Connect the removed cable or cord. <How to connect the cable or cord> * USB cable * Connect to the USB connector on the printer. LAN cable * Connect to the LAN connector on the printer. Power cord (1) Plug the power cord to the power socket on the printer. (2) Plug the power plug in the AC power outlet. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. When transporting the printer unit To prevent damage to the printer during transport, perform the following. Remove the toner cartridge. Before removing the toner cartridge, see "Storing Toner Cartridges." Securely pack the printer in the original box with packing materials. 㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Install the toner cartridge in the drum protective cover (A), and put it in the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth. If the original box and packing materials are not available, find an appropriate box along with packing materials and pack the printer and the parts appropriately. 㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S0 Cleaning and Maintaining the Printer Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration) Perform calibration if colors change or color mismatch occurs and you cannot print the correct colors (the colors you specified) If You Want to Adjust Color Balance When all the printout results appear reddish or bluish, or the color balance is not appropriate, you can correct the colors by adjusting each toner density of C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow), and K (Black). Cleaning the Inside of the Printer If the printed paper has smudge marks, clean the inside of the printer. Print quality deterioration can be prevented by cleaning the inside of the printer. Cleaning the Outside of the Printer Periodically clean the outer surfaces and ventilation slots of the printer to maintain the optimal printing quality. 㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SF Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration) There are the following four methods for performing calibration. Calibration Types Overview Calibration time (rough estimate) Color Mismatch Correction A color mismatch is adjusted by controlling the shifts of the print start positions of each color. Execute when color mismatch occurs. Approximately 40 seconds Density Control Controls the maximum print density and median print density. Execute when the colors have changed and the data is not printed in the correct colors (specified colors). Approximately 50 seconds Density Median Control Controls the median print density. Execute when the colors of the median print density have changed and the data is not printed in the correct colors (specified colors). Approximately 50 seconds Full Calibration Performs [Color Mismatch Corr.] and [Density Control]. Execute when you want to adjust color mismatch and control the print density (adjust color hues) at once. Approximately 80 seconds This section describes the procedure for performing calibration manually. You can perform calibration from the control panel and the Remote UI. Performing Calibration Using the Control Panel Performing Calibration Using the Remote UI IMPORTANT Precautions when performing calibration If you perform calibration frequently, this may affect the life of the toner cartridges. Perform calibration after making sure that the toner remains in the toner cartridges. You can check the status of each color toner cartridge from [Remaining Toner] on the Remote UI portal page. "Remote UI Portal Page" If you perform calibration in the state where the toner cartridges have reached the end of their life, calibration may not finish properly. In this case, replace the toner cartridges, and then perform calibration again. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" NOTE Perform calibration at the designated time or immediately after the printer is turned ON. You can set the printer to automatically perform calibration at the designated time everyday or to perform calibration immediately after the printer is turned ON. "Specifying Times and Performing Automatic Calibration" "Automatically Performing Calibration Immediately after the Printer Is Turned ON" Performing Calibration Using the Control Panel 1 Press [ ]( : Utility). 㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 2 Select [Calibration] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select an item which you want to adjust from [Color Mismatch Corr.], [Density Control], [Density ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Median Cont.], and [Full Calibration] using [ 4 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ Calibration is performed. Performing Calibration Using the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [Calibration] from [Output/Control] under the [Settings/Registration] menu. 㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Perform calibration. (1) Select the calibration which you want to perform. (2) Click [Execute]. ĺ Calibration is performed. 㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S1 Specifying Times and Performing Automatic Calibration Full calibration can be performed automatically at a specified time every day. 1 Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 Select [Control Menu] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [Timer Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select [Calibration Timer] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Select [Calibration Time] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 7 Set the time for calibration to be performed automatically, and press [OK]. You can increase or decrease the value using [ ] or [ ], and move the position using [ ] and [ If calibration is not automatically performed In the following cases calibration will not be performed even if [Calibration Timer] is set to [On]. When it is receiving data and printing When operating the control panel 㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ]. 07YL-0SE Automatically Performing Calibration Immediately after the Printer Is Turned ON You can set the timing for performing calibration when the self-diagnostic immediately after the printer is turned ON determines that calibration is necessary. 1 Press [ ]( ĺ The : Online). (Online) indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel. 2 Press [ ]( : Settings). 3 Select [User Maintenance] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select [First Calibration] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 You can configure the printer operation that is run immediately after the printer is turned ON. Select [After Jobs] or [Immediately] with [ ] or [ ], and press [OK]. After Jobs It runs color mismatch adjustment after the first print job after the printer is turned ON is completed. Immediately Print color mismatch is adjusted immediately after the printer is turned ON. If color mismatch adjustment is run immediately after the printer is turned ON, it will take some time before it is possible to print. ĺ The setting for [First Calibration] is changed. 㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SC If You Want to Adjust Color Balance The toner density can be specified in the range of "-8" to "+8" and is set to the standard density "0" before shipment. When adjusting the toner density using the control panel, use the following procedure. IMPORTANT When adjusting the toner density Adjusting the toner density little by little, print the defective print data from the computer, and then check the printout results. If you cannot adjust the toner density, reset the density to the default value "0", and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When [Toner Save] is enabled This setting is unselectable. Disable [Toner Save], and then perform the following procedure. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" 1 Press [ ]( : Online). The (Online) indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel. 2 Press [ ]( : Settings). 3 Select [Quality] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select the toner density of the target color using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select the density using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. The toner density is lightest when "-8" is selected and densest when "+8" is selected. 㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ The density is set. You can adjust the density of each color for density level. Adjusting the Density of Each Color for Density Level 㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SK Adjusting the Density of Each Color for Density Level IMPORTANT When adjusting the toner density Adjusting the toner density little by little, print the defective print data from the computer, and then check the printout results. If you cannot adjust the toner density, reset the density to the default value "0", and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When [Toner Save] is enabled This setting is unselectable. Disable [Toner Save], and then perform the following procedure. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" 1 Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 Select [Quality] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select the toner density of the target color (for fine adjustment) using [ [OK]. 4 Select the target density level using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select the density using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] and [ ], and then press The toner density is lightest when "-8" is selected and densest when "+8" is selected. ĺ The density is set. <Example adjustment of each density level> (in case of cyan) [High] [Mid] [Low] 㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01K Cleaning the Inside of the Printer Clean the following if dirt sticks to printed paper. "Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer" 㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01L Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer If the printed paper has smudge marks, clean the fixing roller using the following procedure. A4 or Letter size plain paper is required to clean the fixing roller. Have A4 or Letter size plain paper ready. 1 Load A4 size plain paper in the multi-purpose tray. "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" 2 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 3 Press [ ]( : Utility). 4 Select [Cleaning] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray using [ [OK]. 6 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ <Set cleaning paper and press the Online key.> is displayed on the display. 㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] and [ ], and then press 7 Press [ ]( : Online). ĺ The paper is fed into the printer slowly, and the printer starts cleaning the fixing roller. The cleaning is finished when the paper is output completely. Cleaning the fixing roller cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed. IMPORTANT Do not touch the paper until it is output completely while cleaning the fixing roller. The paper is once output partially after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to clean the fixing roller. NOTE Cleaning time It takes approximately 130 seconds. 㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01R Cleaning the Outside of the Printer Before cleaning, see "Attention (Cleaning)." 1 Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer. Shut down the printer before turning it OFF. For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF." <How to disconnect the cable or cord> * USB cable * (2) Turn the computer OFF. (3) Disconnect the cable from the printer. LAN cable * (4) Disconnect the cable from the printer. Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet. (6) Disconnect the cord from the printer. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. 2 Firmly wring a soft cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water, and wipe off the dirt. 㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 After wiping off the dirt, wipe the printer with a dry cloth. 4 When the printer is completely dry, connect the removed cable or cord. <How to connect the cable or cord> * USB cable * Connect to the USB connector on the printer. LAN cable * Connect to the LAN connector on the printer. Power cord (1) Plug the power cord to the power socket on the printer. (2) Plug the power plug in the AC power outlet. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. 㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01S Attention (Cleaning) Before cleaning the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions." IMPORTANT Precautions when cleaning the printer Do not use a cleaning agent other than water or a mild detergent diluted with water, as this may deform or crack the plastic materials in the printer. When using a mild detergent, be sure to dilute it with water. Also, if you use a mild detergent for cleaning, be sure to wipe away the detergent with a soft cloth dampened with water. Grease or oil does not have to be applied to this printer. Be sure not to apply grease or oil. 㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-01U Location of the Serial Number The serial number is required for receiving maintenance service. You can find the serial number at the location shown in the following figures. Do not remove the labels on which the serial number is indicated. Rear side of the printer Outside view of the packaging box 㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-022 Printer Installation Perform the following procedures according to your installation preference. Before installing the printer, see "Attention (Printer Installation)." 1 Checking before Installing the Printer Confirming the Supplied Accessories Checking the Installation Site "Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site" 2 Removing the Packing Materials "Removing the Packing Materials" Installing the Paper Feeder (Only when installing the paper feeder) "Installing the Paper Feeder" Installing ROM (Only when installing ROM) "Installing ROM" Installing SD Card (Only Installing SD Card) "Installing SD Card" Installing the Printer Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site Connecting the Power Cord "Installing the Printer" Specifying the Printer's Initial Settings "Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language" Specifying a Type of Printer Driver "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver" 6 Loading Paper "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" 7 Connecting to a Computer "Connecting to a Computer" 8 Installing the Printer Driver "For Windows" "For Macintosh" 9 Checking the Printing Operation 3 4 5 Check the operations by Test Page in Windows. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 㻝㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-023 Attention (Printer Installation) Before installing the printer, see "Important Safety Instructions." IMPORTANT Protecting the printer from condensation To prevent condensation from forming inside the printer in the following cases, adjust the printer to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use. When the room where the printer is installed is heated rapidly When the printer is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location If water droplets (condensation) form inside the printer, this can result in paper jams or poor print quality. When using an ultrasonic humidifier When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier, we therefore recommend that you use purified water or other water that is free of impurities. If you use tap water or well water, impurities in the water will be dispersed through the air. This can be trapped inside the printer, causing degradation in print quality. Precautions for the power supply Use an AC power outlet exclusively for the printer. Do not use the other sockets of the AC power outlet. Do not plug the power plug in the auxiliary outlet on a computer. Do not use the same AC power outlet for both the printer and any of the following equipment. Copy machine Air conditioner Shredder Equipment that consumes a large amount of electricity Equipment that generates electrical noise The maximum power consumption of the printer is 1,270 W or less. Electrical noise or a dramatic drop in mains voltage may cause the printer or computer to operate incorrectly or lose data. Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in damage to the printer. A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or humidity A location subject to condensation A poorly ventilated location (If you use the printer for a long time or to perform a large amount of printing in a poorly ventilated room, the ozone or other odors generated by the printer may create an uncomfortable working environment. In addition, chemical particles are dispersed during printing. Therefore, it is important to provide adequate ventilation.) A location near equipment that generates magnetic or electromagnetic waves A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur A location exposed to salt air, corrosive gases, or toxic gases A location, such as on a carpet or mat, that may warp from the weight of the printer or where the printer is liable to sink Precautions when preparing the toner cartridge See "Attention (Toner Cartridge)." Precautions when connecting the power cord Do not plug the power plug of the printer into an auxiliary outlet on a computer. One AC power outlet should be used exclusively for the printer. Do not connect this printer to an uninterruptible power source. This may cause printer malfunction or breakdown in the event of a power failure. When turning ON the printer for the first time after the printer installation Before turning ON the printer, be sure to insert the paper drawer in the printer. Precautions when installing the paper feeder Do not touch the connector (A) on the paper feeder. This may result in damage to the printer or misfeeds. 㻝㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you cannot place the printer on the paper feeder properly, lift the printer once, hold it horizontally, and place it again. If you try to place the printer forcefully without lifting it, the connector and positioning pins may be broken. Be sure to turn the printer ON once when loading paper in the paper drawer for the first time after installing the paper feeder. Precautions when installing/removing ROM Be sure not to touch the switches on the main board. If you change the switches, the printer does not operate properly. Observe the following precautions when handling ROM to prevent damage from static electricity. Touch a metal object to dissipate static electricity before handling them. When handling ROM, do not touch anything that generates static electricity such as the computer display. Do not touch the main board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands. Take ROM out of the protective bag right before it is installed. When installing ROM, be careful so that any metal objects such as screws do not touch the main board. If any of screws, clips, staples, and so on should drop inside the printer, do not plug the power plug in the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Do not turn the printer ON without the slot cover attached. This may result in damage to the printer. NOTE About the toner cartridge included with this printer The average yield of the included toner cartridges is as follows. Average yield of K (Black) toner cartridge: 6,100 pages *1 Average yield of Composite C (Cyan), M (Magenta), and Y (Yellow) toner cartridges: 6,400 pages *1 *1 The average yield is on the basis of "ISO/IEC 19798"* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. * "ISO/IEC 19798" is the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for color printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components" issued by ISO (International Organization for Standardization). For purchasing replacement toner cartridges, see "Consumables." 㻝㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-024 Confirming the Supplied Accessories and Checking the Installation Site Confirming the Supplied Accessories Make sure that all the supplied accessories are contained in the box before installing the printer. If an item is missing or damaged, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer. IMPORTANT Download the printer driver for Macintosh from the Canon Web site The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon Web site (http://www.canon.com/). If you cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the Canon Web site, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. NOTE About interface cables This printer does not come with an interface cable. Have an appropriate one available for the computer you are using or the connecting method. Use a USB cable with the following symbol. About the Supplied Manuals The manuals supplied with this printer consist of the following. Read these manuals according to your purpose and make full use of this printer. Manual Name Contents 㻝㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Quick Setup Guide Explains the procedure for installing the printer. e-Manual Explains all the operations of this printer, such as how to use the printer and troubleshooting. (The contents of "Quick Setup Guide" are also included.) Getting Started Guide This is the simple manual (PDF format) written in the following languages. Arabic, Bulgarian, Croatian, Estonian, Greek, Latvian, Lithuanian, Persian, Romanian, Slovakian, Slovenian, Ukrainian To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required. If Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on your system, download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated Web site. Checking the Installation Site In order to use this printer in a safe and trouble-free manner, install the printer in a place that fulfills the following conditions. Temperature and Humidity Conditions Temperature range 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F) Humidity range 20 to 80% RH (no condensation) Power Supply Requirements 220 to 240 V (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±2 Hz) Installation Requirements A location with sufficient space Refer to the following dimensions of each part and ensure the installation space. A location with good ventilation A location with a flat, even surface A location able to fully support the weight of the printer 㻝㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-025 Removing the Packing Materials NOTE Store the removed packing materials. They are required when transporting the printer for relocation or maintenance. About the packing materials The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice. Remove all the orange tape if it is attached to the printer when performing the following procedure. 1 Open the right cover. (1) Remove the tape attached to the position shown in the figure. (2) Open the right cover. Do not remove the tape forcefully because the packing material is attached inside the printer. 2 Remove the packing material with tape. 3 㻝㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Close the right cover. 4 Pull out the paper drawer until it stops. 5 Remove the packing material with tape. 6 Remove the packing material. (1) Turn it in the direction of the arrow. (2) Remove it. 7 Set the paper drawer into the printer. 㻝㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Check ! Checking if the packing materials are removed Check that the following packing materials are completely removed. Dispose of the left packing materials according to local regulations. * Make sure that all the orange tape is completely removed. Close the covers and set the paper drawer after you finish checking. Next, perform one of the following procedures. If you want to use the printer with optional accessories installed Install the optional accessories before installing the printer. "Installing the Paper Feeder" "Installing ROM" "Installing SD Card" If you want to use the printer without optional accessories installed Install the printer. "Installing the Printer" 㻝㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-026 Installing the Paper Feeder By installing the optional paper feeder in addition to the supplied multi-purpose tray and paper drawer, the printer can feed up to 1100 sheets of paper continuously and automatically. Paper Feeder Unit PF-723A <If the printer is already installed> When installing the paper feeder in the printer after installing the printer, move the printer to an appropriate location temporarily. "Moving the Printer" For details on the precautions for when installing the paper feeder, see "Attention (Printer Installation)." Remove all the orange tape if it is attached to the paper feeder when performing the following procedure. 1 Take the paper feeder out of the box. 2 Pull out the paper drawer of the paper feeder until it stops. 3 Remove the three pieces of tape that are securing the packing material. 㻝㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Remove the packing material. 5 Set the paper drawer in the paper feeder. Check ! Remove the packing materials completely. Make sure that the following packing materials are completely removed. Dispose of the left packing materials according to local regulations. * Make sure that all the orange tape is completely removed. Set the paper drawer in the paper feeder after you finish checking. 㻝㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Place the paper feeder at the installation site. When carrying the paper feeder, hold the lift handles on both sides with both hands as shown in the figure. 7 Gently place the printer on the paper feeder so that each surface of the printer is flush with the front or side surfaces of the paper feeder. Also, match the positioning pins (A) and connector (B) when placing the printer. Next, perform the following procedures. If you want to install the ROM modules, follow the procedure from Step 2 in "Installing ROM." If you want to install the SD card, follow the procedure from Step 2 in "Installing SD Card." If you install the printer and paper feeder at the same time 1 Connect the power cord. "Connecting the Power Cord" Specifying the 㻝㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 2 "Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language" printer's initial settings. Specifying a type of printer driver. "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver" 3 Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" 4 Connecting to a computer. "Connecting to a Computer" 5 Install the printer driver. "For Windows" "For Macintosh" 6 Register the paper feeder in the printer driver. "Setting the Paper Feeder Information" 7 Check the printing operation. Check the operations by Test Page in Windows. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" If you install the paper feeder afterward (If you are using the printer already) 1 Connect the cables and cords. 2 Load paper. (Drawer 2*) "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" 3 Register the paper feeder in the printer driver. "Setting the Paper Feeder Information" 4 Check the printing operation. *Paper Reconnect the cables and power cords that were removed and restart the printer. Check the operations by Test Page in Windows. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" drawer of the paper feeder Setting the Paper Feeder Information After installing the paper feeder, set the paper feeder information. The operation method to use with Windows is explained here. If you are a Macintosh user, see the "Online Manual." 1 Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2 㻝㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Right-click the icon for the printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the pop-up menu. 3 Obtain paper feeder information. (1) Display the [Device Settings] tab. (2) Click [Get Device Status]. ĺ Paper feeder information is obtained automatically. NOTE When paper feeder information cannot be obtained automatically Select the check box for [500 Sheet Drawer] under [Paper Source Options]. 㻝㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-027 Installing the Printer If you want to use the printer with optional accessories installed, install them before installing the printer. "Installing the Paper Feeder" "Installing ROM" "Installing SD Card" Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site 1 Carry the printer unit to the installation site. After confirming that the covers and trays are closed, carry the printer with two or more people by holding the lift handles on the lower portion of the printer and lifting it up at the same time. Check the weight of the printer and then start to carry it, making sure that you can hold it safely. "Printer Specifications" Connecting the Power Cord 1 Connect the power cord. NOTE The form of the supplied power cord 㻝㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The form of the supplied power cord may differ from the one in the above illustration. 2 Press the power switch to turn the printer ON. ĺ The indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates a self-diagnostic test on the printer unit and optional accessories. If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Main Power indicator (green), (Ready) indicator (green), (Online) indicator (green) and Paper Source indicator (green) come on, <Ready to print.> appears in the display, and the printer is ready to print. The following information is displayed in the display. Next, perform the following procedures. Specifying the printer's initial settings "Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language" Specifying a type of printer driver "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver" 2 Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" 3 Connecting to a computer "Connecting to a Computer" 1 㻝㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Install the printer driver. 5 Check the printing operation. "For Windows" "For Macintosh" Check the operations by Test Page in Windows. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 㻝㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-028 Installing ROM Insert the ROM in the position shown in the following figure. After checking the position of the ROM, perform the work. Installing ROM It explains the procedure for inserting the ROM. Insert the ROM correctly using the following procedure. Checking the ROM Installation It explains the procedure for checking whether the ROM is inserted correctly. After inserting, perform a check using the following procedure. Removing ROM It explains the procedure for removing the ROM. Use the following procedure when removing the ROM. 㻝㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-029 Installing ROM NOTE A Phillips screwdriver is required. Have a screwdriver ready that matches the size of the screws for the slot cover. 1 Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer. Shut down the printer before turning it OFF. For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF." <How to disconnect the cable or cord> * USB cable * (2) Turn the computer OFF. (3) Disconnect the cable from the printer. LAN cable * (4) Disconnect the cable from the printer. Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet. (6) Disconnect the cord from the printer. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. 2 Remove the slot cover. (1) Remove the screws marked with " " or " ". 㻝㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (2) Open the slot cover. (3) Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow. NOTE About the location for installing ROM Confirm the installation location and its orientation before installing the ROM module. 3 Install ROM. Push the ROM module into the printer firmly while aligning the module with the two connectors. 㻝㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Attach the slot cover. (1) Attach the slot cover. (2) Close the cover. 5 Attach and fasten the screw. Next, perform the following procedures. (If you want to install the SD card, follow the procedure from Step 2 in "Installing SD Card".) If you install the printer and ROM at the same time Connect the power cord. "Connecting the Power Cord" Specifying the printer's initial settings. "Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language" Specifying a type of printer driver. "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver" 3 Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" 4 Connecting to a computer. "Connecting to a Computer" 5 Install the printer driver. "For Windows" "For Macintosh" 1 2 㻝㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Check the printing operation. 7 Check the ROM installation. 8 Specify the settings for the ROM module as needed. Check the operations by Test Page in Windows. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" "Checking the ROM Installation" For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM. If you installed ROM afterward (If you are using the printer already) 1 Connect the cables and cords. 2 Check the ROM installation. 3 Specify the settings for the ROM module as needed. Connect the removed cables and cords again. "Checking the ROM Installation" For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM. 㻝㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02A Checking the ROM Installation After installing a ROM module, print Configuration Page to check if the module is installed properly. NOTE Load A4 size paper. Configuration Page is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Be sure to load A4 size paper when printing the Configuration Page. 1 Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer. "Paper Loading and Output" 2 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 3 Press [ ]( : Utility). 4 Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK] to print Configuration Page. NOTE How to check the installation Confirm that [BarDIMM] is displayed in [PCL]. 㻝㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ If [BarDIMM] is not displayed, see "Removing ROM," remove the ROM module, and then try to install it again. The above figure is a sample of Configuration Page. The contents may differ from the Configuration Page printed by your printer. 㻝㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02C Removing ROM NOTE How to remove the cover For details on how to remove the slot cover, see "Installing ROM." Holding the edges of the ROM module, and then pull it out. 㻝㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02E Installing SD Card Insert the SD card in the position shown in the following figure. After checking the position of the card, perform the work. Installing SD Card It explains the procedure for inserting the SD card. Insert the SD card correctly using the following procedure. Checking the SD Card Installation It explains the procedure for checking whether the SD card is inserted correctly. After inserting, perform a check using the following procedure. Removing SD Card It explains the procedure for removing the SD card. Use the following procedure when removing the SD card. 㻝㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02F Installing SD Card SD card is installed in the main board of the printer unit using the following procedure. IMPORTANT When using the "Encrypted Secured Print" function whose security is reinforced for data communication and stored data You need to install "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in." For details on the installation procedure, see "Readme.txt" in the supplied CD-ROM. We recommend that an encrypted secured print be used when printing secured print jobs. Before installing SD card If the SD card is write-protected, release the protection, and then insert the card. NOTE A Phillips screwdriver is required. Have a screwdriver ready that matches the size of the screws for the slot cover. 1 Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer. Shut down the printer before turning it OFF. For details on the procedure for shutting down the printer, see "Turning the Printer ON/OFF." <How to disconnect the cable or cord> * USB cable * (2) Turn the computer OFF. (3) Disconnect the cable from the printer. LAN cable * (4) Disconnect the cable from the printer. Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet. (6) Disconnect the cord from the printer. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. 㻝㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 2 Remove the SD card slot cover. (1) Remove the screw marked with " ". (2) Remove the SD card slot cover. 3 Install SD card. Install the SD card in the SD card slot until it clicks. 4 Attach the SD card slot cover. (1) Engage the tab of the SD card slot cover into the matching slit. (2) Attach and fasten the screw. 5 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" If <Formatting SD Card?> appears in the display after the printer starts, the SD card is being formatted. Wait for a moment until the format is completed. IMPORTANT 㻝㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If <Formatting SD Card?> does not appear in the display Perform [Format] in [SD Card Maintenance] in the common Setup menu. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" 6 Connect all the interface cables. NOTE Setting after the SD card is installed Perform the following procedure after the SD card is installed. (1) Display the [Device Settings] tab in the printer driver. For details on the procedure for displaying the sheet, see "Setting the Printer Options." (2) Click [Get Device Status]. If you cannot obtain the status of the optional accessories automatically, select the [SD Card Installed] check box. For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Setting the Printer Options." Next, perform the following procedures. If you install the printer and SD card at the same time Connect the power cord. "Connecting the Power Cord" Specifying the printer's initial settings. "Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language" Specifying a type of printer driver. "Specifying a Type of Printer Driver" 3 Load paper. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" 4 Connecting to a computer. "Connecting to a Computer" 5 Install the printer driver. "For Windows" "For Macintosh" 6 Check the printing operation. 1 2 7 Check the operations by Test Page in Windows. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Checking the ROM Installation. (Only when installing ROM) "Checking the ROM Installation" Checking the SD Card Installation. "Checking the SD Card Installation" 㻝㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 Specify the settings for the ROM module as needed. For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM. If you installed SD card afterward (If you are using the printer already) 1 2 3 Connect the cables and cords. Connect the removed cables and cords again. Checking the ROM Installation. (Only when installing ROM) "Checking the ROM Installation" Checking the SD Card Installation. "Checking the SD Card Installation" Specify the settings for the ROM module as needed. For details on the settings for the bar code fonts, see "Bar Code Printing Guide" included in the User Manual CD-ROM. 㻝㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02H Checking the SD Card Installation After installing an SD card, print Configuration Page to check if the module is installed properly. NOTE Load A4 size paper. Configuration Page is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Be sure to load A4 size paper when printing the Configuration Page. 1 Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer. "Paper Loading and Output" 2 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 3 Press [ ]( : Utility). 4 Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK] to print Configuration Page. NOTE How to check the installation Confirm that that [SD Card] under the [Control Menu] is set to [On]. 㻝㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ If [SD Card] is not displayed, see "Removing SD Card," remove the SD card, and then try to install it again. ĺ If [SD Card] is displayed, perform the following procedure. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) ]( : Settings). Press [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Select [Control Menu] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Select [SD Card] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Select [On] using [ Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ Check that the SD card is not write-protected. If the card is write-protected, release the protection, and then insert the card. The above figure is a sample of Configuration Page. The contents may differ from the Configuration Page printed by your printer. 㻝㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02J Removing SD Card NOTE How to remove the cover For details on how to remove the slot cover, see "Installing SD Card." 1 Insert the SD card until it clicks, and then release your hand. 2 Remove the SD card. 㻝㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02K Specifying the Printer's Initial Settings Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language Specifying a Type of Printer Driver 㻝㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02L Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language When the printer is turned ON, the initial setting screen appears. Specify the setting using the following procedure. NOTE About the initial setting screen The initial setting screen is displayed only when the printer is turned ON for the first time. 1 Press the power switch to turn the printer ON. ĺ The indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates a self-diagnostic test on the printer unit and optional accessories. If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Main Power indicator (green), (Ready) indicator (green), (Online) indicator (green) and Paper Source indicator (green) come on, <Ready to print.> appears in the display, and the printer is ready to print. IMPORTANT Do not turn the printer ON immediately after turning it OFF. If you want to cycle the power of the printer, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again. If the printer does not operate properly "Troubleshooting" If an error message appears in the display on the control panel "A Message Appears in the Control Panel" When turning ON the printer for the first time after installing the printer and paper feeder Do not load paper in the paper drawer. "Printer Installation" Precautions when turning OFF the printer If you turn the printer OFF, all print data remaining in the printer memory will be erased. 㻝㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Power consumption when the power is OFF Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is inserted in the AC power outlet. To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. 2 Select a display language using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Specify a date, and then press [OK]. 4 Specify time, and then press [OK]. ĺ The following screen appears, and the settings are completed. NOTE About the clock in this printer The clock in the printer should be accurate within ± 60 seconds per month. Adjust the clock periodically. When setting time zones and daylight savings time See "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" under "Setting Items" in "Managing the Printer." 㻝㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02R Specifying a Type of Printer Driver When printing from a computer by USB connection, specify which of the following printer drivers is used. UFR II UFR II XPS PCL5c PCL6 PS3 XPS (Direct) You can select the type of printer driver to be installed at the time. IMPORTANT When installing the printer driver manually Be sure to match the setting of this item and the type of the printer driver to be installed. You cannot use printer drivers of a different type. 1 Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 Select [Control Menu] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [Select PDL (PnP)] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message is displayed, press [OK] to continue. 4 Select the printer driver to be used using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻝㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ The setting value is changed. 5 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE For details on a hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻝㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02S Connecting to a Computer When Connecting Using a USB Cable Before connecting the printer to a computer, see "Important Safety Instructions." IMPORTANT Do not plug or unplug the USB cable while the printer or computer is ON. This may cause the printer to malfunction. About unidirectional communication equipment The printer performs bi-directional communication. Operation of the printer when connected via unidirectional communication equipment was not tested, and as a result, Canon cannot guarantee printer operation if the printer is connected using unidirectional print servers, USB hubs or switching devices. NOTE About the USB interface The appropriate USB interface varies depending on the operating system of the connected computer as follows. For more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Windows XP, Vista, 7, Server 2003, and Server 2008: Hi-Speed USB/USB Mac OS X (10.3.2 or earlier): USB Mac OS X (10.3.3 or later): Hi-Speed USB/USB About the interface cable This printer does not come with an interface cable. Have an appropriate one available for the computer you are using or the connecting method. Use a USB cable with the following symbol. 1 Make sure that the printer and computer are OFF. Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned off. 2 Connect the USB cable. 㻝㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Flat end (A): Connects to a USB port on your computer. Square end (B): Connects to the USB connector on this printer. Do not turn the printer ON at this stage even if you want to install the printer driver. When Connecting with a LAN Cable IMPORTANT If more than one devices are connected to an AppleTalk network Turn on each device at an interval of ten seconds or longer. NOTE About the network environment This printer supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T connections. About the LAN cable This printer does not come with a LAN cable or a hub. Have cables or a hub ready as needed. Use a Category 5 or higher twisted pair cable for the LAN. If you want to connect the printer to a 100BASE-TX or 1000BASE-T Ethernet network, all the devices to be connected to the LAN (hub, LAN cable, and network board for computer) must support 100BASE-TX or 1000BASET. For more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When the printer is connected to a network Check the MAC address of the print server with Network Status Print, and then configure the network operating system (UNIX, etc.) and print server. "Checking the Printer Settings" "Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer)" 1 Connect the LAN cable. 㻝㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 2 Turn the printer ON. 3 Make sure that the LNK indicator (A) on the network interface is on. When the LNK indicator is off "All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off" 㻝㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02U Installing the Software For Windows Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver Installation Other Software Program(s) For Macintosh Installation 㻝㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02W For Windows To print from a computer, you must install the printer driver and set up the printer configuration using the printer driver. Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver Installation Other Software Program(s) 㻝㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02X Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver The printer driver is installed from a User Software CD-ROM. Content of Each CD-ROM: Features of the Printer Driver UFR II Printer Driver: Using the UFR II printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host PC and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization. PCL Printer Driver: The PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, the PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c and PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard with black-and-white printers. PS Printer Driver: The PS printer driver converts print data from applications into data for use with PS printers, and sends it to the printer. As well as converting print data, it can also enable you to configure settings relating to finishing and detailed settings such as color adjustment, and provides an appropriate print environment for desktop publishing and publishing on demand. 㻝㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-02Y Installation From the menu screen of the User Software CD-ROM, you can install the printer driver. The menu screen also allows you to display the "Printer Driver Installation Guide” describing the installation procedure. To view the guide, display it before you start the installation. 㻝㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-030 Other Software Program(s) The following software program(s) is (are) included on the User Software CD-ROM. Use it (them) according to your need. NetSpot Device Installer Use this software to specify the initial settings for various devices connected to a network from your computer. For information on installing the software, see the Readme file located in the CD-ROM. 㻝㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-031 For Macintosh To print from a computer, you must install the printer driver and set up the printer configuration using the printer driver. Installation 㻝㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-032 Installation For details about the installation procedure, refer to the appropriate Mac driver guide. Starting Installation: Double-click the installation icon in the installer set folder to start the installation. Viewing the Driver Guide: Double-click the manual icon in the installation set folder to view the driver guide. 㻝㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-033 Basic Printer Operations Usable Paper Precautions for Paper Printable Area Paper Loading and Output Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Loading Custom Size Paper Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray Registering the Paper Size and Type Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing Turning the Printer ON/OFF Online and Offline Canceling a Job Operations from the Computer Canceling from the Printer Control Panel Outputting Data (Forced Output) Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) Checking the Printer Status 㻝㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-034 Usable Paper The following shows the paper sizes that can be used with this printer. : Available : Unavailable Paper Source Paper Type Setting for [Paper Type]*1 Paper Size Multipurpose Tray Drawer 1 Drawer 2 (optional) 2-sided Printing *2 A4 B5 *4 A5 A6 *4 *4 Legal Plain paper 74 g/m²) *3 (60 to Letter [Plain L] *5*6 [Plain L2] *5 Executive Statement *4 Foolscap 16K Custom size paper *11*18 *12*17 *15*18 A4 B5 *4 A5 A6 *4 *4 Legal Plain paper 105 g/m²) *3 (70 to [Plain] (Default) [Rough] *10 *6*7 Letter Executive Statement *4 Foolscap 16K Custom size paper *11*18 *12*17 *15*18 A4 B5 *4 A5 A6*4 㻝㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 *4 Legal Heavy paper (100 to 120 g/m²) [Heavy 1] *7*8 Letter Executive Statement *4 Foolscap 16K Custom size paper *11*18 *12*17 *15*18 A4 B5 *4 A5 A6*4 Legal Heavy paper (115 to 163 g/m²) [Heavy 2] *8 Letter Executive Statement *4 Foolscap 16K Custom size paper *11*18 *12*17 *15*18 A4 *16 B5 *16 A5 *16 A6 Heavy paper (164 to 216 g/m²) [Heavy 3] Legal *16 Letter *16 Executive *16 Statement Foolscap *16 16K *16 Custom size paper A4 Transparency [Transparency] Letter A4 㻝㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 *11 *16 *4 B5 A5 A6*4 Legal Letter Label [Labels] Executive Statement *4 Foolscap 16K Custom size paper Index Card *19 [Heavy 2] *11 Index Card Envelope Monarch Envelope Envelope No.10 [Envelope] Envelope DL Envelope ISO-C5 *1 *2 The setting is located in the [Paper Source] tab in the printer driver. If you print from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system, specify a paper type in [Default Paper Type] in the control panel. 2-sided printing supports paper with a weight of 60 to 163 g/m². *3 Recycled paper can be also used. *4 The paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer). If 60 g/m² paper is set to [Plain L] and printed and the print result output paper is curled (the printed side is curved), set it to [Plain L2]. *5 *6 When printing 70 to 74 g/m² paper, it is all right to set it to either [Plain] or [Plain L]. *7 When printing 100 to 105 g/m² paper, it is all right to set it to either [Plain] or [Heavy 1]. *8 When printing 115 to 120 g/m² paper, it is all right to set it to either [Heavy 1] or [Heavy 2]. If either is set and the following problems occur, set it to the other setting and then print. The output paper is curled. After-images appear on the parts that are not printed. The toner does not fix well and the printing is faded. *9 *10 *11 *9 *9 *9 Specify [Rough] for this item when a paper jam occurs or when you want to improve the fixation on printing coarse paper (75 to 90 g/m²) with [Plain] selected. You can load paper of the following custom paper sizes. In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 76.2 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 355.6 mm *12 You can load paper of the following custom paper sizes. In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 101.6 to 215.9 mm *13 ; Long edges 148.0 to 297.0 mm *14 *13 When width is 215.9 mm, max length is 279.4 mm. *14 When length is 297.0 mm, max width is 210.0 mm. *15 You can load paper of the following custom paper sizes. 㻝㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm *16 You can load 164 to 176 g/m² heavy paper. *17 Automatic 2-sided printing can be performed on the custom size paper whose short edges are 148.0 to 215.9 mm and long edges are 210.0 to 297.0 mm. Automatic 2-sided printing can be performed on the custom size paper whose short edges are 148.0 to 215.9 mm and long edges are 210.0 to 355.6 mm. The following Index Card size is supported. 76.2 x 127.0 mm *18 *19 IMPORTANT About print speed The print speed may drop depending on the paper settings for the size, type, orientation, and number of copies. Precautions for paper "Precautions for Paper" NOTE Printable area "Printable Area" Envelope sizes The envelope sizes are as follows. Envelope Monarch 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm Envelope No.10 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm Envelope DL 110.0 mm x 220.0 mm Envelope ISO-C5 162.0 mm x 229.0 mm Chlorine-free paper Chlorine-free paper can be used with this printer. 㻝㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-035 Precautions for Paper Paper Which Requires Attention Before Use When using the following types of paper, this may cause influence to the printout results or printer in some cases. Paper that was stored improperly Creased or folded paper Torn or damaged paper Wrinkled paper Curled paper Wet or moist paper Paper with rough edges Irregularly-shaped paper Paper with holes or perforations Paper with binding holes Paper with perforations Paper with adhesive or a special coating Heat-sensitive paper Paper with adhesive Carbon paper Treated color paper Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc) Paper that was printed by another printer Paper that was printed by a copy machine or another printer (The back side of the paper is also not usable.) Paper that is difficult for the toner to fix onto Paper with rough surfaces Paper containing thick fibers Paper with an extremely rough or smooth surface Paper that is thicker or thinner than the specified usable paper "Usable Paper" IMPORTANT About paper with staples, clips, ribbons or tape This kind of paper may result in the printer malfunction or damage to the printer. About paper that contains ink that melts, burns, evaporates or emits harmful gases at or lower than the heating temperature of the fixing unit This kind of paper may result in the printer malfunction or damage to the printer. Printing on the back side of paper that was previously printed (performing 2-sided printing manually) The printer can manually print the back side * of paper that has been printed once. When printing the back side of paper that has been printed once, first stretch out the edges and flatten out curls, load them one sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray, and then perform the following operation with the printer driver. 1. Display the [Paper Source] tab. 2. Set [Paper Source] to [Multi-purpose Tray]. 3. Select the [Print on the Other Side] check box. * This is only for paper that has been printed using this printer. Also, you cannot print again on the same side of the paper that was printed before. 㻝㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 * If you are using A5 paper, the back side may not be printed correctly. Storing Paper The quality of paper may deteriorate if stored improperly even when the paper meets the normal specifications. Inferior paper may cause misfeeds, paper jams, or deterioration in print quality. How to store paper Observe the following guidelines when storing and handling paper. Store paper on a flat surface. To help paper avoid moisture or dryness, keep paper in its wrapper until it is ready to be used. Do not place paper in the condition where it may curl or become creased. Do not store paper vertically or store too many stacks of paper in one pile. Do not store paper in the following locations. A A A A location exposed to direct sunlight location subject to high humidity dry location location with a temperature or humidity that differs significantly from the location where it will be used If you print on damp paper If you print on damp paper, steam may be emitted from the printer output area. This is due to moisture in the paper evaporating because of the heat generated when toner fixes. This is not a malfunction. (This is likely to occur when the room temperature is low.) Storing Printouts When handling or storing paper printed by this printer, be careful of the following points. How to store printouts Store paper on a flat surface. Avoid storing printouts in folders made of PVC material, as this may cause the toner to melt and stick to the PVC material. Toner may peel when printouts are folded or creased. Store printouts in the condition where they are not folded or creased as toner may peel. Put printouts in a binder when storing for a long period of time (two years or longer). Printouts may discolor when stored for a long period of time. Avoid storing printouts in a location subject to high temperatures. Precautions when sticking printouts with adhesive Be sure to use insoluble adhesive. Test the adhesive on an unneeded printout before using. Before stacking printouts that have adhesive, check that the adhesive completely dried. 㻝㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-036 Printable Area NOTE If you want to extend the printable area Specify the following settings in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver/PCL Printer Driver 1. Click [Advanced Settings] in the [Finishing] tab. 2. Set [Expand Print Region and Print] to [On]. PS Printer Driver See Help of the PS printer driver. Depending on the document to be printed, part of the edges of the document may not be printed, or when printing in color the printing on the edges of the paper may be blurred. Plain Paper/Heavy Paper/Transparency/Label/Index Card The printable areas are as follows. Envelope This printer can print on the following area. You may have to change the printable area before printing, depending on the application you use. 㻝㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻝㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-037 Paper Loading and Output This printer has the following paper sources and output trays. (A): Multi-purpose tray Paper Source (B): Drawer 1 "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" (C): Drawer 2 (optional) Output Tray (D): Output tray Outputs paper with the printed side face-down. Precautions for Output Trays Observe to the following points when handling the output trays. Before handling the output trays, see "Important Safety Instructions." During 2-sided printing, do not touch the paper until it is completely output. The paper is first partially output after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side. Paper Capacity of the Paper Sources and Output Trays : Unavailable Paper Source Paper Type Output tray *1 Multi-purpose tray Drawer 1 Drawer 2 (optional) Plain paper (Ex. 75 g/m²) Approx. 100 sheets Approx. 500 sheets Approx. 500 sheets Approx. 200 sheets Heavy paper (Ex. 120 g/m²) Approx. 80 sheets Approx. 400 sheets Approx. 400 sheets Approx. 40 sheets Heavy paper (Ex. 163 g/m²) Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 250 sheets Approx. 250 sheets Approx. 40 sheets Transparency Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 50 sheets Label Approx. 40 sheets Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 40 sheets Index Card Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 40 sheets 㻝㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 *2 Envelope Approx. 10 sheets Approx. 10 sheets *1 Actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation environment and paper type to be used. *2 When the paper size is Legal, the paper capacity is approximately 150 sheets. . 㻝㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-038 Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer NOTE When loading custom size paper The procedure for loading custom size paper is different from that for loading standard size paper. See "Loading Custom Size Paper." Loading Standard Size Paper For details on the paper that you can load in the paper drawer, see "Usable Paper." Load paper in Drawer 2 (optional) in the same manner as you load paper in Drawer 1. Before loading paper, see "Attention (Paper Drawer)." 1 Pull out the paper drawer until it stops. 2 Slide the paper guides to the position of the size of the paper to be loaded. Slide the side paper guides. (1) Hold the lock release lever. (2) Slide the paper guides to the position of the size of the paper to be loaded. Align the position of (A) with the size mark of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together. 㻝㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Slide the rear paper guide. (1) Hold the lock release lever. (2) Slide the paper guide to the position of the size of the paper to be loaded. Align the position of (A) with the size mark of the paper to be loaded. 3 Load the paper with the printing side face-up, and the paper stack aligned with the rear paper guide. NOTE When loading paper with a letterhead or logo See "Paper Loading Orientation" and load the paper in the correct orientation. 4 㻝㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Hold down the paper, and then set it under the hooks (A) on the paper guides. Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines (B). Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark lines, this may result in paper being misfed. IMPORTANT Be sure to align the paper guides to the paper. If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in paper being misfed or paper jams. 5 Set the paper drawer in the printer. Next, register the paper size "Registering the Paper Size and Type" 㻝㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-039 Attention (Paper Drawer) Before loading paper, see "Important Safety Instructions." IMPORTANT When loading paper for the first time after installing the paper feeder Before loading paper, be sure to turn ON the printer once. Do not touch the black rubber pad (A) in the paper drawer. This may result in paper being misfed. Do not pull out the paper drawer during printing. This may result in paper jams or damage to the printer. When using paper that is poorly cut Multiple sheets of paper may be fed at a time. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface. NOTE When loading A5 paper The orientation setting to be selected on the control panel depends on how you load paper. Select the correct setting. When loading paper in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer) Select [A5R] for paper size. When loading paper in portrait orientation (when the short edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer) Select [A5] for paper size. For paper orientation and printing side, see "Paper Loading Orientation." For settings displayed on the control panel, see "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" or "[Select Feeder] Menu." 㻝㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03A Loading Custom Size Paper NOTE When loading custom size paper in the multi-purpose tray Load them the same way as standard size paper. "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" Loading Custom Size Paper in the Paper Drawer For details on the paper that you can load in the paper drawer, see "Usable Paper." Load paper in Drawer 2 (optional) in the same manner as you load paper in Drawer 1. Before loading paper, see "Attention (Paper Drawer)." 1 Pull out the paper drawer until it stops. 2 Spread the paper guides a little wider than the paper size. Slide the side paper guides. (1) Hold the lock release lever. (2) Slide the paper guides to the position of the size of the paper to be loaded. Align the position of (A) with the size mark of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together. 㻝㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Slide the rear paper guide. (1) Hold the lock release lever. (2) Slide the paper guide to the position of the size of the paper to be loaded. Align the position of (A) with the size mark of the paper to be loaded. 3 Load the paper with the print side face-up, and the edge of the paper stack aligned with the front side of the paper drawer. NOTE When loading paper with a letterhead or logo See "Paper Loading Orientation" and load the paper in the correct orientation. 㻝㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Adjust the paper guides to the stack of paper so as to leave no space in between. IMPORTANT Be sure to adjust the paper guides to the stack of paper so as to leave no space in between. If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in paper being misfed or paper jams. 5 Hold down the paper, then set it under the hooks (A) on the paper guides. Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines (B). Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark lines. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark lines, this may result in paper being misfed. 6 Set the paper drawer in the printer. Next, register the paper size "Registering the Paper Size and Type" 㻝㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03C Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray For details on the paper that you can load in the multi-purpose tray, see "Usable Paper." Before loading paper, see "Attention (Multi-purpose Tray)." 1 Open the multi-purpose tray. Holding the opening on the right side of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray. 2 Pull out the auxiliary tray. 3 When loading a long-size paper, open the tray extension. 㻝㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Slide the paper guides a little wider than the actual paper width. 5 Gently load paper with the printing side face-down under the load limit guides (A) until it touches the back of the tray. IMPORTANT About the loading orientation of envelopes See "Printing on Envelopes" and load envelopes in the correct orientation. NOTE When loading paper with a letterhead or logo See "Paper Loading Orientation" and load the paper in the correct orientation. 6 Adjust the paper guides to the stack of paper so as to leave no space in between. 㻝㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 IMPORTANT Be sure to adjust the paper guides to the stack of paper so as to leave no space in between. If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in paper being misfed or paper jams. Next, register the paper size "Registering the Paper Size and Type" 㻝㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03E Attention (Multi-purpose Tray) Before loading paper, see "Important Safety Instructions." IMPORTANT Precautions when loading paper in the multi-purpose tray Load the paper so that it is straight. If the rear edge of the paper stack is not properly aligned, this may result in paper being misfed or paper jams. If the paper is curled or folded at the corners, flatten it before loading it in the printer. Do not touch the paper in the multi-purpose tray or pull it out during printing. This may result in paper jams or damage to the printer. When using paper that is poorly cut Multiple sheets of paper may be fed at a time. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface. Do not place any objects other than paper on the multi-purpose tray. Do not press the top of or apply excessive force to the multi-purpose tray. This may result in damage to the multi-purpose tray. NOTE When loading A5 paper The orientation setting to be selected on the control panel depends on how you load paper. Select the correct setting. When loading paper in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer) Select [A5R] for paper size. When loading paper in portrait orientation (when the short edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer) Select [A5] for paper size. For paper orientation and printing side, see "Paper Loading Orientation." For settings displayed on the control panel, see "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" or "[Select Feeder] Menu." 㻝㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03F Registering the Paper Size and Type When using Drawer 1 or the multi-purpose tray, you need to register the size of the loaded paper because this printer cannot automatically detect the paper size. When using the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2), register a paper size only in the following cases because the optional paper drawer is configured to automatically detect the paper size by default. When loading Foolscap or 16K size paper When loading standard size paper again after using custom size paper When you want to specify [Mixed Sizes] which does not check the paper size. Also, it is necessary to set the paper type to match the type of paper that is loaded. Register the paper size using the following procedure. (The paper size setting is set to [A4] by default.) NOTE Precautions when specifying [Mixed Sizes] The printer performs printing without checking the paper settings in the printer driver. Make sure that the paper specified in the printer driver matches that loaded in the paper drawer before using the printer. If you are using the UFR II printer driver, load custom size paper whose long edges are 215.9 mm or less in portrait orientation. 1 Press [ ]( : Feeder Selection). 2 Select the paper source using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Select either [MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size] or [Drawer 2 Size]. 3 Select a paper size using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ Paper size is registered. 4 Select the paper source whose type is to be registered using [ 㻝㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] and [ ], and press [OK]. Select either [MP Tray Paper Type], [Drawer 1 Type] or [Drawer 2 Type]. Since the printer driver's [Paper Type] default value is [Printer Default], it is normally not necessary to change the printer driver settings. Whenever you change the printer driver settings, match them with the paper settings on the control panel. 5 Select the paper type with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ The paper type is registered. Next, specify the following settings. When printing from the printer driver on Windows or Macintosh, configure the printer driver. "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" When printing from DOS or UNIX, specify the settings for [Standard Paper Size] and [Default Paper Type] using the control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" 㻝㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03H Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing After loading paper in a paper source, configure the printer driver to print using the following procedure. This section describes the basic procedure for printing from an application, taking Adobe Reader as an example. The printing procedure may differ depending on the application you are using. Before printing, see "Attention (Printer Driver Configuration)." 1 Load paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. "Paper Loading and Output" 2 Open the PDF file to be printed using Adobe Reader. 3 Select [Print] from the [File] menu. 4 Configure the printing preferences. (1) Select this printer. You can change the printer name in the printer folder ( "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows"). (2) Configure the printing preferences. 㻝㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Click [Properties]. 6 Specify the settings for [Page Size] and [Output Size]. (1) Display the [Page Setup] tab. (2) Select the page size of the document created by an application. (3) Select if the size of the paper to be printed is different from that of the data. 㻝㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 IMPORTANT If the [Page Size] setting and [Output Size] setting are different The print is automatically reduced or enlarged to fit on the page. 7 Specify the settings for [Paper Source] and [Paper Type]. (1) Display the [Paper Source] tab. (2) Set the paper source you want to use. (3) Select the type of the paper loaded in the paper source.* * Specify the setting according to the paper type as follows. Paper Type 60 to 74 g/m² [Plain L] *1*2 [Plain L2] *1 70 to 105 g/m² [Plain] *2*3 [Rough] *4 100 to 120 g/m² [Heavy 1] *3*5 115 to 163 g/m² [Heavy 2] *5 Plain Paper Heavy Paper Setting for [Paper Type] 㻝㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 164 to 216 g/m² [Heavy 3] Transparency [Transparency] Label [Labels] Index Card [Heavy 2] Envelope [Envelope] *1 If 60 g/m² paper is set to [Plain L] and printed and the print result output paper is curled (the printed side is curved), set it to [Plain L2]. *2 When printing 70 to 74 g/m² paper, it is all right to set it to either [Plain] or [Plain L]. *6 *3 When printing 100 to 105 g/m² paper, it is all right to set it to either [Plain] or [Heavy 1]. *6 *4 Specify [Rough] for this item when a paper jam occurs or when you want to improve the fixation on printing coarse paper (75 to 90 g/m²) with [Plain] selected. *5 When printing 115 to 120 g/m² paper, it is all right to set it to either [Heavy 1] or [Heavy 2]. *6 *6 If either is set and the following problems occur, set it to the other setting and then print. The output paper is curled. After-images appear on the parts that are not printed. The toner does not fix well and the printing is faded. NOTE Using Preview to specify a paper source You can also specify a paper source by clicking each paper source or [Auto] using Preview when [ ] is selected. 8 Specify the other printing preferences as needed. "Useful Printing Functions" describes the printing procedures that use the various printing functions. Make full use of the functions of this printer. NOTE For details on the settings See Help of the printer driver. "Viewing the Online Help" 9 Confirm the settings, and then click [OK]. ĺ The [Print] dialog box reappears. 10 Click [OK]. 㻝㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ The printer starts printing. If the printer cannot print properly "Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)" "Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)" "Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server)" 㻝㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03J Attention (Printer Driver Configuration) IMPORTANT Be sure to match the setting in the control panel. Match the setting specified in the [Setup] menu and that specified in [Output Size] in the printer driver. If they do not match, the message <Set below paper.> appears. In this case, the setting for [MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size] or [Drawer 2 Size] is changed to that in the printer ]( : Online), allowing you to continue printing. driver by pressing [ "Registering the Paper Size and Type" NOTE About configuration samples The display may differ depending on the operating system in addition to the type and version of the printer driver. How to install the printer driver If you are using Windows, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." To view "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." If you are using Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." To view "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." When printing on custom size paper You need to register the custom paper size in the printer driver previously. For details on the procedure for registering a custom paper size, see Help of the printer driver. "Viewing the Online Help" About the contents specified in "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" The specified settings apply only to data to be printed from the same application. Exiting the application resets the changed settings to the default settings. For details on the procedure for changing the default values for printing preferences, see "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 㻝㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03K Turning the Printer ON/OFF This section describes the procedures for turning the printer ON/OFF and checking the printer operation. Before printing, see "Attention (Turning the Printer ON/OFF)." Turning ON the Printer To use this printer, press the power switch to turn the printer ON. After checking the status of the printer unit and optional accessories, the printer is ready to print. 1 Turn ON the printer. (1) Open the power switch cover. (2) Press the power switch. The indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates a self-diagnostic test on the printer unit and optional accessories. If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Main Power indicator (green), (Ready) indicator (green), (Online) indicator (green) and Paper Source indicator (green) come on, <Ready to print.> appears in the display, and the printer is ready to print. The following information is displayed in the display. 㻝㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Turning OFF the Printer 1 Check that the printer is not performing the following operations. Printing While the printer is running a self-diagnostic test immediately after turning the power ON (Job) indicator is on or blinking While the When any of the following messages appears <Starting up...> <Calibrating...> <Initializing NVRAM> 2 Press [ ]( : Reset). 3 Select [Shut Down] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. IMPORTANT If "Could not execute." is displayed There is a Secure Print job in the SD card. If shutdown is running, after deleting the job using a soft reset, run the shutdown operation again. ]( : Online). If shutdown is not running, press [ NOTE When you are using WSD printing The shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is turned OFF. 4 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ After the message appears, turn OFF the printer automatically. 㻝㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE If the printer is not turned OFF immediately Depending on the process in the printer, it may take up to 10 minutes to turn the printer OFF. 㻝㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03L Attention (Turning the Printer ON/OFF) IMPORTANT Do not turn the printer ON immediately after turning it OFF. If you want to cycle the power of the printer, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again. If the printer does not operate properly "Troubleshooting" If an error message appears in the display on the control panel "A Message Appears in the Control Panel" When turning ON the printer for the first time after installing the printer and paper feeder Do not load paper in the paper drawer. "Attention (Printer Installation)" Precautions when turning OFF the printer If you turn the printer OFF, all print data remaining in the printer memory will be erased. When you attempt to turn the printer OFF suddenly, an unexpected error may occur. Use the procedure described in the e-Manual to turn the printer OFF. Power consumption when the power is OFF Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is inserted in the AC power outlet. To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. 㻝㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03R Online and Offline When the printer can receive data from the computer and print the data, the printer is "Online". When the printer is disconnected with the computer and cannot receive data, the printer is "Offline." To perform the settings for each menu using the control panel, switch the printer status as follows. : You can enter the menu : You cannot enter the menu When the printer is online When the printer is offline * [Setup] menu [Select Feeder] menu [Reset] menu [Job] menu [Utility Menu] menu Application menu * The [User Maintenance] options cannot be specified when the printer is online. Placing the Printer Online When printing from the computer, the printer has to be online. If the printer is offline, place the printer online using the following procedure. 1 Press [ ]( : Online). (Online) indicator turns on, and the printer is online. The IMPORTANT If you cannot place the printer online If an error is occurring in the printer, the printer does not come online. Eliminate the cause of the error before you place the printer online. NOTE About the (Online) indicator during Sleep Mode During Sleep Mode, the (Online) indicator is off even when the printer is online. Placing the Printer Offline To configure the printer so that it does not receive data from the computer or specify the settings for all the items in the [Setup] menu, place the printer offline using the following procedure. 1 Press [ ]( : Online). 㻝㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The (Online) indicator goes off, and the printer is offline. IMPORTANT About the automatic online function You can specify the time interval until the printer automatically enters the online status. The default is [2 minutes]. [Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options) The printer does not automatically enter online status in the following cases. The printer is in error status. The printer is in Sleep mode. [Auto Reset Time] under [Timer Settings] is set to [Off]. 㻝㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03S Canceling a Job You can cancel a print job using either of the following methods. Operations from the Computer You can select jobs from the print queue and cancel them. When the printer is connected to the computer using a LAN cable, you can cancel printing from the Remote UI. "Managing Print Jobs" Canceling from the Printer Control Panel You can press [ ]( : Job Status/Cancel) and cancel the job. You can cancel other user's jobs. <If an error is occurring to a job> Solve the problem using either of the following methods. Outputting Data (Forced Output) You can force the printer to output the print data. "Outputting Data (Forced Output)" Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) You can cancel the process currently being performed. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" <When canceling all the jobs> You can cancel all the jobs using the following method. Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) You can delete all the jobs or data which was already sent to the memory. "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" 㻝㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03U Operations from the Computer This section describes the procedure for when you are using Windows. If you are using Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing Driver Guide, see "Viewing the Driver Guide." 1 Display the print queue. 1. Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2. Double-click the icon for this printer. 2 Right-click the job that you want to cancel, and then select [Cancel] from the pop-up menu. If a print job does not appear Another user's job is not displayed. (For the print server environment, all print jobs are displayed on the print server.) If an error is occurring with a print job from another user, press the [ the job. "Canceling from the Printer Control Panel" NOTE For details on the print queue See Windows Help. 3 Click [Yes] to cancel the print job. If you cannot cancel a job 㻝㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ]( : Job Status/Cancel) key to cancel You cannot cancel the job whose pages are in the process of printing. 㻝㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03W Canceling from the Printer Control Panel When you want to cancel printing using the printer's control panel, run "Job Cancel" using the following procedure. A job cancel allows you to cancel the job currently being received or processed. IMPORTANT The data for which the printer started to feed paper cannot be canceled. If the job is canceled in this state, the next print job may be canceled. About print jobs for other than the printer driver for this printer When there is any print data for other than the printer driver for this printer, multiple data may be canceled. NOTE About print jobs which cannot be canceled When canceling a job, you may not be able to cancel the job even if <Canceling jobs...> is displayed. Also, you cannot cancel the following jobs. Jobs saved to boxes Delete such jobs using the Remote UI. "Remote UI" 1 Make sure that the (Job) indicator is on or blinking. Cancel the job while the printer is processing the data (while the (Job) indicator is on or blinking). 2 Press the [ ]( : Job Status/Cancel) key. 3 Select a job you want to cancel using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select [Yes] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻝㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ <Canceling jobs...> appears, and the print data being processed is canceled. When <Ready to print.> appears, the job cancellation completes. IMPORTANT While <Canceling jobs...> is displayed You cannot operate the printer. 㻝㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03X Outputting Data (Forced Output) When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the data may remain in the printer memory, and the job may not be completed properly. As long as the printer remains in this state, you cannot perform printing because the printer cannot receive the next data. In this case, force the printer to output the print data using the following procedure. IMPORTANT If you cannot output data You cannot output data for the following jobs or in the following state. Data from the PCL/PS/UFR II printer driver (Message) indicator is on When the Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" The data that is being printed is deleted. When you output data, print it again. NOTE About automatic output When [Timeout] under [Interface] in the Setup Menu is set to [On], even less than a page of data is discharged automatically. (Data from the PCL/UFR II printer driver is not output.) [Timeout] for a job is set to 15 seconds in the default settings. 1 Press [ ]( : Reset). 2 Select [Form Feed] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ The data remaining in the memory is printed. 㻝㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 IMPORTANT If the (Job) indicator does not go off even after outputting the data Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 㻝㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-03Y Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) If you want to cancel the process currently being performed, perform [Soft Reset] using the following procedure. IMPORTANT The data that is being printed, that is on the print queue, or that is being received is deleted. Performing a soft reset deletes all the jobs (those from other computers and interfaces). Make sure that other users are not printing before performing a soft reset. NOTE About the difference from a hard reset Hard resets delete all the registered files, such as the form data saved in the RAM of the printer, but soft resets do not delete them. 1 Cancel printing from the computer. 2 Press [ ]( : Reset). 3 Select [Soft Reset] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Hold down the [OK] key 5 seconds or more if you want to perform a [Hard Reset]. 4 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ When <Resetting software...> disappears, the soft reset is completed. 㻝㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-040 Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) When you want to delete all the jobs and data sent to memory for some reason, perform [Hard Reset] using the following procedure. IMPORTANT The data that is being printed, that is on the print queue, or that is being received is deleted. Performing a hard reset deletes all the jobs (those from other computers and interfaces). Make sure that other users are not printing before performing a hard reset. If the printer is reset while it is receiving data The data that is not being received will be received after the resetting process completes. However, the data may not be printed properly. NOTE About the difference from a soft reset Hard resets delete all the registered files, such as the form data saved in the RAM of the printer, but soft resets do not delete them. 1 Press [ ]( : Reset). 2 Select [Soft Reset] using [ ], press [OK] for at least five seconds, and then release your finger. ĺ When you release your finger, <Execute hard reset?> is displayed. 3 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ When <Resetting hardware...> disappears, the hard reset is completed. 㻝㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-041 Checking the Printer Status You can check the current printer status from the Remote UI portal page or the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. "Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page)" 㻝㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-042 Printing on Various Types of Paper Printing on Plain Paper, Heavy Paper, or Index Card Printing on Transparencies (B&W Printing Only) Printing on Labels Printing on Envelopes Printing on Custom Size Paper Paper Loading Orientation 㻝㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-043 Printing on Plain Paper, Heavy Paper, or Index Card Confirming usable paper This printer can print on plain paper (60 to 105 g/m²) and heavy paper (100 to 216 g/m²) of the following sizes or Index Card. Heavy paper of 177 to 216 g/m² can only be loaded in the Multi-purpose tray. Drawer 1 A4*1 , B5*1 , A5*1 , A6*2 , Letter *1 , Executive *1 , Statement *2 and 16K *1 Standard sizes Custom paper sizes In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): *3 Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm Long edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: *3 Short edges 101.6 to 215.9 mm *5 Long edges 148.0 to 297.0 mm *6 Drawer 2 (optional) A4*1 , B5*1 , A5*1*2, Legal*1 , Letter *1 , Executive *1 , Foolscap*1 and 16K *1 In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): *4 Short edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm Long edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: *4 Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm Long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm Multi-purpose Tray A4*1 , B5*1 , A5*1 , A6*2 , Legal*1 , Letter *1 , Executive *1 , Statement, Foolscap*1 , 16K *1 and Index Card In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): *4 Short edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm Long edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: *4 Short edges 76.2 to 215.9 mm Long edges 127.0 to 355.6 mm *1 Can be used for 2-sided printing. (164 to 216 g/m²) heavy paper cannot be used for 2-sided printing.) *2 The paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer). *3 Automatic 2-sided printing can be performed on the custom size paper whose short edges are 148.0 to 215.9 mm and long edges are 210.0 to 297.0 mm. *4 Automatic 2-sided printing can be performed on the custom size paper whose short edges are 148.0 to 215.9 mm and long edges are 210.0 to 355.6 mm. *5 When width is 215.9 mm, max length is 279.4 mm. *6 When length is 297.0 mm, max width is 210.0 mm. Recycled paper can be also used. NOTE When using custom size paper See "Printing on Custom Size Paper." Loading paper The paper which you can load in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray varies depending on the paper type. : Available : Unavailable Paper Type Drawer 1 Drawer 2 (optional) Multi-purpose Tray Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m²) Heavy paper (100 to 163 g/m²) 㻝㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Heavy paper (164 to 216 g/m²) * Index Card * 164 to 176 g/m² heavy paper can be loaded. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" The following Index Card size is supported. 76.2 x 127.0 mm Printing from an application After loading paper, perform printing. "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" The print speed drops when printing on heavy paper (100 to 216 g/m²). The print speed drops when printing on rough paper (75 to 90 g/m²). 㻝㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-044 Printing on Transparencies (B&W Printing Only) Confirming usable transparencies This printer can use the following sizes of transparencies. Standard sizes A4, Letter Transparencies can only be printed in B&W. Loading transparencies You can load transparencies only in the multi-purpose tray. "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" <Precautions when loading transparencies> Thoroughly fan the transparencies, and then align the edges before loading them as they may stick to each other. If they are not fanned enough, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at once, causing paper jams. When fanning or aligning the transparencies, try to hold the edges to avoid touching the printing surface. Take care not to mark or stain the printing surface of the transparencies with fingerprints, dust, or oil. This may result in poor print quality. Printing from an application After loading transparencies, perform printing. "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" The print speed drops when printing on transparencies. 㻝㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-045 Printing on Labels Confirming usable labels This printer can use the following sizes of labels. Standard sizes Custom paper sizes A4, B5, A5, A6 *, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement *, Foolscap, 16K and Index Card In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 76.2 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 355.6 mm * The paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer). Using the following types of labels may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer. Peeled labels or partly used labels Coated labels that are easily peeled off from the backing sheet Labels with uneven adhesive Loading labels You can load labels only in the multi-purpose tray. "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" <Precautions when loading labels> Fan the labels thoroughly, and then align the edges before loading them. If they are not fanned enough, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at once, causing paper jams. Take care not to mark or stain the printing surface of the labels with fingerprints, dust, or oil. This may result in poor print quality. Printing from an application After loading labels, perform printing. "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" The print speed drops when printing on labels. 㻝㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-046 Printing on Envelopes Confirming usable envelopes This printer can use the following envelopes. Using the following types of envelopes may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer. Envelopes with fasteners or snaps Envelopes with address windows Envelopes with adhesive on the surface Wrinkled or creased envelopes Poorly manufactured envelopes in which the glued parts are uneven Irregularly-shaped envelopes Loading envelopes You can load envelopes only in the multi-purpose tray. "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" <Precautions when loading envelopes> Load envelopes in the correct orientation as follows. ( : Feeding direction) Before loading envelopes, align them as follows. 1. Place the stack of envelopes on a flat surface, and then flatten them to release any remaining air. Then, press the edges tightly. 2. Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten curls as shown in the figure. 㻝㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3. Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface. Printing from an application After loading envelopes, perform printing. "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" Do not print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes. The print speed drops when printing on envelopes. When envelopes are printed, they may be creased. 㻝㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-047 Printing on Custom Size Paper Confirming usable custom size paper This printer can use the following custom size paper. Drawer 1 In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 101.6 to 215.9 mm *1 ; Long edges 148.0 to 297.0 mm *2 Drawer 2 (optional) In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm Multi-purpose tray In case of portrait orientation (only when the UFR II printer driver is used): Short edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 215.9 mm In case of landscape orientation: Short edges 76.2 to 215.9 mm; Long edges 127.0 to 355.6 mm *1 When width is 215.9 mm, max length is 279.4 mm. *2 When length is 297.0 mm, max width is 210.0 mm. Loading custom size paper The custom size paper which you can load in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray varies depending on the paper type. : Available Paper Type Drawer 1 Drawer 2 (optional) Multi-purpose Tray Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m²) Heavy paper (100 to 163 g/m²) Heavy paper (164 to 216 g/m²) * * 164 to 176 g/m² heavy paper can be loaded. "Loading Custom Size Paper" Registering a custom paper size If printing custom size paper, you need to register the custom paper size in the printer driver previously. For details on the procedure for registering a custom paper size, see Help of the printer driver. "Viewing the Online Help" Printing from an application After loading custom size paper, perform printing. "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" The print speed drops when printing on heavy paper (100 to 216 g/m²). 㻞㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-048 Paper Loading Orientation To print paper with letterheads or logos, load the paper in the proper orientation as follows. When printing on envelopes, see "Printing on Envelopes." ( : Feeding direction) When paper is loaded in portrait orientation *1 Portrait Layout Landscape Layout When paper is loaded in landscape orientation *2 Portrait Layout Landscape Layout Paper Drawer (1sided printing) *3 Paper Drawer (1sided printing) *4 (With the printing side facing up) (With the printing side facing up) (With the printing side facing up) (With the printing side facing up) (With the printing side facing down) (With the printing side facing down) (With the printing side facing down) (With the printing side facing down) (With the front side facing down) (With the front side facing down) (With the front side facing down) (With the front side facing down) (With the printing side facing down) (With the printing side facing down) (With the printing side facing down) (With the printing side facing down) (With the printing side facing up) (With the printing side facing up) (With the printing side facing up) (With the printing side facing up) (With the front side facing up) (With the front side facing up) (With the front side facing up) (With the front side facing up) Paper Drawer (2sided printing) Multi-purpose tray (1-sided printing) *3 Multi-purpose tray (1-sided printing) *4 Multi-purpose tray (2-sided printing) *1 Portrait orientation: The short edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer. *2 Landscape orientation: The long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer. *3 With [Paper Feed Method] *5 set to [Speed Priority] *4 With [Paper Feed Method] *5 set to [Print Side Priority] *5 㻞㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 For details on [Paper Feed Method], see "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)." 㻞㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-049 Useful Printing Functions Printing from a Computer (Windows) Printing Fundamentals Printing Functions Scaling Documents Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing Booklet Printing Poster Printing Watermark Printing Setting the Color Mode for Printing Combining and Printing Multiple Files Selecting a Profile for Printing Registering a Profile for Printing Printing from a Computer (Macintosh) Printing Fundamentals Printing Functions Scaling Documents Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 1-sided and 2-sided Printing Setting the Color Mode for Printing Using [Presets] for Printing Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods) Functions Which Can Be Specified from the Control Panel Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print) Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print) Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client 㻞㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print) Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt Printing) 㻞㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04A Printing from a Computer (Windows) Printing Fundamentals Printing Configuring the Default Print Settings Setting the Printer Options Viewing the Online Help Printing Functions Common Functions [Page Setup] Tab [Finishing] Tab [Paper Source] Tab [Quality] Tab [Device Settings] Tab Scaling Documents Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing Booklet Printing Poster Printing Watermark Printing Setting the Color Mode for Printing Combining and Printing Multiple Files Selecting a Profile for Printing Registering a Profile for Printing 㻞㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04C Printing Fundamentals This section explains the basic printing method using the printer driver, how to set the printer options, and how to display the online help. Printing Configuring the Default Print Settings Setting the Printer Options Viewing the Online Help 㻞㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04E Printing This section explains the basic printing method using the printer driver. NOTE Printing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application. 1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application. 2. 3. Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items. 㻞㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE The default setting for [Print Style] in the [Finishing] tab is [2-sided printing]. For details, see "1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing." For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Online Help.") 4. Click [OK]. Printing begins. NOTE If a printer icon is displayed in the task tray at the bottom right of your computer monitor, you can stop printing from your FRPSXWHU'RXEOHFOLFNWKHSULQWHULFRQĺFOLFNWKHQDPHRIWKHILOH\RXZDQWWRVWRSSULQWLQJĺFOLFN>'RFXPHQW@ĺ [Cancel]. 㻞㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04F Configuring the Default Print Settings This section describes how to access the printer setup screen from the [Control Panel] and how to configure the printing function settings beforehand. The printer whose settings you have configured will print with those settings every time. When printing, you can change these settings beforehand whenever required. To change the settings, configure them in the [Print] dialog box from the application. IMPORTANT To change the default print settings, you must log on to your computer as a member of the Administrators. 1. Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2. # $ (or [Printing preferences]). % % 3. Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items. 㻞㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Online Help.") 㻞㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04H Setting the Printer Options Before printing, you need to set up the printer configuration in order to use the functions of printer options (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) attached to and installed in the machine. The printer configuration can be set up automatically while installing the driver. If the machine cannot be configured during the installation, follow the procedure below. IMPORTANT To configure the printer option settings, you must log on to your computer as a member of the Administrators. 1. Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2. # $ properties]). % % 3. ; = @= 㻞㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 + 4. ; NOTE If the information request returns an error message, you need to configure the settings (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) manually. If the printer and computer are connected via USB or a WSD (Web Services on Devices) port, the [Get Device Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually. 㻞㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04J Viewing the Online Help You can display the online help by clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen. The online help includes additional information about each printing option. If the e-Manual does not provide the information you need, see the online help. 1. Click [Help]. The online help is displayed. Topic pane (right side): Displays the description of the information. Navigation pane (left side): Click [Contents] / [Search] to search for information. 㻞㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04K Printing Functions This section explains printing functions which can be configured in the printer driver screen. Common Functions [Page Setup] Tab [Finishing] Tab [Paper Source] Tab [Quality] Tab [Device Settings] Tab NOTE The items displayed in the printer driver screen and available functions differ according to the printer model you are using. 㻞㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04L Common Functions The following functions are common to the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs. 1.Profiles You can select a profile to conveniently repeat the same print settings (see "Selecting a Profile for Printing"). 3.Changing the Output Method Enables you to change output methods. For example, you can combine multiple sets of print data and configure print settings for the combined data (see "Combining and Printing Multiple Files"). 5.Verifying Settings You can verify the settings specified in each sheet. 2.Adding/Editing Profiles You can add and edit profile settings. 4.Preview The settings configured in each sheet are displayed in the preview. NOTE For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 㻞㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04R [Page Setup] Tab 1.Output Paper Size 2.Print Direction Sets the print direction relative to the orientation of the paper. Enables you to select the paper size actually output from the printer (see "Scaling Documents"). 4.Watermark 3.Page Layout Prints multiple pages arranged on one sheet of paper (see "Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet"). Prints pages with a watermark (such as "COPY") superimposed on the document (see "Watermark Printing"). 6.Header/Footer 5.Page Border Prints each page with a border. Prints pages with headers and/or footers with the date, page number, etc. NOTE For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 㻞㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04S [Finishing] Tab 1.1-sided/2-sided Printing 2.Booklet Printing Prints on one or both sides of the paper. The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided printing]. 4.Grouping 3.Collating When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs each set separately in page order. Prints pages in a sequence that allows them to be folded and grouped into a booklet when output (see "Booklet Printing"). When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs the pages in groups according to their page numbers. NOTE For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 㻞㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04U [Paper Source] Tab 1.Specifying the Paper When you want to print on a specific type of paper, specify the paper source containing the paper, or the paper type. NOTE For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 㻞㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04W [Quality] Tab 1.Black and White Printing Prints color documents in black and white (see "Setting the Color Mode for Printing"). 2.Color/Black & White Auto Detect Switches between color and black and white according to the color content of each page (see "Setting the Color Mode for Printing"). 4.Toner Reduction 3.Objective Enables you to conveniently select the appropriate settings for the current content. Prints with a reduced amount of toner. NOTE For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 㻞㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04X [Device Settings] Tab 1.Set Options You can set the printer options (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) attached to the machine. 3.Display Version Information You can display version information. 2.Obtain Device Information You can obtain device information and update the settings displayed in the sheet (see "Setting the Printer Options"). NOTE For instructions on how to display the printer properties dialog box, see "Setting the Printer Options." 㻞㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-04Y Scaling Documents You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size. There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually. 1. Click [Page Setup]. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page Size]. 3. Select output size of the document from [Output Size]. 㻞㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size]. 4. Z % scaling ratio for [Scaling]. \^ 5. Click [OK]. NOTE Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document. Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size. The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-050 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper. 1. Click [Page Setup]. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Select [N on 1] from [Page Layout] (where "N" is the number of pages you want to print on the sheet). Note If you cannot select the options for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] tab, and then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at Host]. For instructions on how to display the [Device Settings] tab, see "Setting the Printer Options." 㻞㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3. Select the page order from [Page Order]. The output image is displayed in the preview area. 4. Click [OK]. NOTE You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function. Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not use it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly. The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-051 1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing You can select whether to print on one side or both sides of each sheet of paper. The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided printing]. Paper Type Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m²) Heavy paper (100 to 163 g/m²) * Paper Size Standard size paper A4, B5, A5*, Legal, Letter, Executive, Foolscap and 16K Custom size paper: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm, long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm The paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer). Before performing 2-sided printing, see "Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing)." IMPORTANT Precautions when performing 2-sided printing Do not touch the paper during 2-sided printing until it is completely output. The paper is first partially output after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side. Printing on the back side of paper that was previously printed (performing 2-sided printing manually) The printer can manually print the back side * of paper that has been printed once. When printing the back side of paper that has been printed once, first stretch out the edges and flatten out curls, load them one sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray, and then perform the following operation with the printer driver. 1. Display the [Paper Source] tab. 2. Set [Paper Source] to [Multi-purpose Tray]. 3. Select the [Print on the Other Side] check box. * This is only for paper that has been printed using this printer. Also, you cannot print again on the same side of the paper that was printed before. * If you are using A5 paper, the back side may not be printed correctly. 1. Click [Finishing]. 㻞㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style] NOTE The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided Printing]. You can also change the default setting to [1-sided Printing]. For instructions on changing the default settings, see "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 3. Select the binding edge from [Binding Location]. 㻞㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The output image is displayed in the preview area. 4. Click [OK]. Note The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-052 Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing) NOTE Paper loading orientation On 2-sided printing, the back side of the paper is printed first, therefore the paper should be loaded in the opposite orientation to that for 1-sided printing. If printing on such paper with letterheads, in which faces and directional orientations are specified, see "Paper Loading Orientation" and load the paper in the proper orientation. In the case where the last page is 1-sided printing In cases such as where the last page for the 2-sided printing is 1-sided printing, specifying the following setting allows you to print faster than normal 2-sided printing. 1. Press [ ]( : Settings). 2. Select [Layout] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3. Select [Alternative Method] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4. Select [On] using [ However, when performing 2-sided printing on punched paper or previously printed paper, the orientation or printing surface of the last page may differ from other pages. In this case, set to [Off]. 㻞㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-053 Booklet Printing You can print two pages of a document on each side of each sheet, and then fold the sheets in half to create a booklet. Paper Type Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m²) Heavy paper (100 to 163 g/m²) * Paper Size Standard size paper A4, B5, A5*, Legal, Letter, Executive, Foolscap and 16K Custom size paper: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm, long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm The paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer). IMPORTANT Precautions when performing booklet printing Do not touch the paper during booklet printing until it is completely output. The paper is first partially output after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side. 1. Click [Finishing]. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style]. 㻞㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You can also configure detailed settings such as the opening direction and gutter width for booklet printing in the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box, displayed by clicking [Booklet]. The output image is displayed in the preview area. NOTE For details about the various settings in the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box, view the online help. (See "Viewing the Online Help.") 3. Click [OK]. NOTE You cannot specify the [Finishing] options in the [Finishing] tab when performing Booklet Printing. The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-054 Poster Printing You can enlarge a one-page image and print it over multiple pages. You can then glue the printed pages together to create a poster. NOTE [Poster Printing] can be selected under the following conditions: [1-sided Printing] is selected from [Print Style] in the [Finishing] tab. For details, see "1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing." [Auto] or [Enabled] is selected from [Spooling at Host] in the [Device Settings] tab. For instructions on how to display the [Device Settings] tab, see "Setting the Printer Options." 1. Click [Page Setup]. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Select [Poster [N x N]] (N = 2, 3, or 4) from [Page Layout]. 㻞㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The output image is displayed in the preview area. NOTE If you cannot select the options for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] tab, and then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at Host]. For instructions on how to display the [Device Settings] tab, see "Setting the Printer Options." 3. Click [OK]. NOTE When outputting the pages face-up, the print sequence for the pages (the sheets into which the image is divided) starts from the top left proceeds to the right. When outputting the pages face-down, the sequence starts from the bottom right and proceeds to the left. 2-sided printing is not supported when performing poster printing. Switch to 1-sided printing. "1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing" Poster printing cannot be used together with "Watermark Printing", "Scaling Documents", or "Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet." The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-055 Watermark Printing You can print a watermark (such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "COPY") on a document created using an application. You can also register customized watermarks in addition to the predefined watermarks. 1. Click [Page Setup]. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. { % % The output image is displayed in the preview area. NOTE By clicking [Edit Watermark], you can create and register new watermarks. For details, view the online help (see "Viewing the Online Help"). 㻞㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3. Click [OK]. NOTE You can register up to 50 watermarks, not including the watermarks already provided. The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-056 Setting the Color Mode for Printing You can switch between color and grayscale printing while outputting print data. 1. Click [Quality]. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Select [Black and White], [Color], or [Auto [Color/B&W]] from [Color Mode]. [Auto [Color/B&W]] switches automatically between color printing and black-and-white printing according to the type of data. 3. Click [OK]. 㻞㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-057 Combining and Printing Multiple Files You can combine two or more files created using different applications and edit and print them as a single file. 1. Select [Edit and Preview] from [Output Method]. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items. NOTE For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Online Help.") 㻞㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box of the application. The [Canon PageComposer] dialog box is displayed. 4. For each file you want to combine, repeat Steps 1 to 3. 5. % | = ] (Combine Documents). 6. Z % | \ ; | 7. | % = 㻞㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] (Print). NOTE For details on settings of Canon PageComposer, see the Canon PageComposer online help. The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-058 Selecting a Profile for Printing Combinations of printer driver settings corresponding to a variety of printing purposes are provided with the printer driver as "profiles." This enables you to print documents according to a desired objective by simply selecting a profile from the [Profile] list. You can register the customized profiles other than the various predefined profiles. (See "Registering a Profile for Printing.") 1. Select a profile from the [Profile] list according to your objective. The output image is displayed in the preview area. For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." 2. Click [OK]. NOTE If you cannot select a profile, display the printer properties dialog box from [Control Panel] and click the [Profile] tab, then check [Allow Profile Selection] is selected. For details about how to display the printer properties dialog box, see "Setting the Printer Options." The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-059 Registering a Profile for Printing If you have registered frequently used settings as "profiles," you can apply the settings by simply selecting them from the [Profile] list. 1. } Click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] tabs, and then specify the desired items. For instructions on how to specify the print settings, see "Printing" or "Configuring the Default Print Settings." For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help (see "Viewing the Online Help"). 2. Z Enter additional information in [Comment] if necessary. NOTE To edit or delete a profile, in the printer driver screen, click [Edit] at the right of [Profile]. However, pre-defined profiles cannot be modified. If you cannot select a profile, display the printer properties dialog box from [Control Panel], click the [Profile] tab, and then check whether [Allow Profile Selection] and [Allow Setting Addition] are selected. For details about how to display the printer properties dialog box, see "Setting the Printer Options." The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05A Printing from a Computer (Macintosh) Printing Fundamentals Printing Configuring the Default Page Settings Setting the Printer Options Viewing the Online Help Viewing the Driver Guide Printing Functions Common Functions [Layout] Preferences Pane [Finishing] Preferences Pane [Paper Source] Preferences Pane [Quality] Preferences Pane [Special Features] Preferences Pane Scaling Documents Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing Setting the Color Mode for Printing Using [Presets] for Printing 㻞㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05C Printing Fundamentals This section explains the basic printing method using the printer driver, how to set the printer options, and how to display the online help. Printing Configuring the Default Page Settings Setting the Printer Options Viewing the Online Help Viewing the Driver Guide 㻞㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05E Printing This section explains the basic printing method using the printer driver. NOTE Printing methods may vary depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application. 1. Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of the application. NOTE In Mac OS X 10.5 and later, the [Page Setup] dialog box may not be displayed, depending on the application you are using. If this is the case, skip to step 4. You can specify [Paper Size], [Orientation], and [Scale] in the [Print] dialog box. 2. Select [Page Attributes] from [Settings]. 3. click [OK]. ~ \ 4. Select [Print] from the [File] menu. 㻞㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 \ 5. | \% \ 6. Select the appropriate preferences panes, and configure the print settings. NOTE The default setting for [Print Style] in the [Finishing] preferences pane is [2-sided printing]. For details, see "1-sided and 2-sided Printing." For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Driver Guide.") 㻞㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7. Click [Print]. Printing begins. NOTE 7RVWRSVHQGLQJGDWDWKDWLVZDLWLQJWREHRXWSXWIURP0DF26FOLFNWKHSULQWHULFRQLQWKH'RFNĺFOLFNWKHQDPH RIWKHILOH\RXZDQWWRVWRSSULQWLQJĺFOLFN>'HOHWH@ The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05F Configuring the Default Page Settings The procedure for configuring the page settings prior to printing is as follows. 1. Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of the application. 2. Select [Page Attributes] from [Settings]. 3. ~ \ 4. }= 㻞㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 \ The settings are saved as the default settings. NOTE In Mac OS X 10.5 and later, the [Page Setup] dialog box may not be displayed, depending on the application you are using. The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05H Setting the Printer Options Before printing, you need to set up the printer configuration in order to use the printer options (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) attached to and installed in the machine. When using the printer driver for the first time, or changing the printer options, set up the printer configuration in the driver. If the machine is connected by bidirectional communication, the options are set automatically when you verify the printer information. If the machine is connected by unidirectional communication, you must set the options manually. Verifying the Printer Information Manually Setting the Printer Options 㻞㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SH Verifying the Printer Information You can verify the communication method with the machine and the printer options (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) attached to and installed in machine. If the machine is connected by bidirectional communication, the options are set automatically when you verify the printer information. Mac OS X 10.4/10.5 Mac OS X 10.6 and Later Mac OS X 10.4/10.5 1. ~ 2. + 3. Click [Utility]. 㻞㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4. Click [Printer Information]. 5. ; If [Bidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], the options are automatically set. If [Unidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], you must set the options manually (see "Manually Setting the Printer Options"). Mac OS X 10.6 and Later 㻞㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 1. + ~ 2. 3. ; 4. 㻞㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Click [Printer Information]. 5. ; If [Bidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], the options are automatically set. If [Unidirectional] is displayed for [Communication Method], you must set the options manually (see "Manually Setting the Printer Options"). NOTE If the printer driver name displayed at the top of the [Printer Information] dialog box and the printer name displayed as [Name Retrieved from the Printer] do not correspond correctly, you may not be able to use the printer functions correctly. If the names do not correspond, delete the printer you have added in [System Preferences] and add it again. For details, see the NOTE (see "Printer Driver Installation Guide"). The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SJ Manually Setting the Printer Options If the machine is connected by unidirectional communication, you must set the printer options (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) attached to and installed in the machine manually. Mac OS X 10.4.x Mac OS X 10.5 and later NOTE If the machine is connected by bidirectional communication, the settings for this procedure are disabled. Follow the procedure in "Verifying the Printer Information" to automatically set the options. Mac OS X 10.4.x 1. ~ 2. ; 㻞㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3. Z| } ; NOTE Be sure to select only those options that are actually installed in the printer. NOTE If you close the [Printer Info] dialog box without clicking [Apply Changes] the settings you have made will not be saved. Mac OS X 10.5 and later 1. ~ 2. 㻞㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3. ; = in the printer. NOTE Be sure to select only those options that are actually installed in the printer. 4. Click [OK]. 㻞㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05L Viewing the Online Help You can display the online help by clicking [ ] in the [Print] dialog box. The online help includes additional information about every printing option. If this manual does not provide the information you need, see the online help. 1. Select one of the following preferences panes: [Layout] preferences pane [Finishing] preferences pane [Paper Source] preferences pane [Quality] preferences pane [Special Features] preferences pane The online help is displayed. 㻞㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ]. NOTE For details about how to display the [Print] dialog box, see "Printing." The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05R Viewing the Driver Guide To view the driver guide, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the [Documents] folder in the printer driver install set folder. The location of the [Documents] folder may vary depending on the type and version of the printer driver. 2. Double-click the "index.html" icon. The driver guide is displayed. NOTE The location of the [Documents] folder may vary depending on the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05S Printing Functions This section explains printing functions which can be configured in the printer driver screen. Common Functions [Layout] Preferences Pane [Finishing] Preferences Pane [Paper Source] Preferences Pane [Quality] Preferences Pane [Special Features] Preferences Pane NOTE Available settings may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. ] to the right of [Printer] to display all of the settings in the [Print] If you are using Mac OS X 10.5 or later, click [ dialog box. 㻞㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05U Common Functions Selecting [Print] from the [File] menu of the application displays the [Print] dialog box. 1.Printer Selection Selects the printer to use from those previously added to the [Printing] pane of the [Print & Fax] or [Print & Scan] dialog box in the [System Preferences]. 2.Presets Combinations of frequently used settings can be saved as presets. These saved presets can then be selected for printing (see "Using [Presets] for Printing"). 3.Save As PDF Saves the document as a PDF file. 4.Copies Specifies the number of copies to print. If two or more copies are to be printed, enables them to be output in sets. 6.Pages Specifies the range of pages to be printed. 5.Collated 7. Output Paper Size Enables you to select the paper size actually output from the printer. You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size (see "Scaling Documents"). NOTE The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions. If the above functions cannot be set in the upper part of the [Print] dialog box, display and set them in the [Copies & Pages] preferences pane or the [Page Setup] dialog box. 㻞㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-05W [Layout] Preferences Pane 1.Page Layout 2.Layout Direction Prints multiple pages on one sheet of paper (see "Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet"). 3.Page Border Prints each page with a border. NOTE The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions. 㻞㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Sets the page layout direction. 07YL-05X [Finishing] Preferences Pane 1.1-sided/2-sided Printing Prints on one or both sides of the paper. The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided printing] (see "1-sided and 2-sided Printing"). 2.Binding Location/Gutter NOTE The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions. 㻞㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Sets the orientation and width of the gutter. 07YL-05Y [Paper Source] Preferences Pane 1.Paper Source When you want to print on a specific type of paper, specify the paper source containing the paper, or the paper type. NOTE The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions. 㻞㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-060 [Quality] Preferences Pane 1.Quality Settings Enables you to configure settings relating to print quality. 2.Black and White Printing Prints color documents in black and white (see "Setting the Color Mode for Printing"). NOTE The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions. 㻞㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-061 [Special Features] Preferences Pane 1.Job Processing Enables you to change the output method so that print data is saved to a mail box in the printer memory etc. NOTE The displays may differ between operating systems, printer driver types, and functions. 㻞㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-062 Scaling Documents You can enlarge or reduce the size of the document to be printed. There are two methods for scaling a document: select the paper size to be printed to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually. 1. Select [Page Attributes] from [Settings] in the [Page Setup] dialog box. For details on how to display the [Page Setup] dialog box, see "Configuring the Default Page Settings." 2. Where the paper size specified in the application and that specified in this preferences pane differ, scaling is set automatically. If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, specify the zoom ratio for [Scale]. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Select [Print] from the [File] menu. 5. NOTE Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size. In Mac OS X 10.5.x, the [Page Setup] dialog box may not be displayed, depending on the application you are using. 㻞㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If this is the case, you can specify the page size, page orientation, and scaling in the [Print] dialog box. For details about how to display the [Print] dialog box, see "Printing." The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-063 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet A multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper. 1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application. 2. of paper from [Pages per Sheet]. | % 3. Select the page order from [Layout Direction]. 4. If you want to add a border to each page, select the line type from [Border]. 㻞㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5. Click [Print]. NOTE You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function. The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-064 1-sided and 2-sided Printing You can select whether to print on one side or both sides of each sheet of paper. Paper Type Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m²) Heavy paper (100 to 163 g/m²) * Paper Size Standard size paper A4, B5, A5*, Legal, Letter, Executive, Foolscap and 16K Custom size paper: Short edges 148.0 to 215.9 mm, long edges 210.0 to 355.6 mm The paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation (when the long edges of the paper are parallel to the front side of the printer). Before performing 2-sided printing, see "Attention (1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing)." IMPORTANT Precautions when performing 2-sided printing Do not touch the paper during 2-sided printing until it is completely output. The paper is first partially output after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the back side. Be sure to close the output selection cover before performing 2-sided printing. "Paper Loading and Output" Printing on the back side of paper whose front side is already printed This printer enables you to perform 2-sided printing by manually inserting the back side of the paper * whose front side was previously printed even if the paper cannot be used for 2-sided printing. When printing on the back side of paper whose front side was previously printed, flatten out any curled paper and load one sheet of paper at a time in the multi-purpose tray. * This is only for paper that has been printed using this printer. Also, you cannot print again on the same side of the paper that was printed before. * If you are using A5 paper, the back side may not be printed correctly. 1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application. 2. [Print Style]. ~ $ 㻞㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 $ NOTE The default setting for [Print Style] is [2-sided printing]. You can save the 1-sided printing setting as a preset. For details, see "Using [Presets] for Printing." 3. Select the binding edge from [Binding Location]. The output image is displayed in the preview area. 4. If you want to set the gutter width, click [Gutter]. 㻞㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you do not set the gutter width, skip to step 6. 5. % 6. Click [Print]. NOTE The screen may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RR Setting the Color Mode for Printing You can switch between color and grayscale printing while outputting print data. 1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application. 2. 3. Select [Black and White] or [Color] from [Color Mode]. 4. Click [Print]. NOTE The display may vary according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. 㻞㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-065 Using [Presets] for Printing You can save print settings that you specified in each preferences pane of the [Print] dialog box use as a preset. A preset is a combination of settings that you use frequently, saved as a single setting. If you select a preset when printing a file, the file will be printed with the saved settings. 1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application. 2. print settings you want to save as a preset. | \ Note For information on available printing functions, see "Printing Functions" or the online help. (See "Viewing the Online Help.") 3. Select [Save As] from [Presets]. 4. } The saved preset will be displayed in [Presets] in the [Print] dialog box. 5. 㻞㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 \ | NOTE 7RHGLWDSUHVHWLQWKH>3ULQW@GLDORJER[VHOHFWWKHSUHVHWĺVSHFLI\WKHSULQWHUGULYHUVHWWLQJVĺVHOHFW>6DYH@IURP [Presets]. 7RFKDQJHDSUHVHW VQDPHVHOHFWWKHSUHVHWĺVHOHFW>5HQDPH@IURP>3UHVHWV@ 7RGHOHWHDSUHVHWVHOHFWWKHSUHVHWĺVHOHFW>'HOHWH@IURP>3UHVHWV@ 㻞㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-066 Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods) When the setting values for the same item are different between an application or the printer driver and the menu functions, the setting specified in the application or printer driver is effective. When specifying an item only in the menu functions using the control panel or the Remote UI, the most recently specified setting is effective. Setting priority of direct print The direct print function gives priority to the contents specified using the [Direct Print] menu in the Remote UI or tags in IFD (Image file directory) that the header of TIFF data of image file has over those specified using the control panel or the [Preferences] menu in the Remote UI. Some of the tag function that the header of TIFF data has may not become valid. 㻞㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-067 Functions Which Can Be Specified from the Control Panel This printer allows you to specify the printing functions from the printer driver. However, some printing functions are specified from the control panel or the Remote UI. The following table shows the functions to be specified from the control panel or the Remote UI. For details on the items you can manage using the control panel, see "Setting Items." Function Overview of the Function Multi-purpose tray paper size Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Select Feeder] Menu" Multi-purpose tray priority Specifies whether the printer should detect the paper source in order starting with the multipurpose tray. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Select Feeder] Menu" Drawer N (N = 1, 2) size Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1 or 2). "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Select Feeder] Menu" Standard paper size Since paper size cannot be specified when printing from DOS, UNIX or other operating system, specify it using this setting. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Select Feeder] Menu" Invalid paper tray Specifies what the printer does when paper that is the same size as the paper size of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper source. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Select Feeder] Menu" Auto selection Specifies the paper source to be automatically selected. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Select Feeder] Menu" Default paper type Since paper type cannot be specified when printing from DOS, UNIX or other operating system, specify it using this setting. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Select Feeder] Menu" Adjust start position (Offset X, Offset Y) Adjusts the printing position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction (X). "[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Alternative method If the last page for the 2-sided printing is 1-sided printing, 1-sided printing is applied to the last page. "[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)" Toner volume correction Set the correction method for when the toner volume has exceeded the printer's limit value when printing high density parts. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Reduce quality Specifies whether the printer should continue printing with the image quality of the data being lowered automatically or stop printing displaying an error message when the memory required for the process runs out. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Recovery printing Specifies whether to print the partially printed page when the printer stops printing due to a paper jam or an error occurring. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Check paper size Specifies whether the printer should stop printing, displaying the message <Check paper size.> or continue printing. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" 㻞㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Substitute size The printer switches the paper size if the paper of the size to be used is not loaded in the printer. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Curl correction If printed plain paper curls, specify the setting for this item. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Special image mode If the centers of dense text or lines are not being printed, specify the setting for this item. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Smooth plain paper If plain paper with a smooth surface is used, the density may be low. In such a case, specify the setting for this item. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Paper save Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to no data existing in the page data sent from an application. "[Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options)" 㻞㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-068 Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print) The direct print function is a function that transmits a file from the host terminal to the printer without the printer driver and allows the printer to detect the file and print. Therefore, you do not need to open a file to print. Direct Print from the Remote UI You can specify PDF, TIFF, JPEG, PS, EPS, or XPS format image files from the remote UI and perform Direct Print. For details on operating the Remote UI, see "Remote UI." Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function Printing the PS/EPS File Using the Direct Print Function Printing the TIFF/JPEG File Using the Direct Print Function Printing the XPS File Using the Direct Print Function <Direct Print using Command Prompt> You can Direct Print using the LPR command line. "Direct Printing from Command Prompt" IMPORTANT When printing PDF files using the direct print function The PDF version that is supported is version 1.7. Decoding of encrypted PDF files is supported. The following encryption algorithms can be handled. RC4 128bit AES 128bit AES 256bit When printing image files using the direct print function Note the following when printing image files using the direct print function. JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81. TIFF data is in compliance with the specifications of Adobe TIFF Revision 6.0. The supporting status of encoding methods for JPEG data is as follows. Supported encoding method DCT baseline Unsupported encoding methods DCT extension Reversible compression Hierarchical The supporting status of encoding methods for TIFF data is as follows. Supported encoding methods Uncompressed ITU-T recommendation T.4 One-dimensional coding ITU-T recommendation T.4 Two-dimensional coding ITU-T recommendation T.6 Basic facsimile coding 㻞㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ITU-T recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT only) PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits) LZW Unsupported encoding methods ITU-T recommendation T.82 JBIG ITU-T recommendation T.43 JBIG ITU-T recommendation T.44 MRC NOTE If you cannot print a file using the direct print function or if the printing position is skewed The file may be printed properly by opening it from an application and using the printer driver. 㻞㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-069 Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function 1 Start the Remote UI. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [PDF File] from the [Direct Print] menu. 3 Specify [Select PDF File]. When specifying [File Path] Click [Browse...], select the file, and then click [Open...]. When specifying [URL] Enter the URL of the PDF file that you want to print. If you specify a URL that requires user authentication, enter [User Name] and [Password]. When specifying a URL and printing, the next print job cannot be performed until the PDF is finished downloading or the connection with the Web server is terminated. The protocol for specifying a URL and printing only supports HTTP. 㻞㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Enter the password in [Document Password] when a password is specified for opening the document or when it is necessary to enter a password to print. If printing is attempted without entering a password, <Cannot decode PDF data.> is displayed, and printing is cancelled. When printing PDF files with settings that do not allow them to be printed or when printing in high resolution PDF files with settings that only allow them to be printed in low resolution, enter the master password. When you print a PDF file linked to a policy server, enter [Policy Server User Name] and [Policy Server Password]. 5 Specify the setting for [Specify Print Range]. 㻞㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [All] Select if you want to print all the pages. [Pages] Select [Pages], and then enter the starting page number and ending page number if you want to specify the print range. 6 Specify the settings for [Quality Settings] as the following, as needed. [Gradation] Specify the gradation process for printing the data. It is effective to set [High 1] when printing photographs at standard quality, and to set [High 2] when printing at a higher quality. 7 Specify the settings for [Halftones] as the following, as needed. 㻞㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Halftones] Specify the halftone display method when printing. When [Error Diffusion] is selected, it is possible to print at a higher resolution than [Resolution], but texture stability is slightly inferior. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines and data such as CAD data that is printed with sharp edges. When [Error Diffusion] is not selected, it is possible to select the halftone display method from [Resolution] or [Gradation] for [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. [Resolution]: You can print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Gradation]: You can perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. 8 Specify the settings for [Advanced Smoothing] as the following, as needed. Specify whether to use the smoothing process to smooth the edges of graphics (illustrations created in other applications) or text. [Smooth 2] is better than [Smooth 1] for performing a 㻞㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Advanced Smoothing] smoothing process that provides more smoothing. First, set it to [Smooth 1], and if the data is still not smooth, set it to [Smooth 2]. In addition, by selecting [Graphics] and [Text], you can select what to smooth. This item specifies the smoothing process for graphics data and text data. Image data cannot be specified. [Graphics] and [Text] settings on the printer console are suitable only when [Advanced Smoothing] on the printer driver is set to [Printer Default]. The effects of advanced smoothing differ depending on the pattern of the text or the graphics. 9 Specify the settings for [Color Settings] as the following, as needed. Specify color printing or B&W printing. [Color Mode] [Auto (Color/Black and White)]: It automatically switches between color and black and white printing depending on the type of document. [Black and White]: Even color documents are printed in black (Bk) only. [Color]: It prints in 4 colors: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (Bk). You can select an RGB profile that is suitable for the features of the monitor that you are using. Set it when printing images drawn with an RGB color model or documents that contain images. [RGB Source Profile] [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)]: It can be set to general Windows computer monitor profiles defined by industry standards. When using monitors that support sRGB, you can print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5 Monitor]: [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8 Monitor]: [Canon You can adjust the gamma correction level of RGB data. The higher the value, the darker the printing. 㻞㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 HDTV gamma 2.4 Monitor]: [None]: It performs color separation from RGB data to CMYK without applying an RGB profile. You can set a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-dependent CMYK color model in accordance with the simulation target selected by the CMYK simulation profile. [JapanColor(Canon)]: Use JapanColor profile. Use it for printing in colors that are close to Japanese printing standards. [CMYK Simulation Profile] [U.S. Web Coated v1.00 (Canon)]: Use U.S. Web Coated profile. Use it for printing in colors that are close to U.S. printing standards. [Euro Standard v1.00 Use the Euro Standard profile. Use it for printing in colors that are (Canon)]: close to European printing standards. [None]: It prints CMYK data using a device-dependent CMYK color model, without applying a CMYK simulation profile. You can define suitable profiles for data that you are trying to print. [Normal]: It matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor, and prints. [Photo]: [Output Profile] It matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints. [TR It matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor and prints, Normal]: while also controlling the bleeding of toner into text and fine lines. [TR Photo]: It matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints, while also controlling the bleeding of toner into text and fine lines. [Use RGB Pure Black Process] When device-dependent RGB data is converted to device-dependent CMYK using [RGB Source Profile] in this machine, set what type of processing to use for black and gray data that becomes R=G=B. If uneven gradation or staining is visible when printing black or gray data, do not set this item. Set [Output Profile] to [Normal]. If this item is not set, a combination of settings enable gray data (C=M=Y=0 color) to be printed using black (Bk) toner. An example is shown below. If [Use Pure Black Text] is selected When [RGB Source Profile] is set as [None] When [Output Profile] is set as [TR Normal] or [TR Photo] When the printer driver's [Use 100% GCR Profile] is enabled If [RGB Source Profile] is set as [None], the setting for this item becomes invalid. [Use CMYK Pure Black Process] When device-dependent CMYK is processed using [CMYK Simulation Profile] in this machine, set what type of printing to use for grey data (C=M=Y=0). Even if this item is not selected, a combination of settings enable grey data (C=M=Y=0 color) to be printed using black (Bk) toner, as shown below. An example is shown below. If [Use Pure Black Text] is selected If [CMYK Simulation Profile] is set as [None] When [Output Profile] is set as [TR Normal] or [TR Photo] When the printer driver's [Use 100% GCR Profile] is enabled If [CMYK Simulation Profile] is set as [None], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Specify the printing method when [RGB Source Profile] is applied. You can select color rendering style on the machine, as shown below. [Matching Method] [Perceptual]: It provides colors suitable for printing photos and bitmap images. [Saturation]: It provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. [Colorimetric]: It reproduces as accurately as possible the RGB color values that are 㻞㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 within the machine's color gamut. [Use Grayscale Profile] You can use this machine's grayscale profile to convert device-dependent grey data to CMYK data. However, it may be reproduced using black (Bk) toner only, by using the [Output Profile] or [Use Pure Black Text] settings. [Use Pure Black Text] You can print data for black colors created by applications using only 100% black toner. Since monochrome (black) toner only is used for black text, there is never the problem of color toner slurring around the edges of the characters. [Use Black Overprinting] If the check box for this option is selected, the printer prints black text over a color background. If this option is used with [Use Pure Black Text], the printer prints all the background first, and then prints the text over the color background using only the black (Bk) toner. This alleviates the phenomenon in which the outlines of the printed black text are rimmed with white. [Use Composite Overprinting] You can overprint device-dependent CMYK data as composite output. Since all the colors used in the data are overprinted to a single palette, you can check the result without performing color separation. [Brightness] You can adjust the brightness of the whole image. You can use this item to set from 85% to115% at intervals of 5%. The smaller the value the brighter it becomes. The larger the value the darker it becomes. Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing. This setting is for converting color data to B&W data. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If [Color Mode] is set as [Auto (Color/Black and White)], the setting for this item becomes invalid. [Grayscale Conversion] [sRGB]: It calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion method. [NTSC]: It calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion method. [Uniform RGB]: It takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value. 10 Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed. 㻞㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed. Specify the size of paper to print. If data is input that is outside the engine's maximum and minimum paper size range when the paper size is automatic, it is printed on the paper size that is set with [Standard Paper Size]. [Paper Size] [Auto]: It selects the most suitable paper source for the PDF file page size, and prints. Other than [Auto]: It prints so that the long side of the page size of the PDF file and the long side of the selected paper size go in the same direction. [Paper Type] Specify the type of paper to print. [Manual Feed] You can fix the paper source in the multi-purpose tray. [Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size] If the check box is selected, it fixes the aspect ratio and scales it to fit with the effective print area of the paper size that is set and prints. However if [Paper Size] is set as [Auto], this item cannot be set. [Enlarge Print Area] Specify whether to expand the printable area and print. Depending on the document to be printed, part of the edges of the paper may not be printed. [Print 2-Sided] Specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing. [Binding Location] Set the binding position on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of the paper (short-edged binding). If binding is set from the printer side, the position of the "gutter" is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper. [N on 1] You can print multiple pages of the PDF file data arranged on one page. When printing multiple pages side by side, set [Paper Size] to a setting other than [Auto]. [Page Order] The [N on 1] setting enables you to set the order the pages will be arranged on the paper when printing multiple pages on one page. (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) It collates and prints in page or section units. [Finishing] [Off]: Print the number of copies specified for every page. 㻞㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Collate]: The specified number of copies are collated. Specify whether to print the notes of PDF files. [Comment Print] [Off]: The notes are not printed. [Auto]: It only prints the notes that are specified within the PDF file as printable. [Store in Box] (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) When storing it in a box, check the [Store in Box] check box before selecting the box where you want to store it. 11 Click [Start Printing]. Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it. ĺ When the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed. Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent. 㻞㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻞㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06A Printing the PS/EPS File Using the Direct Print Function 1 Start the Remote UI. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [PS File] from the [Direct Print] menu. 3 Specify [Select PS/EPS File]. Click [Browse...], select the file, and click [Open...]. 㻞㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Specify the setting for [Color Settings]. Specify color printing or B&W printing. [Color Mode] [Auto (Color/Black and White)]: It automatically switches between color and black and white printing depending on the type of document. [Black and White]: Even color documents are printed in black (Bk) only. 5 Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed. 㻞㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed. [Print 2-Sided] Specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing. [Binding Location] Select the binding location from [Short Edge] and [Long Edge]. [Store in Box] (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) When storing it in a box, check the [Store in Box] check box before selecting the box where you want to store it. 6 Click [Start Printing]. Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it. ĺ When the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed. 㻞㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent. 㻞㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06C Printing the TIFF/JPEG File Using the Direct Print Function 1 Start the Remote UI. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [Image File] from the [Direct Print] menu. 3 Specify [Select Image File]. Click [Browse...], select the file, and then click [Open...]. 㻞㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Specify the setting for [Specify Print Range]. [All] Select if you want to print all the pages. [Pages] Select [Pages], and then enter the starting page number and ending page number if you want to specify the print range. 5 Specify the setting for [Quality Settings]. 㻞㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Gradation] Specify the gradation process for printing the data. It is effective to set [High 1] when printing photographs at standard quality, and to set [High 2] when printing at a higher quality. Specify the halftone display method when printing. [Resolution]: You can print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Halftones] [Gradation]: You can perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. [Error Diffusion]: It is possible to print at a higher resolution than [Resolution], but texture stability is slightly inferior. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines and data such as CAD data that is printed with sharp edges. 6 Specify the setting for [Color Settings]. 㻞㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Specify color printing or B&W printing. [Color Mode] [Auto (Color/Black and White)]: It automatically switches between color and black and white printing depending on the type of document. [Black and White]: Even color documents are printed in black (Bk) only. You can select an RGB profile that is suitable for the features of the monitor that you are using. Set it when printing images drawn with an RGB color model or documents that contain images. In order to enable this setting, set [CMS (Matching)/Gamma] as [CMS]. [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)]: It can be set to general Windows computer monitor industry standard image quality. When using monitors that support sRGB, it can match the colors displayed on the monitor and the colors printed in the printer and print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5 Monitor]:[Canon HDTV gamma 1.8 Monitor]:[Canon HDTV gamma 2.4 Monitor]: It adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the data are not lost. Set it to adjust the brightness, such as when the print result is brighter than the colors displayed on the monitor. The larger the gamma value, the darker it is printed. [RGB Source Profile] You can set a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-dependent CMYK color model in accordance with the simulation target selected by the CMYK simulation profile. [CMYK Simulation Profile] [JapanColor(Canon)]: Use JapanColor profile. Use it for printing in colors that are close to Japanese printing standards. [U.S. Web Coated v1.00 (Canon)]: Use U.S. Web Coated profile. Use it for printing in colors that are close to U.S. printing standards. [Euro Standard v1.00 Use the Euro Standard profile. Use it for printing in colors that are (Canon)]: close to European printing standards. You can define suitable profiles for data that you are trying to print. [Output Profile] [Normal]: It matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor, and prints. [Photo]: It matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints. Specify the printing method when [RGB Source Profile] is applied. You can select color rendering style on the machine, as shown below. [Matching Method] [Perceptual]: It provides colors suitable for printing photos and bitmap images. [Saturation]: It provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. [Colorimetric]: It reproduces as accurately as possible the RGB color values that are within the machine's color gamut. [Photo Optimizer PRO] (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) Correct the contrast, color balance, saturation and gradation of photos and illustrations to your preference. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If the [Color Mode] setting is set as [Black and White], the setting for this item becomes invalid. (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) You can set the amount of correction using the [Red-eye Correction Level]. [Red-Eye [Weak]: The amount of correction can be set a little smaller. 㻞㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Correction] [Face Brightener] [Standard]: The amount of correction can be set in the middle between weaker and stronger. [Strong]: The amount of correction can be set a little larger. (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) It detects and corrects red eye caused by flash or strobe light when shooting. Also, if only half of a face shows up in a photo, it can be corrected. It can only correct images which are at least 100 pixels both horizontally and vertically. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black and White], the setting for this item becomes invalid. The face brightening effect may differ depending on the data. You can set the amount of [Face Brightener Level] correction. [Weak]: The amount of correction can be set a little smaller. [Standard]: The amount of correction can be set in the middle between weaker and stronger. [Strong]: The amount of correction can be set a little larger. Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing. This setting is for converting color data to B&W data. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If [Color Mode] is set as [Auto (Color/Black and White)], the setting for this item becomes invalid. [Grayscale Conversion] [sRGB]: It calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion method. [NTSC]: It calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion method. [Uniform RGB]: It takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value. 7 Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed. 㻟㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed. [Paper Size] Specify the size of paper to print. [Paper Type] Specify the type of paper to print. [Image Orientation] Select the orientation of the images from [Auto], [Vertical] or [Horizontal]. [Print Position] Set the location of the images from [Auto], [Center] or [Top Left]. When [Auto] is selected, if the print location is specified in the TIFF format data, it will print at the specified location. If the print location is not set, it will print centered. Since print location is not specified in JPEG format, if [Auto] is selected, it will print centered. [Zoom] Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the printing. When it is set to [Auto], it automatically scales them to match with the effective print area of the paper and prints. [Enlarge Print Area] Specify whether to expand the printable area and print. Depending on the document to be printed, part of the edges of the paper may not be printed. [Print 2-Sided] When it is set, it will print 2-sided. [Binding Location] Set the binding position on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of the paper (short-edged binding). If binding is set from the printer side, the position of the "gutter" is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper. You can select a job processing method for when it detects an Imaging function error. When it is set to [Print], the error description list is printed at the same time. [Show Warnings] [Print] The error description is printed on the paper and the job is terminated. [Panel] The error message is displayed on the printer's display, and printing stops. [Off] Even if an error occurs and nothing is displayed, the job is terminated. 8 Click [Start Printing]. Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it. 㻟㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ When the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed. Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent. 㻟㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06E Printing the XPS File Using the Direct Print Function 1 Start the Remote UI. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [XPS Files] from the [Direct Print] menu. 3 Specify [Specify XPS File]. (1) Click [Browse...], select the file, and then click [Open...]. (2) Clear the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box. If the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box is selected, some items cannot be set via the Remote UI. To use all the print settings made via the Remote UI, clear the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box. 㻟㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Specify the setting for [Specify Print Range]. [All] Select if you want to print all the pages. [Pages] Select [Pages], and then enter the starting page number and ending page number if you want to specify the print range. 5 Specify the settings for [Quality Settings] as the following, as needed. 㻟㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Gradation] Specify the gradation process for printing the data. It is effective to set [High 1] when printing photographs at standard quality, and to set [High 2] when printing at a higher quality. 6 Specify the settings for [Halftones] as the following, as needed. [Halftones] Specify the halftone display method when printing. When [Error Diffusion] is selected, it is possible to print at a higher resolution than [Resolution], but texture stability is slightly inferior. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines and data such as CAD data that is printed with sharp edges. When [Error Diffusion] is not selected, it is possible to select the halftone display method from [Resolution] or [Gradation] for [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. [Resolution] You can print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Gradation] You can perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. 㻟㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7 Specify the settings for [Advanced Smoothing] as the following, as needed. [Advanced Smoothing] Specify whether to use the smoothing process to smooth the edges of graphics (illustrations created in other applications) or text. [Smooth 2] is better than [Smooth 1] for performing a smoothing process that provides more smoothing. First, set it to [Smooth 1], and if the data is still not smooth, set it to [Smooth 2]. In addition, by selecting [Graphics] and [Text], you can select what to smooth. This item specifies the smoothing process for graphics data and text data. Image data cannot be specified. [Graphics] and [Text] settings on the printer console are suitable only when [Advanced Smoothing] on the printer driver is set to [Printer Default]. The effects of advanced smoothing differ depending on the pattern of the text or the graphics. 8 Specify the settings for [Color Settings] as the following, as needed. 㻟㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Specify color printing or B&W printing. [Color Mode] [Auto (Color/Black and White)]: It automatically switches between color and black and white printing depending on the type of document. [Black and White]: Even color documents are printed in black (Bk) only. [Color]: It prints in 4 colors: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (Bk). It sets which color matching method to apply for each piece of text, diagram or image that make up a print job, or for every color space such as RGB or CMYK. You can select whether to use methods such as ICC profile and gamma for processing. The items that can be set depend on the PDL type. 㻟㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Matching Mode] [ICC Profile]: You can select a matching method, which is an adjustment method for bridging the difference in input and output color space width between the input profile that depends on the color space of the input data, and the output file that defines the device-dependent color space. [Gamma]: You can select a gamma correction value selection for adjusting the brightness in relation to the median color (color value with the maximum and minimum values taken away) of the entered data. You can select an RGB profile that is suitable for the features of the monitor that you are using. Set it when printing images drawn with an RGB color model or documents that contain images. You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. [RGB Source Profile] [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)]: It can be set to general Windows computer monitor profiles defined by industry standards. When using monitors that support RGB, you can print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5 Monitor]: [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8 Monitor]: [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4 Monitor]: You can adjust the gamma correction level of RGB data. The higher the value, the darker the printing. You can define suitable profiles for data that you are trying to print. You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. [Output Profile] [Normal]: It matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor, and prints. [Photo]: It matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints. Specify the printing method when [RGB Source Profile] is applied. You can select color rendering style on the machine, as shown below. You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. [Matching Method] [Perceptual]: It provides colors suitable for printing photos and bitmap images. [Saturation]: It provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. [Colorimetric]: It reproduces as accurately as possible the RGB color values that are within the machine's color gamut. [Gamma Correction] It adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the document are not lost. Set it when the print result is brighter than the original (such as a photograph prior to being scanned or a graphic created on a monitor) or when you want to change the brightness of the output. The larger the setting value, the darker it is printed. [1.4] shows no correction You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. [Photo Optimizer PRO] Correct the contrast, color balance, saturation and gradation of photos and illustrations to your preference. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black and White], the setting for this item becomes invalid. It detects and corrects red eye caused by flash or strobe light when shooting. Also, if only half of a face shows up in a photo, it can be corrected. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black and White], the setting for this item becomes invalid. 㻟㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You can set the amount of [Red-eye Correction Level] correction. [Red-Eye Correction] [Face Brightener] [Weak] The amount of correction can be set a little smaller. [Standard] The amount of correction can be set in the middle between weaker and stronger. [Strong] The amount of correction can be set a little larger. It can correct photographs in which people's faces are dark due to insufficient backlighting or underexposure so that the entire image is brightened and the people's faces are the preferred brightness. It can only correct images which are at least 100 pixels both horizontally and vertically. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black and White], the setting for this item becomes invalid. The face brightening effect may differ depending on the data. You can set the amount of [Face Brightener Level] correction. [Weak] The amount of correction can be set a little smaller. [Standard] The amount of correction can be set in the middle between weaker and stronger. [Strong] The amount of correction can be set a little larger. Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing. You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. This setting is for converting color data to B&W data. The setting for this item becomes invalid for B&W data. If [Color Mode] is set as [Auto (Color/Black and White)] and [Color], the setting for this item becomes invalid. [Grayscale Conversion] [Gray Compensation] [sRGB]: It calculates the grayscale value using the RGB standard color conversion method. [NTSC]: It calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion method. [Uniform RGB]: It takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value. Specify whether to print grey data in Bk only. You can set it for these data types: [Text], [Graphics] or [Image]. When it is set to [On], black and grey data is printed in Bk only. You can prevent color registration errors. When it is set to [Off], CMYK 4 color will also be used for black and gray data, and it will be printed in black and gray. The reproduction of dark color gradation will be better than when the check box is selected. 9 Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as needed. 㻟㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Copies] Specify the number of copies to be printed. Specify the size of paper to print. If data is input that is outside the engine's maximum and minimum paper size range when the paper size is automatic, it is printed on the paper size that is set with [Standard Paper Size]. [Paper Size] [Auto]: It selects the most suitable paper source for the XPS file page size, and prints. Other than [Auto]: It prints so that the long side of the XPS file and the long side of the selected paper size go in the same direction. [Paper Type] Specify the type of paper to print. [Manual Feed] You can fix the paper source in the multi-purpose tray. [Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size] If the check box is selected, it fixes the aspect ratio and scales it to fit with the effective print area of the paper size that is set and prints. However if [Paper Size] is set as [Auto], this item cannot be set. [Enlarge Print Area] Specify whether to expand the printable area and print. Depending on the document to be printed, part of the edges of the paper may not be printed. [Print 2-Sided] Specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing. [Binding Location] Set the binding position on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of the paper (short-edged binding). If binding is set from the printer side, the position of the "gutter" is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper. [N on 1] You can print multiple pages of the XPS file data arranged on one page. When printing multiple pages side by side, set [Paper Size] to a setting other than [Auto]. [Page Order] The [N on 1] setting enables you to set the order the pages will be arranged on the paper when printing multiple pages on one page. (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) It collates and prints in page or section units. [Finishing] [Off]: Print the number of copies specified for every page. [Collate]: The specified number of copies are collated. 㻟㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Store in Box] (It is only displayed when an SD card is used.) When storing it in a box, check the [Store in Box] check box before selecting the box where you want to store it. 10 Click [Start Printing]. Do not keep clicking [Start Printing] while the file is transferring. Sometimes it takes time to transfer a file, but if you keep clicking during the transfer, a file failure may occur and it may be impossible to transfer it. ĺ When the print job has finished sending, the display switches and the following message is displayed. Press [To Job List] to check the print job that was sent. 㻟㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06F Direct Printing from Command Prompt The command of the following format is effective. lpr (a space) -S (a space) <the IP address of the printer> (a space) -P (a space) <the printer name> (a space) <the file name> The printer name Enter the printer name. You can check the printer name in [Device Name] on the Remote UI portal page. The file name Enter the name of the file to be printed. Input Example <If the IP address of the printer is "192.168.0.215", if the printer name is "LBP-Printer", and if the file name is "sample.jpg"> lpr -S 192.168.0.215 -P LBP-Printer sample.jpg NOTE The settings which can be used for Direct Print The settings specified using the printer's control panel become effective. You can use the following [Setup] menus. "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) " "[Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)" 㻟㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06H Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) You can print data in USB memory device directly from the machine. Because it is possible to print without a computer, you can easily print data stored in a USB memory device at a location where the machine is installed. This makes immediate handling possible when printed documents are needed quickly. Printing Directly from USB Memory Device You can print files directly from a USB memory device that is connected to the printer. Print Setting Menu List You can change the settings when printing. Changing the Default Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria You can change the default print settings and default file display sorting criteria. Settings that are often used can be conveniently set in advance as defaults. Remove the USB Memory Device Remove the USB memory device after printing has stopped. Use the correct method to remove the USB memory device. IMPORTANT In order to use USB memory devices, the following settings are necessary. Set [MEAP Driver] to [Off]. (1) Press ( (2) (3) (4) (5) Select Select Select Select )[ : Settings], select [Interface] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. [Interface Selection] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. [USB Storage Device] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. [MEAP Driver] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. [Off] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Enable [USB Direct Print] under [USB Direct Print Settings] in the Remote UI. "Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print" About USB memory support The file format FAT32 is supported only. USB memory drives cannot be read by this printer if: these drives are partitioned these drives contain encrypted data 㻟㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06J Printing Directly from USB Memory Device 1 Insert the USB memory device in the USB memory slot on the front side of the printer. 2 Press [ ]( : Application). The "USB Direct Print Mode Screen" is displayed. When department ID management is set, the screen is displayed when the departmental ID and PIN are entered. After entering the department ID and PIN, select [<Log In>], and then press [OK]. NOTE In order to automatically display the USB direct print mode screen When the [Automatically Display USB Direct Print Screen] setting is checked on [USB Direct Print] in the [Edit Management Settings] on the Remote UI, the "USB Direct Print Mode Screen" is displayed automatically when a USB memory device is inserted. "Starting the Remote UI" 3 Select [Select File(s)] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻟㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Changing the order of the files displayed in Step 5 (1) Select [Sort Files] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. (2) When the message is displayed, press [OK]. (3) Select the sorting criteria with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select the type of file to print with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select the file to print with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. [ ] will be attached to the file name. If a file with [ ] attached is selected, and [OK] is pressed again, the selection is removed. If a folder is selected, and [OK] is pressed, the list of files inside the folder is displayed. If [<Clear All>] is selected, all the file selections are removed. Up to 10 files in the same folder can be selected. If the folder hierarchy is moved, all of the file selections are removed. 6 Select [<Apply>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻟㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When printing using an XPS file print ticket (1) Select [<Use Print Ticket>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. (2) Select [<Start Printing>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. It is printed using the print settings specified inside the file. 7 Select [<Start Printing>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. To confirm/ change the print settings, select the setting to be confirmed/changed with [ [OK]. For details on print settings, see "Print Setting Menu List." The selected file begins printing. Remove the USB memory device after printing has finished. "Remove the USB Memory Device" 㻟㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] and [ ], and then press 07YL-06K Print Setting Menu List You can set the following items when printing. NOTE Viewing the Tables The default value for each setting is displayed in bold text. To change the default values, see "Changing the Default Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria." The items and setting values marked with "*" may or may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories or the content of the setting. Items that can be set for all file formats Setting Item Setting Value Setting 1 to 9999 Specify the number of copies to be printed. Only the number of copies specified by the setting value are printed. [Color Mode] [Auto (Color/Black)] / [Black] Specify color printing or B&W printing. When it is set to [Auto (Color/Black)], it automatically switches between color and black and white printing depending on the file's color settings. When it is set to [Black], it prints color files in black (Bk) only. [2-Sided Printing] [Off] / [On] Specify whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper. When it is set to [On], it prints on both sides of the paper. [Long Edge] / [Short Edge] It sets the binding location on the long side of the paper (long-edged binding) or the short side of the paper (short-edged binding). During 2sided printing, the binding location is automatically adjusted on both the front and back sides. When it is set to [Long Edge], the binding location is on the long side of the paper. When it is set to [Short Edge], the binding location is on the short side of the paper. [No. of Copies] [Binding Location] [Enlarge Print Area] [Off] / [On] Specify whether to expand the printable area and print. When it is set to [On], the printable area is expanded and printed. When it is set to [Off], the effective print area becomes that area except for 5 mm at the top, bottom right and left edges. When it is set to [On], images on the edges of the paper may be partially cut off. Items that can be set for PDF/XPS formats Setting Item [Print Range] Setting Value [Designation Method] : [All] / [Specified Pages] [Page Range] : [First Page] / [Last Page] Setting Specify the print range. Only the range specified by the setting value is printed. When [All] is selected, all the pages are printed. When [Specified Pages] is selected, and the page range is entered, only the specified page range is printed. If the page range is selected, select [<Apply>], and then press [OK]. [Page Range] is only displayed when [Specified Pages] is selected in [Designation Method]. Specify the size of paper to output. 㻟㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Select Paper] When it is set to [Auto], it selects the most suitable paper source for the page size of the file to be printed, and prints. When it is not set to [Auto], it prints so that the long side of the page size of the file to be printed and the long side of the selected paper size go in the same direction. [Auto] / [MultiPurpose Tray] / [Drawer 1] / [Drawer 2]* You cannot select the paper source for which a custom paper size is specified. [Halftones] [Error Diffusion] : [Off] / [On] [Resolution/Grad.] : [Text] / [Graphics] / [Image] [Text] : [Resolution] / [Gradation] [Graphics] : [Resolution] / [Gradation] [Image] : [Resolution] / [Gradation] Specify the halftone display method when printing. The [Error Diffusion] is that it is possible to print at a higher resolution than [Resolution/Gradation], but texture stability is slightly inferior. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines and data such as CAD data that is printed with sharp edges. You can set [Resolution/Grad.] as [Text], [Graphics] or [Image] for these data types. [Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Gradation] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. [Resolution/Gradation] is only displayed when [Off] is selected in [Error Diffusion]. When it is set to [On], it automatically scales them to match with the effective print area of the output paper and prints. [Match Paper Size] [Off] / [On] [N on 1] [Off] / [2 on 1] / [4 on 1] / [6 on 1] / [8 on 1] / [9 on 1] / [16 on 1] [Finishing] [Off] / [Collate] When the [Select Paper] setting on the printer is set to [Auto], this setting is not available. You can print multiple pages of the file data to be printed arranged on one page. When the [Paper Size] setting on the printer is set to [Auto], this setting is not available. Specify the finishing options. When it is set to [Off], the number of copies set for each page is printed. When it is set to [Collate], the specified number of copies are collated. Items that can be set for JPEG/TIFF formats Setting Item Setting Value [Print Range (TIFF)] [Designation Method] : [All] / [Specified Pages] [Page Range] : [First Page] / [Last Page] [MultiPurpose Setting Specify the print range. Only the range specified by the setting value is printed. When [All] is selected, all the pages are printed. When [Specified Pages] is selected, and the page range is entered, only the specified page range is printed. If the page range is selected, select [<Apply>], and then press [OK]. [Page Range] is only displayed when [Specified Pages] is selected in [Designation Method]. Specify the paper size for printing. 㻟㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Select Paper] Tray] / [Drawer 1] / [Drawer 2]* Print with the paper size specified for the selected paper source. You cannot select the paper source for which a custom paper size is specified. [Error Diffusion] / [Resolution] / [Gradation] Specify the halftone display method when printing. The [Error Diffusion] is that it is possible to print at a higher resolution than [Resolution] or [Gradation], but texture stability is slightly inferior. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines and data such as CAD data that is printed with sharp edges. [Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Gradation] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. [Zoom] [Off] / [Auto] Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the printing. When it is set to [Auto], it automatically scales them to match with the effective print area of the output paper and prints. [Image Orientation] [Auto] / [Vertical] / [Horizontal] Specify whether to print the image vertically or horizontally. [Print Position] [Auto] / [Center] / [Top Left] Specify the location where the image will be printed. [Halftones] 㻟㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06L Changing the Default Print Settings and File Sorting Criteria 1 Press [ ]( : Application). The "USB Direct Print Mode Screen" is displayed. When department ID management is set, the screen is displayed when the departmental ID and PIN are entered. After entering the department ID and PIN, select [<Log In>], and then press [OK]. 2 Select [USB Print Settings] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select items for which to set default values using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. Set default print settings (1) Select [PDF/XPS Default Set.] or [JPEG/TIFF Def. Set.] using [ (2) Set the default value of each item. For details on the settings, see "Print Setting Menu List." ] or [ Setting default values for file display sorting criteria (1) Select [File Sort Def. Set.] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. (2) Select the default sorting criteria using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻟㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ], and then press [OK]. 07YL-06R Remove the USB Memory Device IMPORTANT When removing USB memory devices Always use the following procedure when removing USB memory devices. Using other methods to remove USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the printer. 1 Display the "USB Direct Print Mode Screen." When other screens are displayed, press [ ]( : Back) or [ ]( : Application) until the "USB Direct Print Mode Screen" is displayed. 2 Select [<Remove USB Memory>] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [Yes] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 When the following message is displayed, remove the USB memory device from the printer. 㻟㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If an error message is displayed, wait a few seconds before starting the removal procedure again from the beginning. 㻟㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06S Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print) E-mail print is a function in which this printer receives e-mails sent from the host terminal and prints the text as well as the attached files. Therefore, you do not need to use a printer driver or open the attached files to print. Available Protocol POP3 Requirements The UIDL command of the POP3 protocol needs to be supported. You can access the mail server but cannot receive e-mails in the following circumstances. For details on the mail server, ask your network administrator. The UIDL command is not supported The response to the UIDL command is negative ("-ERR") Select the [POP3 RX] check box.* SMTP Set the IP address of the printer. "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" Select the [SMTP RX] check box.* For other settings and the setting procedures, see "How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print" and specify them as needed. How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print You can set e-mail print settings from the printer control panel, Remote UI or FTP client. Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually You can receive and print e-mails manually. There are two types of manual printing methods: printing from the printer control panel and printing from the Remote UI. Printing the E-mail Receive Log List You can print the e-mail sending/receiving history. You can print the subject and sender in sending/receiving history. There are two ways of printing e-mail sending/receiving history: from the printer control panel and from the Remote UI. When E-mail Print Fails If for some reason an email does not print normally, an error message is displayed on the printer display or Remote UI and network status print, or an error code is displayed in the e-mail sending/receiving history. Take action according to the displayed error messages and error codes. IMPORTANT Restrictions for E-mail Print Attached files are printable only when they are in TIFF or JPEG format. The number of attached files has to be 3 or less for each mail. If the number exceeds 3, the first 3 files are printed. However, the files of the 4th or later are not printed. The body of an HTML e-mail is printed as a plain text message. E-mail text is printed with its mail header information. If the number of characters in one text line (without a line break) in an e-mail exceeds 1000, an automatic linefeed is performed. Because of this, the text in the next line may not be printed properly. 㻟㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Restrictions for E-mail Print (Only when the optional SD card is installed) If text data of an e-mail exceeds 25 MB, the text is not printed. If header data of an e-mail exceeds 20 KB, the excess part of 20 KB or more header data is not printed. Attached files are printable only when the size of each file is 100 MB or less. Attached files of more than 100 MB are not printed. If the size of an e-mail exceeds 1.5 GB, the e-mail text is not printed. Emails cannot be printed if there is no free space on the SD card. JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81. On e-mail print with this printer, JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81. TIFF data is in compliance with the specifications of Adobe TIFF Revision6.0 and IETF RFC2301 (File Format for Internet FAX). Internet FAX Simple Mode is supported. The e-mail print function of this printer supports Internet FAX Simple Mode. About the supporting status of encoding methods for JPEG data For this printer, the supporting status is as follows. Supported encoding method DCT baseline Unsupported encoding methods DCT extension Reversible compression Hierarchical About the supporting status of encoding methods for TIFF data For this printer, the supporting status is as follows. Supported encoding methods Uncompressed ITU-T recommendation T.4 One-dimensional coding ITU-T recommendation T.4 Two-dimensional coding ITU-T recommendation T.6 Basic facsimile coding ITU-T recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT only) PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits) LZW Unsupported encoding methods ITU-T recommendation T.82 JBIG ITU-T recommendation T.43 JBIG ITU-T recommendation T.44 MRC About the supporting status for encoding types For this printer, the supporting status is as follows. 7bit 8bit binary quoted-printable base64 uuencode x-uuencode About the supporting status for character sets For this printer, the supporting status is as follows. (If no character sets are specified, the data is processed with "usascii.") us-ascii iso-8859-1 iso-8859-15 㻟㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06U How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print Before performing the setup, see "Attention (How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print)." You can set e-mail print settings from the printer control panel, Remote UI or FTP client. This section describes the procedures for registering or changing the settings using a Web browser (Remote UI). 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Network] under [Preferences] in the [Settings/Registration] menu. 3 Click [E-Mail Print Settings]. 㻟㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Edit...] on the right side of [E-Mail Print Settings]. 5 Specify the settings for the e-mail print function. 㻟㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you want to use the POP3 protocol [POP3 Server Name] Specifies the name or sets the IP address of the server which receives e-mails. [POP3 User Name] Specifies the name of the user which receives e-mails. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. [Set/Change Password] Specifies the password for the name of the user which receives e-mails. [Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. [Confirm] For confirmation, enter the same [Password] again. [POP3 RX Interval] Set the interval for automatically connecting to the server that receives e-mail in minute units. Receive e-mail at specified intervals and print it automatically. You can set from [0] (minutes) to [90] (minutes). When it is set to [0], it does not automatically receive e-mail from the server. When it is set to [0] and when you want to connect to the server before it automatically connects to the server that receives e-mail, you can receive e-mail manually. "Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually" [POP3 RX] Specifies whether to enable the e-mail print function. [POP3 Server Port Number] Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails. You can specify the port number between [0] and [65535]. If you want to use the SMTP protocol [SMTP RX] When it is checked, e-mail is relayed using SMTP protocol and it is automatically received and printed. [SMTP Server Port Number] Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails. You can specify the port number between [0] and [65535]. 6 㻟㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Click [OK]. 㻟㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06W Attention (How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print) The following are settings for printing e-mails. You can set them from the printer control panel, Remote UI or FTP client. : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Settings for Using the POP3 Protocol Setting Method Option Setting POP3 Server Name Specifies the name or sets the IP address of the server which receives e-mails. POP3 User Name Specifies the name of the user which receives e-mails. Password Specifies the password for the name of the user which receives e-mails. POP3 RX Interval Set the interval for automatically connecting to the server that receives e-mails in minute units. Receive e-mail at specified intervals and print it automatically. POP3 RX Specifies whether to enable the e-mail print function. POP3 Server Port Number Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails. E-Mail RX Performs manual receiving of e-mails. Control Remote FTP Panel UI Client Settings for Using the SMTP Protocol Setting Method Option Setting SMTP RX Select whether to enable the e-mail printing function. When it is enabled, e-mail is automatically received and printed. SMTP Server Port Number Specifies the port number for the server which receives e-mails. Control Remote FTP Panel UI Client Other Settings Setting Method Option Setting Print History List (EMail Print) Prints e-mail print logs. Show Warnings Specifies whether a message should appear or any indicator should blink when a reception error has occurred on printing emails. Print E-Mail Text Specifies whether the printer should print the text on printing emails. Limit E-Mail Print Specifies whether to limit the number of the print pages of email text. 㻟㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Control Remote FTP Panel UI Client 07YL-06X Receiving and Printing E-mails Manually There are two types of manual printing methods: printing from the printer control panel and printing from the Remote UI. IMPORTANT Receiving E-mails The printer can receive e-mails only when it is online. When using POP3 protocol When it is set to receive e-mail automatically using [POP3 RX Interval], if you attempt to receive e-mail manually while email is being received automatically, your actions will be ignored. "How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print" When using SMTP protocol It automatically receives and prints e-mails. There is no need to manually receive and print them. "How to Specify the Settings for E-mail Print" Printing from the Printer Control Panel 1 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 2 Press [ ]( : Utility) to display the Utility menu. 3 Press [ ] and [ ], select [E-Mail Print Utility], and then press [OK]. ] and [ ], select [Received E-Mails], and then press [OK]. 4 Press [ 5 When <Run?> is displayed, press [ ], select [Yes], and then press [OK]. The printer is connected to the mail server. The printer receives e-mails addressed to the printer and print them. Printing from a Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI. 㻟㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Network] under [Preferences] in the [Settings/Registration] menu. 3 Click [E-Mail Print Settings]. 4 Click [E-Mail RX] on the right side of [E-Mail Print Settings]. The printer is connected to the mail server. The printer receives e-mails addressed to the printer and print them. 㻟㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻟㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-06Y Printing the E-mail Receive Log List Before beginning to print, see "Attention (Printing E-mail Sending/Receiving History)." Printing from the Printer Control Panel 1 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 2 Press [ ]( : Utility) to display the Utility menu. 3 Press [ ] and [ ], select [E-Mail Print Utility], and then press [OK]. ] and [ ], select [Received E-mail List], and then press [OK]. 4 Press [ 5 When <Run?> is displayed, press [ ], select [Yes], and then press [OK]. The e-mail receive log list is printed. Printing from a Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Utility Menu] under [Output/Control] in the [Settings/Registration] menu. 㻟㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Select [E-Mail RX History List], and then click [Execute]. The e-mail receive log list is printed. 㻟㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-070 Attention (Printing E-mail Sending/Receiving History) IMPORTANT Deleting all the e-mail receive logs Delete them using the following procedure. When the optional SD card is installed Format the SD card using the procedure in [SD Card Maintenance]. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" When the optional SD card is not installed Turn the printer OFF. "Turning the Printer ON/OFF" NOTE About the e-mail receive log Up to 60 e-mail receive logs can be printed. If an e-mail is not printed properly for some reason An error code is printed in [RX Results] in the e-mail receive log. See "When E-mail Print Fails." 㻟㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-071 When E-mail Print Fails Perform the following actions depending on the displayed error messages and error codes. Error messages and error codes are displayed in the following locations. Printer Display Remote UI ([Error Information] page in the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu) Network Status Print "The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode" E-Mail Sending/Receiving History See "Printing the E-mail Receive Log List" for printing methods. The error messages that appear in the display, Remote UI, and Network Status Print Error Message Display Remote UI, Network Status Print Cause Remedy Could not connect to the POP3 server when printing e-mails. Check the following points. Whether the following settings in the [Network] page in the Remote UI are correct [POP3 Server Name] and [POP3 Server Port Number] in [E-Mail Print Settings] DNS in [TCP/IP Settings] Whether the POP3 server and the DNS server are operating properly Failed to authenticate the user name in the POP3 server when printing emails. Check the following points. Whether the setting for [POP3 User Name] in [E-Mail Print Settings] in the [Network] page in the Remote UI is correct Whether the user name is registered in the POP3 server properly POP3 Server Password Error Failed to authenticate the password in the POP3 server when printing emails. Check the following points. Whether the setting for [Password] in [E-Mail Print Settings] in the [Network] page in the Remote UI is correct Whether the password is registered in the POP3 server properly Whether the setting for [POP3 User Name] in [E-Mail Print Settings] in the [Network] page in the Remote UI is correct Whether the user name is registered in the POP3 server properly POP3 Server UIDL Error Could not connect to the POP3 server when printing e-mails, because the server does not support the UIDL command. Use a POP3 server that supports UIDL. POP3 Server Connection Error POP3 Server User Name Error EM POP3 server error. 㻟㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 EM E-Mail access error. The printer could not connect to the POP3 server because an error had occurred in its hard disk. Clear the hard disk error on the POP3 server. The error codes that are displayed in the e-mail receive log list* * If multiple errors have occurred, only the error of the highest priority is displayed (high: 407 > low: 499). Error Code Cause Remedy The connection to the POP server was disconnected. 407 Could not receive data of 1 Kbyte (1024 byte) for 10 minutes while receiving e-mails. Consult your network administrator. If errors occur many times on the same e-mail data, check if the e-mail data is normal. 408 The response <ERR> was returned from the POP server. 412 Could not receive data of 1 Kbyte (1024 byte) for 10 minutes while receiving e-mails. 420 The size of the e-mail data exceeded 1.5 GB. Reduce the size of the e-mail data to 1.5 GB or less. 421 The size of the e-mail text exceeded 25 MB. Reduce the amount of the e-mail text. 422 The size of the attached files exceeded 100 MB. Reduce the size of the attached files to 100 MB or less. 423 An attached file in an unsupported format was sent. Change the format of the attached file into TIFF or JPEG. 424 The number of the attached files exceeded 3. Reduce the number of the attached files to 3 or less. 430 An e-mail in which [From] is blank was sent. Enter a name in [From]. Received a divided mail. Apply the following remedies to send the e-mail so that it is not divided. Reducing the size of the e-mail to be sent (Reducing it to the size which cannot be divided). Specifying the application settings so that the e-mail is sent without being divided. An e-mail which included unsupported encoding or character encoding was sent. Change the encoding or character encoding into that supported by this printer. "Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)" Received a mail of an unsupported type (message type). Change the content type into any one of the following types that are supported by this printer. text/plain image/jpeg image/tiff image/tiff-fx application/octet-stream 431 Received an unsupported multipart 㻟㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Consult your network administrator. Consult your network administrator. If errors occur many times on the same e-mail data, check if the e-mail data is normal. Change the content type of the multipart mail into any one of the following types that are supported by this printer. multipart/mixed mail. multipart/parallel multipart/alternative If the mail is nested, the mail is supported only when "multipart/alternative" is nested in "multipart/mixed." 432 Invalid data was sent. Check if the sent e-mail data is normal. 433 An e-mail in HTML format was sent. This printer does not support e-mails in HTML format. 434 The e-mail does not contain a text. Enter the text. 440 The job was canceled for some reason. Send the e-mail again. 441 An error has occurred during the process. Send the e-mail again. 499 An error has occurred in the printer. 㻟㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "A Message Appears in the Control Panel" 07YL-072 Printing Files from the Printer Using FTP Client You can print files from the printer by accessing the FTP server of the printer using FTP Client. IMPORTANT When performing FTP printing, select the [Use FTP Print] check box. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" 1 Run Command Prompt. NOTE Run Command Prompt using the following procedure. If you are using Windows )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@ If you are using UNIX Display the console screen. 2 Copy the file to be printed in the directory displayed in Command Prompt. 3 Enter "ftp <the IP address of the printer>" in Command Prompt, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. Input Example: "ftp 192.168.0.215" If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer Consult your network administrator. 4 Enter the FTP print user name, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. The default user name is "guest". You cannot perform an anonymous login. 5 Enter the FTP print password, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. The default password is "7654321". 㻟㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Enter "put <the name of the file to be printed>", and then press [ENTER] on your keyboard. Input Example: "put sample.txt" ĺ The file is printed from the printer. IMPORTANT When printing a file Print the file in the binary mode. 7 Enter "quit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 8 Enter "exit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. ĺ Command Prompt closes. 㻟㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-073 Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print) In a secured print or encrypted secured print, a print job for which a password is specified is saved in the SD card of the printer, and the job is printed by entering the password using the printer's control panel. This function is convenient when you print a confidential document etc. that you do not want others to read. Before beginning to print, see "Attention (Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print))." It is used only when the optional SD card is installed. 1 Print a secured print job or encrypted secured print job using the printer driver. NOTE How to print a secured print job Print a secured print job by selecting [Secured Print] in the printer driver, and then entering the user name and password. The number of characters which can be specified for a secured print job Specify the user name for a secured print with 15 or less alphanumeric characters and the password with 1 to 7 characters. For details on the encrypted secured print For details on the restriction for the number of characters of an encrypted secured print password and how to print the job, see Help of "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in." You can display Help from the print driver after installing "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in." 2 Move to the printer when printing. 3 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 4 Press [ ]( : Job). 5 Select [Secured Print] or [Encrypted Print] using [ ] and [ 㻟㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ], and then press [OK]. 6 If the user names appear, select the target user name using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 7 If the file names appear, select the target file name using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 8 Enter [PIN], and then press [OK]. Increase or decrease a number using [ ] and [ ], and then move the cursor using [ ] and [ ]. ĺ The specified file is printed. NOTE Entering a password using the control panel Only numbers can be entered. If a password includes alphabetical characters or symbols Alphabetical characters or symbols can be specified for a password depending on the encrypted secured print driver version. In this case, print an encrypted secured print job from the Remote UI. For details on the procedure for operating the Remote UI, see "Remote UI." 㻟㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-074 Attention (Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print)) NOTE The environment in which this function is unavailable You cannot use this function on the DOS application, UNIX or other computer on which the printer driver cannot be used. Print jobs are processed in the [Print] mode. When the amount of data or number of jobs that you can save on the SD card exceeds the limit The message <Cannot perform secured print.> appears. When the message is displayed, perform the following procedure. (1) Press [ ]( : Online) to skip the error. (The job for which the error was skipped will be deleted.) (2) Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card. (3) Save the secured print jobs again. When using the "Encrypted Secured Print" function whose security is reinforced for data communication and stored data You need to install "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in." For details on the installation procedure, see "Readme.txt" in the supplied CD-ROM. We recommend that an encrypted secured print be used when printing secured print jobs. Timing to delete secured print jobs Secured print jobs/encrypted secured print jobs are deleted in the following circumstances: When the printer is turned OFF When a hard reset or soft reset is performed After a secured print job/encrypted secured print job is printed When no printing operation has been performed by the printer's control panel or Remote UI for a fixed period The time interval from when no printing operation is not performed by the Remote UI or printer's control panel for a fixed period until the printer deletes jobs is set to "1 hour" in the default settings. You can change the setting for the time interval. "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" 㻟㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-075 Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) You can save print jobs in the SD card (box) in the printer by selecting [Store] from the printer driver for this printer. In addition, stored jobs can perform the following operations from the printer's control panel and the Remote UI. Performing a Stored Job Print Using the Control Panel of the Printer You can print data by selecting the saved box or job. Displaying or Operating the Jobs Stored in a Box (Resume/Delete) You can check or operate the jobs stored in a box. You can perform operations of Resume (Print) and Delete. You can also check the jobs in detail. This operation is performed from the Remote UI. Changing the Box Settings You can change the name of the box in which data is saved or password. This operation is performed from the Remote UI. NOTE About stored jobs The stored jobs can be displayed or operated only when the SD card is installed, and [SD Card] is set to [On]. For details on the settings for [SD Card], see "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)." The saved jobs are saved on the SD card even after printing, and they are not deleted even after turning the printer OFF. When you want to delete the saved jobs, use the Remote UI. Up to the total of 1000 jobs in all the boxes can be saved. You can change the name of the stored job in the printer driver before printing. Stored jobs can be deleted automatically by setting a length of time to pass between storing of the jobs and their deletion. On how to set the length of this time, see "Automatically Deleting Files Stored in a Box." Since processing for deleting stored jobs is performed in background, the screen display does not always show the actual state depending on your system environment. For example, even if "0" is displayed as number of jobs stored in a box, you may not be able to store new jobs in the same box. In this case, wait for some time and then try again the job storing operation. When the amount of data or number of jobs that you can save on the SD card exceeds the limit The message <Cannot store.> is displayed. When the message is displayed, perform the following procedure. (1) Press [ ]( : Online) to skip the error. (The job for which the error was skipped will be deleted.) (2) Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card. (3) Save the jobs again. Operating the Remote UI "Remote UI" 㻟㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-076 Performing a Stored Job Print Using the Control Panel of the Printer 1 Select [Store] from [Output Method] in the printer driver, specify the box in which you want to store the job, and then send it. 2 Move to the printer when printing. 3 Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). 4 Press [ ]( : Job). 5 Select [Stored Job Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When department ID management is set, the screen is displayed when the departmental ID and PIN are entered. After entering the department ID and PIN, select [<Log In>], and then press [OK]. 6 Select the number for the box in which the job is stored using [ 7 If [PIN] appears, enter the password, and then press [OK]. 㻟㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Increase or decrease a number using [ ] and [ ], and then move the cursor using [ ] and [ ]. 8 Select the name of the target file using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. The specified file is printed. NOTE If the stored job has been deleted If the stored job has been deleted by an external operation, for example an operation from the Remote UI, a screen such as the following is displayed. When the file name is selected When printing is performed 㻟㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-077 Displaying or Operating the Jobs Stored in a Box (Resume/Delete) 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [Box] Menu. 3 Enter the box number of the box where the job that you want to check or operate is stored, and then click [Open...]. You can also display the job list inside the box by clicking on the icon displayed on [Box Number]. If a password is specified for the box, enter the password, and then click [OK]. 㻟㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 When you want to operate any stored job, perform the following procedure. (1) Select the [Select] check box by the first job on the list. (2) Click the operation buttons. [Print...]: Prints the selected job. [Delete]: Deletes the selected job. You can display the page that allows you to change the print copies etc. by clicking [Print...]. (3) Change the settings, and then click [Start Printing]. 㻟㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE Changing the number of the print copies You cannot change the number of the print copies depending on the job. Also, changes to print runs of saved jobs that have [Prioritize Print Ticket] set in XPS format will be ignored. Displaying a document name A job file name of up to 32 characters can be displayed for a document name. If the file name has more than 32 characters, the characters after the limited number are not displayed. Also, depending on the application, the application name may be added to the beginning of the file name. About department ID management When the department ID management function is enabled, clicking [Start Printing] displays an authentication dialog. You can start printing by entering the registered department ID and password in [User Name] and [Password]. If you perform printing as a member of a different department from the one you specified to log in, log out once and log in again to restart the Remote UI. 5 Click the document name to display details of the saved job. 㻟㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 The detailed information of the stored jobs is displayed. 㻟㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SU Automatically Deleting Files Stored in a Box Stored jobs can be deleted automatically by setting a length of time to pass between storing of the jobs and their deletion. This setting is made using the Remote UI. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Control Menu] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻟㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Edit...]. 5 Set a length of time to pass before deletion of stored jobs. 㻟㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The default setting is [3 days]. To not delete automatically, select [Off]. 6 Click [OK]. 㻟㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-079 Changing the Box Settings NOTE You can change the settings only if you have logged on as Administrator. "Remote UI" 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select the [Box] menu. 3 Enter the box number of the box where the job that you want to check or operate is stored, and then click [Open...]. You can also display the job list inside the box by clicking on the icon displayed on [Box Number]. If a password is specified for the box, enter the password, and then click [OK]. 㻟㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Settings...]. 5 Enter the box name in [Box Name]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. 㻟㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Specify the password. When specifying a password for a box (1) Select the [Set PIN] check box. (2) Enter the password that you want to specify in [PIN], and then enter the same number in [Confirm] as the one you entered in [PIN]. 㻟㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When not specifying a password for a box Clear the [Set PIN] check box. In [PIN] and [Confirm], you can enter a number of 1 to 7 digits except for those beginning with the digit "0." 7 Click [OK]. 㻟㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07A Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt Printing) This mode is used for pausing the job currently being processed and start printing the specified job on ahead. The paused print jobs are saved on the SD card in the printer and printed again after the print job that interrupted is completed. Select [Interrupt Print] from [Output Method] in the printer driver, and then print. NOTE If a print job for interrupt printing has already being processed You cannot give priority anymore to another print job. 㻟㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07C Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer) Checking Your Network Environment Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4) Configuring the Protocol Settings Setting IP v. 6 (if necessary) Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) Configuring NetWare Configuring the Protocol Settings Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) Configuring the Protocol Settings Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk) 㻟㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Macintosh Network Settings Configuring the Protocol Settings Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing 㻟㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07E Checking Your Network Environment Check the network environment to which the printer is connected and perform the requisite tasks referring to the following figures. Example of a Windows Network Example of a Macintosh Network Example of a UNIX Network Example of a Network Using a Variety of Computers 㻟㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07F Example of a Windows Network When the NetWare Server is on the Network When the NetWare Server is not on the Network When the NetWare Server is on the Network In the network environment as shown in the following figure, TCP/IP or NetWare can be used. See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used. Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" "Setting the Spooling Function " "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Setting IP v. 6" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) "Configuring NetWare" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" When the NetWare Server is not on the Network In the network environment as shown in the following figure, TCP/IP can be used. See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used. Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) 㻟㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" "Setting the Spooling Function " "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Setting IP v. 6" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" IMPORTANT About SMB printing You can use SMB printing only when an SD card is installed. NOTE To manage the printer effectively By performing the above tasks, computers on a network can be connected to the printer directly. When using a TCP/IP protocol, you can manage the printer effectively by specifying Windows on the network as the print server. For details on the procedure for configuring the print server, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." About NetBEUI This printer does not support NetBEUI. 㻟㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07H Example of a Macintosh Network A Macintosh network can use either of an AppleTalk protocol or TCP/IP protocol. See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used. Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" "Setting the Spooling Function " "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk) "Macintosh Network Settings" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Setting IP v. 6" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" IMPORTANT About a LocalTalk network This printer does not support a Macintosh LocalTalk network. 㻟㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07J Example of a UNIX Network A UNIX network uses a TCP/IP protocol. See the following and perform the requisite tasks. Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" "Setting the Spooling Function " "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Setting IP v. 6" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" 㻟㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07K Example of a Network Using a Variety of Computers If there are a variety of computers on a network, specify the settings appropriate to each computer. For example, if you are using Windows and Macintosh on the same network, perform both "Example of a Windows Network" and "Example of a Macintosh Network." See the following and perform the requisite tasks according to the protocol to be used. Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" "Setting the Spooling Function " "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Setting IP v. 6" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk) "Macintosh Network Settings" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" IMPORTANT About SMB printing You can use SMB printing only when an SD card is installed. 㻟㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07L Network Settings for the Printer (Common to Each Protocol) This section describes the setting items which are common to each protocol to use this printer in a network environment. Selecting a Communication Method or Ethernet Type If you want to fix the type of communication method and Ethernet type, set [Auto Detect] on the Ethernet Drive Setting to [Off]. (This printer can detect the communication method and Ethernet type automatically. Normally, you do not need to specify the setting.) "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" Setting the Spooling Function You can speed up the exiting time of the computer to which you send print jobs, see the following item and configure the spooler function. "Setting the Spooling Function " Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time If the printer cannot be connected to a network, see the following item and specify the setting for the startup waiting time. (Normally, you do not need to change the setting for startup waiting time.) "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor and Change the Settings If you want to restrict the users who can monitor and change the settings, see the following items and configure the SNMP protocol. "Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol" Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication You can specify the settings for using IEEE802.1X authentication with the printer. "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" Network Setting Items This section describes the setting items which you can change using a Web browser (Remote UI), FTP Client, or NetSpot Device Installer. "Network Setting Items" Initializing the Network Settings You can reset the network settings for the printer to the default values. "Initializing the Network Settings" Checking the MAC Address You can check the MAC address by printing Network Status Print. "Checking the MAC Address" 㻟㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07R Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode Configure the Ethernet driver for this printer using either of the following methods. "Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up)" Configure the Ethernet driver using the control panel while checking the display on the printer. "Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI)" Change the settings for the Ethernet driver by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the network. IMPORTANT When configuring the interface first Use the printer's control panel. After configuring the TCP/IP protocol settings, you can change the settings for the interface using the Web browser (Remote UI). NOTE Ethernet Ethernet is a LAN standard, and this printer supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T connections. When this printer is used on a network, the Ethernet driver controls the communication method and Ethernet type. 㻟㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07S Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up) When configuring the interface using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchy. *1 [Communication Mode] and [Ethernet Type] are displayed when [Auto Detect] is set to [Off]. *2 [Communication Mode] appears only when [Ethernet Type] is set to a setting other than [1000 Base-T]. Pressing [ ]( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel. IMPORTANT After performing the configuration To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer. For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." To go back up the hierarchy Press [ ]( : Back). About the control panel For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel." 1 Press [ ]( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message is displayed, press [OK]. You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is off). (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the 2 Select [Ethernet Driver] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻟㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Configure the Ethernet driver. This printer can detect the communication method and Ethernet type automatically. Normally, set [Auto Detect] to [On]. If you want to fix the communication method and Ethernet type, set [Auto Detect] to [Off]. If you are using a hub, match the settings for the hub and the printer. For the settings of the hub you are using, consult your network administrator. (Example) Hub settings Communication mode: Full duplex Ethernet type: 10 Base-T Printer settings [Auto Detect]: [Off] [Communication Mode]: [Full Duplex] [Ethernet Type]: [10 Base-T] When detecting the Ethernet driver automatically (Default) ] and [ (1) Select [Auto Detect] using [ (2) Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ], and then press [OK]. When detecting the Ethernet driver manually ] and [ (1) Select [Auto Detect] using [ (2) Select [Off] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ], and then press [OK]. (3) Select [Communication Mode] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. (4) Select an Ethernet communication method appropriate for your network environment using [ press [OK]. [Half Duplex]: Receives and transmits data alternately, not simultaneously. [Full Duplex]: Receives and transmits data simultaneously. (5) Select [Ethernet Type] using [ ] and [ ] and [ ], and then ], and then press [OK]. (6) Select an Ethernet type appropriate for your network environment using [ 4 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE For details on a hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻟㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 07YL-07U Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻟㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Ethernet Driver Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻟㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) Set the Ethernet driver. If you want the communication method and Ethernet type to be set automatically, select the [Auto Detect] check box. If you want to fix the settings for communication method and Ethernet type, clear the [Auto Detect] check box, and set the following. Using [Communication Mode], select the Ethernet communication method that matches the network environment you are using. [Half Duplex] Sending and receiving are not performed simultaneously. They are performed alternately. [Full Duplex] Sending and receiving are performed simultaneously. If you select half duplex when fixing the Ethernet type, sending and receiving are not performed simultaneously. They are performed alternately. If you select full duplex, sending and receiving are performed simultaneously. If you are using a hub, match the settings for the hub and the printer. For the settings of the hub you are using, consult your network administrator. (Example) Hub settings Communication mode: Full duplex Ethernet type: 10 Base-T Printer settings [Auto Detect]: [Off] [Communication Mode]: [Full Duplex] [Ethernet Type]: [10 Base-T] Using [Ethernet Type], Select the Ethernet type that matches the network environment you are using. (2) Click [OK]. 㻟㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻟㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07W Setting the Spooling Function Specify the setting for the spooler function using either of the following methods. "Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (the Settings to Be Performed First)" Specify the setting for the spooler function using the control panel while checking the display on the printer. "Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI)" Specify the setting for the spooler function by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the network. IMPORTANT When specifying the setting for startup waiting time first Use the printer's control panel. After configuring the TCP/IP protocol settings, you can change the settings using the Web browser (Remote UI) or FTP Client. Because the options which can be specified vary depending on the software, see "Network Setting Items" and use each software appropriate to the environment you are using or options that you want to specify. The Spooling Function It can only be used when the SD card is installed. NOTE Changing the settings using FTP Client You can also specify the setting for startup waiting time using FTP Client. "FTP Client" 㻟㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07X Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (the Settings to Be Performed First) When configuring the spooler function using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchy. Pressing [ ]( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel. IMPORTANT After performing the configuration To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer. For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." To go back up the hierarchy ]( Press [ : Back). About the control panel For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel." 1 Press [ ]( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message is displayed, press [OK]. You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is off). (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the 2 Select [Spooler] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Specify the setting for the spooler function using [ ] and [ 4 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. 㻟㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ], and then press [OK]. After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE For details on a hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻟㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-07Y Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻟㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Spooler]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻟㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Specify the setting for the spooler function. (1) When using the spooling function, select the [Use Spooler] check box. (2) Click [OK]. 7 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 㻟㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻟㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-080 Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time Specify the setting for startup waiting time using either of the following methods. "Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up)" Specify the setting for startup waiting time using the control panel while checking the display on the printer. "Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI)" Specify the setting for startup waiting time by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the network. Normally, you do not need to change the setting for startup waiting time (the time from when you turn the printer ON to when the printer starts communication). Specify the setting for the startup waiting time only when the printer cannot be connected to the network. NOTE If this printer is connected to a switching hub etc. The printer may not be able to be connected to the network even when the network settings are correct. This is because the printer and hub cannot communicate each other immediately after this printer is connected to the hub due to a spanning tree process. In this case, it is necessary to set a delay before establishing the network connection with the printer using this setting. For details on the functions of a switching hub, contact the manufacturer of the switching hub. Changing the settings using FTP Client You can also specify the setting for startup waiting time using FTP Client. "FTP Client" 㻟㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-081 Performing the Configuration Using the Printer's Control Panel (When You First Set it Up) When configuring the startup waiting time using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchy. Pressing [ ]( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel. IMPORTANT After performing the configuration To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer. For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." To go back up the hierarchy ]( Press [ : Back). About the control panel For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel." 1 Press [ ]( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message is displayed, press [OK]. You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is off). (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the 2 Select [Network Delay Time] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Specify the setting for startup waiting time using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. Set a delay of between 0 and 300 seconds from the time the printer is turned ON until it begins communicating. 4 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. 㻟㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE For details on a hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻟㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-082 Changing the Settings Using Web Browser (Remote UI) 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻟㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Startup Time Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻟㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Specify the setting for startup time. (1) Enter the Startup Time from when you turn the printer ON to when the printer starts communication (0 to 300 seconds). (2) Click [OK]. 7 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset 㻟㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻟㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-083 Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol You can restrict the users who can specify and browse the settings using the SNMP protocol using a Web browser (Remote UI). 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻟㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [SNMP Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻟㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Specify the settings for SNMP. Configuring the SNMP Protocol Specifying User Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol Specifying Context Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol Configuring the SNMP Protocol (1) Configure the SNMP v. 1 protocol. When using SNMPv1 protocol a. Select the [Use SNMPv1] check box. b. When using Community Name 1, select the check box for [Use Community Name 1], and set the following items. Set the SNMP Community Name in [Community Name 1]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. The default setting is [public]. Using [MIB Access Permission], select whether to operate the SNMPv1 agent in one of [Read/Write] or 㻟㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Read Only] modes. c. When using Community Name 2, select the check box for [Use Community Name 2], and set the following items. Set the SNMP Community Name in [Community Name 2]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. The default setting is [public2]. Using [MIB Access Permission], select whether to operate the SNMPv1 agent in one of [Read/Write] or [Read Only] modes. When you are not using SNMPv1 protocol Clear the [Use SNMPv1] check box. IMPORTANT When the [Use SNMPv1] check box is cleared The following problems may occur. * You may not be able to use some functions of Canon utility software or to use the software properly due to an error occurring. * You may not be able to specify or browse each option for this printer from utility software that uses the SNMP v. 1 protocol to obtain information. If you clear the [Use SNMPv1] check box, set it after consulting with the network administrator. (2) Set a dedicated community. For the setting of [Dedicated Community], select [Off], [Read/Write], or [Read Only]. To use Canon utility software, it may be necessary to select [Read/Write]. (3) Configure the SNMP v. 3 protocol. 㻟㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When using SNMPv3 protocol a. Select the [Use SNMPv3] check box. b. When setting user information used by SNMPv3 protocol, set user information using [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5]. See "Specifying User Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol" for the method for setting user information. c. When setting context information used by SNMPv3 protocol, set context information using [Context Settings]. See "Specifying Context Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol" for the method for setting context information. When you are not using SNMPv3 protocol Clear the [Use SNMPv3] check box. (4) Specify [Obtain Printer Management Information from Host] as needed. If the [Obtain Printer Management Information from Host] check box is selected, when the printer driver is installed in Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, port monitoring by SNMP is activated automatically. NOTE The port monitoring function by SNMP 㻟㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The port monitoring function by SNMP is a function of Standard TCP/IP Port, and it periodically obtains printer management information such as information about print applications and ports, using SNMP. (5) Make a setting for rejecting to receive SNMP packets while in sleep mode, as necessary. If you select the check box for [Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode], you may be unable to access the printer from Canon software (iW Series) or applications using the SNMP protocol. (6) Proceed to Step 7. Specifying User Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol (1) Specify the user information to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol. If You Want to Register/Edit User Information If You Want to Change the Status (Valid/Invalid) of User Information If You Want to Register/Edit User Information 1. Select the [Enable User] check box under [User Settings 1]. 2. In [User Name], enter the user name to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 㻟㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3. For [MIB Access Permission], select in which mode the SNMP v. 3 agent can operate, [Read/Write] or [Read Only]. 4. Under [Security Settings], select from [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes], [Authentication Yes/Encryption No] or [Authentication No/Encryption No] for the security used by SNMPv3. 㻟㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5. If [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] or [Authentication Yes/Encryption No] is set for [Security Settings], select [MD5] or [SHA1] for [Authentication Algorithm] as the authentication algorithm used by SNMPv3. 6. When [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] is set using [Security Settings], set an authentication password. [Authentication Enter the password to be used for the authentication function of the authentication Password]: algorithm. 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Confirm]: To confirm the password, enter the entered [Authentication Password] again. 㻟㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If the SSL encrypted communication function is not used, this item cannot be set by the Remote UI. Either enable the SSL encrypted communication function, or set from the control panel using the following procedure. ]( 6HWWLQJV VHOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>6103Y6HWWLQJV@DQGWKHQVHW a. Press [ [SNMP v. 3] to [On]. b. Set each password using [Auth. Password] from [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5]. For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates." 7. If [Security Settings] are set to [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes], set an encrypted password. Set [Encryption Algorithm] to [DES] or [AES]. [Encryption Password]: Enter the password to be used for the encryption function of the encryption algorithm. 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Confirm]: To confirm the password, enter the entered [Encryption Password] again. If the SSL encrypted communication function is not used, this item cannot be set by the Remote UI. Either enable the SSL encrypted communication function, or set from the control panel using the following procedure. ]( 6HWWLQJV VHOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>6103Y6HWWLQJV@DQGWKHQVHW a. Press [ [SNMP v. 3] to [On]. 㻟㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 b. Set each password using [Auth. Password] from [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5]. For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates." 8. Set [User Settings 2] to [User Settings 5] using the same procedure as needed. If You Want to Change the Status (Valid/Invalid) of User Information To enable registered user information, select the [Enable User] check box at the top of the targeted user information. To disable registered user information, clear the [Enable User] check box at the top of the targeted user information. (2) Proceed to Step 7. Specifying Context Information to Be Used in the SNMP v. 3 Protocol (1) Specify the context information to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol. If You Want to Register Context Information If You Want to Erase Context Information If You Want to Register Context Information 1. Enter the context names used by the SNMPv3 protocol in [Context Name 1] to [Context Name 5] under [Context Settings]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. If You Want to Erase Context Information 㻟㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 1. Delete the context names that are entered in [Context Name 1] to [Context Name 5] under [Context Settings] that you want to delete. (2) Proceed to Step 7. 7 Click [OK]. 8 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset 㻟㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻠㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-084 Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication Specify the settings for using IEEE802.1X authentication with the printer. See the following sections according to the protocol to be used for authentication. "Setting TLS Authentication Information" "Setting TTLS/PEAP Authentication Information" IMPORTANT Conditions for Using IEEE802.1X Authentication In order to use IEEE802.1X authentication, an authentication server (RADIUS server) is required. NOTE IEEE802.1X Authentication Protocol The printer supports TLS, TTLS and PEAP IEEE802.1X authentication. TLS performs mutual authentication using the certificate sent from the authentication server and the certificate set in the printer. TTLS and PEAP perform mutual authentication using the certificate sent from the authentication server and the user name and password set in the printer. Note the following when simultaneously specifying multiple options from TLS, TTLS, and PEAP: To select TLS: TTLS or PEAP cannot be specified. To select TTLS: TLS cannot be specified. PEAP can be specified. To select PEAP: TLS cannot be specified. TTLS can be specified. The network authentication method to use is determined by the configuration of the authentication server in use. Choose the method based on the configuration of the authentication server IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings We recommend that network settings be performed by the network administrator. 㻠㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-085 Setting TLS Authentication Information Set authentication information for using TLS with the IEEE802.1X authentication method. TLS performs mutual authentication using the authentication server's certificate and the printer's certificate. IMPORTANT In order to set up TLS authentication You need to register a key and certificate or a CA certificate used for authentication to the printer in advance. "Setting Keys and Certificates" "Setting CA Certificates" 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻠㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [IEEE802.1X Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻠㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Enter the login name. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 7 Select the [Use TLS] check box. 㻠㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 Click [Key and Certificate...]. 9 Select the key to use, and then click [Default Key Settings]. 㻠㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 10 Select the [Use IEEE802.1X] check box. If a Message Appears A message will be displayed if there is anything wrong with the settings. See Steps 6 to 9, and check the settings. 11 Click [OK]. 㻠㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 12 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻠㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-086 Setting TTLS/PEAP Authentication Information Set authentication information for using TTLS or PEAP with IEEE802.1X authentication. TTLS and PEAP perform mutual authentication using the authentication server's certificate and the user name and password set in the printer. IMPORTANT In order to set a user name and password You need to set up the SSL encryption communication function in advance. Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. Starting the Remote UI 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻠㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [IEEE802.1X Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻠㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Enter the login name. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 7 Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box. 㻠㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When using TTLS Select the internal TTLS authentication method. (1) Select [MSCHAPv2] or [PAP]. 8 Click [Change User Name/Password...]. When using the log in name entered in Step 6 as the user name Select the [Use Login Name as User Name] check box. 9 Enter user name. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 㻠㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 10 Enter password. (1) Select the [Change Password] check box. (2) Enter password. You can enter up to 24 characters. (3) Enter the same password in the [Confirm] field. (4) Click [OK]. 11 Select the [Use IEEE802.1X] check box. 㻠㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If a Message Appears A message will be displayed if there is anything wrong with the settings. See Steps 6 to 10, and check the settings. 12 Click [OK]. 13 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻠㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-087 Network Setting Items You can change the network settings using various methods. Network Setting Items Software That Can Be Used for the Network Settings Network Setting Items The setting items you can change using NetSpot Device Installer, FTP Client, or the control panel on the printer are as follows. NOTE The settings that you cannot specify using FTP Client, NetSpot Device Installer, or the control panel on the printer Specify them using a Web browser (Remote UI). (However, you cannot specify the settings with even using the Remote UI.) About the item names In the following table, the characters shown in parentheses are exclusively for FTP Client. For example, "[IP Address] (INT_ADDR)" is displayed differently as follows, depending on the application. Web browser (Remote UI): [IP Address] NetSpot Device Installer: [IP Address] config file of FTP Client: [INT_ADDR] Control Panel: [IP Address] General Settings : Can be specified Option : Cannot be specified Contents Default [Device Name] (DEVICE_NAME) Up to 32 characters LBP7780C [Location] (SYS_LOC) Up to 32 characters (Blank) [System Manager] (SYS_CONTACT) Up to 32 characters (Blank) [System Manager Password] (ROOT_PWD) Up to 16 characters 7654321 [Permit End-User's Job Operation] (USER_JOB_CONT) ON, OFF OFF Up to 128 alphanumeric characters http://www.canon.com Support Link [URL] (LINK_URL1) 㻠㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings Settings Using Settings Using Using NetSpot the Control FTP Device Panel Client Installer TCP/IP (IP v. 4) Settings : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option Contents Default [Use IPv4] (IPV4_USE) ON, OFF ON [DHCP] (DHCP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [RARP] (RARP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [BOOTP] (BOOTP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [IP Address] (INT_ADDR) IP address 0.0.0.0 [Subnet Mask] (NET_MASK) IP address 0.0.0.0 [Gateway Address] (DEF_GW) IP address 0.0.0.0 [Primary DNS Server Address] (DNS_PADDR) IP address 0.0.0.0 [Secondary DNS Server Address] (DNS_SADDR) IP address 0.0.0.0 [Host Name] (HOST_NAME) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters "Canon" + "Last 6 digits of the MAC address" [Domain Name] (DOMAIN_NAME) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [DNS Dynamic Update] (DDNS_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [WINS Resolution] (WINS_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [WINS Server Address] (WINS_SERVER) IP address 0.0.0.0 [Scope ID] (WINS_SCOPEID) Up to 63 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [SMB Server Name] (SMB_SERVER) Up to 15 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [SMB Workgroup Name] (SMB_WG) Up to 15 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [Use ARP/PING] (ARP_PING_ENB) ON, OFF ON [Use FTP Print] (FTP_PRINT_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [FTP Print User Name] (FTP_PRINT_USER) Up to 24 alphanumeric characters guest [Password] (FTP_PRINT_PWD) Up to 24 alphanumeric characters 7654321 [FTP Settings] ON, OFF OFF [Use LPD Printing] (LPD_ENB) ON, OFF ON [Print LPD Banner Page] 㻠㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings Using NetSpot Device Installer Settings Using FTP Client Settings Using the Control Panel ON, OFF OFF [Use RAW Printing] (RAW_ENB) ON, OFF ON [Use Bidirectional Communication] (RAW_BIDIR_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Use IPP Print] (IPP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [SSL] ON, OFF (Fixed at OFF when a key is not registered.) OFF [IPP Authentication] (IPP_AUTH_ENB) ON, OFF ON [User Name] (IPP_AUTH_ACCUNT1) Up to 24 characters (Must be entered when using IPP Authentication) guest [Password] (IPP_AUTH_PASSWD1) Up to 24 characters (Must be entered when using IPP Authentication) 7654321 [Use WSD Printing] (WSD_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Use WSD Browsing] (WSD_BROWSING) ON, OFF OFF [Use Multicast Discovery] (WSD_MULTICAST_DISCOVERY) ON, OFF OFF [Use HTTP] (HTTP_ENB) ON, OFF ON [Use Proxy] ON, OFF OFF [HTTP Proxy Server Address] Up to 128 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [HTTP Proxy Server Port Number] 0 to 99999 80 [Use Proxy within Same Domain] ON, OFF OFF [Proxy Authentication] ON, OFF OFF [User Name] Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [Password] Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [Discovery Response] (DISCOVERY_ENB) ON, OFF ON [Scope Name] (DISCOVERY_SCOPE_NAME) Scope name to be used for discovery using utility software such as NetSpot Device Installer. (Up to 32 characters) default [Use SNTP] (SNTP_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [NTP Server Name] (SNTP_ADDR) IP address or host name (Blank) [Polling Interval] (SNTP_INTERVAL) Interval for synchronizing time (1 to 48 hours) 24 (LPD_BANN) TCP/IP (IP v. 6) Settings : Can be specified : Cannot be specified 㻠㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Option Contents Settings Using NetSpot Device Installer Default [Use IPv6] (IPV6_USE) ON, OFF OFF [Use Stateless Address] (IPV6_STATELESS_USE) ON, OFF ON [Use Manual Address] (IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_USE) ON, OFF OFF [IP Address] (IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_SET) IP address (Blank) [Prefix Length] (IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_PREFIX) 0 to 128 64 [Default Router Address] (IPV6_MANUAL_ROUTER_ADDR) IP address (Blank) [Use DHCPv6] (IPV6_DHCPV6_USE) ON, OFF OFF [Primary DNS Server Address] (IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_PRI) IP address (Blank) [Secondary DNS Server Address] (IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_SEC) IP address (Blank) [Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names] (IPV6_DNS_NAME_SAME_AS_IPV4) ON, OFF OFF [Host Name] (IPV6_DNS_HOST_NAME_V6) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters "Canon" + "Last 6 digits of the MAC address" [Domain Name] (IPV6_DNS_DOMAIN_NAME_V6) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [DNS Dynamic Update] (IPV6_DNS_DYNAMIC_SET) ON, OFF OFF [Register Manual Address] (IPV6_DNS_MANUAL) ON, OFF OFF [Register Stateful Address] (IPV6_DNS_STATEFUL) ON, OFF OFF [Register Stateless Address] (IPV6_DNS_STATELESS) ON, OFF OFF Settings Using FTP Client Settings Using the Control Panel NetWare Network Settings : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option Contents Default [Use NetWare] (NW_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Frame Type] (NW_FRAME_TYPE) Frame type used by NetWare AutoSense([Auto Detect]) 㻠㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings Settings Settings Using Using Using NetSpot the FTP Device Control Client Installer Panel [IPX External Network Number] (Display only) [Node Number] (Display only) [Print Service] (NW_PRINT_SERVICE) Print service to be used ndsPserver([NDS PServer]) [File Server Name] (NW_PSERVER_FILE_SERVER_ NAME) Name of the NetWare file server to which the NetWare print server belongs (1 to 47 characters) (Blank) [Print Server Name] (NW_PSERVER_PRINT_SERVER_NAME) NetWare print server name to be used (1 to 47 characters) (Blank) [Print Server Password] (NW_PSERVER_PASSWD) Password for accessing the print server (0 to 20 characters) (Blank) [Printer Number] (NW_PSERVER_PRINTER_NO) Number for the printer connected to the NetWare print server (0 to 15) 0 [Service Mode] (NW_PSERVER_SERVICE_MODE) Service mode to be used psMode1: Only the currently loaded paper can be serviced. psMode2: Paper can be changed as needed. psMode3: The order of the jobs is rearranged to minimize the frequency of changing paper. psMode4: The order of the jobs in a queue is rearranged to minimize the frequency of changing paper. psMode4 [Printer Form] (NW_PSERVER_PRINTER_FORM) Paper Define Form (0 to 255) 0 [Polling Interval] (NW_PSERVER_POLLING_INT) Interval for checking the jobs (1 to 15 Bindery PServer 㻠㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 seconds) Data Buffer Size (1 to 20 KB) 20 [Tree Name](NW_NDSSERVER_TREE_NAME) Name of the NDS tree to which the NetWare print server belongs (1 to 32 characters) (Blank) [Context Name] (NW_NDSSERVER_CONTEXT_ NAME) Name of the context to which the NetWare print server belongs (1 to 255 characters) (Blank) [Print Server Name] (NW_NDSSERVER_PRINT_ SERVER_NAME) NetWare print server name to be used (1 to 64 characters) (Blank) [Print Server Password] (NW_NDSSERVER_PRINT_ SERVER_PASSWORD) Password for accessing the print server (0 to 20 characters) (Blank) [Printer Number] (NW_NDSSERVER_PRINTER_NO) Number for the printer connected to the NetWare print server (0 to 254) 0 [Service Mode] (NW_NDSSERVER_SERVICE_ MODE) Service mode to be used psMode1: Only the currently loaded paper can be serviced. psMode2: Paper can be changed as needed. psMode3: The order of the jobs is rearranged to minimize the frequency of changing paper. psMode4: The order of the jobs in a queue is rearranged to minimize the frequency of changing paper. psMode4 [Buffer Size] (NW_PSERVER_BUFFER_SIZE) NDS PServer 㻠㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Printer Form] (NW_NDSSERVER_PRINTER_FORM) Paper Define Form (0 to 255) 0 [Polling Interval] (NW_NDSSERVER_POLLING_INT.) Interval for checking the jobs (1 to 255 seconds) 5 [Buffer Size] (NW_NDSSERVER_BUFFER_SIZE) Data Buffer Size (3 to 20 KB) 20 [File Server Name] (NW_RPRINTER_FILE_SERVER_ NAME) Name of the NetWare file server to which the NetWare print server belongs (1 to 47 characters) (Blank) [Print Server Name] (NW_RPRINTER_PRINT_SERVER_ NAME) NetWare print server name to be used (1 to 47 characters) (Blank) [Printer Number] (NW_RPRINTER_PRINTER_NO) Number for the printer connected to the NetWare print server (0 to 15) 0 [Tree Name](NW_NPRINTER_TREE_NAME) Name of the NPrinter tree to which the NetWare print server belongs (1 to 32 characters) (Blank) [Context Name] (NW_NPRINTER_CONTEXT_NAME) Name of the context to which the NetWare print server belongs (1 to 256 characters) (Blank) [Print Server Name] (NW_NPRINTER_PRINT_SERVER_ NAME) NetWare print server name to be used (1 to 64 characters) (Blank) [Printer Number](NW_NPRINTER_PRINTER_NO) Number for the printer connected to the NetWare print server (0 to 254) 0 RPrinter NPrinter AppleTalk Settings : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Settings Settings Using 㻠㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings Option Contents Default [Use AppleTalk] (ATLK_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Phase] Fixed at [Phase 2] [Phase 2] [Service Name] (APRINT_1) Up to 32 characters *1 LBP7780C [Zone] (ATK_ZONE) Up to 32 characters *2 * [Print Mode] [Open Both Spool and Direct], [Open Spool], [Open Direct] *1 "=", "@", "*", ":", and "~" cannot be used. *2 "=", "@", ":", and "~" cannot be used. Using FTP Client NetSpot Device Installer Using the Control Panel [Open Both Spool and Direct] SMB Settings : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option Contents Settings Settings Using Using Default NetSpot FTP Device Client Installer [Use SMB Server](SMB_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Server Name](SMB_SERVER) Up to 15 characters (Blank) [Workgroup Name](SMB_WG) Up to 15 characters (Blank) [Comments](SMB_COMMENT) Up to 48 characters (Blank) [Use LM Announce](SMB_LM_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Use SMB Printing](SMB_PRINT_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Printer Name](SMB_PRINTER) Up to 13 characters (Blank) Settings Using the Control Panel SNMP Settings : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option Contents Default [Use SNMPv1] (SNMP_V1_ENB) ON, OFF ON [Use Community Name 1] (SNMP_COMMUNITY1_ENB) ON, OFF ON 㻠㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings Settings Using Using NetSpot FTP Device Client Installer Settings Using the Control Panel [Community Name 1] (SNMP_COMMUNITY1_NAME) Up to 32 characters public [MIB Access Permission] (SNMP_COMMUNITY1_ACCESS) RW, RO ([Read/Write], [Read Only]) RO ([Read Only]) [Use Community Name 2] (SNMP_COMMUNITY2_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Community Name 2] (SNMP_COMMUNITY2_NAME) Up to 32 characters public2 [MIB Access Permission] (SNMP_COMMUNITY2_ACCESS) RW, RO ([Read/Write], [Read Only]) RO ([Read Only]) [Use SNMPv3] (SNMP_V3_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [Obtain Printer Management Information from Host] (SNMP_GET_PRT_MNG_INFO) ON, OFF OFF [Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode] ON, OFF OFF User Settings (SNMPv3) : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option Contents Default [User Name] Up to 32 alphanumeric characters initial [MIB Access Permission] [Read/Write], [Read Only] [Read/Write] [Security Settings] [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes], [Authentication Yes/Encryption No], [Authentication No/Encryption No] [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] [Authentication Algorithm] [MD5], [SHA1] [MD5] [Authentication Password] * 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters initial [Encryption Algorithm] [DES], [AES] [DES] [Encryption Password] * 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters initial * Settings Settings Settings Using Using Using NetSpot the FTP Device Control Client Installer Panel Can be specified only when the printer is in the state of SSL encrypted communication. (If the printer is not in the state of encrypted communication, specify the setting using the printer's control panel.) Context Settings (SNMPv3) : Can be specified Option : Cannot be specified Contents Settings Settings Using Using Default NetSpot FTP Device 㻠㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings Using the Control Panel Installer [Context Name 1] [Context Name 5] Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Client (Blank) Spooler Settings : Can be specified Option : Cannot be specified Settings Settings Using Using Contents Default NetSpot Settings Using the Control Panel FTP Device Client Installer [Use Spooler](SPOOL_ENB) ON, OFF OFF Startup Time Setting : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option [Startup Time] (STRT_DELAY_TIME) Settings Settings Settings Using Using Using Default NetSpot the FTP Device Control Client Installer Panel Contents Waiting time from when you turn the printer ON to when the printer starts obtaining the address (0 to 300 seconds) 0 Ethernet Driver Setting : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option Contents Default [Auto Detect] ON, OFF ON [Communication Mode] [Half Duplex], [Full Duplex] [Half Duplex] [Ethernet Type] [10 Base-T], [100 Base-TX], [1000 Base-T] [10 Base-T] Settings Settings Using Using NetSpot FTP Device Client Installer Settings Using the Control Panel E-Mail Print Settings : Can be specified : Cannot be specified Option Contents Settings Settings Using Using Default NetSpot FTP Device Client Installer [POP3 Server Name](EMAIL_POP_ADDR) Up to 48 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [POP3 User Name](EMAIL_POP_ACCOUNT) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (Blank) 㻠㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings Using the Control Panel [Password](EMAIL_POP_PASSWD) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (Blank) [POP3 RX Interval](EMAIL_POP_INTERVAL) 0 to 90 minutes 0 [POP3 RX](EMAIL_PRINT_ENB) ON, OFF OFF [POP3 Server Port Number](EMAIL_POP_PORTNO) 0 to 65535 110 [SMTP RX] ON, OFF OFF [SMTP Server Port Number] 0 to 65535 25 Remote UI Settings : Can be specified Option : Cannot be specified Settings Settings Using Using Default NetSpot FTP Device Client Installer Contents [Remote UI](RUI_ENB)* Turing ON or OFF the Remote UI ON [Use SSL] ON, OFF OFF * Settings Using the Control Panel Can be specified only by FTP Client or the printer's control panel Permitted Receiving MAC Address Settings : Can be specified Option : Cannot be specified Contents [MAC Address Filter] ON, OFF [MAC Address] (Display only) Settings Settings Using Using Default NetSpot Settings Using the Control Panel FTP Device Client Installer ON Software That Can Be Used for the Network Settings You can perform the network settings for this printer using the following software. : Specifiable : Not specifiable : Can perform a part of the settings Setting Type Web Browser (Remote UI) FTP Client NetSpot Device Installer Configuring the Ethernet Driver "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer 㻠㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ARP/PING Command Control Panel of the Printer Mode" Setting the Spool function "Setting the Spooling Function " Configuring the Communication Environment "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" Setting the IP Address of the Printer "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" Setting the TCP/IP Protocol "Configuring the Protocol Settings" Setting IP v. 6 "Setting IP v. 6" Preparing the NetWare Protocol Settings "Configuring NetWare" Setting the NetWare Protocol "Configuring the Protocol Settings" Setting the AppleTalk Protocol "Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)" Changing the Device Name or Administrator Information "Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information" Changing the Administrator Password "Setting the Administrator Password" 㻠㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Specifying the Job Operation Permission for Endusers "Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users" Restricting the Job Requests by Certain Devices "Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings" Setting the Key Lock Function "Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function)" Changing E-Mail Print Settings "Receiving Email Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)" 㻠㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-088 Initializing the Network Settings If you want to reset the network settings for the printer to the default values, use the printer's control panel. "Initializing the Network Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel" Initialize the network settings using the control panel while checking the display on the printer. IMPORTANT Precautions when initializing the network settings Make sure that the printer is not operating before initializing the network settings. If you initialize the network settings while the printer is printing or receiving data, the received data may not be printed properly, or may result in paper jams or damage to the printer. NOTE When checking the current settings "Checking the Printer Settings" 㻠㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-089 Initializing the Network Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel 1 Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 Select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message is displayed, press [OK]. 3 Select [Init. Network Set.] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻠㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08A Checking the MAC Address You need the MAC address of the printer to set the IP address using NetSpot Device Installer or the ARP/PING command. There are the following three methods for checking MAC addresses. "Checking the Network Ethernet Driver Screen from a Remote UI" "Printing a Network Status Print from the Printer's Control Panel and Checking It" "[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)" Checking the Network Ethernet Driver Screen from a Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻠㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Ethernet Driver Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻠㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Check the MAC address. Printing a Network Status Print from the Printer's Control Panel and Checking It NOTE Loading A4 size paper The Network Status Print is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Be sure to load A4 size paper when printing the Network Status Print. 1 Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer. 㻠㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Paper Loading and Output 2 Press [ ]( : Utility). 3 Select [Network Status Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. Network Status Print is printed. The MAC address (A) is indicated in [Ethernet Driver Settings] on the upper left of the Network Status Print. 㻠㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08C Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP) The requisite tasks to use the printer in the TCP/IP network are as follows. Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4) Configuring the Protocol Settings Setting IP v. 6 Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing 㻠㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08E Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4) There are the following three methods for setting the IP address. Setting the IP Address Using the Printer's Control Panel Set the IP address using the control panel while checking the display on the printer. Setting the IP Address Using the ARP/PING Commands Set the IP address using the ARP/PING command in Command Prompt. Setting the IP Address Using NetSpot Device Installer Set the IP address using NetSpot Device Installer in the supplied CD-ROM. IMPORTANT When setting the IP Address using the ARP/PING command or NetSpot Device Installer The MAC address of the printer is required. For details on the procedure for checking the MAC address, see "Checking the MAC Address." Before setting the IP address Make sure that the printer is connected to the network and the printer is ON. NOTE If you changed the IP address after installing the printer driver Specify the port to be used again in the printer driver. "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" 㻠㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08F Setting the IP Address Using the Printer's Control Panel To set the IP address using the printer's control panel, use the following menu hierarchies. * [Protocol] is displayed when [IP Mode] is set to [Auto]. Pressing [ ]( : Settings) displays the common Setup menu. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [ ] or [ ] on the control panel. indicates that the procedure is performed by pressing [OK] on the control panel. IMPORTANT After setting the IP address To enable the settings, perform a hard reset or restart the printer. For details on a hard reset, see "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." To go back up the hierarchy Press [ ]( : Back). About the control panel For details on the control panel, see "Control Panel." 1 Press [ ]( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message is displayed, press [OK]. You can specify the settings when the printer is either online (the (Online) indicator is off). 㻠㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (Online) indicator is on) or offline (the 2 Select [TCP/IP Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [IPv4 Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Set it to use [IPv4]. (1): After selecting [IPv4] using [ (2): After selecting [On] using [ ] or [ ], press [OK]. ] or [ ], press [OK]. 5 Select the method for setting the IP address. ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. (1): Select [IP Mode] using [ ] and [ (2): Select a method for setting the IP address using [ ], and then press [OK]. [Auto]: When setting the IP address using any one of DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, select this option. [Manual]: When specifying the IP address to the printer directly, select this option. 6 Set the IP address. If You Selected [Auto] in Step 5 If You Selected [Manual] in Step 5 If You Selected [Auto] in Step 5 1. Select [Protocol] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 2. Select [On] for the option to be used when setting the IP address. [Use DHCP]: Obtains an IP address using DHCP. (The DHCP server needs to be running.) [Use BOOTP]: Obtains an IP address using BOOTP. (The BOOTP daemon needs to be running.) [Use RARP]: Obtains an IP address using RARP. (The RARP daemon needs to be running.) NOTE When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP You can select only one from RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP. One of the following can be used: DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP. When any of the settings is turned [On], the remaining two settings are automatically turned [Off]. Because it takes approximately two minutes to check whether DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are available, we recommend that you set the unused protocol(s) to [Off]. When using DHCP If you cycle the power of the printer, you may not be able to print. This is because a different IP address from 㻠㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 the one that has been used is assigned. When using DHCP, consult your network administrator and perform either of the following settings. Specifying the DNS Dynamic Update function "Configuring the Protocol Settings" Specifying the settings so that the same IP address is always assigned when the printer starts up 3. Set the IP address, the subnet mask, and the gateway address manually as needed. When setting them manually, go back up the hierarchy by pressing [ ]( : Back), and then perform the procedure in "If You Selected [Manual] in Step 5." Even if you are using any one of DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address. If you cannot obtain information from the servers of DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP, the values specified manually are used. NOTE When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP You can select only one from RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP. After the printer restarts, the values obtained from DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are displayed. (If the values were specified previously, they overwrite the obtained ones.) 4. Proceed to Step 7. If You Selected [Manual] in Step 5 1. Select [IP Address Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] and [ 2. Select [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Gateway Address] using [ 3. [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Gateway Address] are each set. ], press [OK]. NOTE How to enter values in [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Gateway Address]. ] and [ ] to move the cursor to each field (an area separated by periods to enter 1. Press [ three-digit numbers) in which you want to enter respective values of the address. (The numbers in the field blinks, allowing you to enter the value.) ] increases the value and [ ] decreases the value.) 2. Enter the value. (Pressing [ 3. After entering values in all the fields, press [OK] to confirm the setting. 4. Proceed to Step 7. 7 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE For details on a hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻠㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08H Setting the Printer to a Static IP Address 1 Press [ ]( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message appears, press [OK]. You can configure the settings, regardless of whether the printer is online (with the [ turned on) or offline (with the [ ]( ]( : Online) indicator : Online) indicator turned off). 2 Select [TCP/IP Settings] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [IPv4 Settings] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Enable [IPv4 Settings]. ] or [ (1): Select [IPv4] using [ (2): Select [On] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select how to configure the IP address. ] or [ (1): Select [IP Mode] using [ (2): Select [Manual] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. ], and then press [OK]. 6 Configure the IP address. (1): Select [IP Address Settings] using [ ] or [ (2): Select [IP Address] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. (3): Configure [IP Address]. NOTE How to enter values in [IP Address] ] or [ ] 1. Move between the fields (four sets of up to three decimal numbers separated by periods) using [ when entering the IP address you want to configure. (The values in the selected field start flashing for you to enter the address.) 2. Enter the values. (Press [ ] to increase the value and press [ 㻠㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ] to decrease the value.) 3. When you have finished entering all the values, press [OK] for the setting to take effect. If you are not sure what to enter in [IP Address]: If you are not sure what values you should enter for the IP address, contact your network administrator or see "Determining Which IP Address to Assign to the Printer" for more information. 7 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. The settings become effective after hard resetting or restarting the printer. NOTE About details of hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻠㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08J Determining Which IP Address to Assign to the Printer Follow the steps in the procedure below to assign the IP address to the printer. 1 Open the router setup screen. For instructions on how to open the router setup screen, see the instruction manual that comes with the router you are using or consult the manufacturer or your network administrator. 2 Determine which IP address to assign to the printer. Your router is preconfigured to assign a specific range of IP addresses using DHCP. Check which range of IP addresses your router assigns using DHCP and assign an IP address outside that range to the printer. This prevents this printer from being assigned the same IP address already assigned to another device. Example: Router setup screen * This example shows the range of IP addresses the router assigns using DHCP is from 192.168.11.2 to 192.168.11.65. You need to assign an IP address within a range from 192.168.11.66 to 192.168.11.254. NOTE IP address An IP address is a unique address used in order to identify any device connected to a network. It consists of four sets of numbers from 0 to 255 separated by three periods (.), as shown by the example, "192.168.11.1". 㻠㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08K Setting the IP Address Using the ARP/PING Commands NOTE If your computer and the printer are connected via the router You cannot set the IP address using the ARP/PING command. 1 Run Command Prompt. NOTE If you are using Windows Run Command Prompt using the following procedure. )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@ If you are using Macintosh Perform the following procedure. 1. Run Terminal. 6HOHFWWKHKDUGGLVN\RXXVHĺ>$SSOLFDWLRQV@ĺWKH>8WLOLWLHV@IROGHUDQGWKHQGRXEOHFOLFNWKH>7HUPLQDO@ icon. 2. Enter "su", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. 3. "Password:" is displayed. Enter the root password, and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. If you are using UNIX Display the console screen, and then log in as a super user. 2 Enter "arp -s <IP address> <MAC address>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. <IP address>: Enter the IP address to assign to the printer. Specify the address with four numbers (from 0 to 255) separated with a period (.). <MAC address>: Enter the MAC address of the printer. When entering the number, separate the number every two digits with a hyphen (-) (a colon (:) for Macintosh/UNIX). Input Example (Windows): "arp -s 192.168.0.215 00-1E-8F-46-80-2e" Input Example (Macintosh/UNIX): "arp -s 192.168.0.215 00:1E:8F:46:80:2e" NOTE If you are using IBM-AIX Enter "arp -s ether <the IP address> <the MAC address>." 3 Enter the following command, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. If you are using Windows: "ping <the IP address> -l 479" 㻠㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you are using Macintosh: "ping -c 1 -s 479 <the IP address>" If you are using Solaris 1.x/2.x: "ping -s <the IP address> 479" If you are using IBM-AIX: "ping <the IP address> 479" If you are using HP-UX: "ping <the IP address> 487" If you are using Linux: "ping -s 479 <the IP address>" <IP address>: Enter the same IP address as the one entered in Step 2. Enter a lowercase "L" for "-l." Input Example (Windows): "ping 192.168.0.215 -l 479" ĺ The IP address is set for the printer. The subnet mask and gateway address are set to [0.0.0.0]. 4 Enter "exit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. ĺ Command Prompt closes. 㻠㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08L Setting the IP Address Using NetSpot Device Installer For details on other procedures for starting and using NetSpot Device Installer, see the following. Starting method: "Printer Driver Installation Guide" For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." Usage: Help of NetSpot Device Installer Help is displayed by clicking [Help] in the [Help] menu. IMPORTANT If Windows Firewall is enabled Before starting NetSpot Device Installer, configure Windows Firewall to unblock NetSpot Device Installer. For details on the configuration procedure, see the Readme file of NetSpot Device Installer. For operating systems not compatible with NetSpot Device Installer Perform the settings from another computer on the network or by using the printer's control panel or the ARP/PING command. 㻠㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08R Configuring the Protocol Settings This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network. Before specifying the settings, see "Attention (Protocol Settings)." NOTE When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI You can also specify the settings using the following software. "FTP Client" You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. "NetSpot Device Installer" You can specify the settings using the Canon software, NetSpot Device Installer, in the supplied CD-ROM. If you want to configure the settings such as the DNS server settings, use the Remote UI or FTP Client. The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 㻠㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 4 Click [TCP/IP Settings]. 5 Configure the protocol settings. Setting IP v. 4 WINS Settings ARP/PING Settings 㻠㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 FTP Settings LPD Settings RAW Settings IPP/IPPS Settings WSD Settings HTTP Settings Setting SSL Keys and Certificates Proxy Settings Multicast Discovery Settings SNTP Settings Department ID Management PIN Configuration Settings Setting IP v. 4 (1) Click [Edit...] in [IPv4 Settings]. (2) Set the IP address. [Use IPv4] When the check box is selected, use IPv4. [Select Protocol] Select the protocol used from [Off], [DHCP], [RARP] or [BOOTP]. 㻠㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When [Off] is selected using [Select Protocol], set the following items. [IP Address] Enter the printer's IP address. [Subnet Mask] Enter the subnet mask used by the TCP/IP network. [Gateway Address] Enter the gateway address used by the TCP/IP network. (3) Set DNS. [Primary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. [Secondary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. [Host Name] Enter the host name to be added to the DNS server. Up to 47 characters can be entered. [Domain Name] Enter the name of the domain to which the printer belongs. Up to 47 characters can be entered. Entry example: "example.com" [DNS Dynamic Update] Select the check box when using the DNS Dynamic Update function. When you are not using the DNS Dynamic Update Function, clear the check box. Using the DNS Dynamic Update function, by registering the [Host Name] and [Domain Name] to the DNS server, the printer's IP address can be used without being fixed. (4) Set DHCP option settings. 㻠㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Acquire Host Name] When obtaining the host name using DHCP, select the [Acquire Host Name] check box. [DNS Dynamic Update] When updating the host name using DHCP, select the [DNS Dynamic Update] check box. (5) Click [OK]. Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. WINS Settings (1) Click [Edit...] in [WINS Configuration]. 㻠㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (2) Set WINS. When Using WINS Resolution Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and set the following items. Enter the IP address of the WINS server. [WINS Server Address] When using the IP address settings specified by DHCP, if you obtain the WINS server IP address from the DHCP server, the IP address obtained from the DHCP server is overwritten. Enter [Scope ID] as needed. You can enter up to 63 characters. [Scope ID] The scope ID is an identifier to determine the range available for printers and computers. The scope ID is browsed regardless of the WINS resolution settings. When a scope ID is not specified for the computer in your network environment, leave the [Scope ID] field blank. 㻠㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Set the following items when registering printers on the WINS server. Enter the name of the WINS server. You can enter up to 15 characters. (spaces cannot be entered between the characters) [SMB Server Name] Set the server name that was set here using the SMB function. [SMB Workgroup Name] Enter the workgroup name. You can enter up to 15 characters.(spaces cannot be entered between the characters) Set the workgroup name that was set here using the SMB function. When not Using WINS Resolution Clear the [WINS Resolution] check box. (3) Click [OK]. Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. ARP/PING Settings Select whether to use the ARP/PING function. (1) Click [Edit...] in [ARP/PING Settings]. (2) Set ARP/PING. 㻠㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Use ARP/PING] When the check box is selected, you can change the IP address settings from the client using the ARP/PING command. (3) Click [OK]. IMPORTANT When the [Use ARP/PING] check box is cleared You cannot set the IP address using the ARP/PING command. Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. FTP Settings (1) Click [Edit...] in [FTP Print Settings]. 㻠㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (2) Set FTP print. [Use FTP Print] When the check box is selected, you can access the printer's FTP server using the FTP client and print files. [FTP Print User Name] Enter the user name for logging in to the FTP server. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. You cannot set "root." [Set/Change Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password. [Password] Enter the password for logging in to the FTP server. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the entered [Password] again. [FTP Settings] When the check box is selected, changing settings from the FTP client is allowed. (3) Click [OK]. 㻠㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. LPD Settings (1) Click [Edit...] in [LPD Print Settings]. (2) Set LPD print. 㻠㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Use LPD Printing] When the check box is selected, the LPD print function is enabled. [Print LPD Banner Page] When the check box is selected, whenever it prints using LPD applications, a banner page is printed simultaneously. Banner page printing is set for each job. If the [Print LPD Banner Page] check box is selected, a banner page is printed simultaneously for jobs that are set to print banners. Banner pages are not printed for jobs that are set not to print banner pages. If you are not printing pages, clear the [Print LPD Banner Page] check box. If the [Print LPD Banner Page] check box is cleared, it will not always print banner pages. (3) Click [OK]. Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. RAW Settings Normally, you do not need to change the settings for this option. 㻠㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) Click [Edit...] in [RAW Print Settings]. (2) Set RAW printing. [Use RAW Printing] When the check box is selected, the RAW printing function is enabled. [Use Bidirectional Communication] When the check box is selected, bidirectional communication is performed. (3) Click [OK]. 㻠㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. IPP/IPPS Settings (1) Click [Edit...] in [IPP Print Settings]. (2) Set IPP print. 㻠㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 To Use IPP/IPPS Printing Select the [Use IPP] check box, and set the following items. When the check box is selected, you can use IPPS (encryption of IPP communication data using SSL). You can only use IPPS when the SSL encrypted communication function is enabled. [Use SSL] [Use IPP Authentication] You cannot select the [Use SSL] check box if a key and certificate have been created but the use key is not registered. See "Selecting Keys and Certificates" for more information about SSL encrypted communication functions and key registration procedures. When the check box is selected, use the IPP print user authentication function. When the [Use IPP Authentication] check box is selected, set the following items. [User Name] Enter the user name used for the IPP print user authentication function. Up to 24 characters can be entered. [Set/Change Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password. [Password] Enter the password used for the IPP print user authentication function. Up to 24 characters can be entered. [Confirm] For confirmation, enter the same [Password] again. IMPORTANT When the [Use IPP] check box is selected The HTTP setting [Use HTTP] turns [On] automatically. "HTTP Settings" When Not Using IPP/IPPS Printing Clear the [Use IPP] check box. (3) Click [OK]. 㻠㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. WSD Settings (1) Click [Edit...] in [WSD Print Settings]. (2) Set WSD printing. 㻠㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Use WSD Printing] Select the check box to use WSD printing. [Use WSD Browsing] When the check box is selected, it obtains printer information using WSD reference. If you select the [Use WSD Printing] check box, the [Use WSD Browsing] check box will always be selected. You can only clear the [Use WSD Browsing] check box when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is cleared. [Use Multicast Discovery] Select the check box to use Multicast Discovery. (3) Click [OK]. Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. HTTP Settings Specify whether to use the HTTP function. (1) Click [Edit...] in [HTTP Settings]. 㻠㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (2) Set HTTP. [Use HTTP] When the check box is selected, you can access the printer using HTTP. IMPORTANT When the [Use HTTP] check box is cleared The settings on the functions using HTTP change automatically, as shown below. [Use IPP Print] [Off] [Remote UI]* [Off] * Can only be set from the printer's control panel and the FTP client If the [Use HTTP] check box is cleared, you will not be able to use IPP print or Remote UI, so consult with the network administrator before you set it. (3) Click [OK]. 㻠㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. Setting SSL Keys and Certificates Check the key used for SSL. See "Selecting Keys and Certificates" for more information about SSL encrypted communication functions and key registration and selection procedures. Proxy Settings (1) Click [Edit...] in [Proxy Settings]. (2) Set proxy functions. 㻠㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When using proxy functions Select the [Use Proxy] check box, and set the following items. [HTTP Proxy Server Address] Enter the address of the proxy server used by the proxy functions. [HTTP Proxy Server Port Number] Enter the port number of the proxy server used by the proxy functions. You can set it between [0] and [99999]. [Use Proxy within Same Domain] When the check box is selected, use the proxy function within the same domain. When not using proxy functions Clear the [Use Proxy] check box. (3) Set proxy authentication functions. 㻠㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When using proxy authentication functions Select the [Use Proxy Authentication] check box, and set the following items. [User Name] Enter the user name used for proxy authentication. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Set/Change Password] Select the check box to use a password for proxy authentication. When you are not using a password for proxy authentication, clear the check box. [Password] When [Set/Change Password] is selected, enter the password used for proxy authentication. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the entered [Password] again. When not using proxy authentication functions Clear the [Use Proxy Authentication] check box. (4) Click [OK]. Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. Multicast Discovery Settings Set whether the printer will respond to device searches over the network using Multicast Discovery. (1) Click [Edit...] in [Multicast Discovery Settings]. 㻠㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (2) Set Multicast Discovery. [Respond to Discovery] Select the check box to allow it to respond to a multicast search request. [Scope Name] Enter the scope name used when a specified device is searched from utility software such as NetSpot Device Installer using multicast. Up to 32 characters can be entered. (3) Click [OK]. 㻠㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. SNTP Settings Set whether to synchronize the printer time with the NTP server. (1) Click [Edit...] in [SNTP Settings]. (2) Set SNTP. 㻠㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When using the SNTP client function to obtain time information from the NTP server Select the [Use SNTP] check box, and set the following items. [NTP Server Name] If DNS is set, enter the server name of the NTP server in [NTP Server Name]. If DNS is not set, enter the IP address of the NTP server in [NTP Server Name]. [Polling Interval] Set the interval for the printer to poll the NTP server for time information. You can set intervals of [1] to [48] (hours). NOTE NTP Server It is a public time information server on the Internet. When not Using the SNTP Client Function Clear the [Use SNTP] check box. (3) Click [OK]. 㻠㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. Department ID Management PIN Configuration Settings Specifies whether the department ID and password should be confirmed before printing using the XPS printer driver. (1) Click [Edit...] in [Department ID Management PIN Confirmation Settings]. (2) Set the Department ID Management PIN Confirmation function. [Use Department ID Management PIN Confirmation] Select the check box to confirm the department ID and password when printing. IMPORTANT To use this function, you need to enable Department ID Management in advance. "Specifying an ID for Each Department " A key pair to use for encrypted SSL communication is required to confirm Department IDs and passwords. Even if you enable [Department ID Management PIN Confirmation Settings], Department IDs and passwords cannot be confirmed if the key pair is corrupted or invalid. In this case, erase the key pair and see "Setting Keys and Certificates" to register a new key pair. 㻠㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If there is no key pair, you cannot enable [Department ID Management PIN Confirmation Settings]. You can use the preinstalled key pair, or generate an original key pair with the printer, to set as the default key. For information on the default key, and instructions on how to generate an original key, see "Setting Keys and Certificates." (3) Click [OK]. Proceed to Step 6 if you do not specify the settings for the other options. 6 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻠㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08S Attention (Protocol Settings) When setting the IP address NOTE If you changed the IP address after installing the printer driver Specify the port to be used again in the printer driver. "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP One of the following can be used: DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP. When any of the settings is turned [On], the remaining two settings are automatically turned [Off]. Because it takes one to two minutes to check whether DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are available, we recommend that you set the unused protocol(s) to [Off]. Each server or daemon (the DHCP server, BOOTP daemon, or RARP daemon) must be running on the network. Even if you are using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, specify the settings for [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Gateway Address] manually. If you cannot obtain information from the servers of DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP, the values specified manually are used. After the printer restarts, the values obtained from DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP are displayed. (If the values have been specified previously, they overwrite the obtained ones.) When using DHCP If you cycle the power of the printer, you may not be able to print. This is because a different IP address from the one that has been used is assigned. When using DHCP, consult your network administrator and perform either of the following settings. Specifying the DNS Dynamic Update function Specifying the settings so that the same IP address is always assigned when the printer starts up When configuring the DNS Settings IMPORTANT DNS Dynamic Update DNS Dynamic Update is a function that adds the IP address of the device and the names specified as the host name and domain name to the DNS server automatically. This function can be used in the environment in which a Dynamic DNS server is being used. When using the DNS Dynamic Update function You need to set the IP address, host name, and domain name of the DNS server. When configuring the WINS Settings IMPORTANT WINS WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) is a service that maps NetBIOS names (names of computers or printers) to IP addresses. A WINS server is required to use WINS. If [Scope ID] is specified The printer cannot communicate with the computers that have a different scope ID. When configuring the Multicast Discovery Settings NOTE Multicast discovery This is a function that searches for certain devices using Service Location Protocol (SLP). 㻠㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 By using the multicast discovery function, you can search for only the devices whose values in [Scope Name] are verified, using the service location protocol (SLP) from utility software, such as NetSpot Device Installer. When configuring the SNTP Settings NOTE When the check box for [Use SNTP] is selected [Check NTP Server Connection] is displayed on the [TCP/IP Settings] page on the [Network]. When [Check NTP Server Connection] is clicked, the printer communicates with the specified NTP server, and the result of the communication is displayed in [NTP Server Connection Check Result]. [OK] is displayed if the printer communicated with the NTP server successfully, and [Error] is displayed if the printer could not communicate with the NTP server due to any reason such as a setting mistake or communication error. 㻠㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08U Setting IP v. 6 This section describes the procedure for setting IP v. 6. Specify the settings for IP v. 6 using the Remote UI after specifying the settings for IP v. 4. NOTE About the IP v. 6 address This printer can have up to seven IP v. 6 addresses of the following types. (Only one address can be registered manually.) IP v. 6 communication allows you to use multiple IP v. 6 addresses simultaneously. Type Registrable Number Overview Link-Local Address 1 A link local address is an IPv6 address that is generated automatically using the specific prefix (information indicating to which network the machine belongs) "fe80::" and an interface identifier generated from the MAC address of the printer. Because this address is valid only within the same prefix, it cannot traverse the router. One link-local address is specified for this printer whenever IP v. 6 is being used. Manual Address 0 to 1 A manual address is a fixed address entered manually. By setting the IP address manually, you can specify the prefix length and the default router address. Stateless Address 0 to 4 A stateless address is a temporary IPv6 address that is automatically generated using the prefix included in the RA (Router Advertisement) that is notified from the router and the printer's MAC address. If the created IPv6 addresses do not overlap on the network, they may be allocated as the printer's IP address. Stateful Address 0 to 1 You can obtain a stateful address from the DHCP server using DHCP v. 6. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 㻠㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 4 Click [TCP/IP Settings]. 㻠㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Click [Edit...] under [IPv6 Settings]. 6 Select the [Use IPv6] check box. 㻠㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7 Specify the stateless address. Check the [Use Stateless Address] check box when using a stateless address. NOTE Stateless Address Retention After the [Use Stateless Address] check box is selected and the printer is restarted, the stateless address is displayed automatically. This stateless address is discarded when the printer is turned OFF. 㻠㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 If you want to use a manual address, specify the following settings. If you do not want to use a manual address, proceed to Step 9. (1) (2) (3) (4) Select the [Use Manual Address] check box. Enter [IP Address]. Enter [Prefix Length]. Enter [Default Router Address] as needed. IMPORTANT Addresses which cannot be entered in [IP Address] and [Default Router Address] An address which starts with "ff" (multicast address) An address which starts with "0:0:" 9 Specify DHCP v. 6. When using the stateful address, select the [Use DHCPv6] check box. 㻠㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 10 If you want to use the DNS server, specify the following settings. If you do not want to use the DNS server, proceed to Step 11. You can specify the following [DNS Settings]. (1) Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server in [Primary DNS Server Address]. (2) Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server in [Secondary DNS Server Address]. (3) Set [Host Name] and [Domain Name]. Select the [Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names] check box to use the same host name and domain name as IPv4. After the printer is restarted, the host name and domain name set by IPv4 are set automatically. When using a host name and domain name that are different from IPv4, enter [Host Name] and [Domain Name]. You can enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters. Example of [Domain Name] entry: "example.com" 㻠㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 11 If you want to use DNS Dynamic Update, specify the following settings. If you do not want to use the DNS server, proceed to Step 12. (1) Select the [DNS Dynamic Update] check box. Using the DNS Dynamic Update function, by registering the [Host Name] and [Domain Name] to the DNS server, the printer's IP address can be used without being fixed. (2) Set whether to register the IPv6 address to the DNS server during DNS dynamic updates. If you select the [Register Manual Address] check box, a manual address is registered to the DNS server. If you select the [Register Stateful Address] check box, a stateful address is registered to the DNS server. If you select the [Register Stateless Address] check box, a stateless address is registered to the DNS server. IMPORTANT DNS Dynamic Update DNS Dynamic Update is a function that adds the IP address of the device and the names specified as the host name and domain name to the DNS server automatically. This function can be used in the environment in which a Dynamic DNS server is being used. When using the DNS Dynamic Update function You need to set the IP address, host name, and domain name of the DNS server. 12 Click [OK]. 㻠㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 13 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻠㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08W Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing After completing the protocol settings for the printer, configure each computer to be used for printing. This section describes the procedure for when you are using Windows. If you are using Macintosh, see "Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing" in "Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk)." Connecting to a TCP/IP Network Install TCP/IP client software on all the computers to be used for printing to make them able to use a TCP/IP network. For more details, see the instruction manual for the operating system. Print Application Selection This printer supports the following print applications when being used on a TCP/IP network. LPD RAW IPP/IPPS FTP WSD NOTE Print application A print application is software that receives print data sent via a network and outputs the data to the printer. A print application is required to print to the printer on a network. About the printer connection The setting procedure for the printer connection varies depending on the print application. Perform the settings for the printer connection after installing the printer driver. For details on the features of print applications, see the following. "Features of LPD" "Features of RAW" "Features of IPP/IPPS" "Features of WSD" For details on the procedure for configuring a print application, see the following. "Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)" "Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS)" "Connecting the Printer (WSD)" NOTE When using FTP Client You can print using FTP client software. For details on the procedure for printing using FTP client software, see "FTP Client." To manage the printer effectively You can manage the printer effectively as follows by specifying Windows on the network as the print server. The print server manages print data. If you install an alternative printer driver previously, other computers can install the printer driver via the network. For details on the procedure for configuring the print server, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." 㻠㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08X Features of LPD This is a print application that can be used on Windows, Mac OS X, UNIX, and Linux. LPD is generally used for a TCP/IP network environment. Advantages LPD printing is the most common network printing method supported by Windows, Mac OS X, UNIX, and Linux as standard. You can also print a banner page. Even if you should restart the printer while the printer is printing, the print data is guaranteed because the print job is retransmitted (when a byte count is specified on printing). Disadvantage You cannot obtain the detailed information about print jobs. Usage Example When sharing the printer by multiple users (because it is easy to identify the owner of the print data by using the banner page) When there are a variety of computers (operating systems) in the same network environment, and you want to print using only one print application Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)" 㻠㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-08Y Features of RAW This is a print application that can be used on Windows. By using this printer application, you can generally print faster than when using LPD. Advantages You can print relatively faster than when using other applications. When printing in Windows, the print settings using RAW are easier than using other print applications. Disadvantage You cannot obtain the detailed information about print jobs. RAW is supported as standard by only Windows, not supported by Macintosh, UNIX, and Linux. Usage Example If you are using Windows and want to use the printer immediately after installing it Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)" 㻠㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-090 Features of IPP/IPPS IPP is a print application that can be used on Windows etc. By using this print application, you can print not only to a printer on your LAN, but also to a remote printer via the Internet. IPPS is a print application that performs SSL encrypted communication when using IPP. IPPS can be used on Windows when the SSL encrypted communication function is enabled. Advantages You can print using the printer on the Internet. You can obtain information about print jobs and the printer. Disadvantage Printing takes relatively more time than other print applications do. Usage Example When printing using a remote printer via the Internet Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS)" 㻠㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-091 Features of WSD This is a print application that can be used on Windows Vista, 7, and Server 2008. By using WSD, you can search for the printer automatically as well as obtain information about jobs and the printer, using the WSD protocol. Advantages You can search printers on a network automatically. Installation of the printer driver is easy. WSD can notify the computer of job completion and obtain the printer's configuration information automatically. Disadvantage Windows Vista, 7, and Server 2008 are only operating systems that support WSD. Usage Example If you are using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008 and want to use the printer immediately after installing it Setting Method "Connecting the Printer (WSD)" 㻠㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-092 Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW) Configure the protocol settings. If You Are Using Windows If You Are Using UNIX If You Are Using Windows When Installing the Printer Driver from the Beginning 1 Install the printer driver. Following the procedure for automatically searching the printer on a network in "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install the printer driver. For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." NOTE When using LPD When the printer driver is installed using the above method, RAW is specified as the print application to be used. If you want to use LPD, install the printer driver using the above procedure, and then change a port. When Changing a Port 1 Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 3 Perform the following procedure. (1) Display the [Ports] tab. (2) Click [Add Port]. 㻠㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Select the port type. (1) Select [Standard TCP/IP Port]. (2) Click [New Port]. 5 Click [Next]. 6 Enter the IP address or name of the printer. (1) Enter the IP address or name * of the printer in [Printer Name or IP Address]. * The DNS name to be registered on the DNS server (up to 78 characters) (2) Click [Next]. 㻠㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 IMPORTANT If the printer cannot be detected The following screen appears. Perform either of the following operations. Follow the on-screen instructions and search again for the printer. Specify the setting for [Device Type]. (1) Select [Standard], and then select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100]. (2) Click [Next]. NOTE If you are not sure about the value to enter The value to be entered varies depending on how the IP address of the printer was set. For more details, see "Values for Setting a Port" or ask your network administrator. 7 Click [Finish]. 8 㻠㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Click [Close]. 9 Click [Apply]. If you want to use LPD, proceed to Step 10. If you want to use RAW, proceed to Step 11. 10 If you want to use LPD, change the port configuration information. When using LPD printing, set up the LPR protocol using the procedure below. (1) Click [Configure Port]. (2) Select [LPR]. (3) Enter "lp" in [Queue Name]. (4) Click [OK]. 㻠㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 11 Click [OK]. NOTE When deleting an unnecessary port Select the unnecessary port on the [Ports] tab, and then click [Delete Port]. If You Are Using UNIX This section describes the preparation for printing using LPD. For details on the procedure for printing using FTP, see "FTP Client." IMPORTANT About the setting procedure The procedure described here is a setting example. Depending on the system environment, the setting procedure may be different. Specify the settings also when using a computer on which UNIX OS is installed as a stand-alone workstation along the procedure described here. 1 Log in to the UNIX server as a root user. IMPORTANT If you do not have the root user permission on the UNIX server Consult your network administrator. 2 Edit the "/etc/hosts" file to add the printer to the local network. 1. Open the "/etc/hosts" file using a text editor. 2. Add the following line. Form: <The fixed IP address of the printer> (a tab) <the printer name> (a tab) # <comment> Input Example: 192.168.0.215 LBP7780Cx #the printer to be added 㻠㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you specified [DNS Host Name] of the printer, specify the same character string as [DNS Host Name] in <the printer name>. For more details on [DNS Host Name], see "Configuring the Protocol Settings." 3. After saving the "/etc/hosts" file, exit the text editor. IMPORTANT Be sure to assign a fixed IP address to the printer. When printing from UNIX OS, be sure to assign a fixed IP address to the printer. For details on the procedure for setting the IP address, see "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)." 3 Set up the spooling system on the UNIX server. Example Example Example Example of of of of When When When When Using Using Using Using Solaris 1.x Solaris 2.x or Later HP-UX IBM-AIX Example of When Using Solaris 1.x 1. Enter the following in the "/etc/printcap" file. Form: :<Print queue name>|<comment>:\ :lp=<the device special file>:\ :sd=<the spool directory>:\ :if=<the log file directory>:\ :rm=<the IP address or name of the printer> Input Example: :print_queue_name|comments:\ :lp=/var/spool/print_queue_name/.null:\ :sd=/var/spool/print_queue_name:\ :if=/var/spool/print_queue_name/log:\ :rm=printer_host_name In the line of "rm", enter the same contents that you entered in <the printer name>. 2. Create the spool directory for the printer. Execute the following commands. Form: mkdir -p <the spool directory> chown daemon <the spool directory> Input Example: mkdir -p /var/spool/print_queue_name chown daemon /var/spool/print_queue_name In <the spool directory>, enter the same character string that you added in the "/etc/printcap" file. 3. Create the log file for the printer. Execute the following commands. Form: cp /dev/null <the log file directory> Input Example: cp /dev/null /var/spool/print_queue_name/log 4. Proceed to Step 4. Example of When Using Solaris 2.x or Later 1. Run "admintool." The "admintool" utility is supplied with an operating system. For more details, see the manual for the operating system. 㻠㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 2. % 3. }} 4. Enter an arbitrary print queue name in [Printer Name], and then enter the IP address or name of the printer in [Print Server]. 5. Select [OK]. 6. Proceed to Step 4. Example of When Using HP-UX 1. Run "SAM." The "SAM" utility is supplied with an operating system. For more details, see the manual for the operating system. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Select [Printers and Plotters]. Select [LP Spooler] from the [Printers and Plotters] menu. Select [Printers and Plotter] from the [LP Spooler] menu. Select [Add Remote Printer/Plotter] from the [Action] menu. Enter an arbitrary print queue name in [Printer Name], and then enter the IP address or name of the printer in [Remote System Name]. Enter "lp" in [Remote Printer Name]. Select [Remote Printer is on a BSD System]. Select [OK]. Proceed to Step 4. Example of When Using IBM-AIX 1. Run "SMIT." The "SMIT" utility is supplied with an operating system. For more details, see the manual for the operating system. 2. } 3. Select [Standard processing]. 4. Enter an arbitrary print queue name in [remote queue name] and the IP address or name of the printer in [Hostname of Remote Server]. 5. Enter "lp" in [name of the queue] on the remote server. 6. Enter "BSD" in [type of print spooler] on the remote server. 7. Proceed to Step 4. 4 Enter the following commands and check if you can print. Form: lp -d <the print queue name> <the name of the file to be printed> Input Example: lp -d print_queue_name report 㻠㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-093 Values for Setting a Port Depending on the method for setting the IP address of the printer, the value to be entered in [Printer Name or IP Address] on the following screen displayed in the process of port setting varies. If you want to set the IP address to be assigned to the printer manually (If you know the IP address to use) Enter the IP address in [Printer Name or IP Address]. If you want to set the IP address using the DNS server, specify the DNS settings for the printer. Then, enter the printer name (the DNS name registered on the DNS server) within up to 78 characters in [Printer Name or IP Address]. For example, enter the printer name as "AAA.BBB.com" if you specified the host name as "AAA" and the domain name as "BBB.com." However, enter "AAA.CCC.com" if you can obtain the domain name (CCC.com) simultaneously when you obtain the IP address from DHCP and so on. If you want to set the IP address to be assigned to the printer using DHCP and so on Specify the settings such as the DHCP settings so that the same IP address is always assigned to the printer when you start the printer. For more details, see "If you want to set the IP address to be assigned to the printer manually" above. If a different IP address is assigned to the printer each time the printer starts, specify the DNS settings for the printer first. Then, enter the printer name (the DNS name registered on the DNS server) within up to 78 characters in [Printer Name or IP Address]. For example, enter the printer name as "AAA.BBB.com" if you specified the host name as "AAA" and the domain name as "BBB.com." However, enter "AAA.CCC.com" if you can obtain the domain name (CCC.com) simultaneously when you obtain the IP address from DHCP and so on. NOTE About the DNS settings See "Configuring the Protocol Settings." 㻠㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-094 Connecting the Printer (IPP/IPPS) If You Are Using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008 If You Are Using Windows XP or Server 2003 If You Are Using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008 IMPORTANT When using IPPS printing You need to obtain the public key for this printer and install it on Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008. For details on the procedure for obtaining the public key, see "Obtaining the Public Key for This Printer When Using SSL Encrypted Communication." NOTE About the screenshots This procedure is described using screenshots from Windows 7. 1 Confirm the setting for [IP Address Filter]. Make sure that the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is not restricted to print. "Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings" IMPORTANT If printing is restricted You cannot install the printer driver. If printing is restricted after the installation If the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is restricted to perform printing in [Receive/Print Range Setting], you cannot print from the computer. 2 Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 3 Click [Add a printer]. 4 Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer]. 㻠㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Click [The printer that I want isn't listed]. 6 Perform the following procedure. (1) Select [Select a shared printer by name]. (2) Enter "http://<the IP address or name of the printer>/ipp." When you want to perform IPPS printing using SSL encrypted communication, enter "https://<the IP address or name of the printer>/ipp." (3) Click [Next]. IMPORTANT About IPPS IPPS can be used only when the SSL encrypted communication function is enabled. 㻠㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates." 7 Click [Have Disk], and then specify the folder that contains the printer driver from the CD-ROM drive. NOTE When you are using the IPP authentication function If you are asked to enter the password, enter the user name and password, and then click [OK]. For details on the settings for the IPP authentication function, see "Configuring the Protocol Settings." 8 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the printer driver. If You Are Using Windows XP or Server 2003 1 Confirm the setting for [Receive/Print Range Setting]. Make sure that the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is not restricted to print. "Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings" NOTE If printing is restricted You cannot install the printer driver. If printing is restricted after the installation If the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is restricted to perform printing in [Receive/Print Range Setting], you cannot print from the computer. 2 Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 3 㻠㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Display [Add Printer Wizard]. Click [Add a printer]. Double-click [Add Printer]. 4 Click [Next]. 5 Select a printer type. (1) Select [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer]. (2) Click [Next]. 6 Select the printer to be connected. Select [Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network]. 㻠㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7 Enter [URL]. (1) Enter "http://<the IP address or name of the printer>/ipp." When you want to perform IPPS printing using SSL encrypted communication, enter "https://<the IP address or name of the printer>/ipp." (2) Click [Next]. IMPORTANT About IPPS IPPS can be used only when the SSL encrypted communication function is enabled. For details on the SSL encrypted communication function, see "Setting Keys and Certificates." 8 Click [Have Disk], and then specify the folder that contains the printer driver from the CD-ROM drive. NOTE When you are using the IPP authentication function 㻠㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you are asked to enter the password, enter the user name and password, and then click [OK]. For details on the settings for the IPP authentication function, see "Configuring the Protocol Settings." 9 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the printer driver. 㻠㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-095 Obtaining the Public Key for This Printer When Using SSL Encrypted Communication If you want to use IPPS printing, you need to obtain the public key for this printer using the following procedure and install it on Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008. 1 Start the Web browser. 2 Enter "https://<the IP address or name of the printer>/" in the address field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. Input Example: "https://192.168.0.215/" 3 Click [Continue to this website (not recommended).] to display the Remote UI screen. 4 Double-click [Internet | Protected Mode] on the lower right of the Web browser. 5 Select [Trusted sites], and then click [Sites]. 6 ^ Z \ }; 7 If the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] check box is selected, clear the check box. 8 Click [OK] to redisplay the Remote UI screen. 9 Exit the Web browser once, and then restart it. 㻠㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 10 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to start the Remote UI, and then click [Continue to this website (not recommended).]. 11 Click [Certificate Error] on the right of the address entry field, and then select [View certificates]. 12 Click [Install Certificate] in the displayed dialog box to run the Certificate Import Wizard. 13 Click [Next], select [Place all certificates in the following store], and then click [Browse]. 14 Select [Trusted Root Certification Authorities], and then complete the Wizard following the instructions on the screen. 15 If you cleared the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] check box in Step 7, select the check box. 㻠㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-096 Connecting the Printer (WSD) NOTE If the confirmation dialog box appears during the procedure Enter the user name and password. For more details, see the manual etc. supplied with the operating system. 1 Confirm the setting for [Receive/Print Range Setting]. Make sure that the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is not restricted to print. "Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings" IMPORTANT If printing is restricted You cannot install the printer driver. If printing is restricted after the installation If the IP address of the computer on which the printer driver is installed is restricted to perform printing in [Receive/Print Range Setting], you cannot print from the computer. 2 Install the printer driver. Following the procedure for when you are using a WSD network environment in "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install the printer driver. For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." 㻡㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-097 Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) The requisite tasks to use the printer in the NetWare network are as follows. Before starting NetWare network settings, see "Attention (NetWare Network Settings)." Configuring NetWare Configuring the Protocol Settings 㻡㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-098 Attention (NetWare Network Settings) IMPORTANT Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing After completing the NetWare network settings, configure each computer to be used for printing. (1) Connecting to an NetWare Network Install NetWare client software on all the computers that perform printing, and then log in to the NetWare server or to the tree. For details on the NetWare Network connection, see the instruction manual for NetWare or the operating systems. (2) Connecting the Printer Install the printer driver using the procedure for installing the printer driver for a local area connection or network environment in "Printer Driver Installation Guide." When you install the printer driver, select [Network printer] for the printer connection, and then select the print queue created in "Configuring NetWare." If a screen for selecting a port appears during the installation, select [Network], and then click [Settings]. From the list, select the print queue created in "Configuring NetWare." 㻡㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-099 Configuring NetWare To perform printing using a NetWare network, you need to configure the print service such as the print server and queue and the printer protocols. IMPORTANT About the print service settings When specifying the print service settings using NetSpot Device Installer or NetWare Administrator, Novell Client (a NetWare client from Novell, Inc.) needs to be installed as a client software on the computer on which NetWare Administrator will run. Types of the Print Service Before configuring the print service, select the type of the print service referring to the following descriptions. NOTE About describing the print service in this manual Usually, select the print service of NDS for NetWare 4.x or later and the print service in Bindery Mode for NetWare 3.x. This manual does not describe the other settings. About NDPS You can also use NDPS as the print service on NetWare 5.x or later. When using NDPS, use Novell Printer Gateway supplied with NetWare as the gateway. This manual does not describe the procedure for setting NDPS. For the setting procedure, see the instruction manual of NetWare. NDS (Novell Directory Services) and Bindery Mode This printer supports both NDS and Bindery Mode. Select the appropriate mode for your network environment. If you are using NetWare 3.x, you can use only Bindery Mode. Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode This printer supports both the Queue server mode and Remote Printer mode. Queue Server Mode When using Queue Server Mode, you do not need any other hardware or software for the print server because this printer is provided with all the functions of the print server. NDS Queue Server Mode (NDS PServer) uses a NDS print server for printing. Bindery Queue Server Mode (Bindery PServer) uses a Bindery print server for printing. Queue Server Mode requires one NetWare user license per printer. Remote Printer Mode In Remote Printer Mode, this printer is controlled by a NetWare print server. Therefore, you need a NetWare print server other than this printer. NDS Remote Printer Mode (NPrinter) uses a NDS print server for printing. Bindery Remote Printer Mode (RPrinter) uses a Bindery print server for printing. Configuring NetWare If there is any operating system that supports NetSpot Device Installer on the network, configure the NetWare print server using NetSpot Device Installer. If there is no operating system that supports NetSpot Device Installer on the network, configure the NetWare print server using NetWare Administrator or PCONSOLE. Settings Using NetSpot Device Installer For details on the procedures for installing or using NetSpot Device Installer, see the Readme file in the following folder in Printer Driver Software CD-ROM. 㻡㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 \NetSpot_Device_Installer\usa Settings Using NetWare Administrator (When Using the Printer in NDS Queue Server Mode/NDS Remote Printer Mode) 1 Log in to NetWare as "Admin" (or a user who has the equivalent permissions), and then run NetWare Administrator. 1. Select [Print Services Quick Setup] from the [Tools] menu. 2. In [Print Server name], enter an arbitrary name. To use an existing print server, click the button on the right of [Print Server name], and then select the print server from the list. 3. In [Name] for the printer, enter an arbitrary name. 4. When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, select [Other/Unknown] in [Type]. 5. When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, select [Parallel] in [Type], and then click [Communication]. Set [Port] to [LPT1] and [Connection type] to [Manual load]. 6. In [Name] for the print queue, enter an arbitrary name. 7. In [Volume], enter the volume object (the object that indicates the physical volume on the network) that creates the queue. You can select the volume object from a list by clicking the button on the right. 8. Specify the other settings, and then click [OK]. NOTE About entering the print server name Because the print server name is required for the protocol settings for the printer, note it down. About Quick Setup If you perform Quick Setup, the printer is allocated to the printer number "0." When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, do not change the printer number from "0." 2 When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, start the print server. When using the NetWare file server as the print server, enter "LOAD PSERVER.NLM" in the file server, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. ĺ The settings for NetWare print service are now completed. NOTE About Queue Server Mode When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, you do not need to specify these settings. 3 Next, configure the NetWare protocol settings for the printer. For details on the procedure for configuring the NetWare protocol, see "Configuring the Protocol Settings." Settings Using PCONSOLE (When Using the Printer in Bindery Queue Server Mode/Bindery Remote Printer Mode) 㻡㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 1 Log in to NetWare as the Supervisor, and then start PCONSOLE. 2 If you have not created a print server, create the print server. 1. Select [Print Server Information] from [Available Options], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 2. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard. 3. Enter the name of the print server to be created, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 4. Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard to go back to the [Available Options] list. NOTE About entering the print server name Because the print server name is required for the protocol settings for the printer, note it down. About using multiple NetWare servers If you are using multiple NetWare servers and want to use this printer in Queue Server Mode, use the same print server name for all the NetWare servers. 3 Create a queue, and then assign the print server to the queue. 1. From [Available Options] select [Print Queue Information], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 2. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard. 3. Enter the name of the queue to be created, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 4. Select the name of the created queue, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 5. Select [Queue Servers], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 6. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard. 7. Select the print server created in Step 2, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 8. Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard repeatedly to go back up to [Available Options]. 4 Assign the printer to the print server. 1. Select [Print Server Information] from [Available Options], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 2. Select the print server created in Step 2, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 3. Select [Print Server Configuration], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 4. Select [Printer Configuration], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 5. From the [Configured Printers] list, select the printer number, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, select the printer number "0." When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, you can select an arbitrary printer number. 5 Specify the name or type of the printer. 㻡㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 1. Enter an arbitrary printer name in [Name], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 2. When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, select [Defined] in [Type]. 3. When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, select [Remote Parallel] in [Type], and then set [Port] to [LPT1]. 4. Specify the settings for the other options, and then press the [ESC] key on your keyboard. 5. If the confirmation box appears, select [Yes], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 6. Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard to go back to the [Print Server Configuration] list. 6 Assign a queue to the printer. 1. Select [Queues Serviced by Printer], and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 2. Select the printer name specified in Step 5, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 3. Press the [INSERT] key on your keyboard. 4. Select the queue created in Step 3, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 7 Press the [ESC] key on your keyboard until the [Exit PCONSOLE] window appears, and then select [Yes] to exit PCONSOLE. 8 When using the printer in Remote Printer Mode, start the print server. 1. When you are using a computer exclusively as the print server, enter "PSERVER.EXE" in the computer as the print server name, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 2. When using the NetWare file server as the print server, enter "LOAD PSERVER.NLM <the print server name>" in the file server, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. ĺ The settings for NetWare print service are now completed. NOTE About Queue Server Mode When using the printer in Queue Server Mode, you do not need to specify these settings. 9 Next, configure the NetWare protocol settings for the printer. For details on the procedure for configuring the NetWare protocol, see "Configuring the Protocol Settings." 㻡㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09A Configuring the Protocol Settings This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network. IMPORTANT Before configuring the protocol settings When configuring the protocol settings for the printer using the above software, the TCP/IP protocol must be able to be used in your network environment. Make sure that each setting option for TCP/IP is specified, the printer and computer are connected properly, and the printer is ON. NOTE When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI You can also specify the settings using the following software. "FTP Client" You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 㻡㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 4 Click [NetWare Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻡㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Select the [Use NetWare] check box. NOTE When the [Use NetWare] check box is cleared The printer is not detected on the NetWare network. 7 Set [Frame Type]. Select the frame type that is used by the system environment you are using from [Auto Detect], [Ethernet II], [Ethernet 802.2], [Ethernet 802.3] or [Ethernet SNAP]. 㻡㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When using Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (the print server of Bindery Mode) 1. Select [Bindery PServer] from [Print Service]. 2. In [File Server Name], enter the file server name created in "Configuring NetWare." 3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare." 4. In [Print Server Password], enter the password for the print server. 5. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare." 6. Specify the settings for [Service Mode], [Printer Form], [Polling Interval], and [Buffer Size] as needed. When using NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (the print server of NDS) 1. Select [NDS PServer] from [Print Service]. 2. In [Tree Name] and [Context Name], enter the name of the tree to which the print server belongs and the context name. 3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare." 4. In [Print Server Password], enter the password for the print server. 5. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare." 6. Specify the settings for [Service Mode], [Printer Form], [Polling Interval], and [Buffer Size] as needed. When using RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (the print server of Bindery Mode) 1. Select [RPrinter] from [Print Service]. 2. In [File Server Name], enter the file server name created in "Configuring NetWare." 3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare." 4. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare." When using NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (the print server of NDS) 1. Select [NPrinter] from [Print Service]. 2. In [Tree Name] and [Context Name], enter the name of the tree to which the print server belongs and the context name. 3. In [Print Server Name], enter the print server name created in "Configuring NetWare." 4. In [Printer Number], enter the same printer number as the one specified in "Configuring NetWare." 㻡㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 Click [OK]. 9 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻡㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09C Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) The requisite tasks to use the printer in the SMB network are as follows. Before starting SMB network settings, see "Attention (SMB Network Settings)." Configuring the Protocol Settings Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing 㻡㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09E Attention (SMB Network Settings) IMPORTANT Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing After completing the protocol settings for the printer, configure each computer to be used for printing. About the protocol used in an SMB network An SMB network supports only NetBIOS over TCP/IP, but not NetBEUI. You need to install TCP/IP client software on all the computers to be used for printing to make them able to use a TCP/IP network. For more details, see the instruction manual for the operating system. 㻡㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09F Configuring the Protocol Settings This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network. IMPORTANT Before configuring the protocol settings When configuring the protocol settings for the printer using the above software, the TCP/IP protocol must be able to be used in your network environment. Make sure that each setting option for TCP/IP is specified, the printer and computer are connected properly, and the printer is ON. About SMB printing You can use SMB printing only when an SD card is installed. NOTE When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI You can also specify the settings using the following software. "FTP Client" You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify. About the screenshots This procedure is described using screenshots from Windows 7. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 㻡㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 4 Click [SMB Settings]. 㻡㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Click [Edit...]. 6 Select the [Use SMB Server] check box. 㻡㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE When the [Use SMB Server] check box is cleared The printer is not detected on the SMB network. 7 Specify the settings for SMB. Enter the computer name to which the printer belongs. Up to 15 characters can be entered. [Server Name] Enter a name that does not overlap with the names used on the other computers or the printers on the network. Enter the name of the work group to which the printer belongs. Up to 15 characters can be entered. [Workgroup Name] If there is no workgroup in your system environment, create a workgroup on Windows, 㻡㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 and then enter the workgroup name. [Comments] If necessary, enter comments about the printer. You can enter up to 48 characters. When announcing the existence of the printer to the LAN Manager, select the [Use LM Announce] check box. When not making an announcement, clear [Use LM Announce]. [Use LM Announce] When it is not necessary for the LAN Manager to reference the printer, you can clear the [Use LM Announce] check box and reduce network traffic. 8 Specify the settings for SMB printing. When using SMB printing 1. Select the [Use SMB Printing] check box. 2. Enter the name of this printer in [Printer Name]. Up to 13 alphanumeric characters can be entered. When not using SMB printing Clear the [Use SMB Printing] check box. 9 Click [OK]. 㻡㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you want to specify the settings for WINS, proceed to Step 10. If you do not want to specify the settings for WINS, proceed to Step 14. 10 When setting WINS, select [Network] in [Preferences]. 11 Click [TCP/IP Settings]. 㻡㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 12 Click [Edit...] in [WINS Configuration]. 13 Set WINS. When Using WINS Resolution Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and set the following items. Enter the IP address of the WINS server. [WINS Server Address] When using the IP address settings specified by DHCP, if you obtain the WINS server IP address from the DHCP server, the IP address obtained from the DHCP server is overwritten. 㻡㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Enter [Scope ID] as needed. You can enter up to 63 characters. [Scope ID] The scope ID is an identifier to determine the range available for printers and computers. The scope ID is browsed regardless of the WINS resolution settings. When a scope ID is not specified for the computer in your network environment, leave the [Scope ID] field blank. Set the following items when registering printers on the WINS server. [SMB Server Name] Enter the WINS server name set in Procedure 7. [SMB Workgroup Name] Enter the workgroup name set in Procedure 7. When not Using WINS Resolution Clear the [WINS Resolution] check box. IMPORTANT If [Scope ID] is specified The printer cannot communicate with the computers that have a different scope ID. 14 Click [OK]. 15 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 㻡㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻡㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09H Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing Configure all the computers to be used for printing so that they can be used on an SMB network. Connecting to an SMB Network 1 Perform the following procedure. )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>1HWZRUNDQG,QWHUQHW&RQQHFWLRQV@ĺ>1HWZRUN&RQQHFWLRQV@ )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>9LHZQHWZRUNVWDWXVDQGWDVNV@ĺ>0DQDJHQHWZRUN connections]. )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>9LHZQHWZRUNVWDWXVDQGWDVNV@ĺ>&KDQJHDGDSWHUVHWWLQJV@ )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@ĺ>1HWZRUN&RQQHFWLRQV@ĺ>/RFDO$UHD&RQQHFWLRQ@ From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], double-click [Network and Sharing Center], and then click [Manage network connections]. 2 Display the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box. Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon, and then select [Properties] from the pop-up menu. Click [Properties]. 㻡㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears Click [Yes] or [Continue]. 3 Make sure that the check boxes for the following options are selected. [Client for Microsoft Networks] [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] (or [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]) If the check boxes are not selected, select them. 4 Double-click [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] (or [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]). 㻡㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Click [Advanced] in the [General] tab. 6 Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP. (1) Display the [WINS] tab. (2) Select [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP]. (3) Click [OK]. 7 Continue to click [OK] until all the dialog boxes close. If a message that prompts you to restart the computer appears Restart the computer. Installing the Printer Driver A printer driver is required for printing. Following "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install the printer driver. For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." 㻡㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE If the screen that prompts you to select a port appears during the installation Perform the following procedure. 1. Click [Add Port]. 2. Select [Network], and then click [OK]. 3. From the list, select [Workgroup Name], [Server Name], and [Printer Name] specified in "Configuring the Protocol Settings" respectively. 㻡㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09J Network Settings for the Printer (AppleTalk) The requisite tasks to use the printer in the AppleTalk network are as follows. If you are using Mac OS X10.6 or later, see "Network Settings for the Printer (TCP/IP)", and specify the settings for the network. Macintosh Network Settings Configuring the Protocol Settings Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing 㻡㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09K Macintosh Network Settings Configure the Macintosh network settings. 1 Select [System Preferences] from the Apple menu. 2 Click [Network]. 3 Check the settings for the network port. (1) Select [Network Port Configurations] from [Show]. (2) Make sure that the [Built-in Ethernet] check box is selected. (If the check box is not selected, select it.) 㻡㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Make sure AppleTalk is active. (1) Select [Built-in Ethernet] from [Show]. (2) Click [AppleTalk]. (3) Make sure that the [Make AppleTalk Active] check box is selected. (If the check box is not selected, select it.) NOTE If [Built-in Ethernet] does not appear in [Show] Select [Network Port Configurations], and then select the [Built-in Ethernet] check box. 5 Close the [Network] dialog box, and then save the settings. 㻡㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09L Configuring the Protocol Settings This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network. IMPORTANT Before configuring the protocol settings When configuring the protocol settings for the printer using the above software, the TCP/IP protocol must be able to be used in your network environment. Make sure that each setting option for TCP/IP is specified, the printer and computer are connected properly, and the printer is ON. NOTE When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI You can also specify the settings using the following software. "FTP Client (Macintosh)" You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. The specifiable options vary depending on the software. See "Network Setting Items" and use software appropriate to the network environment you are using or options that you want to specify. About the screenshots This procedure is described using screenshots from Windows 7. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 㻡㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 4 Click [AppleTalk Settings]. 㻡㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Click [Edit...]. 6 Select the [Use AppleTalk] check box. 㻡㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE When the [Use AppleTalk] check box is cleared The printer is not detected on the AppleTalk network. 7 Specify the settings for AppleTalk. 1. Enter the name of the printer in [Service Name]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. The name specified in this option is displayed on the printer list of Macintosh. 2. If any zone is set up on the network, enter the zone name in [Zone]. Up to 32 characters can be entered. 3. In [Print Mode], specify a printing process to be used. If you want to fix the printer to be used, select the check box only for the printer. [Open Both Spool and Direct]: Prints documents with a choice of "Spool" or "Direct" from the computer. [Open Spool]: Prints documents at high speed. 㻡㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Open Direct]: Prints documents at high quality. IMPORTANT About [Phase] [Phase] is fixed at [Phase 2], and you cannot specify the setting. About [Service Name] You cannot specify a name which includes "=", "@", "*", ":", and "~." About [Zone] You cannot specify a name which includes "=", "@", ":", and "~." If multiple printers are in the same zone Specify a specific name for each printer. [Print Mode] It is not possible to clear both [Open Spool] and [Open Direct] together. 8 Click [OK]. 9 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻡㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻡㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09R FTP Client (Macintosh) This section describes the procedure for when Terminal supplied with Mac OS X as standard is used. IMPORTANT If the [FTP Settings] check box is not selected in the [TCP/IP Settings] page in [Settings/Registration] - [Preferences] [Network], settings cannot be specified from the FTP client. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" 1 Enter "ftp the IP address of the printer", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. Input Example: "ftp 192.168.0.215" If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer Print and confirm Network Status Print while referring to "Checking the Printer Settings", or consult your network administrator. 2 Enter "root" as the user name, and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. The default password is "7654321". 4 Enter "cd config", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. 5 Enter "get CONFIG <the file name>", and then press [return] on your keyboard. Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters. ĺ The config file is downloaded. The characters entered for <the file name> become the name of the downloaded config file. NOTE If the config file cannot be found Search for the config file using the file search function of your operating system. (The download directory for the config file varies depending on the operating system or settings.) 6 㻡㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Edit the downloaded config file in "TextEdit" or a similar text editor. For details on descriptions of each option, see "Setting Items." 7 Enter "put <the file name> CONFIG", and then press [return] on your keyboard. Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters. ĺ The edited config file uploads. In <the file name>, enter the name of the config file that was entered when the file was downloaded. 8 Enter "get reset", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. When the printer is restarted the settings will be enabled. After checking that the printer has restarted, press the [c] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key, and return to the ftp command prompt. 9 Enter "quit", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. 10 Enter "exit", and then press the [return] key on your keyboard. 11 Select [Quit Terminal] from the [Terminal] menu. 㻡㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09S Configuring a Computer that Performs Printing After completing the protocol settings for the printer, configure each Macintosh to be used for printing. Installing the Printer Driver A printer driver is required for printing. Following "Printer Driver Installation Guide", install the printer driver. For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." IMPORTANT The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon Web site (http://www.canon.com/). If you cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the Canon Web site, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Setting the Printer Destination After installing the printer driver, set the printer destination. Following "Driver Guide", set the printer destination. For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." 㻡㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09U Managing the Printer Software That Can Be Used for Managing the Printer Remote UI FTP Client NetSpot Device Installer Managing Print Jobs Control Panel Setting Setting Items Checking the Number of the Printed Pages Importing and Exporting Settings Initializing the Settings Checking the Printer Settings Setting the Administrator Password Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information Sleep Mode Auto Shutdown Specifying an ID for Each Department Register/Update Software Function 㻡㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09W Software That Can Be Used for Managing the Printer You can manage the printer using the control panel and the following software. Because the items you can manage differ respectively, use each software according to your environment or the item you want to manage. For details on the items you can manage using the control panel, see "Setting Items." : Can be managed : Cannot be managed : Can be managed partly Management Item Control Panel Remote UI FTP Client NetSpot Device Installer Managing Print Jobs Checking the Number of the Printed Pages Checking the Printer Settings Setting the Administrator Password Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information Energy-saving Mode Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer) Security Settings [Settings/Registration] Menu Specifying an ID for Each Department 㻡㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09X Remote UI The Remote UI allows you to manage the printer using a Web browser. <Features of the Remote UI> No specific software is needed. You can operate the Remote UI in a Web browser. You do not need specific software to operate the Remote UI. You can manage the printer from a remote location. By accessing and operating the printer from the Web browser via a network, you can manage the printer using a computer in a remote location. You can perform various operations, such as checking the current printer status or job logs and specifying various network settings in the Remote UI. Central management of all the printer settings with the administrator password. Only the administrator can configure the settings or perform the operations related to the printer management by setting the administrator password. Before starting the Remote UI, see "Attention (Remote UI)." Starting the Remote UI Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page) Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links System Requirements of the Remote UI Web Browser Internet Explorer 6 or later Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later Operating System An operating system on which the above Web browsers can run Display Resolution: 800 x 600 pixels or more Display colors: 256 colors or more 㻡㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-09Y Starting the Remote UI 1 Start the Web browser. 2 Enter "http://<the IP address of the printer>/" in the address field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. Input Example: http://192.168.0.215/ If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter ["host name"."domain name"] instead of the IP address. Input Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/ If you want to use SSL encrypted communication, enter "https://<the IP address or name of the printer>/". If the [Security Alert] dialog box or other dialog box appears, follow the directions in the message. Input Example: https://192.168.0.215/ If the Remote UI top page is not displayed Check the following points. The Remote UI is enabled. "Enabling the Remote UI" The printer and computer are connected properly via a network. The printer is turned ON. The IP address or ["host name"."domain name"] is entered correctly. 3 Log in as Administrator or End-User. Logging in as Administrator By logging in as Administrator, you can perform all the operations and settings of the Remote UI. Logging in as End-User By logging in as End-User, you can check the device status, confirm the settings, and view the jobs. Logging in as Administrator (1) Select [Management Mode]. (2) Enter the password in [Password]. The default password is "7654321". "Setting the Administrator Password" (3) Click [Log In]. 㻡㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Logging in as End-User (1) Select [End-User Mode]. (2) Enter [User Name] as needed. (3) Click [Log In]. NOTE About [User Name] When you have logged in by entering [User Name], permit job operation by end-users in [Management Settings] in the [Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] - [Security] page. "Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users" Although it is possible to log in without entering any value for [User Name], logging in by entering the user name enables to operate the jobs for which the user names correspond with each other. The value to be entered for [User Name] is the user name you entered when logging in to the computer. About department ID management When the department ID management function is enabled, you can log in by entering the department ID and password. "Specifying an ID for Each Department " 㻡㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A0 Attention (Remote UI) NOTE When using SSL encrypted communication To use SSL encrypted communication, a key and its certificate need to have been created and the key needs to have been registered as the default key. For details on the SSL encrypted communication function and the procedure for registering a key, see "Setting Keys and Certificates." If the Remote UI does not start when SSL is enabled There is a possibility that the file related to key management is broken. Perform the following procedure. ]( 6HWWLQJV RQWKHFRQWUROSDQHOVHOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>5HPRWH8,6HWWLQJV@ĺ>66/@DQGWKHQ 1. Press [ make sure that [SSL] is set to [Off]. 2. Restart the printer. 3. Regenerate the key and certificate and specify the settings for SSL from the Remote UI. "Setting Keys and Certificates" 4. Restart the printer. When using a proxy server If you cannot connect the computer to the printer via a proxy server when using a proxy server, add the IP address of the printer to [Exceptions] (the addresses that do not use the proxy server) on the settings for the proxy server of the Web browser. The setting varies depending on the network environment. Consult your network administrator. About Cookies Configure your Web browser to enable cookies. Setting priority For details on the setting priority for when specifying the same item using a method other than the Remote UI as that specified using the Remote UI, see "Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods)." Starting the Remote UI If the Remote UI is running on multiple computers at a time, the latest settings are valid. If you want to log in as Administrator, we recommend that only one Remote UI should be running at a time. You can change language displayed in the login screen from the Setup menu. [Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options) The following message may be displayed before the login screen appears depending on your environment. "Processing… Wait a moment." 㻡㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A1 Enabling the Remote UI This section describes the procedure for enabling the Remote UI using the printer's control panel. NOTE When enabling the Remote UI using software other than the Remote UI You can also enable the Remote UI using the following software. "FTP Client" You can enable the Remote UI by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. 1 Press [ ]( : Settings), select [Network] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. When the message is displayed, press [OK]. 2 Select [Remote UI Settings] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [Remote UI] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select [On] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻡㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE For details on a hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻡㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A2 Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page) Remote UI Portal Page The screen shown below, which is displayed when the Web browser is launched and you have logged in to the Remote UI, is called the Portal Page. (1) [Device Basic Information] [Device Status] The indicators and status messages show the current printer status. You can see the status of the printer from the indicator colors, as shown below. Indicator Color Printer Status (Gray): Offline (not accepting print data) (Green): Normal status (able to print) (Yellow): There is no printing trouble, but some type of action is required (a warning message is displayed) (Red): Printing is not possible for some reason (an error message is displayed) 㻡㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Solution Go back online and print. Follow the onscreen instructions shown in [Error Information] below and solve the problem. [Error Information] It displays error information generated by the printer. (2) [Consumables Information] [Paper Information] It displays paper level, size and type for each of the paper sources. [Remaining Toner] It displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge. Consumables Display 16100% *1 Status Able to print Solution - 8-15% *1 Printing will continue or stop. *2 If printing has stopped, press [ ]( : Online) on the printer control panel and printing will continue. Have a replacement toner cartridge ready. We recommend that you replace the toner cartridge before doing a large amount of printing. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" 1-7%*1 The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon 0% The toner cartridge has reached the end of its life The printer stops printing, and you cannot continue the job. Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" <Insert Cartridge> The toner cartridge is not installed Install the toner cartridge properly. Toner Cartridge *1 The value to be displayed may be different from the actual amount of toner remaining. *2 Whether the printer continues or stops printing when the toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon depends on the setting for [Warning Step] in the [Setup] menu. "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" (3) [Message Board] It displays messages from the administrator. "Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links" (4) [Support Link] It displays links to information concerning printer support. "Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links" (5) [Language] You can change the screen display language from the drop-down list. (6) [Mail to System Manager] You can send e-mail to the system manager. (7) Update Button Refresh the portal page display to the latest status. (8) [Status Monitor/Cancel] You can check and change the status of jobs the printer is processing. You can also check device status. "[Status Monitor/Cancel] Menu" (9) [Settings/Registration] You can set/change the various printer settings. The items that can be set/changed differ depending on whether you log in as administrator or end user. "[Settings/Registration] Menu" (10) [Box] When the optional SD card is installed, you can print, copy and send documents that are saved in the printer's box. (11) [Direct Print] 㻡㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Using the printer, you can print PDF files, PS/EPS files, image files and XPS files that are saved to the computer you are using as is, without opening them. "Printing without the Printer Driver (Direct Print)" "Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) " (12) [Service Management Service] It displays the SMS (Service Management Service) screen. "MEAP " [Status Monitor/Cancel] Menu The following pages are in the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu. Print: [Job Status] Page Print: [Job History] Page E-Mail RX: [Job History] Page [Error Information] Page [Device Features] Page [Device Information] Page [Check Counter] Page Print: [Job Status] Page You can check the status of jobs that are currently printing and manage them using cancel/resume. (1) [Job No.] The Job No. of the job is displayed. When you click the Job No., the job's details are displayed. (2) [Document Name] The name of the job is displayed. For e-mail printing jobs, the subject of the e-mail is displayed. (3) [User Name] The user name of the job is displayed. For e-mail printing jobs, the e-mail sender is displayed. (4) [Status] The status of the job is displayed. (5) [Job Operation] It runs the job operation. Click the button for the operation that you want to run. "Managing Print Jobs" [Cancel] It cancels the printing of the job that you clicked on and deletes the job. When the SD card is installed, you can run the following operations. 㻡㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Interrupt] It pauses the job that is currently being output, and makes the new job the printing priority. When the new job is finished printing, it resumes printing the paused job. [Priority Print] The output order of the job is moved up by one. [Pause]/[Resume] When you click [Pause], it pauses the job output. The button for the paused job changes to [Resume]. When you click [Resume], the paused job resumes. The button for the resumed job goes back to [Pause]. NOTE [Job Operation] When logged on in End-User mode, it is possible to operate jobs with user names that match using [Management Settings] of [Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] - [Security] only when job operation by end users is permitted. "Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users" (6) [Dept. ID] If department ID is set, the department ID for the job is displayed. (7) [Date/Time] The date and time the job was input is displayed. (8) Update Button It refreshes the [Job Status] page display to the latest status. (9) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. Print: [Job History] Page The Print Job/Direct Print, saved job, report printing and e-mail Job History are displayed. NOTE [Job History] Page Display It is possible to display Job History only when displaying job history is permitted by [Display Job History] of [Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] - [Security]. (1) Display Toggling Select the job history to display. Only the selected type of job history is displayed in the list. [Print Job/Direct Print] [Stored Job] 㻡㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Report] [E-Mail Print] (2) Display Job History The output job history list is displayed. (3) Update Button It refreshes the [Job History] page display to the latest status. (4) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. E-Mail RX: [Job History] Page It displays the received e-mail history. (1) Display Job History The received e-mail history list is displayed. (2) Update Button It refreshes the [Job History] page display to the latest status. (3) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. [Error Information] Page Information about errors occurring in the printer is displayed. 㻡㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Error Information] (Number of Errors) It displays whether or not errors have occurred, and if there are errors, the number of errors. (2) [Error Information] (Information) It displays status and solutions for the error information occurring in the printer. The meanings of the displayed icons are shown below. (3) Update Button It refreshes the [Error Information] page display to the latest status. (4) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. [Device Features] Page The printer equipment information and the functions that can be used in the current equipment status are displayed. 㻡㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Basic Specifications] The amount of RAM installed in the printer console, the installed options and the basic printing performance are displayed. (2) [Toner] Information about the toner cartridges installed in the printer is displayed. (3) [PDL] The page description languages that can be used by the printer are displayed. (4) [Direct Print] The file formats and document formats that can be used by Direct Print are displayed. (5) Update Button It refreshes the [Device Features] page display to the latest status. (6) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. [Device Information] Page The basic information about the printer and the system manager information are displayed. 㻡㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Device Basic Information] The basic information about the printer is displayed. (2) [Version Information] The printer controller version is displayed. (3) [System Manager Information] Information about the registered system manager is displayed. (4) [Usage Information] The number of pages printed is displayed. (5) Update Button It refreshes the [Device Information] page display to the latest status. (6) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. [Check Counter] Page The number of pages printed is displayed. "Checking the Number of the Printed Pages" 㻡㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Main Counter] The number of pages printed for each counter is displayed. (2) Update Button It refreshes the [Check Counter] page display to the latest status. (3) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. [Settings/Registration] Menu The following pages show the settings that can be checked using the [Settings/Registration] menu. [Preferences] [Control Menu] Page [Paper Source Menu] Page [Network] Page [Layout Menu] Page [Quality Menu] Page [User Maintenance Menu] Page [Output/Control] [Utility Menu] Page [Calibration] Page [Device Control] Page [Management Settings] [Department ID Management] Page [Security] Page [License/Other] Page [Control Menu] Page It displays the operation settings for energy-saving mode (Sleep Mode) and when errors occur. For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)." 㻡㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Sleep Settings] The settings related to sleep mode operation are displayed. (2) [Timer Settings] The settings related to timer operation are displayed. (3) [Warning Step] The settings related to warning display are displayed. (4) [PDL Selection (Plug-n-Play)] The currently selected page description language is displayed. (5) [Date/Time Settings] The settings related to date and time are displayed. (6) [Panel Display/Notification Settings] 㻡㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The settings related to control panel display are displayed. (7) [Others] Other operation settings not included in the above categories are displayed. (8) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. NOTE Changing Settings You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode. [Paper Source Menu] Page It displays the settings for paper size, etc. when printing from the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer. For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" or "[Select Feeder] Menu." (1) [Paper Source] The currently selected paper source is displayed. (2) [Paper Size] The paper size selected for each paper source is displayed. (3) [Tray] The operation settings related to the multi-purpose tray are displayed. (4) [Auto Selection] It displays whether to recognize the paper source for auto selection when [Auto] is set for [Paper Source] for each paper source. (5) [Paper Type] The paper type selected for each paper source is displayed. (6) [2-Sided Settings] The settings related to 2-sided printing are displayed. (7) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. 㻡㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE Changing Settings You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode. [Network] Page It displays the printer's network settings, etc. (1) [TCP/IP Settings] It displays the TCP/IP settings. How to change settings "Configuring the Protocol Settings" (2) [NetWare Settings] It displays the NetWare settings. How to change settings "Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) " (3) [AppleTalk Settings] It displays the AppleTalk settings. How to change settings "Configuring the Protocol Settings" (4) [SMB Settings] It displays the SMB settings. How to change settings "Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) " (5) [SNMP Settings] It displays the SNMP settings. How to change settings "Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol" 㻡㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (6) [Spooler] It displays the spool function settings when the SD card is installed. How to change settings "Setting the Spooling Function " (7) [Startup Time Settings] It displays the startup time settings. How to change settings "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" (8) [Ethernet Driver Settings] It displays the network interface settings. How to change settings "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" (9) [IEEE802.1X Settings] It displays IEEE802.1X security settings. How to change settings "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" (10) [E-Mail Print Settings] It displays the e-mail print settings. How to change settings "Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)" (11) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. NOTE Changing Settings You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode. [Layout Menu] Page It displays the settings relating to print appearance, such as adjustment of print position and setting gutter margins. For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)." (1) [Layout Menu] The settings for number of pages and print appearance are displayed. (2) [Back to Page Top] 㻡㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. NOTE Changing Settings You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode. [Quality Menu] Page It displays the settings related to print quality, such as toner density adjustment. For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)." 㻡㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Basic Settings] It displays the settings related to printing resolution and toner. (2) [Adjust Toner Density] 㻡㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Display the fine-tuned toner density. (3) [Halftones] It displays the settings related to halftone representation method when printing. (4) [Gray Compensation] It displays the settings related to gray compensation. (5) [CMS] It displays the settings related to color management. (6) [Gradation Settings] It displays the settings related to gradation processing. (7) [Advanced Smoothing] It displays the settings related to gradation processing. (8) [Others] The settings related to other print quality are displayed. (9) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. [User Maintenance Menu] Page It displays the settings for printer adjustment from a specified paper source if a problem occurs, such as adjustment of print position and recovery printing. For details on the settings, see "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)." (1) [Adjust Print Position/Others] It displays the print position adjustment settings for each paper source. It also displays the settings for operation and maintenance if a problem occurs. (2) [Import/Export] It displays the settings for saving the printer settings on the computer you are using (Export) or the settings for reading the printer settings from the computer (Import). (3) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. NOTE Changing Settings You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode. [Utility Menu] Page 㻡㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You can print each type of management report. Select the item to output, and then click [Execute]. For details on the settings, see "[Utility Menu] Menu." The following management reports can be output. Status Print Network Status Print E-Mail RX History List Printing Position Adjustment Print Stored Job List * PCL Font List PS Configuration Page PS Font List Print History List (Print Job/Direct Print) Print History List (Stored Job) * Print History List (Report) Print History List (E-Mail Print) A4 Cleaning LTR Cleaning Counter Report Page Count List Print MEAP System Information * Only when the optional SD card is installed [Calibration] Page You can run each type of calibration. Select the item to run, and then click [Execute]. For details on the settings, see "[Utility Menu] Menu" or "Troubleshooting." 㻡㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Device Control] Page It controls the printer. Select the item to run, and then click [Execute]. For details on the settings, see "[Reset] Menu" or "Basic Printer Operations." [Department ID Management] Page If department ID management is set, it displays the number of pages printed by each registered department. For details on the settings, see "Specifying an ID for Each Department ." 㻡㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Department ID Page Total] It displays the number of pages printed by each department. (2) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. [Security] Page It displays printer information and security settings. (1) [Management Settings] It displays general information about the printer. How to change settings "Setting the Administrator Password" "Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information" "Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs" "Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users" "Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function)" "Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print" (2) [Remote UI Settings] It displays whether the Remote UI is set to use the SSL encrypted communication function. 㻡㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 How to change settings "Changing the Remote UI Settings" (3) [Key and Certificate Settings] It displays information on registered keys and certificates. How to change settings "Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI" (4) [CA Certificate Settings] It displays information on registered keys and certificates. How to change settings "Displaying the [CA Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI" (5) [IPSec Settings] It displays the IPSec security policy list. How to change settings "Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function " (6) [Display Job History] It displays whether it is set to allow job history to be displayed. How to change settings "Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display" (7) [IP Address Filter] It displays information restricting users who can print and change settings. How to change settings "Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings" (8) [MAC Address Filter] It displays information restricting users who have access. How to change settings "Restricting the Users Who Can Access" (9) [Back to Page Top] It moves the scroll box up to the top of the page. NOTE Changing the settings You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode. [License/Other] Page It displays the pages that the settings for message boards or support links, or registering or updating software are performed. 㻡㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) [Message Board/Support Link] It displays messages from the administrator and links to support pages. How to change settings "Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links" (2) [Register/Update Software] It displays the pages that registering or updating software is performed. How to change settings "Register/Update Software Function " NOTE Changing the settings You can only change settings when you are logged on in system manager mode. 㻡㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A3 Display/Change Message Board Messages and Support Links You can post messages from the administrator on a message board on the portal page of the Remote UI. Also, you can set links to information about printer support in the portal page support link, and make it accessible from the Remote UI when necessary. When you are logged in system manager mode, you can change the messages on the message board and change the link destination of support links. Displaying a Support Page 1 From [Support Link] on the portal page, click the link destination on the support page. Changing Message Board Comments or Support Link Destinations 1 Select [Message Board/Support Link]. 㻡㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 From the [Settings/Registration] menu, select [Message Board/Support Link] in [License/Other] under [Management Settings]. 2 Click [Edit...]. If [Edit...] does not appear Log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 3 Change the message link destination. (1) Set message board messages when necessary. (2) Set support link URL when necessary. (3) Click [OK]. 㻡㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Message] Enter messages from the administrator. [URL] Enter the URL address of the support link. The supported URL protocols are as follows. http:// https:// If you omit the supported URL protocol in entering the URL address, it is interpolated automatically. 㻡㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A4 FTP Client In FTP Client, you can specify the network settings, security settings, and so on by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. <Features of FTP Client> No specific software is needed. You can operate the FTP Client using the Command Prompt supplied with Windows. You do not need specific software to operate the FTP Client. You can specify the network settings at a time. Because the setting items are listed in a file, you can specify multiple items all at once. To manage the printer using FTP Client, perform the following procedure. IMPORTANT If the [FTP Settings] check box is not selected in the [TCP/IP Settings] page in [Settings/Registration] - [Preferences] [Network], settings cannot be specified from the FTP client. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" NOTE For Macintosh users For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "FTP Client (Macintosh)." 1 Run Command Prompt. NOTE If you are using Windows Run Command Prompt using the following procedure. )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@ If you are using UNIX Display the console screen. 2 Enter "ftp <the IP address of the printer>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. Input Example: "ftp 192.168.0.215" If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer Print and confirm Network Status Print while referring to "Checking the Printer Settings", or consult your network administrator. 3 Enter "root" as the user name, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 4 㻡㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Enter the administrator password, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. The default password is "7654321". 5 Enter "cd config", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 6 Enter "get CONFIG <the file name>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters. ĺ The config file is downloaded. The characters entered for <the file name> become the name of the downloaded file. If you cannot find the config file Search for the config file using the file search function of your operating system. (The download directory for the config file varies depending on the operating system or settings.) 7 Edit the downloaded config file in Notepad or a similar text editor. For details on descriptions of each option, see "Network Setting Items." 8 Enter "put <the file name> CONFIG", and then press [ENTER] key on your keyboard. Enter "CONFIG" as all upper case characters. ĺ The edited config file uploads. In <the file name>, enter the name of the config file that was entered when the file was downloaded. 9 Enter "get reset", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. ĺ When the printer is restarted the settings will be enabled. After checking that the printer has restarted, press the [c] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key, and return to the ftp command prompt. 10 Enter "quit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 11 Enter "exit", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. 㻡㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ Command Prompt closes. 㻡㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A5 NetSpot Device Installer NetSpot Device Installer is the Canon software included in the supplied CD-ROM. <Features of NetSpot Device Installer> You do not need to install NetSpot Device Installer. You can start NetSpot Device Installer directly from the CD-ROM without installing it. You can also install NetSpot Device Installer on a computer. You can check the various printer statuses. You can view the list of statuses of the Canon devices on a network easily. Also, you can change the default network settings or basic protocol settings. For details on other procedures for starting and using NetSpot Device Installer, see the following. Starting method: "Printer Driver Installation Guide" For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." Usage: Help of NetSpot Device Installer Help is displayed by clicking [Help] in the [Help] menu. IMPORTANT If Windows Firewall is enabled Before starting NetSpot Device Installer, configure Windows Firewall to unblock NetSpot Device Installer. For details on the configuration procedure, see the Readme file of NetSpot Device Installer. About operating systems that NetSpot Device Installer supports For details on the latest NetSpot Device Installer, see the Canon Web site (http://www.canon.com/). 㻡㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A6 Managing Print Jobs You can check/delete the job currently being printed or check job histories using the Remote UI. You can also delete the job currently being printed using a method other than the Remote UI. "Canceling a Job" Before managing print jobs, see "Attention (Job Manager)." Checking/Deleting the Job Currently Being Printed 1 Start the Remote UI. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 From the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu, select [Job Status] to display the job currently being printed. 3 If you want to delete the job, perform the following procedure. Using job operation, click [Cancel] on the job you want to delete. 㻡㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Checking Job History 1 Start the Remote UI. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [Job History] from the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu. 3 Select the options that you want to display. 㻡㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Print Job/Direct Print]: The printed job history is displayed from the computer. [Stored Job]: The printing history of jobs stored in BOX is displayed. [Report]: The utility print printing history is displayed. [E-Mail Print]: The history of jobs received by e-mail and printed is displayed. 㻡㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0A7 Attention (Job Manager) IMPORTANT Deleting the print logs The print logs are deleted by turning the printer OFF or performing a hard reset. NOTE About [Document Name] A job file name of up to 32 characters can be displayed. If the file name has more than 32 characters, the characters after the limited number are not displayed. Also, depending on the application, the application name may be added to the beginning of the file name. About the job histories The maximum numbers of the print logs that you can check are as follows. When the number of the jobs exceeds the maximum, the job histories are deleted starting from the oldest one. [Print Job/Direct Print]: 48 (200 when SD card is installed) [Stored Job]: 128 (only when SD card is installed) [Report]: 16 (128 when SD card is installed) [E-Mail Print]: 16 (128 when SD card is installed) If the jog log display is not specified in [Display Job History] in the [Settings/Registration] - [Management Settings] [Security] page, you cannot display the job histories. "Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display" 㻡㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SW Control Panel Setting This section describes the menu operation for this printer. Procedure for the Menu Operation The menu consists of three hierarchies: "Option", "Item", and "Setting Value." Select the target options in each hierarchy. As an example of the setting procedure, this section describes the procedure for setting [Gradation Level] in the [Quality] options to [High]. Start the key operation from Step 1. Before specifying the setting, see "Attention (Control Panel Setting)." Operation Procedure Key Operation ]( Press [ 1 Place the printer offline. Display the [Setup] menu. : Online). When the printer is online, the [Setup] menu can be displayed, however, the [User Maintenance] options cannot be specified. Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 The [Setup] menu is displayed. Select the option. When the [Quality] options are selected 3 Press [ ] or [ ]. The target option is displayed. Display the item. Press [OK]. 4 The selected item is displayed. Select the item. When [Gradation Level] is selected 5 Press [ ] or [ ]. The target item is displayed. Select the item. Press [OK]. 㻡㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 The selected setting value is displayed. Press [ Select the setting value. When [High 2] is selected 7 ]. The target setting value is displayed. Press [OK]. Determine the selected setting value. 8 9 ] or [ The target setting value is specified. The setting completion screen is displayed for 3 seconds. You can change the display time for the screen using [Set. Comp. Notify] in the [Setup] menu. Go out of the setting menu. ]( Press [ : Online). Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation You can enter each menu when the printer is in the following status. : The state where you can enter the menu : The state where you cannot enter the menu When the printer is ready to print *1 When an error is occurring When the printer is online When the printer is offline [Setup] Menu *3 [Select Feeder] Menu *4 [Reset] Menu [Job] Menu [Utility Menu] Menu Application menu *1 The printer is ready to print when the *2 An error is occurring in the printer when the *3 The [User Maintenance] options cannot be specified. *4 You cannot perform [Form Feed]. (Ready) indicator is on. (Message) indicator is on. 㻡㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 *2 07YL-0A9 Attention (Control Panel Setting) NOTE If you want to go back up the previous hierarchy or cancel a selected item To go back up the previous hierarchy or cancel a selected item, press [ Pressing [ ]( ]( : Back) or [ ]. : Online) on the screen during the menu operation cancels a selected item and places the printer online or offline. When the printer can be placed offline The printer can switch back to the offline state when it is ready to print (when the (Ready) indicator is on). About setting values Depending on the item, some settings become effective after restarting the printer. Setting priority For details on the setting priority for when specifying the same item using a method other than the control panel as that specified using the control panel, see "Setting Priority (When Specifying the Same Item Using Multiple Methods)." About items displayed in the display Some items are added and displayed only when an optional accessory is installed, and you can select such items. About the exclusive [Setup] menu When the exclusive [Setup] menu is selected in the "Option" hierarchy, see the following about each option. PCL: "[Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options)" UFR II: "[Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options)" Imaging: "[Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options)" XPS: "[Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) " PS: "[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)" PDF: "[Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options)" MEAP: "[Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options) " About [Initialize Menu] [Initialize Menu] does not have a lower hierarchy than "Option." For details on the procedure for the initialization, see "Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel." 㻡㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0AA Setting Items [Setup] Menu [Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Network] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options) [Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options) [Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options) [Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options) [Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) [Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options) [Setup] Menu ([PS] Options) [Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options) [Setup] Menu ([Check Counter] Options) [Utility Menu] Menu [Job] Menu [Reset] Menu [Select Feeder] Menu 㻡㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SX [Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. After changing the setting items with "*1", cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the settings effective. The setting items or setting values with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Setting Item Setting Value [Sleep Mode] [High (Deep Sleep)], [Mid (Printer Sleep)] [Sleep Even if Error] [Off], [On] [Sleep Migration Time] [5 minutes], [10 minutes], [15 minutes], [30 minutes], [60 minutes] Setting Set the sleep mode. "Sleep Mode" [Timer Settings] [Wake Up Timer] [Off], [On] [Wake Up Time] 00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59 Set sleep modes (printer sleep mode and deep sleep mode) to cancel automatically. "Sleep Mode" [Off], [10 seconds], [20 seconds], [30 seconds], [40 seconds], [50 seconds], [1 minute], [2 minutes], [3 minutes], [4 minutes], [5 minutes], [6 minutes], [7 minutes], [8 minutes], [9 minutes] Specifies whether one of the following transitions is to take place when no key operation has been performed in a particular screen. A transition to the MEAP authentication screen A transition to the ready status screen and the screen for using MEAP applications A transition from offline status to online status [Auto Reset Time] When no key operation has been performed during a job processing session, this function is also executed depending on the current screen or current position in a menu. [Sleep Mode Timer] [Off], [On] [Sleep Mode Time] 00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59 [Calibration Timer] [Off], [On] [Calibration Time] 00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59 Specifies whether the sleep timer function is used to put the printer into a sleep mode (printer sleep mode or deep sleep mode) when the printer is not used for a certain time. "Sleep Mode" Set whether to run calibration automatically at set times. "Specifying Times and Performing Automatic Calibration" [Warning Step] [Toner Cart. Warning] [Continue Printing], [Stop Printing] 㻡㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Specifies whether the printer should continue or stop printing when <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.> appears. Specifies whether the printer should automatically use the function that, when an error is occurring, releases the printer from the error temporarily (Error Skip) and continues the job. [Auto Continue] [Off], [On] [Panel Language] >ýHãWLQD@>'DQVN@>'HXWVFK@[English], [Español], [Français], [Italiano], [Magyar], [Nederlands], [Norsk], [Polski], [Português], >Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ@>6XRPL@>6YHQVND@>7UNoH@>中 文( 体)], [ ] [Alarm] [Off], [On] Specifies an alarm sound for when an error occurs. [Toner Cart. Warning] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should display <16 C toner cart. will soon reach lifetime.> <16 M toner cart. will soon reach lifetime.> <16 Y toner cart. will soon reach lifetime.> <16 K toner cart. will soon reach lifetime.> when the toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. [Check Fixing Unit] [Off], [On] Specifies whether a message should appear or any indicator should blink when the fixing unit needs to be replaced soon. [Check ITB Unit] [Off], [On] Specifies whether a message should appear or any indicator should blink when the ITB unit needs to be replaced soon. [Check Waste Tnr Ctn] [Off], [On] Specifies whether a message should appear or any indicator should blink when the waste toner container needs to be replaced soon. [Drawer Empty] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should blink the Paper Source indicator for the paper drawer that ran out of paper. [E-Mail Trans. Error] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should display an error message when a communication error occurs in the e-mail printing. Specifies the language to be displayed in the display. This setting allows you to change language displayed in the Remote UI login screen. [Show Warnings] [Date/Time Settings] [Date] 01/01/2001 to 31/12/2030 [Time (24 hour)] 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 Specify date or time when the clock is not keeping correct date or time. "Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language" [Daylight Savings]* [DST Settings] [Off], [On] Specifies whether to set the daylight saving time. [Start Date/Time]/[End Date/Time] [Month], [Week], [Day], [Time] Specifies the time duration of the daylight saving time. GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 Specifies the time zone according to the region where the printer is being used. [Time Zone]* Specify whether to use SD cards. When the optional SD card is installed, you will be able to use the following functions. 㻡㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [SD Card]*1*2 [Interrupt Print] Interrupt print Changing the order of print data (Priority print) Pausing/Resuming print data processing (Pausing/Resuming printing) Saving print data on the SD card (boxes) (Stored job print) Spooler SMB print Importing and Exporting Settings Stored Job List Print History List (Stored Job) [Off], [On] *2 Set whether to allow the job printing to be interrupted. "Giving Priority to a Print Job (Interrupt Printing) " [Off], [On] Set the amount of time before secured print jobs are automatically deleted. Secured print data is saved on the SD card, and it will not be deleted unless after printed. However, they will be deleted automatically when the amount of time specified with this item has elapsed. [Sec. Print Del. Time] *2 [1 hour], [2 hours], [3 hours], [6 hours], [12 hours], [24 hours] As with secured print data, encrypted secured print data will be deleted automatically when the amount of time specified with this item has elapsed. Even before the amount of time specified with this item elapses, secured print data will be deleted automatically once the printer is turned off or a hard or soft reset is performed. [Secure Job Log] *1*2 If the printer is turned off during printing, the print log of the job being printed may not be saved or the total number of printed pages (page counter) may not be counted. If [On] is specified for this item, the print log of the job being printed is saved, and the total number of printed pages (page counter) is counted even when you turn the printer OFF. [Off], [On] If [On] is specified for this item, printing speed drops. [Select PDL (PnP)]*1 [UFR II], [UFR II XPS]*2 , [PCL5c], [PCL6], [PS3], [XPS (Direct)] 㻡㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you want to connect the printer and computer with a USB cable The printer driver for this printer may be installed automatically when the USB cable is connected. You can select the type of the printer driver ("UFR II", "UFR II XPS", "PCL5c", "PCL6", "PS3", or "XPS (Direct)") to be installed in this item at the time. If you want to connect the printer and computer with a LAN cable If you are using Windows Vista, you can detect the printer automatically using the WSD (Web Service on Devices) protocol. You can select the type of the printer driver ("UFR II", "UFR II XPS", "PCL5c", "PCL6", "PS3", or "XPS (Direct)") to be installed on the automatically detected printer in this item. [Mng. Settings] [Settings Key Lock] ]( : When you set to [On], [ Settings) is locked and you cannot operate the Setup menu. When you set this item to [Off], [Settings Key Lock] is not locked. [Off], [On] * You can unlock the locked Settings key only from the Remote UI. [Adjust Screen] [Contrast] [Backlight Brightness] -3 Dark to 0 to +3 Light [Off], [Level 1], [Level 2], [Level 3] If the display is not clear, adjust the contrast or brightness to the desired level. [Animated Instruction] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should display an animated picture in the display when a paper jam occurs or when a toner cartridge is replaced. [Show Toner Gauge] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should display the icon that indicates the toner remaining. [Set. Comp. Notify] [Off], [1 second], [2 seconds], [3 seconds] Specifies the display time of messages that are displayed when the setting completes. If [Off] is specified, no setting completion message is displayed. [Scrolling Speed] [Slow], [Normal], [Fast] Set the scrolling speed for the message display on the control panel. 㻡㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SY [Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. About the icons The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item. : : When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating systems which do not use the printer driver, the settings are enabled for this item. Setting Item [Paper Source] Setting Value Setting [Auto], [Drawer 1], [Drawer 2]*, [Multi-Purpose Tray] Select the default paper source that is used when printing. [A6], [A5], [A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL], [EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [Custom Size], [Custom Size R], [Env. ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch], [Env. No.10], [Env. DL], [Index Card], [STMT], [FLSC], [16K] Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" [MP Tray Priority] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should detect the paper source in order starting with the multi-purpose tray when [Paper Source] is set to [Auto]. [Drawer 1 Size] [A6], [A5], [A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [Custom Size], [Custom Size R], [STMT], [16K] [Drawer 2 Size]* [Mixed Sizes], [Auto], [Custom Size], [Custom Size R], [FLSC], [16K] [MP Tray Paper Size] [Standard Paper Size] [Diff. Paper Tray] [Auto Selection] [Default Paper Type] Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" [A6], [A5], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL], [EXEC], [Env. ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch], [Env. No.10], [Env. DL], [Index Card], [STMT], [FLSC], [16K] If you cannot specify the paper size or if you print from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system, specify the paper size in this item. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray" [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when paper of the size for the received data is not loaded in the paper drawer. [Multi-Purpose Tray]: [Off], [On] [Drawer 1]: [Off], [On] [Drawer 2]*: [Off], [On] [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Heavy 3], [Transparency], [Envelope], [Labels], 㻡㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Specifies the paper source to be automatically selected when [Paper Source] is set to [Auto]. If [On] is specified, the printer selects the paper source as the one to be automatically selected. If you cannot specify the paper type or if you print from DOS, UNIX, or other [Rough] operating system, specify the paper type in this item. [MP Tray Paper Type] [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Heavy 3], [Transparency], [Envelope], [Labels], [Rough], [Mixed Types] Set the type of paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" "Usable Paper" [Drawer 1 Type] [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Rough], [Mixed Types] [Drawer 2 Type]* [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Heavy 3], [Rough], [Mixed Types] [Manual 2-Sided (MP)] [2-Sided Printing] Set the type of paper that is loaded in the paper drawer. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" "Usable Paper" [1st Side], [2nd Side] Set the printing side of the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray manually for 2-sided printing. When it is set to [1st Side], it is printed on the front of the paper (the side that is first be printed). When it is set to [2nd Side], it is printed on the back of the paper (the reverse side of the paper that has already been printed). [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should print on one side or both sides of the paper. 㻡㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0AF [Setup] Menu ([Network] Options) NOTE Table description After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the settings effective. This item is displayed only when all the following conditions are met. [Network] in [Interface Selection] is set to [On]. Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Setting Item Setting Value Specifies the TCP/IP setting for the print server equipped with this printer. [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings] Setting [IPv4]: [Off], [On] When using IPv4, set it to [On]. [IP Mode]: [Auto], [Manual] Select the method for setting the IP address. When setting the IP address using any one of DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, select [Auto]. When specifying the IP address to the printer directly, select [Manual]. [Protocol]*: [Use DHCP]: [Off], [On] [Use BOOTP]: [Off], [On] [Use RARP]: [Off], [On] If you set [IP Mode] to [Auto], select which protocol you want to use. Set each of [Use DHCP], [Use BOOTP], and [Use RARP] to [On] (use) or [Off] (do not use). [IP Address Settings]: [IP Address]: 0.0.0.0 [Subnet Mask]: 0.0.0.0 [Gateway Address]: 0.0.0.0 Specify [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Gateway Address]. For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for entering addresses" below the table. [DNS]: [Primary Address]: 0.0.0.0 [Secondary Address]: 0.0.0.0 Specify [Primary Address] and [Secondary Address] for DNS. For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for entering addresses" below the table. Specify the settings for [Host Name], [Domain Name], and [DNS Dynamic Update] from the Remote UI. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" [DHCP Option]: [Acquire Host Name]: [Off], [On] [DNS Dynamic Update]: [Off], [On] Set DHCP options when [IP Mode] is set to [Manual] and [Use DHCP] is set to [On]. When obtaining the host name using DHCP, set [Acquire Host Name] to [On]. When updating the host name using DHCP, set [DNS Dynamic Update] to [On]. If you want to use IP v. 6, specify [On]. [IPv6 Settings] [IPv6]: [Off], [On] * Specify the setting for IP v. 6 from the Remote UI. 㻡㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "Setting IP v. 6" If you want to use WINS Resolution, specify [On]. * [WINS Resolution] [Off], [On] [ARP/PING] [Off], [On] [FTP] [FTP Print]: [Off], [On] [FTP Settings]: [Off], [On] Specify the following settings from the Remote UI. [WINS Server Address] [Scope ID] [SMB Server Name] [SMB Workgroup Name] "Configuring the Protocol Settings" When it is set to [On], you can change the IP address settings from the client using ARP/PING commands. When it is set to [On], you can access the printer's FTP server using the FTP client and print the files. If you want to perform the settings using FTP Client, set [FTP Settings] to [On]. * Specify the settings for [FTP Print User Name] and [Password] from the Remote UI. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" If you want to use LPD Print, specify [On]. * [LPD Print] [Off], [On] Specify the setting for [Print LPD Banner Page] from the Remote UI. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" If you want to use RAW Print, specify [On]. * [RAW Print] [Off], [On] Specify the setting for [Use Bidirectional Communication] from the Remote UI. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" If you want to use IPP Print, specify [On]. * [IPP Print] [Off], [On] [WSD Print]: [Off], [On] [WSD] [HTTP] [WSD Browsing] *: [Off], [On] [Multicast Discovery]: [Off], [On] [Off], [On] Specify the settings for [IPP Authentication], [User Name], and [Password] from the Remote UI. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" If you want to use WSD Print, set [WSD Print] to [On], and then specify the following settings. If you want to obtain printer information using WSD, set [WSD Browsing] to [On]. If you set [WSD Print] to [On], [WSD Browsing] is not displayed. ([WSD Browsing] is fixed at [On].) If you want to set the printer to respond to requests from multicast discovery, set [Multicast Discovery] to [On]. When it is set to [On], you will be able to access the printer using HTTP. When this is set to [Off], the message appears, disallowing you to use the Remote UI or perform IPP printing. [Proxy]: [Off], [On] If you want to use the proxy function, specify [On]. [Server Address] *: - Enter the proxy server address to be used for the proxy function. [Port Number]*: 0 to 80 to 99999 Enter the port number of the proxy server to be used for the proxy function. You can specify between [0] and [99999]. [Same Domain] *: [Use If you want to use the proxy function also for the same domain, 㻡㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Proxy Settings] * Proxy], [Do Not Use Proxy] specify [Use Proxy]. [Proxy Authentication] *: [Off], [On] If you want to use the proxy authentication function, specify [On]. [User Name] *: - Enter the user name to be used for the proxy authentication. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Password] *: - Enter the password to be used for the proxy authentication. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. When obtaining time using the SNTP Client function, specify [On]. * [SNTP] [Off], [On] Specify the settings for [NTP Server Name] and [Polling Interval] from the Remote UI. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" If you want to set the printer so that it responds to searches that used the multicast discovery function, specify [On]. [Discovery Response] [Off], [On] [IPSec] [Off], [On] * Specify the setting for [Scope Name] from the Remote UI. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" When using the IPSec function, set it to [On]. "Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function " [NetWare]: [Off], [On] [NetWare Settings] [Frame Type] *: [Auto Detect], [Ethernet II], [Ethernet 802.2], [Ethernet 802.3], [Ethernet SNAP] Configures the NetWare network settings. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" [Print Service]*: [Bindery PServer], [RPrinter], [NDS PServer], [NPrinter] [AppleTalk] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should use AppleTalk. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" [SMB] * [SMB Server]: [Off], [On] [SMB Print]: [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should use SMB. "Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) " Specify the settings related to SNMP protocol. "Restricting the Users Who Can Monitor/Change the Settings Using the SNMP Protocol" [SNMP Settings] [SNMP v. 1 Settings] [SNMP v. 1] [Dctd. Community Set.] [SNMP v. 3 Specify the settings related to SNMP v. 1 protocol. [Off], [On] [Dctd. Community]: [Off], [Read/Write], [Read Only] [SNMP v. 3]: [Off], [On] [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5]*: Specify whether to use the SNMP v. 1 protocol. [Dctd. Community] specifies whether to permit accessing to the Management Information Base (MIB) that SNMP manages using the name of dedicated community for Canon equipment. To use Canon utility software, it may be necessary to select [Read/Write]. Specify the settings related to SNMP v. 3 protocol. 㻡㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Settings] [Auth. Password] [Encryption Password] Specifies whether to discard the SNMP packets received while in sleep mode. [Rjct Packet in Sleep] If you set this item to [On], you may be unable to access the printer from Canon software (iW Series) or applications using the SNMP protocol. [Off], [On] [Spooler] * [Off], [On] When using the spooling function, set it to [On]. "Setting the Spooling Function " [Network Delay Time] 0 to 300 seconds Specifies the time interval from when the printer is turned ON to when the protocol starts. "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" [Remote UI Settings] [Ethernet Driver] [Remote UI]: [Off], [On] [SSL]*: [Off], [On] * [Auto Detect]: [Off], [On] [Communication Mode] *: [Half Duplex], [Full Duplex] Specifies whether the printer should use the Remote UI. Also, whether to use SSL for communication by the Remote UI is specified. "Setting Keys and Certificates" Configures the Ethernet driver. "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" [Ethernet Type] *: [10 Base-T], [100 BaseTX], [1000 Base-T] [Off], [On] When using the IEEE802.1X function, set it to [On]. "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" [Address Filter] [Off],[On] When using the address filter function, set it to [On]. "Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings" "Restricting the Users Who Can Access" [MAC Address] (Display only) Displays the MAC address of the printer. [IEEE802.1X] Set e-mail print. [E-Mail Print Set.] When [POP3 RX Interval] is changed from 0 minute, POP3 reception immediately after the setting has been changed is performed at a specified interval plus approximately five seconds. From the second time onwards, POP3 reception is performed at a specified interval. [POP3 RX Interval]: 0 to 90 (minutes) [POP3 RX]: [Off], [On] [SMTP RX]: [Off], [On] "Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)" By the initialization in this item, you can reset the network settings to the default settings. "Initializing the Network Settings" [Init. Network Set.] Method for entering addresses 1. Move the cursor to each field (an area separated by periods to enter three-digit numbers) in which you want to enter ] or [ ]. (The number in the field blinks, allowing you to enter a value.) the address, by pressing [ 2. Enter the numbers. ([ ] increases the value and [ ] decreases the value.) 3. After entering values in all the fields, press [OK] to confirm the settings. 㻡㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U0 [Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. About the icon : The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item. Setting Item [Copies] [Offset Y]/[Offset X] Setting Value Setting 1 to 9999 Specifies the number of copies to be printed. The printer prints the specified number of copies. -50.0 to 0.0 to +50.0 (mm) Adjusts the printing position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction (X) by the specified value. "Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs" Specifies which edge of the paper, the long edge or short edge, is to be bound. When performing 2-sided printing, the printer adjusts the binding location automatically according to the paper surface. If [Long Edge] is specified, the binding location is created on the long edge of the paper. [Binding Location] [Gutter] [Long Edge], [Short Edge] -50.0 to 0.0 to +50.0 (mm) If [Short Edge] is specified, the binding location is created on the short edge of the paper. Specifies the gutter width for printing with the binding location created. A gutter is created with the image shifted by the specified value. You can shift the image in the "+" direction with a positive value and in the "-" direction with a negative value. 㻡㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If this item is set to [On] and if the last page for the 2-sided printing is 1-sided printing, 1-sided printing is applied to the last page. (Printing can be performed faster than normal 2-sided printing.) However, when performing 2-sided printing on punched paper or previously printed paper, the orientation or printing surface of the last page may differ from other pages. In this case, specify [Off]. [Alternative Method] [Off], [On] If [On] is specified, 1-sided printing is also performed in the following cases. The page on the back side of the sheet (even-numbered page) is blank. The page on the back side of the sheet (even-numbered page) cannot be printed (for example due to page size not permitting 2sided printing). 㻡㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U1 [Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. About the icons The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item. : : The settings in the control panel are enabled for this item because the settings are prioritized for the default settings for the printer driver. Check the settings in the control panel even when using the printer driver. Setting Item Setting Value [Gradation Level] [High 1], [High 2] Setting Specify the data gradation process when printing. It is effective to set [High 1] when printing photographs at standard quality, and to set [High 2] when printing at a higher quality. [Toner Save] is used for test printing. When you use [Toner Save], you can save toner when you print. [Toner Save] [Off], [On] [Density: C]* -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Density: M] * -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Density: Y] * -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Density: K] * -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Density C (Fine Adj)]* [High]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Mid]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Low]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Density M (Fine Adj)]* [High]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Mid]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Low]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Density Y (Fine Adj)]* [High]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Mid]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Low]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark When it is set to [On], the print density becomes lower, and sometimes it does not print well. Adjust the print density of each color when printing. The larger the setting value, the greater the print density. When [Toner Save] is set to [On], this setting is unselectable. Adjust the print density of each color for density level. The larger the setting value, the greater the print density. When [Toner Save] is set to [On], this setting is unselectable. 㻡㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Density K (Fine Adj)]* [High]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Mid]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Low]: -8 Light to 0 to +8 Dark [Color Mode] [Auto (Color/Black)], [Color], [Black] Specify color printing or B&W printing. When it is set to [Auto (Color/Black)], it automatically switches between color and black and white printing depending on the original type. When it is set to [Color], it prints in 4 colors: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (Bk). When it is set to [Black], it prints color documents in black (Bk) only. [Halftones] [Error Diffusion]: [Off], [On] [Resolution/Grad.]: [Text]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Graphics]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Image]: [Resolution], [Gradation] Specify the halftone display method when printing. When [Error Diffusion] is set to [On], it uses error diffusion that excels at subtle expression of text and fine lines. It is suitable for printing small text or particularly fine lines. When [Error Diffusion] is set to [Off], you can select the halftone display method from [Resolution] and [Gradation] using [Resolution/Grad.]. [Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Gradation] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. [Text]: [Off], [On] [Graphics]: [Off], [On] [Image]: [Off], [On] When printing in color, for RGB equivalent, set whether to print in black (K) toner only to print in CMYK 4-color toner. When it is set to [On], black and gray data is printed in black (K) only. This can prevent color registration errors. When it is set to [Off], it is printed with CMYK 4-color toner. The gradation of dark colors is reproduced more faithfully than when it is set to [On]. [CMS Selection] [Printer], [Host] Set which side will perform color processing, the printer side or the host side (printer driver). [CMS/Gamma] [Text]: [CMS], [Gamma] [Graphics]: [CMS], [Gamma] [Image]: [CMS], [Gamma] Set whether to perform color matching or to perform color correction by setting a gamma value. [Gray Compensation] [CMS] [RGB Source Profile] [Text]: [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4] [Graphics]: [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4] [Image]: [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], Select a suitable profile for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using. When it set to [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], it is set to the industry standard image quality for general Windows (PC) monitors. When using monitors that support sRGB, it can match the colors displayed on the monitor and the colors printed in the printer and print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. When it is set to [Canon HDTV gamma X.X], it adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the data are not lost. Set it to adjust the brightness, such as when the print result is brighter than the colors displayed on 㻡㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4] the monitor. The larger the gamma value, the darker it is printed. [Output Profile] [Text]: [Normal], [Photo] [Graphics]: [Normal], [Photo] [Image]: [Normal], [Photo] Set the output profile. The output profile is applied to all of the print data. [Matching Method] [Text]: [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] [Graphics]: [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] [Image]: [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] Since the colors displayed on the computer monitor and the colors that the printer can reproduce differ, adjust the colors. Select the adjustment method depending your use or preference. When it is set to [Perceptual], matching is performed by making it prioritize shades (hues). When it is set to [Saturation], it provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. When it is set to [Colorimetric], it matches so that the color difference between originals such as logos and the output color is minimized. [Gamma Correction] [Text]: [1.0], [1.4], [1.8], [2.2] [Graphics]: [1.0], [1.4], [1.8], [2.2] [Image]: [1.0], [1.4], [1.8], [2.2] It adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the document are not lost. The larger the setting value, the darker it is printed. [1.4] shows no correction. [Gradation Settings] [Gradation]: [Off], [Smooth 1], [Smooth 2] [Graphics]: [Off], [On] [Image]: [Off], [On] Set this item when you cannot print the gradations of image data such as graphics (illustrations created in other applications) and images (bitmaps) smoothly (color transitions stand out). [Smooth 2] is better than [Smooth 1] for performing a smoothing process that provides smoother gradation. You also can select what to smooth by switching [Graphics] and [Image] [On]/[Off]. [Advanced Smoothing] [Advanced Smoothing]: [Off], [Smooth 1], [Smooth 2] [Graphics]: [Off], [On] [Text]: [Off], [On] Specify whether to use the smoothing process to smooth the edges of graphics (illustrations created in other applications) or text. [Smooth 2] is better than [Smooth 1] for performing a smoothing process that provides more smoothing. You can select what to smooth by switching [Graphics] and [Text] [On]/[Off]. [Toner Volume Corr.] [Normal], [Gradation Priority], [Text Priority] Set the correction method for when the toner volume has exceeded the printer's limit value when printing high density parts. When it is set to [Normal], it prints text and lines using the toner volume that will preserve resolution, and it prints the other data with the toner volume that will preserve hue. When it is set to [Gradation Priority], it prints all the data using the toner volume that will preserve hue. When it is set to [Text Priority], it prints all the data using the toner volume that will preserve resolution. [Line Control] [Resolution Priority], [Gradation Priority] Set image processing for lines. When it is set to [Resolution Priority], it processes lines in the same way as text so that resolution is preserved. When it is set to [Gradation Priority], it processes lines in the same way as graphics so that gradation is preserved. Specifies whether the printer should continue printing with the image quality of the data being lowered automatically or stop printing 㻡㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Reduce Quality] [Continue Printing], [Stop Printing] displaying the following error message when the memory required for the process runs out. If [Continue Printing] is specified, the printer prints with the image quality level being lowered automatically without displaying a message. If [Stop Printing] is specified, the printer stops printing, displaying a message. In this case, the printer resumes printing with the ]( : image quality of the data being lowered by pressing [ Online). 㻡㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0AK [Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. After changing the setting items with "*1", cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the settings effective. The setting items or setting values with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Setting Item Setting Value Setting [Interface Selection] *1 [USB]: [Off], [On] [Network]: [Off], [On] [USB Storage Device]: [MEAP Driver]: [Off], [On] Specifies the settings for the interfaces used for communication with the computer and so on. You can specify [On] or [Off] for each interface. [Timeout] [Timeout]: [Off], [On] [Timeout Time] *2 : 5 to 15 to 300 seconds Specifies the function to finish a job automatically. [Connection Recog.]*1 [Extended RX Buffer] *1 [Off], [On] When you print using the standard network, you may not obtain proper printout results. (Unreadable characters are printed, overlay printing fails, etc.) In this case, specify [Off] for this item. [Off], [On] If this item is set to [On], the memory capacity of the printer's receive buffer that receives the data is increased. You can speed up the time the computer exits when you send a large amount of data or complicated data from the computer. 㻡㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U2 [Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Setting Item [Adj. Start Position] Setting Value [Offset Y (MP Tray)]: -0-5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm) [Offset X (MP Tray)]: -2.22 to 0.00 to +2.22 (mm) [Offset Y (Drawer 1)]: -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm) [Offset X (Drawer 1)]: -2.22 to 0.00 to +2.22 (mm) [Offset Y (Drawer 2)]*: -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm) [Offset X (Drawer 2)]*: -2.22 to 0.00 to +2.22 (mm) [Offset Y (2-Sided)]: -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm) [Offset X (2-Sided)]: -2.22 to 0.00 to +2.22 (mm) Setting Specifies the printing position of the paper in the specified paper source. Adjusts the position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction (X) by the specified value. The setting values are indicated in millimeters (mm), and you can adjust ] and [ ]. the position using [ If you do not adjust the printing position, specify [0.0] for this item. Adjust the printing position for 2-sided printing as follows. Adjust the printing position of the first page using [Offset Y (2-Sided)] and [Offset X (2-Sided)]. The printing position of the second page depends on the settings for each paper source. If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing position, the part will be missing in the print result. "Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source" [Recovery Printing] [Off], [On] Specifies whether to print the partially printed page when the printer stops printing due to a paper jam or an error occurring. [Check Paper Size] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should stop printing, displaying the message <Check paper size.> or continue printing when [MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size], [Drawer 2 Size] is set to [Mixed Sizes]. When the paper of the target size is not loaded in the printer, the printer prints on paper of the following sizes. 㻢㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Substitute Size] [Special Image Mode] [Off], [On] [Off], [Level 1], [Level 2] Printer Driver Setting Size of the Paper to Be Printed Letter ĺ A4 A4 ĺ Letter If the centers of dense text or lines are not being printed, set this to [Level 1]. If the problem still persists after setting it to [Level 1], set it to [Level 2]. When [Special Image Mode] is used, the print density becomes lower. [SD Card Maintenance] [Format] [No], [Yes] Delete the contents of the SD card. [Off], [On] When printed paper curls, set this item to [On]. [Special Print Mode] [Curl Correction] If plain paper with a smooth surface is used, the density may be low. In such a case, set this item to [On] to improve this problem. [Smooth Plain Paper] [Off], [On] Normally, use the printer with this option set to [Off]. Change the setting for this option only if the above phenomenon occurs. [Update Firmware] [USB] This option is to be executed only when the firmware of the printer needs to be updated. [Network] [First Calibration] [Off], [After Jobs], [Immediately] Specify the timing of calibration. If [After Jobs] is specified, calibration is performed at the completion of the first printing after the printer is turned on. If [Immediately] is specified, calibration is performed immediately after the printer is turned on. When calibration is performed immediately after the printer is turned on, excessive time is required until the printer is ready to print. "Automatically Performing Calibration Immediately after the Printer Is Turned ON" [Paper Feed Method] [MultiPurpose Tray]: [Speed Priority], [Print Side Priority] [Drawer 1]: [Speed Priority], [Print Side Priority] [Drawer 2]*: [Speed Specifies on which side of the loaded paper the printer should print. Perform printing after selecting the paper drawer or tray to feed paper. Select the paper source. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" The setting of this item determines which side of paper is printed on. Load the paper in proper orientation. "Paper Loading Orientation" If [Speed Priority] is specified, the printing sides of the paper for 1sided printing and 2-sided printing do not match. If you specify [Print Side Priority], the printer matches the printing sides of the paper for 1-sided printing and 2-sided printing. Therefore, when you print previously printed paper, you do not need to reload the paper each time you switch between the settings. 㻢㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Priority], [Print Side Priority] If you specify [Print Side Priority], the print speed drops. Specify whether or not to adjust the temperature of the fixing unit during standby. If other than [Off] is specified, the time to start printing from the standby state becomes shorter compared to when [Off] is specified. [Mode (Time to start printing from the standby state: shorter/power 1] consumption: larger, compared to when [Off] is specified) Ļ [Adjust Standby Temp] [Off], [Mode 1], [Mode 2], [Mode 3] [Mode 2] Ļ [Mode (Time to start printing from the standby state: shortest/power 3] consumption: largest) If other than [Off] is specified, the power consumption during standby becomes larger compared to when [Off] is specified. [Show Job List] [Off], [On] ]( : Job Specifies whether to display the job list when [ Status/Cancel) is pressed. If [On] is specified, the printer displays the job list. If [Off] is specified, the printer does not display the job list. [IMPORT/EXPORT] [EXPORT], [IMPORT] You can save and read printer settings. "Importing and Exporting Settings" 㻢㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0AR [Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. Setting Item [Auto Mode Selection] [Auto Select] [Mode Priority] Setting Value [Auto Selection], [PCL], [PS], [PDF], [XPS] [PCL]: [Off], [On] [PS]: [Off], [On] [PDF]: [Off], [On] [XPS]: [Off], [On] [None], [PCL], [PS], [PDF], [XPS] Setting Specifies the mode in which this printer operates when you print without using the printer driver for this printer. If the print mode is not appropriate, such a printing problem as unreadable characters being printed may occur. Specify this item according to the job to be printed. Specifies the print mode to be automatically switched if [Auto Mode Selection] is set to [Auto Selection]. If [On] is specified, the mode is to be automatically switched to. You can specify [Mode Priority] to be switched to by priority for when [Auto Mode Selection] is set to [Auto Selection] and this printer cannot identify the control command of the data. If you specify [None], the printer does not specify the mode priority. If this printer cannot identify the control command of the data, it determines the mode automatically. 㻢㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0AS [Setup] Menu ([UFR II] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. Setting Item [Paper Save] Setting Value [Off], [On] Setting Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to no data existing in the page data sent from an application. 㻢㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0AU [Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Setting Item Setting Value Setting [Paper Save] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to no data existing between two Form Feed codes sent from an application. [Orientation] [Portrait], [Landscape] Enables you to set the paper orientation. [Font Number] 0 to 104 Enables you to set the default font for this printer function using the corresponding font numbers. Valid font numbers are from 0 to 104. 4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 point If the number selected in [Font Number] is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font, this option appears in the [PCL] options. It enables you to specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in increments of 0.25 pts. [Pitch] * 0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 cpi If the number selected in [Font Number] is that of a fixed pitch scalable font, Pitch appears in the [PCL] options. It enables you to specify the pitch for the default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments of 0.01 cpi (characters per inch). [Form Lines] 5 to 64 to 128 lines Enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. You can specify from 5 to 128 lines. [Character Code] [PC8], [ROMAN8], [ROMAN9], [ISOL1], [ISOL2], [ISOL5], [ISOL6], [ISOL9], [PC775], [PC8DN], [PC850], [PC852], [PC858], [PC8TK], [PC1004], [WINL1], [WINL2], [WINL5], [WINBALT], [DESKTOP], [PSTEXT], [LEGAL], [ISO4], [ISO6], [ISO11], [ISO15], [ISO17], [ISO21], [ISO60], [ISO69], [WIN 30], [MCTEXT], [PC864], [ARABIC8], [WINARB], [PC866], [ISOCYR], [WINCYR], [PC851], [GREEK8], [ISOGRK], [PC8GRK], [WINGRK], [PC862], [HEBREW7], [HEBREW8], [ISOHEB] Enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer. [Custom Size] [Do Not Set], [Set] Enables you to specify a custom paper size. If [Set] is selected, you can enter a custom size. [Unit of Measurement] * [Millimeters], [Inches] Enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify your custom paper size. [X Dimension] * 76.2 to 215.9 mm; 215.9 mm (3.00 to 8.50 in.; 8.50 in.) Enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom paper. The X dimension can be adjusted between 76.2 mm and 215.9 mm in increments of 0.1 mm. [Point Size]* * 127.0 to 355.6 mm; 355.6 mm 㻢㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom [Y Dimension] (5.00 to 14.00 in.; 14.00 in.) paper. The Y dimension can be adjusted between 127.0 mm and 355.6 mm in increments of 0.1 mm. Enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received. [Append CR to LF] [Yes], [No] [Enlarge A4 Prt Width] [Off], [On] Determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 paper to that of Letter size in width. [BarDIMM] * [Enable], [Disable] You can enable or disable the Bar Code Printing function of the printer. [Off], [~], ["], [#], [$], [/], [\], [?], [{], [}], [|] You can specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does not support the standard Escape Code. [FreeScape] * 㻢㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U3 [Setup] Menu ([Imaging] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. After changing the setting items with "*1", cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset to make the settings effective. The setting items or setting values with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Setting Item Setting Value Setting [Image Orientation] [Auto], [Vertical], [Horizontal] Specifies whether the printer should print an image in portrait (vertical) orientation or in landscape (horizontal) orientation. [Zoom] [Off], [Auto] Specifies whether the printer should print with scaling outputs according to the printable area. [Print Position] [Auto], [Center], [Top Left] Specifies the printing position for an image. [Print Guarantee] *1*2 [Off], [On] Set the processing method for received TIFF data. When it is set to [Off], the processing time is shortened by processing received TIFF data sequentially. When it is set to [On], it is possible to prevent errors from occurring, since all the TIFF data is received before processing begins. However, the printing speed will drop. After specifying, perform a hard reset or restart the printer to enable the settings. [Show Warnings] [Off], [Print], [Panel] [Print E-Mail Text] [On], [Off] [Limit E-Mail Print] *2 [Off], [On] Specifies the display setting for the error message in case of an error occurring. Set e-mail print. "Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)" Specifies whether the printer should print a document with its printable area expanded. [Enlarge Print Area] [RGB Source Profile] [Off], [On] [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4] [Euro Standard When [On] is specified, part of the print image may be missing near the margins of the paper. Select a suitable profile for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using. When it set to [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], it is set to the industry standard image quality for general Windows (PC) monitors. When using monitors that support sRGB, it can match the colors displayed on the monitor and the colors printed in the printer and print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. When it is set to [Canon HDTV gamma X.X], it adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the data are not lost. Set it to adjust the brightness, such as when the print result is brighter than the colors displayed on the monitor. The larger the gamma value, the darker it is printed. You can set a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-dependent CMYK color model in accordance with the simulation target selected by the CMYK 㻢㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [CMYK Sim. Profile] [Output Profile] [Matching Method] [Halftones] v1.00], [JapanColor (Canon)], [U.S. Web Coated v1.0] simulation profile. When it is set to [JapanColor (Canon)], it uses JapanColor profile. When it is set to [U.S. Web Coated v1.0], it uses U.S. Web Coated profile. When it is set to [Euro Standard v1.00], it uses Euro Standard profile [Normal], [Photo] You can define suitable profiles for data that you are trying to print. When it is set to [Normal], it matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor, and prints. When it is set to [Photo], it matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints. [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] Specify the printing method when [RGB Source Profile] is applied. You can select color rendering style on the machine, as shown below. When it is set to [Perceptual], it provides colors suitable for printing photos and bitmap images. When it is set to [Saturation], it provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. When it is set to [Colorimetric], it reproduces as accurately as possible the RGB color values that are within the machine's color gamut. [Resolution], [Gradation], [Error Diffusion] Specify the halftone display method when printing When it is set to [Resolution], you can print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. When it is set to [Gradation] you can perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. When it is set to [Error Diffusion], it uses error diffusion that excels at subtle expression of text and fine lines. It is suitable for printing small text or particularly fine lines. [Photo Corr (CL Only)]*2 Set whether to correct image contrast, color balance, saturation, and gradation automatically and print. [Photo Optimizer PRO] [Off], [On] [Red-Eye Correction] [Red-Eye Correction]: [Off], [On] [Red-Eye Correct. Lv.]*2 : [Weak], [Standard], [Strong] [Face Brightener] [Face Brightener]: [Off], [On] [Face Brightener Lv.]*2 : [Weak], [Standard], [Strong] If [Color Mode] is set as [Black], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Set whether to detect and correct red eye caused by flash or strobe light when shooting and print. When [Red-Eye Correction] is set to [On], set the red-eye correction strength. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Set whether or not to correct and print photographs in which people's faces are dark due to insufficient backlighting or underexposure so that the entire image is brightened and the people's faces are the preferred brightness. When [Face Brightener] is set to [On], set the correction strength for brightening the entire image. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for 㻢㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Grayscale Conversion] *2 [sRGB], [NTSC], [Uniform RGB] printing. When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion method. When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion method. When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value. 㻢㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U4 [Setup] Menu ([XPS] Options) NOTE Table description The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. Setting Item Setting Value Setting [ICC Profile], [Gamma] Set whether to perform color matching or to perform color correction by setting a gamma value. [RGB Source Profile] [Text]: [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4] [Graphics]: [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4] [Image]: [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4] Select a suitable profile for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using. When it set to [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], it is set to the industry standard image quality for general Windows (PC) monitors.When using monitors that support sRGB, it can match the colors displayed on the monitor and the colors printed in the printer and print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. When it is set to [Canon HDTV gamma X.X], it adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the data are not lost. Set it to adjust the brightness, such as when the print result is brighter than the colors displayed on the monitor. The larger the gamma value, the darker it is printed. [Output Profile] [Text]: [Normal], [Photo] [Graphics]: [Normal], [Photo] [Image]: [Normal], [Photo] You can define suitable profiles for data that you are trying to print. When it is set to [Normal], it matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor, and prints. When it is set to [Photo], it matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints. [Matching Method] [Text]: [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] [Graphics]: [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] [Image]: [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] Specify the printing method when [RGB Source Profile] is applied. You can select color rendering style on the machine, as shown below. When it is set to [Perceptual], it provides colors suitable for printing photos and bitmap images. When it is set to [Saturation], it provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. When it is set to [Colorimetric], it reproduces as accurately as possible the RGB color values that are within the machine's color gamut. [Gamma Correction]: [Text]: [1.0], [1.4], [1.8], [2.2] [Graphics]: [1.0], [1.4], [1.8], [2.2] [Image]: [1.0], [1.4], [1.8], [2.2] It adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the document are not lost. The larger the setting value, the darker it is printed. [1.4] shows no correction. [Matching Mode] [ICC Profile Settings] [Gamma Settings] 㻢㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Photo Corr (CL Only)] Set whether to correct image contrast, color balance, saturation, and gradation automatically and print. [Photo Optimizer PRO] [Red-Eye Correction] [Off], [On] [Red-Eye Correction]: [Off], [On] [Red-Eye Correct. Lv.]*2 : [Weak], [Standard], [Strong] [Face Brightener]: [Off], [On] [Face Brightener] [Face Brightener Lv.]*2 : [Weak], [Standard], [Strong] If [Color Mode] is set as [Black], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Set whether to detect and correct red eye caused by flash or strobe light when shooting and print. When [Red-Eye Correction] is set to [On], set the red-eye correction strength. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Set whether or not to correct and print photographs in which people's faces are dark due to insufficient backlighting or underexposure so that the entire image is brightened and the people's faces are the preferred brightness. When [Face Brightener] is set to [On], set the correction strength for brightening the entire image. If [Color Mode] is set as [Black], the setting for this item becomes invalid. [Halftones] [Error Diffusion] [Off], [On] Specify the halftone display method when printing. When [Error Diffusion] is set to [On], it uses error diffusion that excels at subtle expression of text and fine lines. It is suitable for printing small text or particularly fine lines. [Resolution/Grad.]* [Text]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Graphics]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Image]: [Resolution], [Gradation] When [Error Diffusion] is set to [Off], you can select the halftone display method from [Resolution] and [Gradation] using [Resolution/Grad.]. [Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Gradation] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. [Text]: [Off], [On] [Graphics]: [Off], [On] [Image]: [Off], [On] When printing in color, for RGB equivalent, set whether to print in black (K) toner only to print in CMYK 4-color toner. When it is set to [On], black and gray data is printed in black (K) only. This can prevent color registration errors. When it is set to [Off], it is printed with CMYK 4-color toner. The gradation of dark colors is reproduced more faithfully than when it is set to [On]. [Gray Compensation] [Advanced Smoothing] [Advanced Smoothing]: [Off], [Smooth 1], [Smooth 2] [Graphics] *: [Off], [On] [Text] *: [Off], [On] [Grayscale [Text]: [sRGB], [NTSC], [Uniform RGB] [Graphics]: [sRGB], Specify whether to use the smoothing process to smooth the edges of graphics (illustrations created in other applications) or text. [Smooth 2] is better than [Smooth 1] for performing a smoothing process that provides more smoothing. You can select what to smooth by switching [Graphics] and [Text]: [On]/[Off]. Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing. When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion method. When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion method. 㻢㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Conversion] [NTSC], [Uniform RGB] [Image]: [sRGB], [NTSC], [Uniform RGB] When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value. If [Color Mode] is set as [Auto (Color/Black)] and [Color], the setting for this item becomes invalid. 㻢㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U5 [Setup] Menu ([PDF] Options) NOTE Table description The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. Setting Item Setting Value Setting Set it to enlarge or reduce to fit the effective print area of the specified paper. [Fit to Page] [Off], [On] This setting fixes the aspect ratio and scales the page size of the PDF file. Set whether to expand the effective print area to the edges of the paper without leaving margins around the edges of the paper. [Enlarged Print Area] [Off], [On] [N on 1] [Off], [2 on 1], [4 on 1], [6 on 1], [8 on 1], [9 on 1], [16 on 1] You can print multiple pages of the PDF file data arranged on one page. When multiple pages are printed, they are arranged from the top left. [Comment Print] [Off], [Auto] Specify whether to print the comments inside the PDF file that are specified for printing. [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4], [None] Select a suitable profile for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using. When it is set to [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], it is set to the industry standard image quality for general Windows (PC) monitors. When using monitors that support sRGB, it can match the colors displayed on the monitor and the colors printed in the printer and print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. When it is set to [Canon HDTV Gamma X.X], it adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the data are not lost. Set it to adjust the brightness, such as when the print result is brighter than the colors displayed on the monitor. The larger the gamma value, the darker it is printed. When it is set to [None], it performs color separation from RGB data to CMYK without applying an RGB profile. When it is set to [On], images on the edges of the paper may be partially cut off. [ICC Profile Settings] [RGB Source Profile] [CMYK Sim. Profile] [Euro Standard v1.00], [JapanColor (Canon)], [U.S. Web Coated v1.0], [None] You can set a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-depe ndent CMYK color model in accordance with the simulation target selected by the CMYK simulation profile. When it is set to [U.S. Web Coated v1.0], it uses U.S. Web Coated profile. When it is set to [Euro Standard v1.00], it uses Euro Standard profile. When it is set to [None], it prints CMYK data using a devicedependent CMYK color model, without applying a CMYK simulation profile. 㻢㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If this item is set to [None], dark color gradation may collapse, depending on the data. [Grayscale Profile] [Output Profile] [Off], [On] [PS Normal], [PS Photo], [PS TR Normal], [PS TR Photo] Set what type of processing to use for device-dependent gray data. When it is set to [On], it uses the printer's "Grayscale Profile" to convert it to CMYK data. However, it may be reproduced using black (Bk) toner only, by using the [Output Profile] or [Pure Black Text] settings. When it is set to [Off], it is reproduced using black (Bk) toner only. You can define suitable profiles for data that you are trying to print. When it is set to [PS Normal], it matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor, and prints. When it is set to [PS Photo], it matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints. When it is set to [PS TR Normal], it matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor and prints, while also controlling the bleeding of toner into text and fine lines. When it is set to [PS TR Photo], it matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints, while also controlling the bleeding of toner into text and fine lines. When [RGB Source Profile] and [CMYK Sim. Profile] are set to [None], or [Grayscale Profile] is set to [Off], this setting is not applied to device-dependent color data. [Matching Method] [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] Specify the printing method when [RGB Source Profile] is applied. When it is set to [Perceptual], it provides colors suitable for printing photos and bitmap images. When it is set to [Saturation], it provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. When it is set to [Colorimetric], it reproduces as accurately as possible the RGB color values that are within the machine's color gamut. When [RGB Source Profile] or [CMYK Sim. Profile] are set to [None], if the printer receives a device-dependent color space definition that has been processed by the host computer, the setting for this item becomes invalid. [RGB Pure Black Mode] [Off], [On] When device-dependent RGB data is converted to device-dependent CMYK using [RGB Source Profile] in this machine, set what type of processing to use for black and gray data that becomes R=G=B. When it is set to [On], it prints using black (Bk) toner only, regardless of the [Output Profile] setting that is selected. When it is set to [Off], it prints according to the selected [Output Profile] setting. If uneven gradation or staining is visible when printing black or gray data, set this item to [Off], and set [Output Profile] to [Normal]. [CMYK Pure Black] [Off], [On] When device-dependent CMYK is processed using [CMYK Sim. Profile] in this machine, set what type of printing to use for grey data (C=M=Y=0). When it is set to [On], it prints using black (Bk) toner only, regardless of the [Output Profile] setting that is selected. When it is set to [Off], it converts it and prints according to the selected [Output Profile] setting. 㻢㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If [CMYK Sim. Profile] is set as [None], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Set how to print black (R=G=B=0% and C=M=Y=100%/BK=N% or C=M=Y=0%/Bk=100%) text. When it is set to [On], it prints data for black colors created by applications using only 100% black toner. The text is never printed with color toner slurring around the edges. [Pure Black Text] [Off], [On] When it is set to [Off], it prints black text according to the selected [Output Profile] setting. Set how to print black (R=G=B=0% and C=M=Y=100%/BK=N% or C=M=Y=0%/Bk=100%) text. When it is set to [On], if black text is on a colored background, there is never a white rim around the edges of the text, so that the black text is not printed set out from the background with white edges. [Black Overprint] * [Off], [On] When it is set to [Off], if black text is on a colored background, after the black text is printed set out from the background with white edges, black text is printed on the white edges. The print may be fainter than the print result if it were set to [On], and the edges of the text may be rimmed with white. 85 to 100 to 115% You can adjust the brightness of the whole image. You can use this setting to set from 85 to115% at intervals of 5%. The smaller the value the brighter it becomes. The larger the value the darker it becomes. [Error Diffusion] [Off], [On] Specify the halftone display method when printing. When [Error Diffusion] is set to [On], it uses error diffusion that excels at subtle expression of text and fine lines. It is suitable for printing small text or particularly fine lines. [Resolution/Grad.] [Text]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Graphics]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Image]: [Resolution], [Gradation] When [Error Diffusion] is set to [Off], you can select the halftone display method from [Resolution] and [Gradation] using [Resolution/Grad.]. When it is set to [On], it uses the printer's "Grayscale Profile" to convert it to CMYK data. However, it may be reproduced using black (Bk) toner only, by using the [Output Profile] or [Pure Black Text] settings. When it is set to [Off], it is reproduced using black (Bk) toner only. [Brightness] [Halftones] [CMYK Overprint] [Off], [On] You can overprint device-dependent CMYK data as composite output. Since all the colors used in the data are overprinted to a single palette, you can check the result without performing color separation. If [CMYK Sim. Profile] is set as a value other than [None], the 㻢㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 setting for this item becomes invalid. [Advanced Smoothing] [Advanced Smoothing]: [Off], [Smooth 1], [Smooth 2] [Graphics] *: [Off], [On] [Text] *: [Off], [On] [Grayscale Conversion] * [sRGB], [NTSC], [Uniform RGB] Specify whether to use the smoothing process to smooth the edges of graphics (illustrations created in other applications) or text. [Smooth 1] is better than [Smooth 2] for performing a smoothing process that provides more smoothing. You can select what to smooth by switching [Graphics] and [Text]: [On]/[Off]. Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing. When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion method. When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion method. When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value. If [Color Mode] is set as [Auto (Color/Black)] and [Color], the setting for this item becomes invalid. 㻢㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U6 [Setup] Menu ([PS] Options) NOTE Table description The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. Setting Item Setting Value Setting [Job Timeout] 0 to 3600 seconds If the time specified in this item has elapsed since a job process was started, the printer automatically finishes the job and receives the next job. If you do not want to specify the timeout, specify "0 seconds." [Print PS Errors] [Off], [On] Specifies whether an error page should be printed when a PostScript error is occurring. [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4], [None] Select a suitable profile for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using. When it set to [sRGB v3.0 (Canon)], it is set to the industry standard image quality for general Windows (PC) monitors. When using monitors that support sRGB, it can match the colors displayed on the monitor and the colors printed in the printer and print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor. When it is set to [Canon HDTV gamma X.X], it adjusts the brightness of the printed result so that the brightest and darkest parts of the data are not lost. Set it to adjust the brightness, such as when the print result is brighter than the colors displayed on the monitor. The larger the gamma value, the darker it is printed. When it is set to [None], it performs color separation from RGB data to CMYK without applying an RGB profile. [ICC Profile Settings] [RGB Source Profile] [CMYK Sim. Profile] [Euro Standard v1.00], [JapanColor (Canon)], [U.S. Web Coated v1.0], [None] You can set a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-dependent CMYK color model in accordance with the simulation target selected by the CMYK simulation profile. When it is set to [JapanColor (Canon)], it uses JapanColor profile. When it is set to [U.S. Web Coated v1.0], it uses U.S. Web Coated profile. When it is set to [Euro Standard v1.00], it uses Euro Standard profile. When it is set to [None], it prints CMYK data using a devicedependent CMYK color model, without applying a CMYK simulation profile. If this item is set to [None], dark color gradation may collapse, depending on the data. Set what type of processing to use for device-dependent gray data. When it is set to [On], it uses the printer's "Grayscale Profile" to convert it to CMYK data. However, it may be reproduced using black (Bk) toner only, by using the [Output Profile] or [Pure Black Text] settings. [Grayscale Profile] [Off], [On] 㻢㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When it is set to [Off], it is reproduced using black (Bk) toner only. If this item is set to [None], dark color gradation may collapse, depending on the data. [Output Profile] [PS Normal], [PS Photo], [PS TR Normal], [PS TR Photo] You can define suitable profiles for data that you are trying to print. When it is set to [PS Normal], it matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor, and prints. When it is set to [PS Photo], it matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints. When it is set to [PS TR Normal], it matches with colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor and prints, while also controlling the bleeding of toner into text and fine lines. When it is set to [PS TR Photo], it matches with colors similar to photographs, and prints, while also controlling the bleeding of toner into text and fine lines. When [RGB Source Profile] and [CMYK Sim. Profile] are set to [None], or [Grayscale Profile] is set to [Off], this setting is not applied to device-dependent color data. [Matching Method] [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Colorimetric] Specify the printing method when [RGB Source Profile] is applied. When it is set to [Perceptual], it provides colors suitable for printing photos and bitmap images. When it is set to [Saturation], it provides colors suitable for printing artwork and graphs for use in presentations. When it is set to [Colorimetric], you can reproduce the RGB color values that are within the machine's color gamut as accurately as possible. When [RGB Source Profile] or [CMYK Sim. Profile] are set to [None], if the printer receives a device-dependent color space definition that has been processed by the host computer, the setting for this item becomes invalid. [RGB Pure Black Mode] [Off], [On] When device-dependent RGB data is converted to device-dependent CMYK using [RGB Source Profile] in this machine, set what type of processing to use for black and gray data that becomes R=G=B. When it is set to [On], it prints using black (Bk) toner only, regardless of the [Output Profile] setting that is selected. When it is set to [Off], it prints according to the selected [Output Profile] setting. If uneven gradation or staining is visible when printing black or gray data, set this item to [Off], and set [Output Profile] to [Normal]. [CMYK Pure Black] [Off], [On] When device-dependent CMYK is processed using [CMYK Sim. Profile] in this machine, set what type of printing to use for grey data (C=M=Y=0). When it is set to [On], it prints using black (Bk) toner only, regardless of the [Output Profile] setting that is selected. When it is set to [Off], it converts it and prints according to the selected [Output Profile] setting. If [CMYK Sim. Profile] is set as [None], the setting for this item becomes invalid. Set how to print black (R=G=B=0% and C=M=Y=100%/BK=N% or C=M=Y=0%/Bk=100%) text. 㻢㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When it is set to [On], it prints data for black colors created by applications using only 100% black toner. The text is never printed with color toner slurring around the edges. [Pure Black Text] [Off], [On] When it is set to [Off], it prints black text according to the selected [Output Profile] setting. Set how to print black (R=G=B=0% and C=M=Y=100%/BK=N% or C=M=Y=0%/Bk=100%) text. When it is set to [On], if black text is on a colored background, there is never a white rim around the edges of the text, so that the black text is not printed set out from the background with white edges. [Black Overprint] * [Off], [On] When it is set to [Off], if black text is on a colored background, after the black text is printed set out from the background with white edges, black text is printed on the white edges. The print may be fainter than the print result if it were set to [On], and the edges of the text may be rimmed with white. 85 to 100 to 115% You can adjust the brightness of the whole image. You can use this setting to set from 85 to115% at intervals of 5%. The smaller the value the brighter it becomes. The larger the value the darker it becomes. [Error Diffusion] [Off], [On] Specify the halftone display method when printing. When [Error Diffusion] is set to [On], it uses error diffusion that excels at subtle expression of text and fine lines. It is suitable for printing small text or particularly fine lines. [Resolution/Grad.] [Text]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Graphics]: [Resolution], [Gradation] [Image]:[Resolution], [Gradation] When [Error Diffusion] is set to [Off], you can select the halftone display method from [Resolution] and [Gradation] using [Resolution/Grad.]. [Resolution] allows you to print in fine detail so that the edges of text data can be seen clearly. It is suitable for printing data containing text and fine lines. [Gradation] allows you to perform printing that combines smooth gradation with edge quality. It is suitable for printing graphics or graphs that use gradation. [Brightness] * [Halftones] [CMYK Overprint] [Off], [On] You can overprint device-dependent CMYK data as composite output. Since all the colors used in the data are overprinted to a single palette, you can check the result without performing color separation. If [CMYK Sim. Profile] is set as a value other than [None], the setting for this item becomes invalid. [Advanced [Advanced Smoothing]: [Off], [Smooth 1], [Smooth Specify whether to use the smoothing process to smooth the edges of graphics (illustrations created in other applications) or text. [Smooth 2] is better than [Smooth 1] for performing a smoothing 㻢㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Smoothing] 2] [Graphics] *: [Off], [On] [Text] *: [Off], [On] [Grayscale Conversion] * [sRGB], [NTSC], [Uniform RGB] process that provides more smoothing. You can select what to smooth by switching [Graphics] and [Text]: [On]/[Off]. Select the method for converting color print data to grayscale for printing. When it is set to [sRGB], it calculates the grayscale value using the sRGB standard color conversion method. When it is set to [NTSC], it calculates the grayscale value using the NTSC standard color conversion method. When it is set to [Uniform RGB], it takes the average value of the Red, Green and Blue color values as the grayscale value. If [Color Mode] is set as [Auto (Color/Black)] and [Color], the setting for this item becomes invalid. 㻢㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0C1 [Setup] Menu ([MEAP Settings] Options) NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. Setting Item [Select Def. Screen] Setting Value [Print Screen], [MEAP] Setting Set the initial screen of the control panel that is displayed after the printer starts up. When it is set to [Print Screen], the printer's print standby screen is displayed. When it is set to [MEAP], the MEAP menu screen is displayed. After the printer starts, you can toggle the menu screens by pressing ]( : Application) on the control panel. [ 㻢㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U7 [Setup] Menu ([Check Counter] Options) Setting Item [Check Counter] Setting Value [113: Total (Black/S)], [123:Total(Full+1C/S)] Setting Check the number of pages printed for each counter selected. Each counter shows the number of pages printed of the following. [113: Total (Black/S)]: Number of single-sided pages printed in black and white [123:Total(Full+1C/S)]: Number of single-sided pages printed in color "Checking the Number of the Printed Pages" 㻢㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U8 [Utility Menu] Menu NOTE About samples For Configuration Page, Network Status Print, and Printing Position Adjustment Print, see the following. "The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode" Setting Item Setting Value Setting [Check Counter] [113: Total (Black/S)], [123:Total(Full+1C/S)] Check the number of pages printed for each counter selected. Each counter shows the number of pages printed of the following. [113: Total (Black/S)]: Number of single-sided pages printed in black and white [123:Total(Full+1C/S)]: Number of single-sided pages printed in color "Checking the Number of the Printed Pages" [Configuration Page] - Prints the capacity of the built-in memory (RAM) or the contents specified in the common [Setup] menu. You can select this item regardless of the setting for the print mode. [Network Status Print] - Prints the version number and the settings of the print server equipped with this printer. [IPSec Policy List] - Print the IPSec policy that is registered in the printer. [Calibration] [Color Mismatch Corr.], [Density Control], [Density Median Cont.], [Full Calibration] Run each type of calibration. "Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration)" [PCL Utility] [Font List] A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode is printed. [Configuration Page] Prints the content specified in the [PS] options. [Font List] A list of the fonts that can be used in the PS mode is printed. [PS Utility] [Configuration Page], [Font List] [Cleaning] [A4], [LTR] The printer cleans the fixing roller by printing a cleaning paper. "Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer" [E-Mail Print Utility] [Received E-Mails], [Received E-mail List] Manage e-mail printing. "Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)" [Printing Pos. Print] - The printing position adjusted in [Adj. Start Position] is printed. Check the printout results to confirm the setting for [Adj. Start Position]. "Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source" [Page Count List] - If department ID management is set, print an aggregate report of the number of pages printed by each department. [Counter Report] - Print an aggregate report of the number of pages printed for each counter. "Checking the Number of the Printed Pages" [Print MEAP Sys. Info] - Print information about applications installed on MEAP and parts of the system applications. [Serial Number] (Display only) Displays the serial number of the printer. 㻢㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Consumables] [Paper Information], [Toner Cart. Model], [Remaining Toner] [Paper Information] Displays information about the loaded paper such as size, type, and remaining amount for each paper source. [Toner Cart. Model] Displays the model numbers of the toner cartridges of each color. [Remaining Toner] Displays the amount of toner remaining in the cartridge. You can use this item to estimate when the toner cartridge will need to be replaced. 㻢㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0C4 [Job] Menu NOTE Table description The items and setting values marked with "*1" may or may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories or the content of the setting. The items and setting values marked with "*2" are only displayed when the check box for [Display Job History] is selected on the Remote UI. "Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display" Setting Item Setting Value Setting [Encrypted Print] *1 User Name, Job Name, [PIN] [Secured Print] *1 User Name, Job Name, [PIN] [Stored Job List]*1 - Print the list of jobs stored on the SD card. [Stored Job Print] *1 [Box No.N] (N=0 to 99), [PIN], Job Name Prints jobs stored on the SD card. Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) - Prints the job logs printed from the computer. File names, print dates, and other information are printed on the job log list. [Stored Job Print Log] *1*2 - Print the history of jobs printed from BOX. [Report Print Log] *2 - Prints the logs of the printed Configuration Page and Network Status Print. [E-Mail Print Log] *2 - Print the history of jobs received by e-mail and printed. [Job Print Log List] *2 Print secure jobs stored on the SD card or encrypted secure jobs. "Specifying a Password for a Document and Printing (Secured Print) " 㻢㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0C5 [Reset] Menu Setting Item [Soft Reset] ([Hard Reset]) [Form Feed] [Shut Down] Setting Value Setting - Resets the printer when a problem is occurring or you want to cancel printing. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" - When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the data may remain in the printer memory, and the job may not be completed properly. As long as the printer remains in this state, you cannot print the next job because the printer cannot receive the next data. In this case, force the printer to output the print data using the procedure for this item. "Outputting Data (Forced Output)" - Shuts down the functions of the printer. If you are using WSD printing, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is turned OFF. After executing a shut down, the printer cannot receive data, and panel operation becomes invalid. Cycle the power of the printer if you want to print the data again. Turning the Printer ON/OFF 㻢㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0U9 [Select Feeder] Menu NOTE Table description Bold values in the table indicate the default settings. The setting items or setting values with "*" may not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings. About the icons The settings for the printer driver are prioritized for this item. : : When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating systems which do not use the printer driver, the settings are enabled for this item. Setting Item Setting Value Setting [Auto], [Drawer 1], [Drawer 2]* , [Multi-Purpose Tray] Selects the drawer or tray from which the printer feeds paper. After a paper source is selected, the corresponding Paper Source indicator comes on. [A6], [A5], [A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL], [EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [Custom Size], [Custom Size R], [Env. ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch], [Env. No.10], [Env. DL], [Index Card], [STMT], [FLSC], [16K] Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" [MP Tray Priority] [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should detect the paper source in order starting with the multi-purpose tray when [Paper Source] is set to [Auto]. [Drawer 1 Size] [A6], [A5], [A5R], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [EXEC], [Mixed Sizes], [Custom Size], [Custom Size R], [STMT], [16K] [Drawer 2 Size]* [Mixed Sizes], [Auto], [Custom Size], [Custom Size R], [FLSC], [16K] [Paper Source] [MP Tray Paper Size] [Standard Paper Size] [Diff. Paper Tray] [Auto Selection] Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" [A6], [A5], [B5], [A4], [LTR], [LGL], [EXEC], [Env. ISO-C5], [Env. Monarch], [Env. No.10], [Env. DL], [Index Card], [STMT], [FLSC], [16K] If you cannot specify the paper size or if you print from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system, specify the paper size in this item. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray" [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when paper of the size for the received data is not loaded in the paper drawer. [Multi-Purpose Tray]: [Off], [On] [Drawer 1]: [Off], [On] [Drawer 2]*: [Off], [On] Specifies the paper source to be automatically selected when [Paper Source] is set to [Auto]. If [On] is specified, the printer selects the paper source as the one to be automatically selected. 㻢㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Heavy 3], [Transparency], [Envelope], [Labels], [Rough] If you cannot specify the paper size or if you print from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system, specify the paper size in this item. "Usable Paper" [MP Tray Paper Type] [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Heavy 3], [Transparency], [Envelope], [Labels], [Rough], [Mixed Types] Set the type of paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" "Usable Paper" [Drawer 1 Type] [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Rough], [Mixed Types] [Drawer 2 Type]* [Plain], [Plain L], [Plain L2], [Heavy 1], [Heavy 2], [Heavy 3], [Rough], [Mixed Types] [Default Paper Type] [Manual 2-Sided (MP)] [2-Sided Printing] Set the type of paper that is loaded in the paper drawer. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" "Usable Paper" [1st Side], [2nd Side] Set the printing side of the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray manually for 2-sided printing. When it is set to [1st Side], it is printed on the front of the paper (the side that is first be printed). When it is set to [2nd Side], it is printed on the back of the paper (the reverse side of the paper that has already been printed). [Off], [On] Specifies whether the printer should print on one side or both sides of the paper. 㻢㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0UA Checking the Number of the Printed Pages If you want to check the number of the printed pages, use either of the following methods. "Checking the Counter Using the Printer's Control Panel " "Checking the Counter Using a Web Browser (Remote UI) " Checking the Counter Using the Printer's Control Panel You can check the number of the printed pages using the control panel. 1 Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 Select [Check Counter] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select the counters to check using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Check the number of the printed pages. Checking the Counter Using a Web Browser (Remote UI) You can check the number of the printed pages using the Remote UI. 1 㻢㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [Check Counter] from the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu. 3 Check the number of the printed pages. 㻢㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0C8 Importing and Exporting Settings You can save (export) printer settings that are set in the operation panel or Remote UI to USB memory devices or SD cards. In addition, you can read (import) saved printer settings any time. This section describes the method for importing and exporting settings using the printer's control panel. Importing and exporting can also be performed using the Remote UI. "Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page)" IMPORTANT USB memory device connecting location You can use either or both of the front-side and rear-side USB ports. When the both ports have a USB memory device connected to them, priority is given to the front-side port. About USB memory support The file format FAT32 is supported only. USB memory drives cannot be read by this printer if: these drives are partitioned these drives contain encrypted data Printers that can be imported You can import the settings only to the same model from which you export the settings. NOTE When saving/reading settings using USB memory devices and SD cards Connect a USB memory device or an SD card to the printer's USB port or SD card slot. The saving location/writing source priority is shown below. "USB memory" > "SD card" Saving Printer Settings (Export) Save printer settings to USB memory devices or SD cards. 1 Insert the USB memory device or the SD card into the printer. 2 Press [ ]( : Online). The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel. 3 Press [ ]( : Settings). 4 Select [User Maintenance] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 㻢㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Select [IMPORT/EXPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 6 Select [EXPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 7 When [Yes] is selected using [ saving location. ], and [OK] is pressed, the printer's settings are saved to the targeted ĺ When the saving has finished, <Done.> is displayed. Reading Printer Settings (Import) Read printer settings that have been saved to USB memory devices or SD cards. 1 Insert the USB memory device or the SD card into the printer. 2 Press [ ]( : Online). The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control panel. 㻢㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Press [ ]( : Settings). 4 Select [User Maintenance] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 5 Select [IMPORT/EXPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 6 Select [IMPORT] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 7 When [Yes] is selected using [ targeted writing source. ], and [OK] is pressed, the printer's settings are read from the ĺ When the reading has finished, <Done.> is displayed. 8 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. 㻢㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE For details on a hard reset See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻢㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0C9 Initializing the Settings If you want to initialize the [Setup] menu using the control panel You can restore the printer's common setup menus and dedicated setup menus to their default settings. "Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel" If you want to initialize the network settings You can restore the network settings for the printer to the default settings. "Initializing the Network Settings" NOTE Initializing using NetSpot Device Installer You can also initialize the network settings using NetSpot Device Installer. For details on the procedure for initializing the network settings using NetSpot Device Installer, see Help. Help is displayed by clicking [Help] in the [Help] menu. 㻢㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CA Initializing the [Setup] Menu Using the Printer's Control Panel Initialization of the [Setup] menu resets the settings specified in the common [Setup] menu and exclusive [Setup] menu to the default settings. Initialize the settings by selecting [Initialize Menu] in the hierarchy of "Options" in the [Setup] menu. Start the key operation from Step 1. IMPORTANT Setting items which are not initialized The following setting items are not initialized. [Network] Options [Adj. Start Position] ([User Maintenance] Options) If <Initialize failed.> is displayed If the message <Initialize failed.> appears when the initialization of the [Setup] menu is executed, the [Setup] menu is not initialized. (Job) indicator is off, and then perform [Initialize Menu] again. Make sure that the Do not turn the printer OFF during the initialization. The printer memory may be damaged. About some setting items Some setting items do not become effective unless you cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard reset after initializing the [Setup] menu. NOTE Canceling the initialization If you press [ ]( : Online) during the operation, the operation is canceled. However, you cannot cancel the operation when <Initializing...> is displayed even if you press [ ]( : Online). 1 Press [ ]( : Settings). 2 Select [Initialize Menu] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK]. ĺ While the initialization is being performed, <Initializing...> is displayed. <Init. complete.> is displayed after the initialization is completed. 㻢㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻢㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CC Checking the Printer Settings You can check the printer status, network settings, and so on by printing Configuration Page or Network Status Print. Configuration Page or Network Status Print is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Be sure to use A4 size paper. You can also check the network settings and so on using the following software. "Remote UI" "FTP Client" "NetSpot Device Installer" 1 Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer. "Paper Loading and Output" 2 Make sure that the printer is online (the If the (Online) indicator is off, press [ ]( (Online) indicator is on). : Online). 3 Press [ ]( : Utility). 4 Select [Configuration Page] or [Network Status Print] using [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK]. [Configuration Page] Prints the list of currently available functions for the printer and setting values of the menus, and so on. [Network Status Print] Prints the TCP/IP settings including the IP address and information including security settings. 5 Select [Yes] using [ ], and then press [OK] to print Status Print. 㻢㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻢㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CE Setting the Administrator Password Only the administrator (user who knows the password) can configure the settings or perform the operations related to the printer management by setting the administrator password. Also, the administrator password can be changed anytime. This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network. NOTE When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI You can also specify the settings using the following software. "FTP Client" You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [Security] under [Management Settings] in the [Settings/Registration] menu. 3 Click [Management Settings]. 㻢㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Edit...] under [Management Settings]. 5 Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password]. 㻢㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Set a new administrator password. (1) Select the [Set/Change Password] check box. (2) Enter the administrator password. (3) Click [OK]. [Set/Change Password] Select the check box when setting/changing the password. [Password] Enter a new desired password. [Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the password entered in [Password] again. 㻢㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CF Specifying the Device Name or Administrator Information This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. In the Remote UI, you can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via a network. NOTE When specifying the settings using software other than the Remote UI You can also specify the settings using the following software. "FTP Client" You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. "NetSpot Device Installer" You can specify the settings using the Canon software, NetSpot Device Installer, in the supplied CD-ROM. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Select [Security] under [Management Settings] in the [Settings/Registration] menu. 3 Click [Management Settings]. 㻢㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Edit...] under [Management Settings]. 5 Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password]. 㻢㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Specify the device name or administrator information. (1) Specify the settings for each option as needed. (2) Click [OK]. [System Manager] Enter the name of the system manager. [Contact Information] Enter the system manager's contact information. [E-Mail Address] Enter the system manager's email address. [System Manager Enter the system manager's comments. 㻢㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Comment] [Device Name] Enter the name of the printer. [Location] Enter the location of the printer. 㻢㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CH Sleep Mode You can specify the settings for sleep mode using the following procedures. "Setting the Printer to Sleep Mode" "Types of Sleep Mode" "Releasing Sleep Mode" IMPORTANT Power consumption when the power is OFF Even if the printer is turned OFF, power is still consumed slightly while the power plug is inserted in the AC power outlet. To stop the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Setting the Printer to Sleep Mode There are the following four methods for setting the printer to Sleep Mode. Setting the printer to Sleep Mode automatically when it is not operating Specify the time interval until the printer enters Sleep Mode in [Sleep Migration Time]. You can specify the time interval between [5 minutes] and [60 minutes]. The default is [10 minutes]. We recommend that you use this option in the default setting. Setting the printer to Sleep Mode using the printer's control panel Press [ Setting the printer to Sleep Mode from a network computer 6HOHFW>6OHHS@IURP>6HWWLQJV5HJLVWUDWLRQ@RQWKH5HPRWH8,ĺ>2XWSXW&RQWURO@ĺ>'HYLFH Control], and then click [Execute]. Setting the printer to Sleep Mode on the designated time every day Set the [Sleep Mode Timer] under [Timer Settings] to [On], and then set the time when it automatically goes in the Sleep Mode in [Sleep Mode Time]. ] (Energy Saver) on the printer's control panel. If the above operations or settings are performed, and the entering conditions described in "Types of Sleep Mode" are fulfilled, the printer enters Sleep Mode. Types of Sleep Mode There are the following two types of Sleep Mode, and they vary in the entering conditions. Types of Sleep Mode Settings for [Sleep Mode] Which the Printer Can Enter Entering Conditions [Mid (Printer Sleep)] [High (Deep Sleep)] Panel operation has not been performed. No data has been sent from the computer. The printer is not starting up. A shutdown is not being performed. [Sleep Even if Error] is set to [On]. There is no job on the print queue. A service call is not occurring. A paper jam is not occurring. No cover is open. The toner cartridge is installed. Sleep Mode 1 (Printer Sleep mode) Power saving 㻢㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 A toner cartridge has not reached the end of its life. The printer is not cooling down. (The cooling fan stops.) effect: Middle The printer takes up to about 30 minutes to fully cool down. It is not accessing USB memory. Sleep Mode 2 (Deep Sleep mode) Power saving effect: Large The conditions to enter Sleep Mode 2 are fulfilled. NOTE To check which Sleep Mode the printer has entered You can check Sleep Mode using indicators on the control panel. Sleep Mode 1 (Ready) indicator and Main Power indicator come on. The However, the following indicator may come on. (Message) Indicator Comes on if the printer enters Sleep Mode when it is offline. Sleep Mode 2 The Ready indicator goes off and the Main Power indicator comes on. To configure the printer so that it does not enter Sleep Mode when an error occurs Set [Sleep Even if Error] to [Off]. When using a utility software related to network When you are using some type of utility software related to network and you set Sleep Mode to [High (Deep Sleep)], communications may fail. When using such type of utility software, please release Sleep Mode. Releasing Sleep Mode The following are the methods to release Sleep Mode. Releasing Sleep Mode using the printer's control panel Press the key on the printer's control panel. If the printer has entered Sleep Mode 2, you can release the mode when [ ] (Energy Saver) is pressed. Releasing Sleep Mode on the designated time every day Set the [Wake Up Timer] under [Timer Settings] to [On], and set the time when it automatically cancels the Sleep Mode in [Wake Up Time]. Releasing Sleep Mode from a computer Send data to the printer. Perform the following in the Remote UI. Perform the operations in the [Output/Control] menu under [Settings/Registration] Display and set the [User Maintenance Menu] page in the [Preferences] menu under [Settings/Registration] NOTE Sleep Mode is released also in the following cases. When an error is occurring Sleep Mode 1 is released also when an error is occurring. However, Sleep Mode 2 may not be released depending on the error type. When connecting a network cable The printer enters Sleep Mode 1 from Sleep Mode 2. When the printer is connected to a network or receives the unicast packet 㻢㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Sleep Mode 2 is released. When devices on a network are searched from application software or utility software Sleep Mode 2 is released. 㻢㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RS Auto Shutdown You can specify the settings for auto shutdown using the following procedure. This setting is made using the Remote UI. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Control Menu] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻢㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Edit...]. 5 Specify the settings for auto shutdown. (1) Select the [Use Auto Shutdown Timer] check box. The default setting is that it is enabled. (2) Specify the time to shut down in [Auto Shutdown Time]. 㻢㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE About the setting for the time to execute auto shutdown When [Auto Shutdown Time] is changed during sleep mode, the specified time to execute auto shutdown becomes effective in the following cases. When the printer is recovered from sleep When the power of the printer is cycled You can specify [Auto Shutdown Time] for auto shutdown with 1 hour increments between [After 1 hour] and [After 8 hours]. If you specify the setting for this option shorter than the default setting, this may shorten the life of the toner cartridges (the default setting is "4" hours). If the printer is not turned OFF immediately Depending on the process in the printer, it may take up to 10 minutes to turn the printer OFF. 6 Set the auto shutdown weekly function as needed. (1) Select the [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer] check box. (2) Specify the day and time when to execute auto shutdown. All the default settings are that it is disabled. 㻢㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7 Click [OK]. 㻢㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CJ Specifying an ID for Each Department Displaying or Changing the Departmental ID Management Settings You can manage the number of [Printed Pages] * on a departmental basis by specifying IDs for each department and entering an ID when printing. * [Printed Pages] indicates the number of printed surfaces. If you perform 2-sided printing on a sheet of paper, the number of the printed surfaces is two. IMPORTANT Register one or more Department IDs before enabling Department ID Management, which will have no effect with no Department ID registered. (1) (2) [Register New Department] (Displayed only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.) Clicking this button displays the [Register New Department] page. Set the following items and click [OK]. [Department ID] Enter the department ID using a number with up to seven digits. [PIN] Enter the password using a number with up to seven digits. [Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the password entered in [PIN] again. [Dept. ID] (Clickable only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.) Clicking the department ID displays the [Edit Department] page. Set the following items and click [OK]. [Department ID] Enter the department ID using a number with up to seven digits. [Set/Change PIN] Select the check box when setting/changing the password. If there is no entry in [PIN] though this check box is selected, no password is specified. [PIN] Enter the password using a number with up to seven digits. [Confirm] To confirm the password, enter the password entered in [PIN] again. [Clear Count] (Not displayed depending on the settings.) Clear [Printed Pages] ([Total Print]) for this Department ID. [Total Print] Displays the number of printed surfaces. 㻢㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (3) [Settings...] (Displayed only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.) Clicking this button displays the [Department ID Management Settings] page. Set the following items and click [OK]. [Enable Department ID Management] If the check box for this option is selected, you need to enter a department ID and password when printing. You also need to enter a department ID and password when you perform direct printing or manipulate boxes from the Remote UI. Jobs which failed to be authenticated are deleted. [Accept Print Jobs With Unknown IDs] If the check box for this option is selected, you can print jobs with unknown IDs. If the check box is not selected, you can neither log on in Administrator Mode nor print jobs using the Remote UI. Jobs with unknown IDs indicate the following kinds of jobs. Jobs printed by a printer driver which does not support the department ID management Jobs directly printed using a method other than the Remote UI (4) [Printed Pages] Displays the number of printed surfaces. (5) Delete the Selected Department (Displayed only if you have logged on in Administrator Mode.) If you click [Delete] to the right of the Dept. ID to be deleted, the selected Dept. ID is deleted. (6) [Clear All Counts] (Not displayed depending on the settings.) Clears [Total Print] of all the departments. 㻢㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CK Register/Update Software Function Available Functions Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) Downloading the Manuals and Related Software Updating the Firmware Managing the Register/Update Software Function 㻢㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CL Available Functions Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications Using the Register/Update Software function, you can install the System Options/MEAP Applications to the printer. You can use this function from both the touch panel display and the computer (Remote UI). Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by accessing the delivery server from this printer. Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by using the license file/license key that you obtained from the License Management System. Updating the Firmware Using the Register/Update Software function, you can update the firmware of the printer to the most recent version. You can use this function from the computer (Remote UI). Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network You can update the firmware by accessing the delivery server from this printer. 㻢㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CR Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications The procedures to install the system options or MEAP applications on the printer differ, depending on whether the printer is connected or not to an outside network. Select the procedure that matches your conditions using the references below. Installing by Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network Install from the Remote UI. NOTE Communication test To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a communication test before installation. "Testing Communication Using the Remote UI" Installing by Not Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network Installing System Options Install using one of the following procedures. NOTE If you install multiple system options We recommend that you install from the Remote UI. Procedure Necessary Steps Reference Page 1. Obtain the license file from the License Management System "Obtaining the License File" 2. Install the license file using the Remote UI "Installing the System Options Using the Remote UI" Using the Remote UI to install Installing MEAP Applications Use the following procedure to install. Procedure Using the Remote UI to install Necessary Steps Reference Page 1. Obtain the license file from the License Management System "Obtaining the License File" 2. Install the license file and application file using the Remote UI "Installing the MEAP Applications Using the Remote UI" 3. Start the MEAP applications from SMS "Starting the MEAP Applications" 㻢㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CS Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can install the system options and MEAP applications from the Remote UI by linking with the delivery server. NOTE Preparing a license access number certificate Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 3 Click [Delivered Installation]. 㻢㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 | Once the license access number is confirmed after contacting the delivery server, information for the system options/MEAP applications you can install are displayed. 5 ^} Z Status after Installation: 㻢㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Start: Starts the installed MEAP applications. Stop: Stops the installed MEAP applications. IMPORTANT If [Stop] is selected when installing MEAP applications You need to start the application before using the MEAP application. "Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications" If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, click [Accept]. 6 Check the Installation Result page. When the installation of the system options is completed, the message <Restart the device.> appears. Restart the printer to enable the function. To return to the Delivered Installation screen, click [To Delivered Installation]. NOTE The manual for system options/MEAP applications You can download the manual for the installed system options/MEAP applications by accessing the URL for the manual download site displayed on the Installation Result screen. "Downloading the Manuals and Related Software" 㻢㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CU Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) This section describes how to install the system options and MEAP applications without connecting the printer to an outside network. Obtaining the License File Obtain the license file. License file: Obtain the license file when installing the system options/MEAP applications using the Remote UI. NOTE Preparing a license access number certificate Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available. License access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application If the license access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application you are using, the license file is issued by the distributor of the MEAP application. You do not need to obtain the license file explained in this section. For more information, see the manual for each MEAP application. 1 Check the management number you need to obtain the license file. To obtain the license file, the following management number is required. License Access Number: Check the license access number certificate. Device Serial Number: You can check from the control panel. "[Utility Menu] Menu" 2 Access http://www.canon.com/lms/license/. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen and obtain the license file. Next, install the system options or the MEAP applications. Installing the System Options Using the Remote UI You can install the system options to the printer using the Remote UI. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 㻢㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 3 Click [Manual Installation]. 4 ; % 㻢㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 File extensions: License File: A file with the [lic] extension. 5 ; % | Z Installing the MEAP Applications Using the Remote UI You can install the MEAP applications to the printer using the Remote UI. NOTE The number of MEAP applications that can be installed You can install up to eight applications. Memory area that can be used The maximum amount of memory allocated to install MEAP applications is 32MB. For details on MEAP applications There may be other system requirements for installation, depending on the MEAP applications. For instructions on settings, see the manual provided with the MEAP application. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 㻢㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Click [Manual Installation]. 4 ; % File extensions: 㻢㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 License File: A file with the [lic] extension. Application File: A file with the [jar] extension. IMPORTANT When you install MEAP applications You cannot install license files only. When installing the MEAP application, make sure you specify the license file. You cannot install the MEAP application without specifying the license file. 5 ; Depending on the MEAP application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Confirm the information GLVSOD\HGRQWKHVFUHHQĺFOLFN>2.@ If you are installing a new MEAP application, the following information is displayed on the screen. Application Information License Information The following information is displayed when you overwrite a MEAP application. Current Application Information Application Information after Overwrite Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait.> is displayed again. After the installation, click [To Manual Installation] to display the Manual Installation screen. IMPORTANT To use MEAP applications To use the installed MEAP application, you must start the MEAP application. "Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications" Starting the MEAP Applications This section describes how to start the installed MEAP application from the SMS screen. NOTE 㻢㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Details on SMS For details on SMS, see "MEAP ." 1 From the top page of the SMS, click [MEAP Application Management]. 2 % 㻢㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CW Downloading the Manuals and Related Software You can download the manuals for the installed system options/MEAP applications and their related software from the following URL. http://canon.com/fau/downloads NOTE Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available. If you installed from the Remote UI, you can jump to the above URL from the link displayed on the Installation Result screen. If you do so, the license access number is entered automatically. 1 Start the Web browser on your computer. 2 Enter the URL in [Address]. 3 After entering the license access number, follow the instructions on the screen to download the manuals and related software. If software is downloaded, refer to the manual of that software to install. 㻢㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CX Updating the Firmware Update from the Remote UI. NOTE Communication test To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a communication test before installation. "Testing Communication Using the Remote UI" Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can update to a most recent firmware by linking with the delivery server. IMPORTANT Estimated time required to apply firmware The time required to apply the downloaded firmware is approximately 20 minutes. This operation may take more time depending on the system configuration and network environment of your printer. Checking the New Firmware/Specifying the Delivery Settings You can check the new firmware that is applicable with the printer and specify the delivery settings. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 㻢㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Click [Delivered Update]. 4 Click [Confirm New Firmware]. Contact the delivery server for information on whether an applicable new firmware is available or not. 5 If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, press [I Accept]. 㻢㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Details of each item are shown below. Firmware: Current Version: Displays the version of the current firmware. Applicable Firmware: Displays the new firmware that is applicable with the printer. Release Note: If the new firmware has a release note, that information is displayed. Delivery Settings: Delivery Schedule: Click "Deliver now" or " Deliver at specified date and time." You can specify a date/time up to 30 days later for delivery schedule. [Deliver now]: Downloads the firmware after the delivery setting is specified. [Deliver at specified date and time]: Select the date/time (year, month, date, and time) to download the firmware from the drop-down list. Timing to Apply: Click [Auto] or [Manual]. [Auto]: The firmware is automatically applied after the download of the firmware is completed. [Manual]: Only downloads the firmware. To apply the downloaded firmware, set from [Apply Firmware]. Deliver Update: Click [On] or [Off]. [On]: Downloads only the difference between the current firmware and the new firmware. [Off]: Downloads the new firmware entirely. E-Mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the administrator. You can receive e-mails regarding the update status that is sent from the delivery server. You can enter up to 64 characters for the e-mail address (excluding "(," ")," "<," ">," ",," ";," ":," "”," and "\"). Comments: Enter the comment that will automatically be added to the e-mail. If the model name is entered, you can identify which device status the e-mail is about. You can enter up to 128 characters in Comment. NOTE 㻢㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Delivery Schedule and Timing to Apply When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] The firmware is applied after the new firmware is downloaded from the delivery server. When the application is completed, the printer automatically restarts. When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Manual] The new firmware is downloaded. When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver at specified date and time] The scheduled delivery is set to the specified date/time. Applying the Downloaded Firmware You can apply the downloaded firmware to the printer. NOTE If the Timing to Apply in Delivery Settings is set to [Auto], this step is not necessary. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 3 Click [Delivered Update]. 㻢㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Apply Firmware]. 5 ; % 㻢㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The new firmware is applied to the printer. When the application is completed, the printer automatically restarts. Deleting the Downloaded Firmware You can delete the downloaded firmware. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 㻢㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Click [Delivered Update]. 4 Click [Delete Firmware]. 5 ; % 㻢㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The firmware is deleted. Deleting the Scheduled Delivery You can delete the scheduled delivery of the firmware. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 㻢㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Click [Delivered Update]. 4 Click [Delete Scheduled Delivery]. 5 ; 㻢㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The scheduled delivery is deleted. 㻢㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0CY Managing the Register/Update Software Function You can display the installation logs and test communication using the Remote UI. Displaying the Installation/Update Log Using the Remote UI You can check the installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the firmware. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 3 Click [Display Logs /Communication Test]. 㻢㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 ~ % $ % \ % The installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the firmware are displayed. Testing Communication Using the Remote UI You can check whether the printer can properly communicate with the delivery server. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 ~ # Z\ # [Register/Update Software]. 㻢㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 ; = ; ; When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click [Yes]. Contents for the test are downloaded from the delivery server. When the communication test is completed, the communication test result screen is displayed. NOTE If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result screen, check that the network cable is connected and that the network settings are correct. If the problem is not resolved, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻢㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E1 Security Settings Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings Restricting the Users Who Can Access Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function) Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print Setting Keys and Certificates Setting CA Certificates Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display NOTE Software to be used for the security settings You can specify the settings using the following software. Remote UI You can specify the settings by accessing the printer from a Web browser via the network. FTP Client You can specify the settings by accessing the FTP server of the printer using Command Prompt. This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings using the Remote UI. To specify the settings using FTP Client, see "FTP Client." 㻢㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E2 Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings You can restrict the users who can print or perform the printer settings with IP addresses by using a Web browser (Remote UI). Restriction Using the IP v. 4 Address Restriction Using the IP v. 6 Address Always use the Remote UI to specify the IP address. The control panel allows you only to switch the address filter setting between On and Off. [Setup] Menu ([Network] Options) Restriction Using the IP v. 4 Address 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻢㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [IP Address Filter]. 5 Click [Edit...] under [IPv4 Address: TX Filter] or [IPv4 Address: RX Filter]. 㻢㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [IPv4 Address: TX Filter] It limits the sending of data from the printer. [IPv4 Address: RX Filter] It limits the sending of data to the printer. 6 Select the [Use Filter] check box, and then [Default Policy]. 㻢㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you select [Reject], you will only be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses] field. If you select [Allow], you will not be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses] field. If you clear the [Use Filter] check box, you will be able to transmit and print from all users (clients). 7 Set the IP address. (1) Enter the IP address for which you want to reject or permit to print. Enter the IPv4 address, which is a decimal value, by adding "." (periods) as delimiters. (2) Click [Add]. You can set up to 16 IP addresses (16 sets of IP addresses for when you have specified with [Register Address]). 㻢㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You can also enter IP addresses as follows. Input example of the IP addresses Method for entering IP addresses 192.168.0.1192.168.0.10 If you want to enter the IP addresses of consecutive numbers, place "-" (hyphen) between the address of the smallest number and that of the largest number. 192.168.0.0/16 In order to specify the subnet range (prefix length), enter a "/" (slash) after the normal IP address symbol, and then enter another prefix length (maximum 32). NOTE When "0" is entered in [Prefix Length] All the IP addresses become the target for rejection or permission. When "32" is entered in [Prefix Length] The IP address of the printer becomes the target for rejection or permission. When deleting a set IP address (1) Select an IP address you want to delete. (2) Click [Delete]. 㻢㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 Click [OK]. 9 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. Restriction Using the IP v. 6 Address 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 㻢㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 4 Click [IP Address Filter]. 㻢㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Click [Edit...] under [IPv6 Address: TX Filter] or [IPv6 Address: RX Filter]. [IPv6 Address: TX Filter] It limits the sending of data from the printer. [IPv6 Address: RX Filter] It limits the sending of data to the printer. 6 Select the [Use Filter] check box, and then select [Default Policy]. 㻢㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you select [Reject], you will only be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses] field. If you select [Allow], you will not be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses] field. If you clear the [Use Filter] check box, you will be able to transmit and print from all users (clients). 7 Set the IP address. (1) Enter the IP address for which you want to reject or permit to print. Enter the IPv6 address, which is a hexadecimal value, by adding ":" (colons) as delimiters. (2) Click [Add]. You can set up to 16 IP addresses (16 sets of IP addresses for when you have specified with [Register Address]). 㻢㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 You can also enter IP addresses as follows. Input example of the IP addresses fe80::0000/64 Method for entering IP addresses In order to specify the subnet range (prefix length), enter a "/" (slash) after the normal IP address symbol, and then enter another prefix length (maximum 128). NOTE When "0" is entered in [Prefix Length] All the IP addresses become the target for rejection or permission. When "128" is entered in [Prefix Length] The IP address of the printer becomes the target for rejection or permission. When deleting a set IP address (1) Select an IP address you want to delete. (2) Click [Delete]. 㻢㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 Click [OK]. 9 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻢㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E3 Restricting the Users Who Can Access You can restrict the users who can access with MAC addresses using a Web browser (Remote UI). Always use the Remote UI to specify the MAC address. The control panel allows you only to switch the address filter setting between On and Off. [Setup] Menu ([Network] Options) 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻢㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [MAC Address Filter]. 5 Click [Edit...] under [TX Filter] or [RX Filter]. 㻢㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [TX Filter] It limits the sending of data from the printer. [RX Filter] It limits the sending of data to the printer. 6 Select the [Use Filter] check box, and then select [Default Policy]. If you select [Reject], you will not be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses] field. If you select [Allow], you will only be able to transmit or print from users (clients) entered in the [Exception Addresses] field. If you clear the [Use Filter] check box, you will be able to transmit and print from all users (clients). 7 Set the MAC address. 㻢㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) Enter the MAC address of a device of which you want to permit to access. Enter the address without placing a hyphen (-) between characters, like AABBCCDDEEFF. (2) Click [Add]. You can set up to 50 addresses. NOTE When deleting a set MAC address (1) Select a MAC address you want to delete. (2) Click [Delete]. 㻢㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 8 Click [OK]. 9 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻢㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E4 Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs You can use the Web browser (Remote UI) to set restrictions for print jobs. IMPORTANT When restrictions for print jobs are set, the effect will be as follows. Type of job Restriction Printer Driver Direct Print Will be stored in a box. Image File Will not be displayed in the menu. * PS/PDF Will be stored in a box. XPS Will be stored in a box. USB Direct Print Cannot be output. Utility Menu There are no restrictions. *The settings will be enabled after a hard reset or after the printer is restarted. "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 㻢㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 4 Click [Management Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻣㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password]. 7 Set restrictions for print jobs. (1) Select the [Restrict Printer Jobs] check box. (2) Click [OK]. 㻣㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻣㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E5 Specifying the Job Operation Permission for End-Users You can specify the job operation permission for end-users using a Web browser (Remote UI). If the job operation by end-users is permitted, the job operation by the name entered when logging on (the user name) becomes enabled when you are using the Remote UI in End-User Mode. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Management Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻣㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password]. 7 Specify the job operation permission for end-users. (1) Select the [Allow End-User's Job Operation] check box. If the check box is cleared, End-User cannot operate all the jobs. (2) Click [OK]. 㻣㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻣㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E6 Locking the Keys on the Control Panel (Key Lock Function) You can set the key lock function using a Web browser (Remote UI). When using the key lock function, you can lock the keys on the control panel, prohibiting the change of the printer settings by a user other than the administrators. IMPORTANT If pressing a locked key The printer beeps and the message <Key locked.> is displayed on the display. Precautions when setting the key lock function Set the key lock function while the keys are not being operated. If the key lock function is set while the keys are being operated, the key lock function is enabled after the key operation. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] in the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Management Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻣㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password]. 7 Specify the keys which you want to lock. (1) Select the check boxes respectively for keys, which you want to lock, on the control panel on the printer. For details on the keys, see "Control Panel." (2) Click [OK]. 㻣㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻣㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SR Setting Restrictions for USB Direct Print You can use the Web browser (Remote UI) to set restrictions for USB Direct Print. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Management Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻣㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password]. 7 Set restrictions for USB Direct Print. (1) Clear the [USB Direct Print] check box. If the check box is selected, the USB Direct Print function is enabled. If the [Automatically Display USB Direct Print Screen] check box is selected, the USB Direct Print screen is automatically displayed when the USB memory device is inserted. (2) Click [OK]. 㻣㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻣㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E8 Setting Keys and Certificates When using SSL encrypted communication, IEEE802.1X authentication or IPSec encrypted communication, authentication settings are necessary for the user to check the public key for encryption, the private key for decryption and key information. See the following according to your system environment and the options that you want to specify. When creating and using a key and its certificate with this printer Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI Newly Creating a Key and Its Certificate Newly create a key pair (the public key and private key) and its certificate. Checking a Certificate Confirm the contents of the certificate of a created key. Deleting a Key and Its Certificate Delete a created key and its certificate. When using a key/certificate file created by a device other than this printer Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI Installing a Key/Certificate File on the Printer Install a key/certificate file created by a device other than this printer on this printer. Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer Register a key pair (the public key and private key) and its certificate in a key/certificate file installed on this printer so that you can use them in the printer. Checking a Certificate Confirm the contents of the certificate of a created key. Deleting a Key and Its Certificate Delete a created key and its certificate. IMPORTANT The number of key and certificate which you can create, register, or install You can create and register up to eight "keys and certificates" (the total includes the one that is installed). Also, only one key and certificate file can be installed. If you cannot create, register or install them, delete unnecessary keys and certificates. About a Key/Certificate File which can be installed on this printer The key generation algorithm is "RSA". You can only install files with the extensions ".P12" or ".PFX". The file format which you can register is a PKCS#12 file in DER (binary encoding) format. 㻣㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0E9 Displaying the [Key and Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Key and Certificate Settings]. 㻣㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EA Newly Creating a Key and Its Certificate 1 Click [Generate Key...]. 2 Enter the name of the key to be newly created. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 㻣㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Select [Signature Algorithm]. Select from [SHA1], [SHA256], [SHA384], or [SHA512]. 4 Select [Key Algorithm]. Select from [512 bit], [1024 bit], [2048 bit], or [4096 bit]. When you select [SHA384] and [SHA512] in [Signature Algorithm], you can create a key only when selecting other than [512 bit]. NOTE Key Generation Algorithm 㻣㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The generation algorithm when the printer generates a key is RSA. About the key length Although using the longer key makes it more difficult to decode data, the processing speed on encryption and decryption is slower. Select the key length according to the needs of security for data communication. 5 Specify the effective date and expiration date of the self-sign server certificate. You can enter date between 1/1/2000 (1 Day 1 Month 2000 Year) and 31/12/2037 (31 Day 12 Month 2037 Year). 6 Specify the country/region name for the self-sign server certificate. Enter the Internet country code with 2 or less characters. 㻣㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7 Specify the required information for the self-sign server certificate. [State]: Enter the name of the state. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [City]: Enter the name of the city. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Organization]: Enter the name of the organization. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 㻣㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Organization Unit]: Enter the organization unit such as a section name. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. [Common Name]: Enter the IP address or FQDN (in the style of "xyz.company.com") of this printer. Up to 41 alphanumeric characters can be entered. IMPORTANT To issue the self-sign server certificate Specify the setting for at least one of the options among [Country/Region], [State], [City], [Organization], [Organization Unit], and [Common Name]. When all the fields are blank, the self-sign server certificate is not issued. If you are using Windows Vista, 7 or Server 2008 If you want to use IPPS printing, be sure to enter the IP address of this printer in [Common Name]. 8 Click [OK]. ĺ The key and certificate creation starts. 㻣㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EC Installing a Key/Certificate File on the Printer 1 Click [Register Key and Certificate...]. 2 Click [Install...]. 3 Specify the directory of a key/certificate file. 㻣㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Click [Browse...] to select the key/certificate file or enter the directory for the saved key/certificate file. NOTE About the name of the key/certificate file Except for the extension up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be specified in [File Path] for the file name. Specify the file name so that its length is 20 characters or less. 4 Click [Start Installation]. ĺ The installation of the key/certificate file starts. To specify the key pair (the public key and private key) and its certificate in a key/certificate file installed on this printer so that you can use them in the printer, see "Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer " and register the key pair (the public key and private key) and its certificate in the printer after installing the key/certificate file. 㻣㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EE Registering a Key and Its Certificate in the Printer 1 Click [Register Key and Certificate...]. 2 Click [Register...]. 3 Enter the name of the key to be registered. 㻣㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 4 Enter the password specified for the private key. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 5 Click [OK]. ĺ The key and certificate registration starts. 㻣㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻣㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EF Checking a Certificate 1 Click the icon of the certificate to be confirmed. [ ] is displayed only when a certificate has been issued for the created key. 2 If you want to verify the certificate, click [Certificate Verification]. ĺ The verification result is displayed. NOTE If "An error has occurred during verification." is displayed in the verification result screen, this key pair cannot be used. 㻣㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Delete the key pair, and then register a new key pair. "Selecting Keys and Certificates" Check the verification result, and then click [Back to Certificate Details]. 㻣㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EH Deleting a Key and Its Certificate 1 Click [Delete] for the key and its certificate that you want to erase. NOTE About [Delete] [Delete] is displayed only when the key is not specified as the default key. 2 Click [OK]. ĺ The selected key and its certificate are deleted. 㻣㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EJ Setting CA Certificates Set CA certificates needed by the server in order to use SSL server communication. See the following sections. "Displaying the [CA Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI" "Installing CA Certificate Files on the Printer" "Registering CA Certificates in the Printer" "Checking CA Certificates" "Deleting CA Certificates" IMPORTANT Number of CA Certificates that can be Registered/Installed Registered: 8 Installed: 2 If you cannot register or install one, delete unnecessary keys and certificates. 㻣㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EK Displaying the [CA Certificate Settings] Page in the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [CA Certificate Settings]. 㻣㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EL Installing CA Certificate Files on the Printer 1 Click [Register CA Certificate]. 2 Click [Install...]. 3 Specify the location of the CA certificate file. 㻣㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Either select the CA certificate file by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where CA certificate file is stored. 4 Click [Start Installation]. ĺ The CA file installation starts. To enable the printer to use the CA certificate installed on the printer, after the CA certificate installation is complete, refer to "Registering CA Certificates in the Printer" and register the CA certificate in the printer. 㻣㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0ER Registering CA Certificates in the Printer 1 Click [Register CA Certificate...]. 2 Click [Register]. ĺ The CA file registration begins. 㻣㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0ES Checking CA Certificates 1 Click the icon of the CA certificate to be confirmed. 2 If you want to verify the certificate, click [Certificate Verification]. ĺ The verification result is displayed. NOTE If "An error has occurred during verification." is displayed in the verification result screen, this CA certificate cannot be used. 㻣㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Delete the CA certificate, and then register a new CA certificate. Selecting Keys and Certificates Check the verification result, and then click [Back to Certificate Details]. 㻣㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EU Deleting CA Certificates 1 Click [Delete]. 2 Click [OK]. ĺ The CA certificate is deleted. 㻣㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EW Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function Specify settings in order to use the SSL encryption communication function with this printer. See the following sections. "Selecting Keys and Certificates" "Changing the Remote UI Settings" NOTE SSL encrypted communication function This is a function that enables exchange of encrypted data between this printer and a computer when performing IPP printing in which data is printed via a network or when using the Remote UI in which you manage the printer with the Web browser. Using the SSL encrypted communication function achieves safer printing environments by preventing theft and falsification of data. To perform SSL encrypted communication A key pair (the public key for encryption and private key for decryption) is required. Registering the key pair in this printer and opening the public key to the users allows you to perform the following. The users can encrypt data to send to the printer. Only this printer can decrypt the encrypted data with the private key. In this printer, a certificate is also created when a key pair is created. The users can check information about the key with the certificate. 㻣㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EX Selecting Keys and Certificates Select keys and certificates used by SSL encrypted communication functions. NOTE When Selecting Keys and Certificates A key and certificate need to be generated for encrypted SSL traffic. For more information, see "Setting Keys and Certificates." About [Default Key Settings] [Default Key Settings] is only displayed when the key is not specified as use key. To prevent keys in use from being changed, [Default Key Settings] is not displayed in the following cases. [Use SSL] under [Remote UI Settings] is set to ON. [SSL] under [TCP/IP Settings] is set to On for IPP printing. If you want to set the key as use key, first disable the above settings and then set the key as use key. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Network] from the [Preferences] menu. 㻣㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [TCP/IP Settings]. 5 Click [Key and Certificate...] under [SSL Settings]. 㻣㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Select the key to use, and then click [Default Key Settings]. 㻣㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0EY Changing the Remote UI Settings Specify whether the SSL encrypted communication function should be used for the Remote UI. 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Remote UI Settings]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻣㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Change the Remote UI settings. (1) Select the [Use SSL] check box. If you clear the check box, the remote UI cannot use SSL encrypted communication. (2) Click [OK]. IMPORTANT If you cannot set [Use SSL] When a key is not selected for SSL, [Use SSL] cannot be checked. Setting Keys and Certificates Selecting Keys and Certificates 7 㻣㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻣㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F0 Setting the IPSec Encryption Communication Function Specify the settings for using IPSec encryption with the printer. See the following sections, depending on the items you wish to set. Registering/Editing Security Policies In order to use the IPSec encryption communication function, it is necessary to set a security policy in advance. Displaying the [IPSec Settings] Page on the Remote UI Adding a New Security Policy Editing Security Policies Enabling and Disabling IPSec Encryption Communication Function Settings Displaying the [IPSec Settings] Page on the Remote UI Enabling IPSec Encryption Communication NOTE IPSec Encryption Communication IPSec is a protocol that maintains security by protecting IP packets transmitted over the IP network from threats such as theft, falsification, spoofing. Its advantage is that it can be used to add a security function to the basic Internet Protocol (IP) without being dependent on software or network configuration. Communication Mode Of the IPSec communication modes, the printer supports only the transport mode. Certificates and encryption can only be applied to the data parts of IP packets. IMPORTANT Packets that are not applied by IPSec encrypted communication The following packets are not applied by IPSec encrypted communication. IKE (IPv4/IPv6) UDP port number: 500 Loopback address IPv4 address: 127.0.0.1 IPv6 address: ::1 Multicast address IPv4 address: 244.0.0.0 /4 IPv6 address: FF00:: /8 Broadcast address IPv4 address: 255.255.255.255 㻣㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F1 Displaying the [IPSec Settings] Page on the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [IPSec Settings]. 㻣㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F2 Adding a New Security Policy NOTE Number of security policies that can be registered You can register up to 10. If you cannot register one, delete unnecessary security policies. 1 Click [IPSec Policy List...] on the [IPSec Settings] page. 2 Click [Register IPSec Policy...]. 㻣㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Enter the name of the new security policy to be registered. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered. 4 Select the [Enable Policy] check box. If the check box is cleared, the security policy cannot be used. 㻣㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Set [Local Address Settings] and [Remote Address Settings]. The packets setting the security policy are specified as follows. Transmission Packets Applying the Security Policy RX Packets with "destination IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified here TX Packets with "departure IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified here [Local Address] RX Packets with "departure IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified 㻣㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 here [Remote Address] TX Packets with "destination IP addresses" that match IP addresses specified here When [IPv4 Manual Settings]/[IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected Enter the IP address in the [Addresses to Set Manually] field. You can enter the IP address in the following way. IP Address Entry Example IP Address Entry Method 192.168.0.1192.168.0.10 fe80::1000fe80::2000 If you want to enter the IP addresses of consecutive numbers, place "-" (hyphen) between the address of the smallest number and that of the largest number. 192.168.0.0/16 fe80::0000/64 In order to specify the subnet range (prefix length), enter a "/" (slash) after the normal IP address symbol, and then enter another prefix length (maximum 32 for IPv4 and maximum 128 for IPv6). 6 Set [Port Settings]. The packets setting the security policy are specified as follows. Transmission [Local Port] [Remote Port] Packets Applying the Security Policy RX Packets with "destination ports" that match IP addresses specified here TX Packets with "departure ports" that match IP addresses specified here RX Packets with "departure ports" that match IP addresses specified here TX Packets with "destination ports" that match IP addresses specified here If you want to select all ports Select the [All Ports] check box. If you want to select a single port 㻣㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) Select the [Single Port] check box. (2) Enter the port number (0 to 65535). 7 Set [IKE Mode] and [AUTH Method] under [IKE Settings]. (1) Select [Main] or [Aggressive] under [IKE Mode]. (2) Select [AUTH Method]. If you want to specify [Pre-Shared Key Method] a. Select the [Pre-Shared Key Method] check box. b. Click [Shared Key Settings...]. c. Enter the name of the shared key (up to 24 characters), and then click [OK]. If you want to specify [Digital Signature Method] a. Select the [Digital Signature Method] check box. b. Click [Key and Certificate...]. c. Select the key to use, and then click [Default Key Settings]. NOTE [AUTH Method] Settings In order to set [Pre-Shared Key Method], the SSL encrypted communication function must be enabled. "Setting the SSL Encryption Communication Function" We recommend that network settings be performed by the network administrator. "Setting Keys and Certificates" 8 Set [Authentication/Encryption Algorithm] under [IKE Settings]. 㻣㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When setting automatically Select the [Auto] check box. When setting manually Set the following items. [Authentication] Select the authentication algorithm from [SHA1], [MD5] or [SHA1 and MD5]. [Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm from [3DES-CBC], [AES-CBC] or [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC]. [DH Group] Select the Diffie-Hellman group from [Group 1 (768)], [Group 2 (1024)] or [Group 14 (2048)]. 9 Set the PFS for [IPSec Network Settings] and [Validity]. (1) When using PFS, select the [Use PFS] check box. (2) Set [Validity]. 㻣㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When specifying by time a. Select the [Specify by Time] check box. b. Enter the time (1 to 65535 minutes). When specifying by size a. Select the [Specify by Size] check box. b. Enter the size (1 to 65535 MB). NOTE About PFS If PFS is used, the key generation process becomes complex. Even assuming one key is deciphered, it does not mean that later keys will be deciphered easily. 10 Set [Authentication/Encryption Algorithm] under [IPSec Network Settings]. When setting automatically Select the [Auto] check box. When setting authentication using ESP protocol (1) Select the [ESP] check box. (2) Select the authentication algorithm from [SHA1], [MD5], [SHA1 and MD5] or [NULL] under [ESP Authentication]. (3) Select the encryption algorithm from [3DES-CBC], [AES-CBC], [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC] or [NULL] under [ESP Encryption]. When setting authentication using AH protocol (1) Select the [AH] check box. (2) Select the authentication algorithm from [SHA1], [MD5] or [SHA1 and MD5] under [AH Authentication]. 11 Click [OK]. 㻣㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 12 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻣㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F3 Editing Security Policies 1 Click [IPSec Policy List...] on the [IPSec Settings] page. 2 Perform the necessary operations on the [IPSec Policy List] page. When editing security policies (1) Click the policy name displayed in the [Policy Name] field. (2) See "Adding a New Security Policy", and edit the content. 㻣㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When deleting security policies (1) Click [Delete] on the security policy you wish to delete. (2) Click [OK]. When changing the priority of security policies The higher up the list the security policy is, the higher its priority. Click [Raise Priority] or [Lower Priority] for the security policy whose priority you wish to change, and change the priority. 3 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻣㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F4 Enabling IPSec Encryption Communication 1 Click [Edit...] on the [IPSec Settings] page. 2 Select the [Use IPSec] check box. In order to allow receipt of non-policy packets, select the [Allow Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box. 3 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. 㻣㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ After performing a hard reset or restarting the printer, the settings are effective. NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻣㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F5 Specifying the Setting for Job Log Display You can specify the setting for Job Log Display using a Web browser (Remote UI). 1 Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Select [Security] from the [Management Settings] menu. 㻣㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Display Job History]. 5 Click [Edit...]. 㻣㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Specify whether the printer should display the job logs. If the [Display Job History] check box is selected, you can display the job logs*. If the [Display Job History] check box is cleared, the job logs* are not displayed. * The [Job History] page in the [Status Monitor/Cancel] menu 7 Select whether to permit management software to obtain job logs. 㻣㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If the [Allow Obtain Job History from Management Software] check box is selected, you can obtain the job logs from management software. If the [Allow Obtain Job History from Management Software] check box is cleared, job logs cannot be obtained from management software. NOTE If the [Display Job History] check box is selected The [Allow Obtain Job History from Management Software] check box is selected automatically. 8 Click [OK]. 9 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. 㻣㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ĺ$IWHUSHUIRUPLQJDKDUGUHVHWRUUHVWDUWLQJWKHSULQWHUWKHVHWWLQJVDUHHIIHFWLYH NOTE To perform a hard reset You can perform a hard reset using the following procedure. 1. Click [Settings/Registration]. 2. Select [Device Control] from the [Output/Control] menu. 3. Select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute]. 㻣㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F6 MEAP Available Functions Launching and Closing SMS MEAP Application Settings System Settings List of Error Messages (MEAP) 㻣㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F7 Available Functions SMS (Service Management Service) is software that accesses the printer over the network from an existing Web browser, and can install and manage MEAP applications (called "applications" in this document). Since the software (Web server) for using SMS is embedded in the printer, there is no need for any software other than a Web browser. If a printer on the network is connected to a computer, it can use SMS. You can perform the following operations using SMS. You can check application information from computers on the network You can access the printer via the network and display the status and information of installed applications. After SMS launches and you log in by entering your password in the [Log In] page, the following top page is displayed. (1) [MEAP Application Management] It can display the status of applications that are installed in the printer. "MEAP Application Settings" (2) [Install MEAP Application] Install the MEAP application. 㻣㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "Installing MEAP Applications" (3) [System Management] MEAP system administrator settings are used for setting system application settings, displaying information and changing passwords, etc. "System Settings" You can install and uninstall applications You can install and uninstall applications that support this printer from the computer. "Installing MEAP Applications" "Uninstalling MEAP Applications" You can update installed applications and license files If the license for the installed applications has expired, you can reinstall and update it. "Adding License Files" 㻣㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F8 Launching and Closing SMS Log in is required to use SMS. Before Launching SMS (Preparation) Launching SMS (Log in) Closing SMS (Logging Out) NOTE Web Browser Settings The following settings are required. JavaScript must be enabled The use of session cookies must be enabled When a proxy server is used, using the proxy server settings of your Web browser, add the IP address of the printer to the [Exceptions] (addresses that do not use a proxy) list. Since settings differ depending on the network environment, consult with your network administrator. Launching SMS Multiple users cannot log in to SMS at the same time. Automatic SMS Logout While SMS is in use, if it is not accessed for approximately five minutes or more it times out and the user is automatically logged out. If that happens, log in again from the [Login] page. Do not use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button If you use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button, SMS may not operate properly. SMS System Environment SMS operation is guaranteed in the following system environments. Web Browsers Internet Explorer 6 Service Pack 1, or later Safari 1.3.2 or later Operating system Windows XP Professional SP3 Windows Vista SP2 Windows 7 Mac OS X 10.4.9 or later 㻣㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0F9 Before Launching SMS (Preparation) Set the following before launching SMS. Step 1 Set [Network]. "Configuring the Network Settings (Sharing the Printer)" Step 2 Check the printer's IP address. "Checking the Printer Settings" Step 3 Set it so that the printer can be accessed from the Web browser. "Setting Up HTTP Communication" 㻣㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FA Setting Up HTTP Communication In order to use MEAP functions from the Web browser, HTTP communication must be enabled. Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the settings. (The default settings are [On].) 1 Press [ ]( : Settings), select [Network] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. After the message is displayed, press [OK]. 2 Select [TCP/IP Settings] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3 Select [HTTP] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4 Select [On] with [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. [On] It uses HTTP. [Off] It does not use HTTP. 5 Perform a hard reset or restart the printer. The settings are enabled after a hard reset or after the printer is restarted. 㻣㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE Details about Hard Resets See "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)." 㻣㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FC Launching SMS (Log in) The following two methods are used for launching SMS. Launching SMS directly from the Web browser Launching SMS from a Remote UI Before launching SMS, see "Attention (Launching SMS (Log in))." Launching SMS directly from the Web browser 1 Start the Web browser. 2 Enter "https://<Printer's IP address>:8443/sms/" in the address bar, and then press [ENTER] from the Enter key on the keyboard. Entry Example: https://192.168.0.215:8443/sms/ If the printer's host name is registered in the DNS server, you can enter [host name.domain name] instead of the IP address. Input Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com:8443/sms/ If SMS does not launch Check the following. HTTP communication is enabled. "Setting Up HTTP Communication" The computer and printer are connected properly over the network. The printer is turned ON. The IP address or [host name.domain name] are entered correctly. 㻣㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE Device Serial Number The printer's device serial number is displayed on the upper left of the screen. (The device serial number is required to obtain the license file from the license management system.) 3 Enter the password, and then click [Login]. The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive). If you cannot log in If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-enter your password. Enter the correct password, and then click [Login]. If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not be able to log in even if you enter the correct password. A switch license file is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize Password] in the screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch License File, and then click [Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. Launching SMS from a Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode. "Starting the Remote UI" 2 Click [Service Management Service] on the portal page. 㻣㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 3 Enter the password, and then click [Login]. The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive). If you cannot log in If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-enter your password. Enter the correct password, and then click [Login]. If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not be able to log in even if you enter the correct password. A switch license file is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize Password] in the screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch License File, and then click 㻣㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. 㻣㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FE Attention (Launching SMS (Log in)) IMPORTANT SMS Password To prevent unauthorized access, We recommend that the administrator change the password before SMS use is begun. See "Changing the SMS Password" when changing passwords. This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the administrator. Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to use SMS. If this happens, contact your local dealer. 㻣㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FF Closing SMS (Logging Out) Click [Log Out from SMS] to close SMS. If you close the Web browser without clicking [Log Out from SMS], SMS becomes temporarily unusable. 㻣㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FH MEAP Application Settings MEAP applications are set from the [MEAP Application Management] and the [Install MEAP Application] menus. Items shown in the [MEAP Application Management] menu [Application Name] The name of the application is displayed. [Installed on] The date on which the application was installed is displayed. The status of the application is displayed. [Installed]: The application has been installed, but not started. Or, the printer was turned OFF after the application stopped, and after the printer was restarted the application was not yet started. 㻣㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Status] [License] [Started]: The application [Stopped]: The application [Starting]: The application [Stopping]: The application is running. is stopped. is starting up. is closing down. The license status of the application is displayed. [Installed]: A valid license file has been installed. [Not Installed]: The license file has been disabled. [Over Limit]: The license file that is installed has an expiration date, and multiple types of counters have been set. One or more of the counter values has exceeded the upper limits of the counter. [Invalid]: The installed license file has passed its expiration date. Or, the current counter value has exceeded the upper limit of the license file. * When upper limits have been set for multiple types of counters, the license will become invalid at the point in time when any counter exceeds its upper limit. [Unnecessary]: The application does not require a license file for startup. The resources being used by the applications are displayed. [Storage]: The amount of storage being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB). [Memory]: The amount of memory being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB). [Threads]: The number of threads. [Sockets]: The number of sockets. [File Descriptors]: The number of file descriptors. [Resource Information] NOTE Timing of [Resource Information] Updates [Resource Information] is updated at the following times. Item Timing of Updates [Storage] When the application is installed or uninstalled [Memory] [Threads] [Sockets] [File Descriptors] When the application starts or stops [Install MEAP Application] Menu Settings Install the MEAP application. [Install]: Specify the application file and license file to be installed, and then click [Install] to start the installation. 㻣㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Install MEAP Application/License] [Application File]: Specify the application file to be installed. [License File]: Specify the license file. See the following section for settings that use the [MEAP Application Management] and [Install MEAP Application] menus. Installing MEAP Applications Uninstalling MEAP Applications Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications Checking the Details of MEAP Applications MEAP Application License Settings Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications 㻣㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FJ Installing MEAP Applications Before starting the following operation, see "Attention (Installing MEAP Applications)." 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Install MEAP Application]. 3 Set [Application File Path] and [License File Path]. Either select the file by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the file is stored. 㻣㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Application File Path] Specify a file with a "jar" extension. [License File Path] Specify a file with a "lic" extension. 4 Click [Install]. 5 Confirm the information on the install confirmation page, and then click [Yes]. When the [License Agreement] appears, confirm the information, and then click [I Accept]. ĺ The installation begins. <Information Displayed on the Install Confirmation Page> If you are installing a new application [Application Information] Information about the application [License Information] The expiration date of the application If you are updating an application [Application Information] [License Information] [Current Application Information] Information about the current application [Application Information after Overwrite] Application information after overwrite [Expires after] The expiration date of the targeted application [Current Counter Usage Limit] Current counter information [Counter Usage Limit after Overwrite] Counter information after overwrite If the install is cancelled 㻣㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If the shutdown process for the printer starts while an application is being installed, an error message may be displayed on the [Install] page for SMS, and the installation cancelled. If this happens, install the application again after restarting the printer by turning the main power switch OFF and then back ON again. 6 After the install is completed, click [To MEAP Application Management]. NOTE When using the installed application Start the application. "Starting MEAP Applications" 㻣㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FK Attention (Installing MEAP Applications) IMPORTANT Installing Applications There may be other specific requirements for installation, depending on the application. For more information, see the instruction manual provided with the application. You can install up to eight applications. You cannot install license files only. Specify both the application file and the license file. To only add a license file for an application that is already installed, see "Adding License Files." Obtaining License Files In order to install an application, a valid license file is required. If you have a license access number in your application package, obtain a valid license file from License Management System (http://www.canon.com/lms/license/). In order to obtain a license file, a license access number and a device serial number (the number displayed on the upper left of the SMS screen) are required. If you do not have a license access number in your application package, it will be provided by the dealer where you purchased the application. For more information, see the instruction manual provided with the application. Storage Area The application can use a maximum storage area of 32MB. You can confirm the storage space used by the application "Storage", under resource information displayed on the [MEAP Application Management] page. When you are updating an application Stop the application before installing the new version. "Stopping MEAP Applications" 㻣㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FL Uninstalling MEAP Applications IMPORTANT If the license status is not "Not Installed" Uninstall the application after disabling and deleting the license files. "Disabling License Files" "Deleting Disabled License Files" 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall. Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted. 4 Click [Yes]. ĺ The uninstall begins. 㻣㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When the restart prompt message is displayed Follow the onscreen instructions to restart the printer. IMPORTANT If <A package exported from this application cannot be used.> is displayed and you uninstall the application that displayed this message, you may not be able to use other applications. 㻣㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FR Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications Starting MEAP Applications Stopping MEAP Applications 㻣㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FS Starting MEAP Applications 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click [Start] for the application to start. If the application does not start Check the following. The required license file has been installed There is sufficient [Memory], [Threads], [Sockets] and [File Descriptors] under [Resource Information] When the restart prompt message is displayed Follow the onscreen instructions to restart the printer. 㻣㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FU Stopping MEAP Applications 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click [Stop] for the application to stop. 㻣㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When the restart prompt message is displayed Follow the onscreen instructions to restart the printer. 㻣㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FW Checking the Details of MEAP Applications Check the details of installed applications. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click the application to check the details. ĺ [Application/License Information] is displayed on the screen. 㻣㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When [Authentication Information Settings] is displayed Set the authentication information. "Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications" 㻣㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FX MEAP Application License Settings You can add, disable and delete license files for installed applications. Adding License Files Disabling License Files Downloading Disabled License Files Deleting Disabled License Files IMPORTANT Disabling Licenses You cannot disable a license file if the application is still running. "Stopping MEAP Applications" When a disabled license file is generated, the status of that license file becomes <Not Installed> and the application becomes unusable. Downloading and Deleting Licenses You can only download or delete disabled license files. Some license files need to be downloaded after they have been disabled. Once you have deleted the disabled license file, you cannot download it from the printer again. We recommend downloading and backing it up before deleting it. Reinstalling License Files You can reinstall disabled or downloaded license files in the same printer. 㻣㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0FY Adding License Files You can install license files for applications that are already installed. You can also increase counter values and extend terms of validity by adding license files. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click the name of the application to which a license file will be added. 㻣㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [License Management]. 5 Specify the license file. 㻣㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 (1) Click [Browse], and then select the license file to be added. (2) Click [Install]. 6 Confirm the information on the install confirmation page, and then click [Yes]. ĺ The license file is installed. If you are adding a license file to an [Over Limit] or [Invalid] application you may need to restart the application. "Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications" 㻣㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H0 Disabling License Files After you disable a license file, you can download and save it to a computer or delete it. IMPORTANT Disabling Licenses You cannot disable a license file if the application is still running. "Stopping MEAP Applications" When a disabled license file is generated, the status of that license file becomes <Not Installed> and the application becomes unusable. Reinstalling License Files You can reinstall disabled license files in the same printer. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click the name of the application for which to disable to license file. 㻤㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [License Management]. 5 Click [Disable]. 㻤㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Click [Yes]. ĺ The license file is disabled. 㻤㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H1 Downloading Disabled License Files Download and back up disabled license files to the computer. IMPORTANT Downloading Licenses You can only download disabled license files. Some license files need to be downloaded after they have been disabled. Reinstalling License Files You can reinstall downloaded and disabled license files in the same printer. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click the name of the application for which to download to license file. 㻤㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [License Management]. 5 Click [Download]. 㻤㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a file storage directory. ĺ The license file is saved. 㻤㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H2 Deleting Disabled License Files To uninstall an application, you must first delete the license file. IMPORTANT Deleting Licenses You can only delete disabled license files. Once you have deleted the disabled license file, you cannot download it again. We recommend downloading and backing it up before deleting it. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click the name of the application to which to delete a license file. 㻤㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [License Management]. 5 Click [Delete]. 㻤㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 6 Click [Yes]. ĺ The license file is deleted. 㻤㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H3 Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications When processing jobs from applications that do not require operation from the printer, you must first set the authentication information. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3 Click the name of the application for which to set authentication information. 㻤㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Authentication Information Settings]. 5 Enter the authentication information. 㻤㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you use department ID management Enter the department ID and password in the fields marked [Department ID] and [PIN]. If you do not use department ID management Enter an arbitrary ID and password in the fields marked [Department ID] and [PIN]. 6 Click [Update]. ĺ Authentication information is set. IMPORTANT When cancelling authentication information Click [Delete]. 㻤㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H4 System Settings The [System Management] menu contains the following items. [Panel Display Order Settings] It sets the order MEAP applets are displayed on the operation panel. "Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order" [Enhanced System Application Management] It displays enhanced system application status and performs settings. You can also set log in service settings. "Setting Enhanced System Applications" [System Application Management] It displays system application status and performs start/stop operations. [System Information] It displays versions and system application information, etc. "Checking System Information" [MEAP Application Information] It displays the details about MEAP applications. "Checking Application Information" [Check License] It checks the content of the license file before it is installed. "Checking License Files" [Change Password] It changes the SMS log in password. "Changing the SMS Password" [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] It deletes the details about MEAP applications. "Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information" [MEAP Application Log Management] It downloads and deletes log data obtained by MEAP applications. "Managing MEAP Application Log Data" 㻤㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H5 Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order The applet display order changes when you press [ ]( : Application) on the control panel. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Panel Display Order Settings]. 3 Select the check boxes for the applets whose display order you wish to change. 㻤㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 The display order changes. (1) Move the applets up and down by clicking [Up] and [Down]. (2) Click [Update]. 㻤㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H6 Checking Login Services Check the login services that perform user authentication. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Enhanced System Application Management]. 3 Check the status of log in service. 㻤㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻤㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H7 Setting Enhanced System Applications They perform the operations of the enhanced system applications that enhance the system applications (the basic applications that make up the MEAP system). Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications Starting Enhanced System Applications Stopping Enhanced System Applications Installing Enhanced System Applications Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications 㻤㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H8 Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications Starting Enhanced System Applications Stopping Enhanced System Applications 㻤㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0H9 Starting Enhanced System Applications 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Enhanced System Application Management]. 3 Click [Start] for Other System Applications, and then start the application. When the [License Agreement] appears, confirm the information, and then click [I Accept]. 㻤㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HA Stopping Enhanced System Applications 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Enhanced System Application Management]. 3 Click [Stop] for Other System Applications, and then stop the application. 㻤㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HC Installing Enhanced System Applications 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Enhanced System Application Management]. 3 Set [Enhanced System Application File Path] and [License File Path]. Either select the file by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the file is stored. 㻤㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Enhanced System Application File Path] Specify a file with a "jar" extension. [License File Path] Specify a file with a "lic" extension. IMPORTANT When specifying a file Specify both the application file and the license file. 4 Click [Install]. 㻤㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Confirm the information on the install confirmation page, and then click [Yes]. When the [License Agreement] appears, confirm the information, and then click [I Accept]. ĺ The installation begins. 㻤㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HE Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications NOTE Deleting License Files There is no need to delete license files before uninstalling enhanced system applications. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Enhanced System Application Management]. 3 Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall. Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted. 4 Click [Yes]. ĺ The uninstall begins. 㻤㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HF Checking Information Checking System Information Checking Application Information Checking License Files 㻤㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HH Checking System Information You can check the version information of platforms such as Java virtual machine and version information, date of installation and status of system applications. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [System Information]. Click [Display Details] to check detailed information. 㻤㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻤㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HJ Checking Application Information You can check the information about installed or uninstalled applications (except for system applications). 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Information]. 3 Information about applications is displayed. (1) Select [Installed] or [Uninstalled]. (2) Click [Switch]. [Installed] Information about installed applications (except for system applications) is displayed. [Uninstalled] Information about uninstalled applications (except for system applications) is displayed. 㻤㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HK Checking License Files You can check the content of the license file before it is installed. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Check License]. 3 Either select the file by clicking [Browse], or enter the location where the file is stored. 4 Click [Check]. ĺ The content of the license file is displayed. 㻤㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HL Changing the SMS Password IMPORTANT SMS Password To prevent unauthorized access, We recommend that the administrator change the password before SMS use is begun. This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the administrator. Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to use SMS. If this happens, contact your local dealer. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [Change Password]. 3 Set the password. (1) Set the password. (2) Click [Change]. Enter between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9) for the password. [Old Password] Enter the password that is currently used. [New Password] Enter the new password. 㻤㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 [Confirm] Enter the same password again in [New Password]. 㻤㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HR Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information Deletes the application data. 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Setting Information Management]. 3 Select the check box for the application whose setting information you wish to delete, and then click [Delete]. Click [Select All] to select all of the applications. 㻤㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Yes]. ĺ The setting information of the application is deleted. 㻤㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HS Managing MEAP Application Log Data It downloads and deletes log data obtained by MEAP applications. Downloading Log Data Deleting Log Data 㻤㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HU Downloading Log Data 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Log Management]. 3 Click [Download Application Logs]. 㻤㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a file storage directory. ĺ The log file is saved. 㻤㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HW Deleting Log Data 1 Start SMS (Service Management Service). "Launching SMS (Log in)" 2 Click [MEAP Application Log Management]. 3 Click [Delete Application Logs]. 㻤㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Click [Yes]. ĺ The log data is deleted. 㻤㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HX List of Error Messages (MEAP) This section describes how to handle error messages that are displayed when logging in to or operating SMS. The error messages are divided into separate pages. Click the following links and perform the necessary actions. Errors Relating to the [Login] Page Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page Other Errors 㻤㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0HY Errors Relating to the [Login] Page <The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.> <The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.> <The specified switch license file cannot be used for password initialization. Try to specify the file again.> <Cannot initialize password because a used switch license file is specified. Try to specify the file again.> <Cannot initialize the password because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.> <You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service. Log in with administrator rights.> <Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations have not been successfully performed. Please wait a moment and then try this operation again.> <Error: <Error Details>> The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect. Specify the file path correctly. The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file. Problem Action Problem Action The specified file is not a switch license file. Check to make sure that the specified file is a switch license file for password initialization. Information is missing from the specified file. The password cannot be initialized using the specified file. Check the content of the file. The specified switch license file cannot be used for password initialization. Try to specify the file again. Problem Action The specified file is not a switch license file for initializing the password. Specify a switch license file for initializing the password. Cannot initialize password because a used switch license file is specified. Try to specify the file again. Problem Action The specified license file has already been installed. License files that have been installed once cannot be installed again. Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file. Cannot initialize the password because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again. Problem Action Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or it cannot initialize the password because the firmware is being updated. Wait until the processing stops before initializing the password. You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service. Log in with administrator rights. 㻤㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Problem Action Only users with administrator rights can log in to SMS with the user name and password that they use for logging in to the printer. The user trying to log in cannot do so because they do not have administrator rights. Log in again with the user name and password of a user with administrator rights. Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations have not been successfully performed. Please wait a moment and then try this operation again. Problem Cannot log in for a period of time because either another user is logged in or when the user was logged in before, the logout procedure was not performed properly. Action If another user is logged in, wait until the user logs out. If another user is not logged in, wait for the lock to be cancelled. Error: <Error Details> Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details. If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. 㻤㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J0 Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page <Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the application. Get a distributable software.> <Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.> <A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it again after installing a license.> <Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>> <Cannot uninstall this application because the license file has not been deleted. Uninstall the application after deleting the license in the [License Management] page.> <The name listed in the file for the application and the applet name to register with Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the file.> <Cannot start this application because application setting information is being processed. Please wait a moment and then try again.> <Error: <Error Details>> Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the application. Get a distributable software. Problem Action The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules. Contact the application developer. Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications. Problem Action The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (five applets), so the application cannot be launched. First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the system which includes an applet, and then restart the application. A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it again after installing a license. Problem Action Cannot start the application because a license file is not installed. Install the license file, and then restart the application. Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources> Problem Action The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be available to be allocated. Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time. Cannot uninstall this application because the license file has not been deleted. Uninstall the application after deleting the license in the [License Management] page. Problem Action The application cannot be uninstalled because the license file for the application still exists inside the printer. Uninstall the application after deleting the license on the [License Management] page. The name listed in the file for the application and the applet name to register with Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the file. 㻤㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Problem Action The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application file. Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application file, contact the application developer. Cannot start this application because application setting information is being processed. Please wait a moment and then try again. Problem Action The application cannot be started because application data is being deleted. After deletion of application data completes, launch the application again. Error: <Error Details> Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details. If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. 㻤㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J1 Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page <The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.> <The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.> <The manifest is not listed in the specified file. Check the file.> <The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.> <The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.> <The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information>> <The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information>> <Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been confirmed to be valid. Get a valid code signing.> <Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again.> <The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.> <Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.> <Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again.> <To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file.> <The specified file is a system application. Install the application from the [Enhanced System Application Management] page.> <The specified application does not require a license.> <The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.> <The specified application does not support this device.> <Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specified application has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel.> <The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the file.> <Cannot install the application because the license requirement is different. Uninstall the specified application, and then try to install the application again.> <Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again.> <Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.> <This application does not support the MEAP version of the device. Contact your service representative after checking the application version.> <The specified application cannot be installed on this device.> <The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the process again.> <Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.> <Error: <Error Details>> The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Specify the file path correctly. The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The license file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect. Specify the file path correctly. The manifest is not listed in the specified file. Check the file. 㻤㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Problem Action A manifest does not exist for the file specified as the application file. This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer. The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file. Problem Action Either the content of the files specified as application files is not correct or information is missing. This application file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the application developer or the application support help desk. The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file. Problem Action Either the content of the files specified as license files is not correct or information is missing. This license file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the application developer or the application support help desk. The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information> Problem Action The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application file. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the application developer or the application support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>. The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information> Problem 1 Action Problem 2 Action <Inaccurate information> in the application file cannot be recognized as correct information. Contact the application developer or the application support help desk. If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specifications, the application's MEAP specification values and the printer's MEAP specification values do not match. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been confirmed to be valid. Get a valid code signing. Problem 1 Action Problem 2 Action Cannot confirm that there is a valid code signature inside the application file. Perform the correct code signing operation for the application. The file may have been altered. Contact the application developer. Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again. Problem Action The application cannot be installed because the specified license file does not correspond to the specified application. Specify the license file that corresponds to the application. 㻤㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications. Problem The maximum number of applications that can be installed is eight. You are attempting to install an application that will exceed that number. Action You can install it if you first uninstall another installed application (unless it is a system application). Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative. Problem Action The license file cannot be installed because the number of license file ID information logs contained in the license file exceeds the number that can be saved. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again. Problem Action License files that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already been installed. Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file. To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file. Problem Action You cannot install the application unless you specify the license file that corresponds to the application at the same time. Specify the corresponding license file when specifying the application, and then install them. The specified file is a system application. Install the application from the [Enhanced System Application Management] page. Problem Action The specified file is a system application. It cannot be installed from this [Install MEAP Application] page. Install it from the [Enhanced System Application Management] page. The specified application does not require a license. Problem Action An application file and license file were specified, but the specified application file does not require a license file. Install the application without specifying a license file. The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license. Problem Action License files contain the serial number information of printers in which the license file can be installed. The specified license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number information. Specify a license file that matches the printer's serial number. The specified application does not support this device. Problem Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model. 㻤㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action Specify an application that supports this printer. Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specified application has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel. Problem Action The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer. Install an application that contains applets that support this printer. The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the file. Problem Action The specified application file is a file for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary to stop the application which is to be updated before updating. Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again. Cannot install the application because the license requirement is different. Uninstall the specified application, and then try to install the application again. Problem Action You have tried to upgrade an application which is already installed using a version of the same application with different license requirements. Upgrade using the same license conditions. Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again. Problem Action The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity. Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used. Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed. Problem Action The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled. Disable the license file, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it. This application does not support the MEAP version of the device. Contact your service representative after checking the application version. Problem Action The specified application cannot be installed because it does not support the MEAP version on this printer. Contact the application developer. The specified application cannot be installed on this device. Problem Action The specified application cannot be installed because there is not enough memory in the printer. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the process again. Problem The installation could not be completed because it conflicted with a system shutdown. 㻤㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action Restart the printer and perform the install again. Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again. Problem Action Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because the firmware has been updated. Wait until the processing stops before installing the application. Error: <Error Details> Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details. If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. 㻤㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J2 Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page <Settings are incorrect.> <The [Department ID] is incorrect. Enter an integer for the [Department ID].> <The [Department ID] is not entered.> <Could not set authentication information because an error occurred.> <Could not delete authentication information because an error occurred.> Settings are incorrect. Check to see if the password is incorrect. Enter Dept. ID within 7 digits. Check to see if the Department. ID is registered with the device. Problem Action Cannot set authentication information because either the Dept. ID entered does not exist, or the PIN was entered incorrectly. Enter a Dept. ID and PIN that are registered in the printer. The [Department ID] is incorrect. Enter an integer for the [Department ID]. Problem Action The Dept. ID that was entered is a positive integer, but the registered Dept. ID is not a positive integer. Enter the correct Dept. ID that is registered in the device. The [Department ID] is not entered. Problem Action The Dept. ID is blank. Specify a Dept. ID. Could not set authentication information because an error occurred. Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be set. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. Could not delete authentication information because an error occurred. Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be deleted. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. 㻤㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J3 Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page <The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.> <The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.> <Cannot install this license because the specified license does not correspond to this application. Try to specify a path for the license file again.> <Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.> <Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again.> <The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.> <Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.> <Cannot install the license because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.> <Cannot disable the license file because this application has been started. Disable the license file after stopping the application.> <Error: <Error Details>> The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect. Specify the file path correctly. The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file. Problem Action Either the content of the file is not correct or information is missing. This license file cannot be installed. Contact the application developer. Cannot install this license because the specified license does not correspond to this application. Try to specify a path for the license file again. Problem Action The specified license file does not correspond to the application, so they cannot be installed. Specify the license file that corresponds to the application. Check to make sure that the manifest file listed inside the license file is correct. Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative. Problem Action The license file cannot be installed because the number of license file ID information logs contained in the license file exceeds the number that can be saved. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again. Problem Action According to the specifications, a license file which is already installed cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already been installed. Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file. The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license. Problem License files contain lists of printers in which they can be installed. The specified license file cannot be installed in this printer. 㻤㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action Specify a license file that can be installed in this printer. Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed. Problem Action The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled. Disable the license file, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it. Cannot install the license because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again. Problem Action Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license file cannot be installed because the firmware has been updated. Wait until the processing stops before installing the license file. Cannot disable the license file because this application has been started. Disable the license file after stopping the application. Problem Action You cannot disable a license if the corresponding application is still running. Stop the application that corresponds to the license before disabling the license. Error: <Error Details> Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details. If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact the application developer. 㻤㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J4 Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page <Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the application. Get a distributable software.> <Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.> <Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>> <The name listed in the file for the application and the applet name to register with Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the file.> <The following login services cannot be uninstalled: The currently set login service Login services that will be enabled after the device is restarted Default Authentication login services The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the device is restarted.> <The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.> <The manifest is not listed in the specified file. Check the file.> <The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.> <The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.> <The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.> <Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been confirmed to be valid. Get a valid code signing.> <Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again.> <The specified file is not system application. Check the file.> <Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.> <Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again.> <To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file.> <The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information>> <The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information>> <The specified application does not support this device.> <The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.> <Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specified application has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel.> <The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the file.> <The specified file is an update file for a login service that is currently set. Switch to another login service, restart the device, and then install the file.> <Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again.> <Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.> <The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the process again.> <Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.> <Error: <Error Details>> Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the application. Get a distributable software. Problem Action The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules. Contact the application developer. Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications. Problem The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (five applets), so the application cannot be launched. 㻤㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the system which includes an applet, and then restart the application. Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources> Problem Action The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be available to be allocated. Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time. The name listed in the file for the application and the applet name to register with Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the file. Problem Action The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application file. Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application file, contact the application developer. The following login services cannot be uninstalled: - The currently set login service - Login services that will be enabled after the device is restarted - Default Authentication login services The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the device is restarted. Problem Action The currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the machine, and the Default Authentication login service cannot be uninstalled. Do not uninstall the currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the machine, or the Default Authentication login service. To uninstall the currently set login service, uninstall it after restarting the machine. The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Specify the file path correctly. The manifest is not listed in the specified file. Check the file. Problem Action A manifest does not exist for the file specified as the application file. This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer. The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Specify the file path correctly. The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file. Problem Either the content of the files specified as application files is not correct or information is missing. This application file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the 㻤㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action application developer or the application support help desk. The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file. Problem Action Either the content of the files specified as license files is not correct or information is missing. This license file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the application developer or the application support help desk. Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been confirmed to be valid. Get a valid code signing. Problem 1 Action Problem 2 Action Cannot confirm that there is a valid code signature inside the application file. Perform the correct code signing operation for the application. The file may have been altered. Contact the application developer. Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again. Problem Action The application cannot be installed because the specified license file does not correspond to the specified application. Specify the license file that corresponds to the application. The specified file is not system application. Check the file. Problem Action The specified file is not system application. It cannot be installed from the [Enhanced System Application Management] page. Install it from the [Install MEAP Application] page. Cannot install this license because the number of license file ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative. Problem Action The license file cannot be installed because the number of license file ID information logs contained in the license file exceeds the number that can be saved. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. Cannot install because a used license file is specified. Try to specify the file again. Problem Action License files that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already been installed. Since the specified license file cannot be installed, specify another file. To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file. Problem You cannot install the application unless you specify the license file that corresponds to the application at the same time. 㻤㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action Specify the corresponding license file when specifying the application, and then install them. The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information> Problem 1 Action Problem 2 Action <Inaccurate information> in the application file cannot be recognized as correct information. Contact the application developer or the application support help desk. If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specifications, the application's MEAP specification values and the printer's MEAP specification values do not match. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information> Problem Action The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application. Check the file. If there are no problems with the files, contact the application developer or the application support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>. The specified application does not support this device. Problem Action Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model. Specify an application that supports this printer. The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license. Problem Action License files contain the serial number information of printers in which the license file can be installed. The specified license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number information. Specify a license file that matches the serial number of this printer. Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specified application has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel. Problem Action The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer. Install an application that contains applets that support this printer. The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the file. Problem Action The specified application file is a file for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary to stop the application which is to be updated before updating. Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again. The specified file is an update file for a login service that is currently set. Switch to another login service, restart the device, and then install the file. Problem Although the specified application file is an update file for the login service that is currently set, it cannot update a login service that has already started. 㻤㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action To install the update file for the login service, start another login service, and then install the update file. Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again. Problem Action The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity. Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used. Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed. Problem Action The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled. Disable the license file, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it. The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the process again. Problem Action The installation could not be completed because it conflicted with a system shutdown. Restart the printer and perform the install again. Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again. Problem Action Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because the firmware has been updated. Wait until the processing stops before installing the application. Error: <Error Details> Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details. If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. 㻤㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J5 Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages <The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.> <The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.> <The specified switch license file cannot be used to delete the license file ID log. Try to specify the path again.> <The specified license is already installed. Installed license file information cannot be displayed.> <Cannot perform the operation because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.> <The old password is incorrect.> <The new password is incorrect. Enter the password with 8 to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters.> <The new password and password to confirm do not match.> <Error: <Error Details>> The specified file does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The file does not exist on the specified path or the file path is incorrect. Specify the file path correctly. The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file. Problem 1 Action Problem 2 Action The content of the file is not correct. (A file other than a license file was specified.) Check to make sure that the specified file is a license file. Information is missing from the file. Check the content of the file. The specified switch license file cannot be used to delete the license file ID log. Try to specify the path again. Problem Action The specified file is not a switch license file for deleting license file ID logs. Try specifying the file path for the switch license for deleting license file ID logs. The specified license is already installed. Installed license file information cannot be displayed. Problem Action Information about license files that have already been installed in this printer cannot be displayed. Specify another license file. Cannot perform the operation because another application is being installed, or the firmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again. Problem Action Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license file information cannot be displayed because the firmware has been updated. Wait until the processing stops before displaying the license information. The old password is incorrect. Problem The text string entered as the current password is different from the current password. 㻤㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Action Enter the correct password. The new password is incorrect. Enter the password with 8 to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters. Problem Action The new password has under 8 characters or more than 33 characters. Illegal characters that cannot be used in passwords have been used. Enter a new password of between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9). The new password and password to confirm do not match. Problem Action The password cannot be changed because the new password and the confirmation password do not match. Enter a new password and the same text string as the confirmation password. Error: <Error Details> Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details. If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives. 㻤㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J6 Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page <Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications because it is in use by currently running applications. Stop the following applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and then delete the setting information. <Application Name>> <Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error occurred.> Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications because it is in use by currently running applications. Stop the following applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and then delete the setting information. <Application Name> Problem Action The application is in one of the following states. Started Starting Stopping Return to the previous page using the [Back] button, bring the applications corresponding to the error message to other state than "Started," "Starting" or "Stopping," and then try deletion again. Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error occurred. Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason, so the setting information could not be deleted. Return to the previous page using the [Back] button. 㻤㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J7 Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page <Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist.> <Could not download application logs because an error occurred.> <Could not delete application logs because an error occurred.> Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist. Problem Action The application log does not exist. Return to the previous page using the [Back] button. Could not download application logs because an error occurred. Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be downloaded. Return to the previous page using the [Back] button. Could not delete application logs because an error occurred. Problem Action An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be deleted. Return to the previous page using the [Back] button. 㻤㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J8 Other Errors <Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.> Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user. Problem Action The application for the attempted operation does not exist. Return to the previous page using the [Back] button. 㻤㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0J9 Troubleshooting Printer Unit Problems Printing Cannot Be Performed The Printer Takes a Long Time to Start the Print Job You Cannot Turn the Printer ON All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off Driver Problems You Cannot Install the Printer Driver You Cannot Uninstall the Printer Driver The Printer Driver Settings Cannot Be Changed "Profiles" Cannot Be Selected or Edited The Status of the Paper Feeder Cannot Be Obtained Automatically Paper Jams Paper Jams Error Display The Message Indicator Is On A Message Appears in the Control Panel Printout Problems Poor Printout Results Other Problems If You Cannot Solve a Problem 㻤㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JA Printing Cannot Be Performed The solutions for when printing cannot be performed vary depending on your environment. See the solutions according to your environment. If You Are Using the Printer by Direct Connection If the printer is connected by a USB cable "Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)" If the printer is connected by a LAN cable "Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)" If You Are Using the Printer in the Print Server Environment If your computer is the print server "Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)" "Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)" If your computer is a client computer "Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server)" 㻤㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JC Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection) If you cannot print when the printer is connected to the computer by a USB cable, check the problem following the questions below. NOTE For Macintosh users This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example. For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." <Question 1> Is the printer turned ON? Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned on. ON To <Question 2> OFF Turn the printer ON. Cannot be turned ON "You Cannot Turn the Printer ON" <Question 2> Check the indicators on the printer unit. The The (Ready) indicator is on. (Ready) indicator is blinking. The The (Message) indicator is on. (Job) indicator is on. To <Question 3> The printer is warming up. Please wait a moment. "The Message Indicator Is On" The printer is operating. Please wait a moment. If the printer does not perform printing for a while, perform the print 㻤㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The (Job) indicator is blinking. The Paper Source indicator is blinking. <Question 3> Check the data output or soft reset. "Canceling a Job" It is out of paper. Load paper. "Paper Loading and Output" (Online) indicator. The (Online) indicator is on. To <Question 4> The (Online) indicator is off. The printer is offline. Place it online. "Online and Offline" <Question 4> Can you print Configuration Page? "Checking the Printer Settings" Printable Not printable To <Question 5> If an error message is displayed, solve the problem following the message. "A Message Appears in the Control Panel" <Question 5> Is the USB cable connected properly? Try the following points. If you are using a hub, connect the printer to the computer directly. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with the short one. 㻤㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Connected If you have another USB cable, use it. If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 6>. Unconnected Connect the cable properly. "Connecting to a Computer" <Question 6> Check the settings for [Interface Selection]. "[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)" [USB] is set to [On]. To <Question 7> [USB] is set to [Off]. Set it to [On]. <Question 7> Can you print a test page in Windows? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Printable Not printable There is no problem with the printer and driver. Check the printing preferences in the application. To <Question 8> <Question 8> Is the port to be used selected correctly? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 㻤㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Selected To <Question 9> Not selected Select the correct port. The port to be used cannot be found. Install the printer driver again. For details on the procedure for installing and uninstalling the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." <Question 9> Is bi-directional communication enabled? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Enabled Not enabled To <Question 10> Enable bi-directional communication and restart the computer and printer. <Question 10> Try the following points. Make resident software invalid including security software. If any other devices are connected to your computer by USB connection, disconnect those unneeded. If drivers or software of any other devices (USB connection) is installed on your computer, uninstall those unneeded. Connect the USB cable to another USB port on your computer. Connect the printer to another computer with a USB cable. If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 11>. <Question 11> Install the printer driver again. For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 12>. <Question 12> Uninstall the USB class driver, and then install the printer driver again. For details on the procedure for uninstalling the USB class driver and installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide" on the User Software CD-ROM. For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." 㻤㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If printing does not work, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻤㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JE Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection) If you cannot print when the printer is connected to the computer by a LAN cable, check the problem following the questions below. NOTE For Macintosh users This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example. For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." <Question 1> Is the printer turned ON? Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned on. ON To <Question 2> OFF Turn the printer ON. Cannot be turned ON "You Cannot Turn the Printer ON" <Question 2> Check the indicators on the printer unit. The The (Ready) indicator is on. (Ready) indicator is blinking. The The (Message) indicator is on. (Job) indicator is on. To <Question 3> The printer is warming up. Please wait a moment. "The Message Indicator Is On" The printer is operating. Please wait a moment. If the printer does not perform printing for a while, perform the print 㻤㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The (Job) indicator is blinking. The Paper Source indicator is blinking. <Question 3> Check the data output or soft reset. "Canceling a Job" Load paper. "Paper Loading and Output" (Online) indicator. The (Online) indicator is on. To <Question 4> The (Online) indicator is off. The printer is offline. Place it online. "Online and Offline" <Question 4> Can you print NETWORK STATUS PRINT? "Checking the Printer Settings" Printable Not printable To <Question 5> If an error message is displayed, solve the problem following the message. "A Message Appears in the Control Panel" <Question 5> Is the LAN cable connected properly? Connected Unconnected To <Question 6> Connect the cable properly. "Connecting to a Computer" 㻤㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 <Question 6> Check the indicators on the network interface. The ACT indicator is on. To <Question 7> The LNK indicator is on. "All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off" All the indicators are off. <Question 7> Check the settings for [Interface Selection]. "[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)" [Network] is set to [On]. To <Question 8> [Network] is set to [Off]. Set it to [On]. <Question 8> Can you print a test page in Windows? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Printable Not printable There is no problem with the printer and driver. Check the printing preferences in the application. To <Question 9> <Question 9> Which network protocol are you using? TCP/IP To <Question 10> 㻤㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NetWare or SMB To <Question 14> AppleTalk To <Question 17> <Question 10> Is the IP address set properly? Check if the IP address written on Network Status Print printed in <Question 4> matches the one configured for the port of your PC. "Checking the Printer Settings" Yes, they are matched. No, they are not matched. "Checking the Port" To <Question 11> Configure the printer to a static IP address. "Setting the Printer to a Static IP Address" <Question 11> Is the port to be used selected correctly? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Selected Not selected The port to be used cannot be found. The IP address was changed. To <Question 12> Select the correct port. Create a port. "Connecting the Printer (LPD/RAW)" <Question 12> Check the following points. 㻤㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The printer is specified as the default printer. The TCP/IP protocol is running. The users who can print are not restricted. "Restricting the Users Who Can Print or Perform the Printer Settings" "Restricting the Users Who Can Access" If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 13>. <Question 13> Try the following points. Change the printing protocol to LPR. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Enable the LPR byte count. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Shorten the name of the file to be printed. If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 19>. <Question 14> Is NetWare or SMB set properly? When using NetWare "Configuring NetWare" "Configuring the Protocol Settings" When using SMB "Configuring the Protocol Settings" If you are using the DHCP server and WINS server, check if the servers are linked properly. Try the following point. Set [Network Delay Time] longer than usual. "Specifying the Setting for Startup Waiting Time" NetWare or SMB is set properly. If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 15>. NetWare or SMB is not set properly. Set NetWare or SMB properly. <Question 15> Is the IP address set properly? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" SMB printing does not support IP v. 6. The IP address is set properly. The IP address is not set properly. To <Question 16>. Set the IP address properly. "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" <Question 16> Is the port to be used selected correctly? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" The port is selected correctly. To <Question 19>. The port is not selected properly. Or The settings for NetWare or SMB are changed. Create the appropriate port. When using NetWare "Network Settings for the Printer (NetWare) " When using SMB "Network Settings for the Printer (SMB) " 㻤㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 <Question 17> Is AppleTalk set properly? "Configuring the Protocol Settings" In particular, make sure that the zone in which the printer exists is configured properly in [Zone]. Set Not set To <Question 18> Set AppleTalk properly. <Question 18> Check the following points. The printer destination is set properly. AppleTalk is available. For details on the procedure for setting the printer destination, see "Driver Guide." For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." Set To <Question 19> Not set Set them properly. <Question 19> Connect the printer and computer directly with the cross-type * LAN cable. * This is a LAN cable which is used to connect a printer and computer directly without a hub (LAN network). If printing does not work or if you cannot prepare a cross-type LAN cable, proceed to <Question 20>. <Question 20> Install the printer driver again. For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 21>. <Question 21> Can you print from another computer (LAN connection)? Printable Not printable Make resident software invalid including security software. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻤㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JF Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server) If you cannot print when the printer is used via the print server, check the problem following the questions below. NOTE For Macintosh users This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example. For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." <Question 1> Is the printer turned ON? Check if the Main Power indicator on the control panel is turned on. ON To <Question 2> OFF Turn the printer ON. Cannot be turned ON "You Cannot Turn the Printer ON" <Question 2> Check the indicators on the printer unit. The The (Ready) indicator is on. (Ready) indicator is blinking. The The (Message) indicator is on. (Job) indicator is on. To <Question 3> The printer is warming up. Please wait a moment. "The Message Indicator Is On" The printer is operating. Please wait a moment. If the printer does not perform printing for a while, perform the print data output or soft reset. 㻤㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The (Job) indicator is blinking. The Paper Source indicator is blinking. <Question 3> Check the "Canceling a Job" Load paper. "Paper Loading and Output" (Online) indicator. The (Online) indicator is on. To <Question 4> The (Online) indicator is off. The printer is offline. Place it online. "Online and Offline" <Question 4> Can you print Configuration Page? "Checking the Printer Settings" Printable Not printable To <Question 5> If an error message is displayed, solve the problem following the message. "A Message Appears in the Control Panel" <Question 5> Is the printer connected to the print server properly? Connected Unconnected To <Question 6> Connect them properly. "Connecting to a Computer" <Question 6> Can your computer be connected to the print server or the shared printer? Can be connected Cannot be connected To <Question 7> "The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found" "The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed" <Question 7> Check the following points. 㻤㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The print server is connected to the network properly. The additional driver (alternate driver) is updated properly. Printing can be performed from the print server. If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 8>. <Question 8> Can you print a test page in Windows? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Printable Not printable There is no problem with the printer and driver. Check the printing preferences in the application. To <Question 9> <Question 9> Is the printer on the print server displayed on the network? "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Displayed Not displayed To <Question 10> Ask your network administrator about the problem. <Question 10> Install the printer driver again. For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." If printing does not work, proceed to <Question 11>. <Question 11> Can another client print? Printable Not printable Make resident software invalid including security software. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻤㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JH The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The LAN cable is not connected properly. Solution Connect the print server to the client computer with the LAN cable properly. <Cause 2> The print server has not been started up. Solution Start up the print server. <Cause 3> The printer is not specified as a shared printer. Solution Specify the printer as a shared printer. For details on the procedure for specifying the printer as a shared printer, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." <Cause 4> The user does not have permission to access the print server or printer. Solution Ask your network administrator to change the user permissions. <Cause 5> [Network discovery] is not enabled. (Windows Vista, 7, and Server 2008) Perform either of the following procedures. 1. From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel]. 2. Click [View network status and tasks]. 3. Set [Network discovery] to [On]. Solution 1. 2. 3. 4. From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel]. Click [View network status and tasks]. Click [Change advanced sharing settings]. Specify [Turn on network discovery] in [Network discovery]. 1. From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel]. 2. Double-click [Network and Sharing Center]. 3. Set [Network discovery] to [On]. 㻤㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JJ The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The user of the computer to be used is not registered, or the password is not specified. Solution Register the user of the computer to be used or specify the password on the print server. For more details, ask your network administrator. <Cause 2> The path to the network is not correct. Check printers in the print server. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" Solution 1 If the icon for this printer is not displayed Ask your network administrator about the problem. If the icon for this printer is displayed You can install the printer driver by performing either of the following procedures and following the instructions on the screen. Double-clicking the icon for this printer Dragging and dropping the icon for this printer in the printer folder Solution 2 If you want to specify the network path directly, check if the network path is specified correctly as "\\the print server name (the computer name of the print server)\the printer name." 㻤㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JK The Printer Takes a Long Time to Start the Print Job Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The printer is cooling down to maintain print quality. (Especially after narrow paper is printed) Solution Wait a moment. The printer automatically cools down the inside. After cooling is completed, the printer resumes printing. <Cause 2> This problem may occur in some applications depending on the processing type of the print data. (Windows XP/Server 2003) If you are using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, performing the following procedure may be able to solve the problem. UFR II Printer Driver Solution 1. Display the [Finishing] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Change the [EMF Spooling] setting. PCL Printer Driver See Help of the PCL printer driver. 㻤㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JL You Cannot Turn the Printer ON Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The power plug is unplugged from the AC power outlet. Solution Plug the power plug in the AC power outlet. <Cause 2> The printer is plugged to an extension cord or multiple power strip. Solution Plug the power plug directly in the AC power outlet. <Cause 3> The breakers have tripped. Solution Reset the breakers on the switch board. <Cause 4> There is a break in the power cord. Solution If the printer can be turned ON after replacing the power cord with one that is of the same type, and then purchase a new power cord and replace the broken one. 㻤㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JR All the Indicators on the Network Interface Are Off Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The LAN cable is not connected properly or broken. Solution 1 Remove the LAN cable once, and then connect it again. Solution 2 Replace the LAN cable with another one, and then connect it. <Cause 2> The cable is connected to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub. Solution 1 Connect the LAN cable to the port on the hub with an " X " mark. Solution 2 If the hub has an UP-LINK (cascade) switch, switch to " X." <Cause 3> A cross LAN cable is being used. Solution 1 Replace the cable with a straight LAN cable. Solution 2 Connect the cross LAN cable to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub. If the hub has an UP-LINK (cascade) switch, switch to the " = " side. <Cause 4> Cannot communicate with the hub. Solution 1 Make sure that the power of the hub is on. Solution 2 Specify the communication settings for the print server according to the transmission speed of the connected hub. "Changing the Network Transmission Speed or Transfer Mode" <Cause 5> The hardware of the printer is in an abnormal condition. Solution Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to request service. 㻤㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JS You Cannot Install the Printer Driver NOTE For Macintosh users This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example. For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." If a problem occurs during the installation Select a problem during the installation from any of the following. Connection with a USB cable "The Printer Is Not Recognized Automatically" Connection with a LAN cable "The Printer Cannot Be Searched for" Connection via the print server (Client) "The Print Server for Connection Cannot Be Found" "The Shared Printer Cannot Be Accessed" If the printer driver is not installed properly Perform the following procedure. Solution 1 Install the printer driver again. For details on the procedure for uninstalling or installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." Solution 2 (Only when connecting with USB) Uninstall the USB class driver, and then install the printer driver again. For details on the procedure for uninstalling the USB class driver and installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." 㻤㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JU The Printer Is Not Recognized Automatically Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The printer is not turned ON. Solution Turn the printer ON. <Cause 2> The USB cable is not connected properly. Solution Make sure that the printer and computer are properly connected with the USB cable. "Connecting to a Computer" <Cause 3> The USB cable was already connected and the printer was turned ON before the printer driver was installed. Perform the following procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn the printer OFF. Disconnect the USB cable. Connect the USB cable again. While the following screen appears, turn the printer ON. Solution <Cause 4> An inappropriate USB cable is being used. Use a USB cable that is appropriate for the USB interface environment of the printer and has the following symbol. Solution The following is the USB interface environment of this printer. Hi-Speed USB USB <Cause 5> The USB class driver is installed. Solution Uninstall the USB class driver. For details, see the following item in "Printer Driver Installation Guide." "Appendix" - "If You Cannot Install a USB Class Driver" For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." 㻤㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JW The Printer Cannot Be Searched for If the printer cannot be searched for when you are in the process of installing the printer driver, perform the following procedure. 1 Make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly, and the printer is turned ON. "Connecting to a Computer" 2 Click [Search Again] to search again for the printer on the network. Make a search again for the printer on the network. Install the printer driver by following the procedure for automatically searching for a printer on a network described in the “Printer Driver Installation Guide.” For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." If the printer cannot be searched for (no devices are displayed) even by performing the above procedure <Solution> 1. Set [Interface Selection] in [Network] to [On]. "[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)" 2. Set the IP address. "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" "Setting IP v. 6" 3. Recover your printer from Sleep mode. "Sleep Mode" 㻤㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JX You Cannot Uninstall the Printer Driver Perform the following procedure. Solution 1 Use Uninstaller supplied with User Software CD-ROM to uninstall the printer driver. For details on the procedure for uninstalling the printer driver, see the "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." Solution 2 (Only when connecting with USB) Uninstall the USB class driver. For details on the procedure for uninstalling the USB class driver, see the "Printer Driver Installation Guide." For details on the procedure for viewing "Printer Driver Installation Guide", see "Installation." 㻤㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0JY The Printer Driver Settings Cannot Be Changed If [Spooling at Host] (whether the print data are processed in the computer) is set to [Disabled], you cannot change the driver settings because some options are unavailable. To change the settings, set [Spooling at Host] to [Auto] using the following procedure. 1 Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 3 Change the setting for [Spooling at Host]. (1) Display the [Device Settings] tab. (2) Select [Auto] for [Spooling at Host]. 㻤㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you cannot change the setting You need administrative rights to change the setting. Contact your system administrator. 4 Click [OK]. 㻤㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K0 "Profiles" Cannot Be Selected or Edited When the [Allow Profile Selection] and [Allow Setting Edition] check boxes are cleared, selecting and editing a "Profile" are restricted. To select or edit a "Profile", select the check box using the following procedure. 1 Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 3 Change the settings for [Define Document Property]. (1) Display the [Profile] tab. (2) Select the [Allow Profile Selection] and [Allow Setting Edition] check boxes. 㻤㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If you cannot change the setting You need administrative rights to change the setting. Contact your system administrator. 4 Click [OK]. 㻤㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K1 The Status of the Paper Feeder Cannot Be Obtained Automatically If you cannot specify the settings for Drawer 2 in [Paper Source] in the printer driver, specify the status of the paper feeder using the following procedure. NOTE For Macintosh users This section describes the procedure for Windows as an example. For details on the procedure for Macintosh, see "Driver Guide." For details on the procedure for displaying "Driver Guide", see "Viewing the Driver Guide." 1 Open the printer folder. "Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows" 2 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 3 Obtain the status of the paper feeder. (1) Display the [Device Settings] tab. (2) Click [Get Device Status]. (3) Click [Yes] to obtain the status of the paper feeder. 㻤㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If the status of the paper feeder is not obtained Remove the paper feeder once, and then install it again. If the status of the paper feeder cannot be obtained even by installing it again, see the following and make sure that the printer and computer can communicate with each other. "Printing Cannot Be Performed (USB Connection)" "Printing Cannot Be Performed (LAN Connection)" "Printing Cannot Be Performed (via the Print Server)" 4 Click [OK]. 㻤㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K2 Paper Jams Before removing jammed paper, see "Attention (Paper Jams)." When a paper jam occurs, the printer beeps, displaying the message <Paper is jammed.> in the display. This section describes the procedure for when [Animated Instruction] is set to [On] (default setting). If [Animated Instruction] is set to [Off], the following screen is not displayed. Messages appear one at a time. Confirm all of them. As the messages disappear when the cover is open, take a note of them if required. Remove the jammed paper according to the displayed message. Paper Jam Area Message (1) Multi-purpose tray <MP Tray area> (2) Output area <Output area> (3) Inside the right cover <Right cover area> (4) Duplex print transport area <2-Sided unit area> (5) Drawer 1 <Drawer 1 area> (6) Drawer 2 <Drawer 2 area> (7) Right cover area of Drawer 2 <Right cover area> Clearance Procedure "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)" "Clearing Paper Jams (Output Area, Right Cover Area, Duplex Unit Area, or Drawer 1/2)" "Clearing Paper Jams (Drawer 2 Cover)" 㻤㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K3 Attention (Paper Jams) Before removing the jammed paper, see "Important Safety Instructions." IMPORTANT Leave the printer ON when removing the jammed paper. If the power is turned OFF, the data being printed will be deleted. Do not remove the jammed paper forcefully. Removing jammed paper with excess force may cause the paper to tear or damage the inside of the printer. Remove the paper by pulling it gently. If the paper is torn Remove all remaining pieces of paper. Do not touch the secondary transfer roller (A). This may result in damage to the printer. Do not touch the output tray and its surroundings. The area surrounding the output tray is hot during and immediately after printing. Do not touch the area surrounding the output tray when removing paper or clearing a paper jam. 㻤㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K4 Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray) Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper. 1 Press [ ]. 2 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but perform a procedure for another area which is displayed in a message. 3 Close the multi-purpose tray. Next, proceed to the clearing procedure for another area which is displayed in the message. (1) "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)" (2) "Clearing Paper Jams (Output Area, Right Cover Area, Duplex Unit Area, or Drawer 1/2)" (3) "Checking Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer" (4) "Clearing Paper Jams (Drawer 2 Cover)" (5) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Fixing Unit)" 㻤㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K5 Checking Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper. 1 Press [ ]. 2 Open the right cover. 3 Pull out the paper drawer in which a paper jam occurs. If the paper feeder is installed, pull out the paper drawer of the paper feeder also. 4 Remove the paper by pulling it gently. If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 5 and perform the clearing procedure for another area which is displayed in the message. 㻤㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Set the paper drawer in the printer. If the paper feeder is installed, insert the paper drawer of the paper feeder also. 6 Close the right cover. Next, proceed to the clearing procedure for another area which is displayed in the message. (1) "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)" (2) "Clearing Paper Jams (Output Area, Right Cover Area, Duplex Unit Area, or Drawer 1/2)" (3) "Checking Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer" (4) "Clearing Paper Jams (Drawer 2 Cover)" (5) "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Fixing Unit)" If the jammed paper cannot be found Paper may be jammed inside the fixing unit. See "Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Fixing Unit)", and then remove the jammed paper. 㻤㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K6 Clearing Paper Jams (Output Area, Right Cover Area, Duplex Unit Area, or Drawer 1/2) Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper. 1 Press [ ]. 2 Open the right cover. 3 If the paper is jammed in the area shown in the figure, remove the paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. 4 If the paper is jammed in the area shown in the figure, remove the paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. 㻤㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. 6 Close the transfer guide. 㻤㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7 If the paper is jammed in the area shown in the figure when the optional paper feeder is used, remove the paper. (1) Pull out the edge of the paper. (2) Remove the paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. 8 While holding the tab (A), open the duplex cover. 9 Remove any jammed paper. (1) Pull out the edge of the paper. (2) Remove the paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. 㻥㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 10 Close the duplex cover. 11 While raising the lever of the green projection (A), open the cover of the paper source. 㻥㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 12 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. 13 If the paper cannot be removed easily when it is jammed in the area shown in the figure, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 14. ĺ If the following message appears, clear the paper jam in the indicated area. <Drawer 2 cover area> "Clearing Paper Jams (Drawer 2 Cover)" 14 Close the cover of the paper source. Close the cover firmly until it clicks. 15 㻥㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Close the right cover. ĺ When paper is jammed in the paper drawer, the jammed paper is output automatically. The message disappears, and the printer is ready to print. If a message does not disappear Paper or pieces of paper may remain in the area surrounding the paper drawer. See the following, pull out the paper drawer, and then remove the paper or pieces of paper. "Checking Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer" 㻥㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K7 Clearing Paper Jams (Drawer 2 Cover) Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper. 1 Press [ ]. 2 Open the right cover. 3 While holding the tab (A), open the right cover of Drawer 2. 㻥㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. If you cannot remove the paper easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 5 and perform the clearing procedure for another area which is displayed in the message. 5 If the paper cannot be removed easily when it is jammed in the area shown in the figure, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 6. 6 Close the right cover. ĺ When paper is jammed in the paper drawer, the jammed paper is output automatically. The message disappears, and the printer is ready to print. If a message does not disappear Paper or pieces of paper may remain in the area surrounding the paper drawer. See the following, pull out the paper drawer, and then remove the paper or pieces of paper. "Checking Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer" 㻥㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K8 Clearing Paper Jams (Inside the Fixing Unit) Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps below to remove jammed paper. 1 Press [ ]. 2 Open the right cover. 3 Remove the fixing unit from the printer. (1) Hold the levers inside the handles on both sides. (2) Remove the fixing unit. 㻥㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 4 While holding the tab (A), open the cover of the fixing unit. 5 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it gently in the direction of the arrow. 6 Close the cover of the fixing unit. 㻥㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 7 Install the fixing unit in the printer. (1) Align the connecters (A) on the right with each other. (2) Install the fixing unit horizontally. (3) Push the fixing unit to install it firmly. The fixing unit is locked by the levers (B) on both sides. 8 Close the right cover. 㻥㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0K9 The Message Indicator Is On When the (Message) indicator is on, implement the following solutions. The Service Call <Ennn-nnnn> Appears in the Display ("n" Represents an Alphanumeric Character) A Message Appears in the Display The Display Is Turned Off The Service Call <Ennn-nnnn> Appears in the Display ("n" Represents an Alphanumeric Character) Implement the following solutions according to the displayed message. Message ("n" represents an alphanumeric character.) ("n" represents an alphanumeric character.) Cause Solution A problem occurred in the fixing unit. Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed", and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer. A problem occurred inside the printer. Following the procedure in "If a Service Error Is Displayed", cycle the power of the printer. If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed 1 Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer. 㻥㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 <How to disconnect the cable or cord> * USB cable * (2) Turn the computer off. (3) Disconnect the cable from the printer. LAN cable * (4) Disconnect the cable from the printer. Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet. (6) Disconnect the cord from the printer. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. IMPORTANT Do not turn ON the printer again. A fixing unit error is displayed. Do not turn ON the printer after turning it OFF. 2 Contact your local authorized Canon dealer. If you are not sure what the problem is, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. If a Service Error Is Displayed 1 Turn the printer OFF, wait for 10 seconds or longer, and then turn it ON again. If the message does not reappear, the printer is ready. 㻥㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 If the message reappears, you need to request service. Follow the procedure below, and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer to request service. 2 Note down the error code displayed in the display. 3 Turn the printer OFF, and then disconnect the cables or cords from the printer. <How to disconnect the cable or cord> * USB cable * (2) Turn the computer off. (3) Disconnect the cable from the printer. LAN cable * (4) Disconnect the cable from the printer. Power cord (5) Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet. (6) Disconnect the cord from the printer. Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment. 4 㻥㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to request service. When contacting your Canon dealer, please report also the error code which you noted down in Step 2. If you are not sure what the problem is, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. A Message Appears in the Display See the following and solve the problem according to the message. "A Message Appears in the Control Panel" The Display Is Turned Off The printer has entered Sleep Mode while it is offline. Release Sleep Mode. "Sleep Mode" Place the printer online. "Online and Offline" 㻥㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KA A Message Appears in the Control Panel If an error is occurring for some reason during printing, a message appears in the display of the control panel. Perform solutions according to the displayed message. Service call message It is an error state in which the printer cannot print. Warning message It is a warning state in which the printer can print, but some solution is required. Depending on the message type, the message does not appear if [Show Warnings] is set to [Off]. "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" Error message It is an error state in which the printer cannot print. Mark Description For a message with this mark, perform the following procedure according to the situation. When you want to skip an error (error skip) and continue to print 1. Press [ ]( : Online) to skip the error. (Printing is continued.) 2. If print data is missing or is not printed properly, print again. If [Auto Continue] is set to [On], you can skip the error automatically. "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" <Auto Error Skip> If you want to cancel a job 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 2. Solve the problem according to the displayed message (this item). 3. Press [ ]( : Online) and print again. NOTE If multiple warning states are occurring at the same time Warning messages are displayed alternately. If an error state and warning state are occurring at the same time A warning message is not displayed. If a toner-related message appears On how to act if a toner-related message such as <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.> or <1G Change toner cartridge recommended.> appears, see "Toner Cartridge Replacement." 㻥㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Service Call Message "Ennn-nnnn ("n" represents a number.) " "E001-nnnn ("n" represents a number.) " "E003-nnnn ("n" represents a number.) " "E004-nnnn ("n" represents a number.)" Warning Message "18 Drawer 2 overload." "1F Output tray is full." "80 Do not turn the main power OFF. " "BT Clock error. " "E1 Prep. waste toner ctn." "EM E-Mail access error." "EM POP3 server error." "FD Check firmware." "IE An unknown error has occurred." "IE Cannot analyze the certificate." "IE Change the password." "IE Check auth. settings" "IE No reply from the destination." "IE Set necessary authentication info." "IE Set the correct authentication info." "IE The certificate has expired." "IE The certificate is incorrect." "NW Competing IP add. found on the network." Error Message "55 SD Card error. <Auto Error Skip>" "56 SD Card error." "An error occurred while receiving. <Auto Error Skip> " "Cannot decode data. <Auto Error Skip> " "Cannot decode PDF data." "Cannot feed paper. " "Cannot perform 2-Sided Printing. <Auto Error Skip>" "Cannot print with the specified resolution. <Auto Error Skip> " "Cannot print. Reg. Table is full. <Auto Error Skip> " "Cannot read PDF data." "Cannot receive PDF data. Set the receivable size. <Auto Error Skip>" "Cannot start printing because job is restricted. <Auto Error Skip>" "Cannot store. <Auto Error Skip>" "Cannot verify. <Auto Error Skip> " "Change to Black, or change paper type settings. <Auto Error Skip>" "Change waste t. ctn." "Check ITB unit. Remove packing material (sheet)." "Check paper size. " "Check paper type." "Check toner cart. Remove packing materials." "Close XXXX cover. (XXXX shows the cover name)" "Drawer 2 is overloaded. Reduce paper." "IEEE802.1X error. Set the necessary auth. information." "Image browse data error." "Image data error. " "Insert fixing unit." "Key management file is corrupt or deleted." "Load paper. " "Not enough display list memory. <Auto Error Skip>" "Not enough download memory. <Auto Error Skip> " 㻥㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "Not enough memory for PDF processing. <Auto Error Skip>" "Not enough memory for XPS processing. <Auto Error Skip>" "Not enough spool memory. <Auto Error Skip>" "Not enough system memory. <Auto Error Skip> " "Not enough work memory. <Auto Error Skip> " "Output tray is full. Remove paper. " "Paper is jammed. " "PDF error." "PDF font error." "PDF print range error." "Print data version error." "Set below paper." "Set cleaning paper and press the Online key. <Auto Error Skip> " "Syntax error. " "Turn OFF main power. Check options." "XPS document data error. <Auto Error Skip> " "XPS font data error. <Auto Error Skip>" "XPS image data error. <Auto Error Skip>" "XPS page data error. <Auto Error Skip>" "XPS print range error. <Auto Error Skip>" "XPS rendering error." "XPS unsupported image error. <Auto Error Skip>" "A4 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) " "A5 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) " "A7 nn ERROR ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) " "D7 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) " "D8 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) " "D9 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) " Ennn-nnnn ("n" represents a number.) <Cause> A problem is occurring inside the printer. Solution Solve the problem following the instructions in "If a Service Error Is Displayed." E001-nnnn ("n" represents a number.) <Cause> A problem is occurring with the fixing unit of the printer. Solution Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed" in "The Message Indicator Is On", and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer. E003-nnnn ("n" represents a number.) <Cause> A problem is occurring with the fixing unit of the printer. Solution Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed" in "The Message Indicator Is On", and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer. E004-nnnn ("n" represents a number.) <Cause> A problem is occurring with the fixing unit of the printer. Solution Follow the procedure in "If a Fixing Unit Error Is Displayed" in "The Message Indicator Is On", and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 18 Drawer 2 overload. <Cause> The amount of the paper loaded in Drawer 2 exceeds the load limitation. Solution Reduce the amount of the paper in Drawer 2. "Paper Loading and Output" 1F Output tray is full. <Cause> The output tray is filled to the limit. Solution Remove the paper in the output tray. 80 Do not turn the main power OFF. <Cause> A MEAP application is running. Solution When the running of the MEAP application stops, the message disappears automatically. Wait until the message disappears. BT Clock error. <Cause> The clock in this printer has a problem. Solution Though printing is possible as is, logs such as the job histories cannot be recorded correctly. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻥㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 E1 Prep. waste toner ctn. <Cause> The waste toner container needs to be replaced soon. Solution Although you can continue to print for a while, have ready a new waste toner container. "Consumables" EM E-Mail access error. <Cause> The printer could not connect to the POP3 server because an error had occurred in its hard disk. Solution Clear the hard disk error on the POP3 server. EM POP3 server error. <Cause> The printer could not connect to the POP3/SMTP server when printing e-mails, or the settings for the POP3/SMTP server are not correct. Solution Check the error in detail using the Remote UI or Network Status Print. "Receiving E-mail Data on the Mail Server and Printing (E-mail Print)" FD Check firmware. <Cause> There is an old version of the file inside the firmware. Solution Update the firmware. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" IE An unknown error has occurred. <Cause> An unknown IEEE802.1X authentication error has occurred. Solution Restart the printer. If the error message still appears after restarting this printer, contact your local authorized dealer. IE Cannot analyze the certificate. <Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, analysis of the certificate received from the authentication server failed. Solution Check the authentication server's certificate. IE Change the password. <Cause> The password used for IEEE802.1X authentication has expired. Solution Change the password registered in the authentication server, and reset the IEEE802.1X authentication password. "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" IE Check auth. settings 㻥㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 The printer and the authentication server use different IEEE802.1X authentication systems. Solution Change IEEE802.1X authentication systems. "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" IE No reply from the destination. <Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, and error occurred while communicating with the authentication server. Solution Check to see if the cable is disconnected. IE Set necessary authentication info. <Cause> There is information missing from the IEEE802.1X authentication settings. Solution Check the IEEE802.1X settings, and reconfigure them. "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" IE Set the correct authentication info. <Cause> An error was returned from the authentication server because the certificate used for IEEE802.1X authentication is not correct. Solution 1 The certificate used for TLS authentication is not correct. Check the certificate, and reconfigure it. "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" Solution 2 If the printer's certificate is correct, check the authentication server's CA certificate. IE The certificate has expired. <Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, the certificate received from the authentication server was an expired certificate. Solution 1 Check the authentication server's certificate. Solution 2 Check the printer's and the authentication server's time settings. "Turning the Power On and Specifying a Language" IE The certificate is incorrect. <Cause> During IEEE802.1X authentication, an error occurred as a result of the verification by the CA certificate of the certificate received from the authentication server . Solution 1 Check the authentication server's certificate. Solution 2 Install the CA certificate in the printer. "Security Settings" NW Competing IP add. found on the network. <Cause> The IPv4 address set for the printer overlaps with another host on the network. Solution Change the printer's IPv4 address and restart. 㻥㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 "Setting the IP Address (IP v. 4)" An error occurred while receiving. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The printer received any unanalyzable data while it is receiving a job, or it timed out. Solution 1 Press [ Solution 2 A problem may be occurring in the network you are using. Check the status of the network that you are using. ]( : Online) to cancel printing, and then print again. Cannot decode data. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The printer could not analyze encrypted secured print data. Solution Perform a soft reset using the Reset menu, and then print again. Cannot decode PDF data. <Cause 1> An incorrect password was entered to print the PDF data. Solution Enter the correct password. <Cause 2> The PDF data security settings do not permit printing. Solution Change the settings to permit printing. <Cause 3> When you want to print a PDF file linked to a policy server, you cannot access the policy server. Solution Check the policy server's power supply and the status of this product, the policy server, and the network. Cannot feed paper. <Cause> Paper of the size or type that cannot be fed from the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer is specified. Solution 1 If a paper source is specified, press [ [Auto]. "[Select Feeder] Menu" Solution 2 Press [ Solution 3 Load paper appropriate for the paper source. "Usable Paper" Solution 4 Specify the following items. [Standard Paper Size] [Default Paper Type] "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" Solution 5 Press [ ]( ]( ]( : Feeder Selection), and then set [Paper Source] to : Feeder Selection) to select another paper source. : Online), and then print from the currently selected paper source. However, this may result in deterioration in print quality. 㻥㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Cannot perform 2-Sided Printing. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The printer received 2-sided printing data of paper sizes (including the orientation) or paper types unavailable for automatic 2-sided printing. Solution 1 Press [ ]( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data on each side is printed on two pages. Perform the following procedure. Solution 2 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 2. Change the setting to a paper size or type available for automatic 2-sided printing, and then print again. Cannot print with the specified resolution. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The printer cannot process the data because it is too complicated. Solution 1 Press [ ]( : Online) to continue printing. In this case, the printer prints with the image quality level being lowered. Perform the following procedure. Solution 2 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 2. Set [Gradation Level] to [High 1], and then print again. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Cannot print. Reg. Table is full. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The total number of binders inside a single job exceeds 32, or the number of documents inside a single binder exceeds 80. Solution 1 Press [ Solution 2 Confirm the data to be printed, and then print again. ]( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data may not be printed properly. Cannot read PDF data. <Cause> An error has occurred when the PDF data was read. Perform the following procedure. Solution 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 2. Print the PDF data in a format which this printer supports again. Cannot receive PDF data. Set the receivable size. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> There is not sufficient free space to print the PDF file using the direct print function. Press [ ]( : Online) to cancel the job. Afterward, perform the following processes (decreasing the 㻥㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Solution 1 Solution 2 size of the PDF file), and then print again. Optimizing the PDF file Dividing the PDF file into multiple files Send the file again using one of the following methods. Insert the SD card into the slot and send the file again. Send the file directly from the USB memory device. "Installing SD Card" "Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) " Cannot start printing because job is restricted. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> Print job restrictions are set. Press [ Solution ]( : Online) to cancel the job. If print job restrictions are set, only the data stored in a box can be printed. Store the data you want to print in a box. "Setting Restrictions for Print Jobs" Cannot store. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> [SD Card] in the Control Menu options in the Setup menu is set to [Off]. Perform the following procedure. 1. Cancel printing by pressing [ Solution ]( : Online). 2. Set [SD Card] to [On] and print again. "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" <Cause 2> The number of the jobs exceeded the amount of jobs the printer can store. Solution 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ Solution 2 Delete unnecessary stored jobs. ]( : Online), ignoring the print data. <Cause 3> There is not sufficient free space on the SD card. Solution 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ Solution 2 Delete unnecessary stored jobs. ]( : Online), ignoring the print data. <Cause 4> The specified box number is not correct. Solution Specify the correct box number. Cannot verify. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause 1> The department ID and password entered for your job did not match the department ID and password registered on the machine. Solution Print your job again by entering the correct department ID and password. <Cause 2> Printing jobs with unknown IDs are disallowed. 㻥㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Solution Allow print jobs with unknown IDs from the Remote UI. "Specifying an ID for Each Department " Change to Black, or change paper type settings. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> You have attempted to print color transparencies. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 2. Either prints them in black and white or uses paper other than transparencies. Solution "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" Change waste t. ctn. <Cause> The waste toner container is full. Solution Replace the waste toner container with a new one. "Consumables" Check ITB unit. Remove packing material (sheet). <Cause> There is packing material (sheet) remaining in the output area. Solution Turn OFF the printer, remove the packing material (sheet) from inside the right cover, and then turn the printer back ON. Check paper size. <Cause 1> The size of the paper loaded in a paper source is different from the following settings. Setting for [Output Size] in the [Page Setup] tab in the printer driver [MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size] or [Drawer 2 Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu Solution Specify the setting properly. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" <Cause 2> When the following settings in the [Select Feeder] menu are set to [Mixed Sizes], custom size paper whose long edges are 215.9 mm or less is loaded in portrait orientation and printed (only when the UFR II printer driver is used). [MP Tray Paper Size] [Drawer 1 Size] [Drawer 2 Size] Solution Load the paper in landscape orientation, and then print again. <Cause 3> When the UFR II printer driver was not used, custom size paper was loaded in landscape orientation to be printed. Solution Load the paper in portrait orientation, and then print again. 㻥㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 <Cause 4> [Check Paper Size] in the [Setup] menu ([User Maintenance] options) is set to [On]. Solution Set [Check Paper Size] to [Off], and then print again. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Check paper type. <Cause 1> The printer fed paper other than transparencies for data in which transparency was specified. Solution Load transparencies and print again. <Cause 2> The printer fed transparencies for data in which a paper type other than transparency was specified. Solution Load paper appropriate for the print data and print again. Check toner cart. Remove packing materials. <Cause> The toner cartridge was installed with the sealing tapes still attached. Solution Remove the sealing tapes and set the toner cartridge in the correct position. "Toner Cartridge Replacement" Close XXXX cover. (XXXX shows the cover name) <Cause> A cover is open. Solution Close the cover firmly. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). Drawer 2 is overloaded. Reduce paper. <Cause> The amount of the paper loaded in Drawer 2 exceeds the load limitation. Solution Reduce the amount of the paper in Drawer 2. "Paper Loading and Output" IEEE802.1X error. Set the necessary auth. information. <Cause> There is information missing from the IEEE802.1X authentication settings. Solution Check the IEEE802.1X settings, and reconfigure them. "Setting IEEE802.1X Authentication" Image browse data error. <Cause> Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data. Solution This printer cannot print the data. Press [ ]( Image data error. 㻥㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 : Online) to cancel the job. <Cause> Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data or JPEG data. Solution This printer cannot print the data. Press [ ]( : Online) to cancel the job. Insert fixing unit. <Cause> The fixing unit is not installed or is not installed properly. Solution 1 Open the right cover and check if the fixing unit is installed. Solution 2 Install the fixing unit again. If the message appears even after installing the fixing unit again, contact your local authorized Canon dealer for servicing. Key management file is corrupt or deleted. <Cause> The file related to key management is broken. Perform the following procedure. 1. 6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>5HPRWH8,6HWWLQJV@ĺ>66/@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHOWKHQPDNHVXUHWKDW [SSL] is set to [Off]. Solution 2. Restart the printer, and then regenerate the key and certificate and specify the settings for SSL from the Remote UI. "Setting Keys and Certificates" 3. Restart the printer. Load paper. <Cause> Paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the paper source (in all the paper sources when [Paper Source] is set to [Auto] and in the specified paper source when the setting is fixed). Solution 1 Refill or load paper. Solution 2 Press [ ]( : Feeder Selection), and then select other paper source for the same paper size or larger paper size. "Paper Loading and Output" Not enough display list memory. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The memory required for processing has run out and overflowed. Solution 1 Press [ ] (: Online ) to continue printing. However, the job with which an error has occurred is not printed. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" Solution 2 2. After the soft reset, either performs a hard reset or turns the printer back ON, increase memory capacity and prints again. (All data in the memory will be erased.) "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" 㻥㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Not enough download memory. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The memory for registering overlay forms and custom characters ran out and overflowed. Solution 1 Press [ ]( : Online) to continue printing. However, the overflowed data cannot be registered. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" Solution 2 2. After the soft reset, either perform a hard reset or turn the printer back ON, increase memory capacity and print again. (All data in the memory will be erased.) "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" Not enough memory for PDF processing. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> There is not enough memory to process a PDF file. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" Solution 2. Decrease the size of the PDF file or divide it into multiple files, and then print again. The PDF data may be printed properly by opening it from an application and using the printer driver. Not enough memory for XPS processing. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> There is not enough memory for XPS processing. Solution 1 Solution 2 Press [ ]( : Online), and continue printing. However, the data that generated the error will not be printed correctly. If images such as Progressive JPEG are handled inside the XPS, convert them to TIFF or Baseline JPEG and then print. Not enough spool memory. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> Because spool memory ran out, the printer cannot print. Solution 1 Press [ ]( : Online) to continue printing. However, the page with which an error is occurring is not printed. Perform the following procedure. Solution 2 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 2. Specify the paper size smaller, and then print again. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 㻥㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Solution 3 2. Set [Gradation Level] to [High 1], and then print again. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Solution 4 If [2-Sided Printing] is set to [On], specify [Off], and then print again. "[Setup] Menu ([Paper Source] Options)" Solution 5 Change the setting for [Halftones], and then print again. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Not enough system memory. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The work memory required for the printer process ran out while the system was processing the data (mainly the graphics data and text data). Solution 1 Press [ ]( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data with which an error is occurring is not printed properly. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" Solution 2 2. After the soft reset, either perform a hard reset or turn the printer back ON, increase memory capacity and print again. (All data in the memory will be erased.) "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" Not enough work memory. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The work memory for each print mode cannot be secured. Press [ ]( : Online) to continue printing. However, the data with which an error is occurring is not printed properly. Solution 1 IMPORTANT When continuing printing by pressing [ ]( : Online) Be aware that the data of overlay or macro that is already registered may be deleted. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" Solution 2 2. After the soft reset, either perform a hard reset or turn the printer back ON, increase memory capacity and print again. (All data in the memory will be erased.) "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" Output tray is full. Remove paper. <Cause> The output tray is filled to the limit. Solution Remove the paper in the output tray. 㻥㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Paper is jammed. <Cause> Paper is jammed inside the printer. Remove the jammed paper and set the paper drawer and covers to the original position. If the printer is not online, press [ ]( : Online). "Clearing Paper Jams (Multi-purpose Tray)" "Checking Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer" "Clearing Paper Jams (Output Area, Right Cover Area, Duplex Unit Area, or Drawer 1/2)" "Clearing Paper Jams (Drawer 2 Cover)" Solution IMPORTANT If paper jams occur at multiple areas at the same time, the areas appear in the display by rotation. If you removed the jammed paper without opening any cover, be sure to open and close the front cover once, and ]( : Online). then press [ PDF error. <Cause> PDF data which this printer cannot process was sent. Perform the following procedure. 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" Solution 2. Print the PDF data in a format which this printer supports again. PDF font error. <Cause> PDF font which this printer cannot process was sent. Perform the following procedure. Solution 1. Perform a soft reset. "Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset)" 2. Print the PDF data in a format which this printer supports again. PDF print range error. <Cause> The specified print range is incorrect. Solution Specify the print range correctly, and then print again. Print data version error. <Cause> You tried to print from a printer driver that is not for LBP7780Cx. Solution Print the data again from the printer driver for LBP7780Cx. 55 SD Card error. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> An SD error has occurred. 㻥㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Solution 1 ]( If [ : Online) is pressed, settings that do not use the SD card are activated. However, you cannot print with functions that use the SD card. Solution 2 Turn OFF the printer, and make sure that the SD card is inserted correctly. Solution 3 Contact your local dealer for repairs. 56 SD Card error. <Cause> An SD error has occurred. Solution 1 Turn the printer OFF, wait for 10 seconds or longer, and then turn it ON again. Solution 2 Run SD card quick format or standard format. Solution 3 Contact your local dealer for repairs. Set below paper. <Cause 1> The paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the paper drawer or multipurpose tray, or the paper source for the different paper size is selected. Solution 1 Load the paper of the size selected in the application (or the one specified by scaling factors). "Paper Loading and Output" Press [ Solution 2 ]( : Online), and then print to the currently loaded paper forcibly. If you are using the multi- purpose tray, the setting for [MP Tray Paper Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu automatically changes to the paper size specified in the application. <Cause 2> The paper size specified in the application software is different from the following setting. [MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size] or [Drawer 2 Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu Solution Specify the setting properly. "Registering the Paper Size and Type" <Cause 3> Improper paper source is selected. Specify the setting for [Paper Source] in the [Select Feeder] menu properly. "[Select Feeder] Menu" IMPORTANT Solution When the message <Set below paper.> appears If the front cover is opened, the message may disappear. However, be sure to follow the directions in the displayed message to change the paper. Set cleaning paper and press the Online key. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The printer is waiting to print cleaning paper. Solution Load Letter size or A4 paper in the multi-purpose tray, and then press [ Syntax error. 㻥㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 ]( : Online). <Cause> Invalid data is sent when printing using the UFR II printer driver. Solution 1 Solution 2 Press [ ]( : Online) to continue printing from the next data. However, the page with which an error is occurring and its subsequent pages are not printed. Confirm the data to be printed, and then print again. Turn OFF main power. Check options. <Cause 1> The optional paper feeder is not installed properly. Solution Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder properly, and then turn it ON again. "Printer Installation" <Cause 2> Any optional paper feeder is installed or removed when the printer is ON. Solution Turn the power OFF, install or remove the paper feeder, and then turn the printer ON again. "Printer Installation" <Cause 3> The connector of the optional paper feeder is disconnected. Solution Turn the printer OFF, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer for servicing. <Cause 4> A paper feeder that is not for this printer is installed. Solution Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder for this printer, and then turn it ON again. "Printer Installation" XPS document data error. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause 1> The XPS data or the data extracted from the XPS data are invalid. Solution Check to make sure that the data that was input is normal, restart it and print again. <Cause 2> A high volume file was sent directly. Press [ Solution 1 Solution 2 ]( : Online) to cancel the job. Afterward, perform the following processes and then print again. Optimizing the XPS file Dividing the XPS file into multiple files Send the file again using one of the following methods. Insert the SD card into the slot and send the file again. "Installing SD Card" Send the file directly from the USB memory device. "Printing Files Directly from USB Memory Devices (USB Direct Print) " XPS font data error. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> Incorrect font data was received. Solution Check the output result for missing text, and correct the data. 㻥㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 XPS image data error. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> Incorrect image data was received. Solution Check the output result for missing images, and correct the data. XPS page data error. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> Pages cannot be generated because the description is invalid. Solution Check the output result for missing pages, and correct the data. XPS print range error. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> The specified print page range is invalid. Solution Check the page range, and print again. XPS rendering error. <Cause> An error has occurred in the XPS data rendering system. Solution Contact your local dealer. XPS unsupported image error. <Auto Error Skip> <Cause> Unsupported images such as HD Photo images are included in the XPS data. Solution Change the images in the XPS file to TIFF or JPEG format and print again. A4 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) <Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly. Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. A5 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) <Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly. Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. A7 nn ERROR ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) <Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly. Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻥㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 D7 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) <Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly. Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. D8 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) <Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly. Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. D9 nn Error ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters.) <Cause> A problem is occurring and the printer does not operate properly. Solution Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻥㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KC Poor Printout Results Paper curls or creases. Paper Curls Paper Creases Streaks (lines) appear. White Streaks (Lines) Appear Color Streaks (Lines) Appear Streaks (Lines) Appear in Gradated Portions Uneven Gloss, Streaks, or Flaws Appear on Dense Color Areas Unevenness or smudge marks appear. Printing Is Uneven Printed Pages Have White Specks The Toner Does Not Fix onto the Paper Well The Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks Smudge Marks of Spattering Toner Appear around the Text or Patterns The Back of the Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks The Overall Print Result Is Dark Residual Images Appear on Non-printed Areas White Dust Is Attached to the Printed Transparencies Printing is faint or faded. The Overall Print Result Is Faint Thin Lines Are Faded or Halftone Images Are Faint Colored Lines and Text Appear Faded Colored Text Appears Blurred Data Is Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Due to Color Mismatch Thin Lines or Fill Patterns Are Not Printed with the Specified Colors or Do Not Appear At All Shaded Patterns Are Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Photographs and so on Are Printed in Different Colors from Those Displayed on the Monitor Fill Patterns and Borders Are Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Even When the Same Color Is Specified for Them Square Areas That Cannot Be Seen on the Display Appear around Lines or Text and Are Printed in a Different Color from the Other Areas Superimposed Diagrams Are Not Printed in the Correct Color 㻥㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Printout is skewed, missing, or has unneeded space. The Printing Position Is Skewed A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed Data Is Reduced and Printed The Next Page Is Printed from Halfway across the Previous Page Printed Data Lies outside Paper Others Blank Paper Is Output (Nothing Is Printed on the Paper) The Overall Surface of the Paper Is Printed in a Particular Color The Last Page Cannot Be Printed Unreadable Characters Are Printed The Printout Is Different from What Is Displayed on Screen (Windows XP and Server 2003) The Flap of the Printed Envelope Sticks Multiple Sheets of Paper Are Fed at a Time Printed Bar Codes Cannot Be Scanned Paper falls out of the output tray NOTE Contacting your local authorized Canon dealer If a problem that is not indicated in the e-Manual occurs, if none of the suggested measures solve the problem, or if you cannot determine the problem, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. 㻥㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KE Paper Curls Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> Damp paper is used. Solution 1 Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package. "Precautions for Paper" Set [Curl Correction] in [Special Print Mode] to [On], and then print again. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Solution 2 If [Curl Correction] is set to [On], the toner may not fix onto paper well, and the printing may come out faint. When [Paper Type] is set to [Plain] in the printer driver, set [Paper Type] to [Plain L], and then print again. "Configuring the Printer Driver and Printing" Solution 3 If [Paper Type] is set to [Plain L], the toner may not fix onto paper well, and the printing may come out faint. <Cause 2> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" 㻥㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KF Paper Creases Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1>Paper is not loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Solution Load the paper properly. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" <Cause 2> Damp paper is used. Solution Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package. "Precautions for Paper" <Cause 3> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" <Cause 4> There is a foreign object inside the printer. Solution Remove the foreign object inside the printer. 㻥㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KH White Streaks (Lines) Appear Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause> The drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorated. Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. "Toner Cartridge Replacement" 㻥㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RU Color Streaks (Lines) Appear <Cause> The printer has some problem. Solution 1 Perform calibration. "Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration)" Solution 2 Clean the fixing roller. "Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer" Solution 3 Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" 㻥㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RW Streaks (Lines) Appear in Gradated Portions <Cause 1> When you are using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, gray compensation is applied to the gray portions of the "streaks" in the diagrams. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver Display the [Quality] tab Solution 1. Click [Details]. 2. Click [Advanced Settings] in the [Detailed Settings] dialog box. 3. Set [Gray Compensation] to [Off]. PCL Printer Driver See Help of the PCL printer driver. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" <Cause 2> When you are using the PS printer driver, [TR Normal] or [TR Photo] in [Output Profile] is applied to the gray portions of the "streaks" in the diagrams. Solution 1 Set [Output Profile] in the [PS] options to [PS Normal] or [PS Photo]. "[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)" Solution 2 Set [RGB Pure Black Mode] in the [PS] options to [Off]. Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details, see Help of the PS printer driver. "[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)" 㻥㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RX Uneven Gloss, Streaks, or Flaws Appear on Dense Color Areas <Cause> The drum in any of the toner cartridges has deteriorated or is damaged. Solution 1 Perform calibration. "Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration)" Solution 2 If the problem is not solved by performing Solution 1, replace the toner cartridge. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" "Consumables" 㻥㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KJ Printing Is Uneven Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> Paper is too moist or too dry. Solution Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package. "Precautions for Paper" <Cause 2> The toner cartridge has run out of toner, has deteriorated, or is damaged. Solution Check the status of the toner cartridges, and replace the toner cartridge that is almost empty with a new one. "Screen Layout of the Remote UI (Details on Each Setting Page)" "Toner Cartridge Replacement" <Cause 3> The drum in any of the toner cartridges has deteriorated. Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. "Toner Cartridge Replacement" 㻥㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KK Printed Pages Have White Specks Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" <Cause 2> Damp paper is used. Solution Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package. "Precautions for Paper" "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" <Cause 3> The drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorated. Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. "Toner Cartridge Replacement" 㻥㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KR The Toner Does Not Fix onto the Paper Well Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The setting for [Paper Type] is not specified properly. Solution Specify [Paper Type] properly. "Paper Loading and Output" <Cause 2> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" <Cause 3> Toner may not fix onto paper completely depending on the paper type. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver Solution 1. 2. 3. 4. Display the [Quality] tab. Click [Details]. Click [Advanced Settings] in the [Detailed Settings] dialog box. Set [Gray Compensation] to [On]. PCL/PS Printer Driver See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" <Cause 4>Toner on the parts dense in color does not fix onto the paper. Set [Special Image Mode] to [Level 1]. If the problem still persists, set it to [Level 2]. Solution "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" Normally, set [Special Image Mode] to [Off]. Do not set [Level 1] or [Level 2] unless the problems described above occur. If [Special Image Mode] is set to [Level 1] or [Level 2], the print density may be lower than if it was set to [Off]. 㻥㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 <Cause 5>A problem is occurring inside the printer. Solution If <Ennn-nnnn> appears in the display, follow the procedure in "The Message Indicator Is On" to solve the problem. 㻥㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KS The Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks Perform the following procedure. <Cause>The fixing roller is dirty. Solution Clean the fixing roller. "Cleaning the Fixing Roller of the Printer" 㻥㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KU Smudge Marks of Spattering Toner Appear around the Text or Patterns Perform the following procedure. <Cause> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" 㻥㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KW The Back of the Printed Paper Has Smudge Marks Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The size of the print data was larger than that of the loaded paper. Solution Check if the size of the print data matches that of the loaded paper. 㻥㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KX The Overall Print Result Is Dark Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The setting for [Density] is not appropriate. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. 1. Display the [Quality] tab. Solution 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Adjust [Density]. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" <Cause 2> The printer is exposed to direct sunlight or strong light. Solution Move the printer. "Moving the Printer" 㻥㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0KY Residual Images Appear on Non-printed Areas Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" <Cause 2> Paper with wider width was printed just after paper with narrower width (A5 size etc.) was printed continuously. Solution To lower the temperature of the fixing unit, wait for a while before printing again. <Cause 3> The drum in any of the toner cartridges has deteriorated. Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" 㻥㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0L0 White Dust Is Attached to the Printed Transparencies Perform the following procedure. <Cause> You print transparencies after printing paper other than transparency continuously. Solution Wipe and remove the chipped paper with a soft cloth. 㻥㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0L1 The Overall Print Result Is Faint Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The setting for the toner density is not appropriate. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. 1. Display the [Quality] tab. Solution 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Adjust [Toner Density]. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" <Cause 2> [Toner Save] is enabled. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver 1. Display the [Quality] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. Solution 3. Set [Toner Save] to [Off]. PCL/PS Printer Driver See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" 㻥㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S3 Thin Lines Are Faded or Halftone Images Are Faint Perform the following procedure. <Cause> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" 㻥㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S2 Colored Lines and Text Appear Faded Perform the following procedure. <Cause 1>Thin lines or text was printed. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver Solution 1. 2. 3. 4. Display the [Quality] tab. Click [Details]. Click [Advanced Settings] in the [Detailed Settings] dialog box. Select the [Prioritize Printing of Colored Lines and Text] check box. PCL/PS Printer Driver See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver. When using the PS printer driver, you can also specify the same setting using [Output Profile] in the printer's control panel. When doing so, set [Output Profile] to [PS TR Normal] or [PS TR Photo]. "[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)" <Cause 2> The toner cartridges have reached the end of their life. Solution Check the toner cartridges status and replace the toner cartridges of the colors have reached the end of their life. "Toner Cartridge Replacement" 㻥㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S4 Colored Text Appears Blurred Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause>A bold font is being used for the colored text. Solution 1 Print again with thinner fonts. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Display the [Quality] tab. Select the [Manual Color Settings] check box. Click [Color Settings]. Display the [Matching] tab. Set [Matching Method] to [Perceptual [Monitor Color Matched]]. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" 㻥㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S5 Data Is Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Due to Color Mismatch Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The toner cartridges are not installed properly. Solution Check the installation status of the toner cartridges. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" <Cause 2> Any of the four color toner cartridges is almost out of toner, or the drum in any of the toner cartridges has deteriorated. Solution 1 Check the installation status of the toner cartridges. "Replacing Toner Cartridges" Solution 2 Correct the color mismatch. "Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration)" Solution 3 Check the status of the toner cartridges. Replace the toner cartridge that is almost empty with a new one. "Remote UI" "Toner Cartridge Replacement" <Cause 3> Appropriate paper is not being used. Solution Replace the paper with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" <Cause 4> Data was sent before completing calibration or when the printer was turned ON. Make sure that calibration is completed before sending data to the printer. Solution You can specify whether or not to perform calibration when turning the printer ON. "Adjusting the Color or Color Mismatch (Calibration)" <About Color Mismatch> Laser printers are manufactured with technology of high precision. A color mismatch may be slightly conspicuous depending on the print image. Please note that this is due to the structure of laser printers and is not a printer malfunction. 㻥㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S6 Thin Lines or Fill Patterns Are Not Printed with the Specified Colors or Do Not Appear At All Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> Some of the colors cannot be reproduced because of the combination of colors or patterns. Solution 1 Adjust the colors in the application and print again. See the instruction manual supplied with the application. Solution 2 Change the patterns in the application and print again. See the instruction manual supplied with the application. <Cause 2> The colors may appear different depending on the halftone pattern. Solution 1 Readjust to a darker color and print again. See the instruction manual supplied with the application. Solution 2 Reload paper to change the feeding direction, then print again. 㻥㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S7 Shaded Patterns Are Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The shaded pattern of the print data and the dither pattern of the printer are interfering with one another. Solution 1 Print again without specifying a shaded pattern in the application. See the instruction manual supplied with the application. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 2 1. Display the [Quality] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Set [Halftones] to [Gradation]. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 3 1. Display the [Quality] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Set [Halftones] to [Error Diffusion]. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" 㻥㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S8 Photographs and so on Are Printed in Different Colors from Those Displayed on the Monitor Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The methods for adjusting the color on the screen (RGB) and in the printer (YMC) are different. Therefore, the color on the screen may not be printed out exactly as it appears. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Display the [Quality] tab. Select the [Manual Color Settings] check box. Click [Color Settings]. Display the [Matching] tab. Set [Matching Method] to [Perceptual [Monitor Color Matched]]. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Display the [Quality] tab. Select the [Manual Color Settings] check box. Click [Color Settings]. Display the [Matching] tab. Select [Gamma Adjustment] in [Matching Mode]. Change the gamma value for [Gamma]. The larger the value is, the darker in color the data is printed. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Solution 3 If you are using the PS printer driver, set [RGB Source Profile] in the [Setup] Menu ([PS] Options) to [Canon HDTV gamma 1.5], [Canon HDTV gamma 1.8], or [Canon HDTV gamma 2.4]. Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details, see Help of the PS printer driver. "[Setup] Menu ([PS] Options)" 㻥㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0L9 Fill Patterns and Borders Are Not Printed in the Correct Color (Specified Color) Even When the Same Color Is Specified for Them Perform the following procedure. <Cause> A special process may be applied depending on the line width of the border so that thin lines are printed clearly. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Display the [Quality] tab. Select the [Manual Color Settings] check box. Click [Color Settings]. Display the [Matching] tab. Set [Matching Method] for [Text] and [Graphics] to the same settings. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Display the [Quality] tab. Select the [Manual Color Settings] check box. Click [Color Settings]. Display the [Matching] tab. Select [Gamma Adjustment] in [Matching Mode]. Change the gamma value for [Gamma]. The larger the value is, the darker in color the data is printed. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" 㻥㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LA Square Areas That Cannot Be Seen on the Display Appear around Lines or Text and Are Printed in a Different Color from the Other Areas Perform the following procedure. <Cause> A process that is different from the specified halftone process or color process may be applied depending on the operating system or application. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver Solution 1 1. Display the [Quality] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Set [Gray Compensation] to [All] or [Disabled]. PCL Printer Driver See Help of the PCL printer driver. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver Solution 2 1. Display the [Quality] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Set [Halftones] to [Resolution] or [Gradation]. PCL Printer Driver See Help of the PCL printer driver. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. UFR II Printer Driver Solution 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Display the [Quality] tab. Select the [Manual Color Settings] check box. Click [Color Settings]. Display the [Matching] tab. Set [Matching Method] for [Text], [Graphics], and [Images] to the same settings. PCL Printer Driver See Help of the PCL printer driver. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" 㻥㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0S9 Superimposed Diagrams Are Not Printed in the Correct Color Perform the following procedure. <Cause> Because the superimposed areas are misaligned due to enlarged or reduced printing, or any complicated superimpose process is specified in the application, the following problems occur. Streaks appear. Diagrams are printed with their colors partially different from the data. Diagrams that are not filled in with any color do not appear through another data and cannot be printed in the correct color. UFR II Printer Driver Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 1. Display the [Quality] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Set [Mode Details] to [High Quality]. PCL 6 Printer Driver See Help of the PCL 6 printer driver. 㻥㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LH The Printing Position Is Skewed Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> [Gutter] is specified. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 1. Display the [Finishing] tab. 2. Click [Gutter]. 3. Set [Gutter] to "0." You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([Layout] Options)" <Cause 2> [Offset Y] and [Offset X] are specified. Solution Set [Offset Y] and [Offset X] to "0." "Adjusting the Printing Position for All the Jobs" <Cause 3> "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application are not specified properly. Solution Specify the settings for "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application properly. See the instruction manual supplied with the application. <Cause 4> The printing position is adjusted in [Adj. Start Position]. Solution Adjust the printing position to an appropriate value in [Adj. Start Position]. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" 㻥㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LJ A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The setting for the scaling factor is not appropriate. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 1 1. Display the [Page Setup] tab. 2. Clear the [Manual Scaling] check box. If the [Manual Scaling] check box is cleared, the scale factor will be set according to [Page Size] and [Output Size] automatically. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 2 1. Display the [Page Setup] tab. 2. Select the [Manual Scaling] check box, and then specify an appropriate scale factor according to the paper size to be used. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options)" <Cause 2> Paper is not loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Solution Load the paper properly. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" <Cause 3> A document with no margins was printed. Solution 1 Data is printed with a margin of 5 mm (10 mm for envelopes). Provide a margin around the data. "Printable Area" Perform the following procedure if you are using the printer driver. PCL/UFR II Printer Driver 1. Display the [Finishing] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. Solution 2 3. Set [Expand Print Region and Print] to [On]. PS Printer Driver See Help of the PS printer driver. The edges of the printout may be partly missing, depending on the settings of the document to be printed. 㻥㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LK Data Is Reduced and Printed Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The setting for the scaling factor is not appropriate. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 1 1. Display the [Page Setup] tab. 2. Clear the [Manual Scaling] check box. If the [Manual Scaling] check box is cleared, the scale factor will be set according to [Page Size] and [Output Size] automatically. Perform the following procedure in the printer driver. Solution 2 1. Display the [Page Setup] tab. 2. Select the [Manual Scaling] check box, and then specify an appropriate scale factor according to the paper size to be used. You can specify the same setting from the printer's control panel. "[Setup] Menu ([PCL] Options)" 㻥㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LL The Next Page Is Printed from Halfway across the Previous Page Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> "Line Spacing" or "Lines/Page" in the application is not specified properly. Solution Specify the settings for "Line Spacing" or "Lines/Page" in the application so that the data fits in one page, and then print again. See the instruction manual supplied with the application. <Cause 2> When [Auto Mode Selection] is set to [Auto Selection], the number of seconds specified in [Timeout Time] is too short. Solution Set [Auto Mode Selection] to a setting other than [Auto Selection], or increase the number of seconds specified in [Timeout Time] sufficiently. "[Setup] Menu ([Print Mode] Options)" "[Setup] Menu ([Interface] Options)" 㻥㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LR Printed Data Lies outside Paper Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> When the following settings in the [Select Feeder] menu are set to [Mixed Sizes], custom size paper whose long edges are 215.9 mm or less is loaded in landscape orientation and printed (only when the UFR II printer driver is used). Size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray Drawer N (N = 1, 2) size Solution Load the paper in portrait orientation, and then print again. <Cause 2> When the UFR II printer driver was not used, custom size paper was loaded in portrait orientation to be printed. Solution Load the paper in landscape orientation, and then print again. <Cause 3> Paper of the size smaller than the data size is loaded. Solution Load the paper of the size that matches the data size or print the data in the reduced size that matches the paper size. "Scaling Documents" <Cause 4> Paper is not loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Solution Load the paper properly. "Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer" "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" <Cause 5> The printing position is adjusted in [Adj. Start Position]. Solution The printing position is adjusted in [Adj. Start Position]. "Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source" 㻥㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LS Blank Paper Is Output (Nothing Is Printed on the Paper) Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> Multiple sheets of paper are fed at a time. Fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface. Solution <Cause 2> The size of the paper loaded in a paper source is different from the following settings. Setting for [Output Size] in the [Page Setup] tab in the printer driver [MP Tray Paper Size], [Drawer 1 Size], or [Drawer 2 Size] in the [Select Feeder] menu Solution When the message <Check Paper Size> appears in the display, perform the described solutions in "A Message Appears in the Control Panel." 㻥㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LU The Overall Surface of the Paper Is Printed in a Particular Color Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The drum in any of the toner cartridges has deteriorated or is damaged. Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. "Toner Cartridge Replacement" <Cause 2> A problem is occurring inside the printer. Solution If <Ennn-nnnn> appears in the display, follow the procedure in "The Service Call <Ennn-nnnn> Appears in the Display ("n" Represents an Alphanumeric Character)" in "The Message Indicator Is On" to solve the problem. 㻥㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LW The Last Page Cannot Be Printed Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The command that notifies of the end of the data is not sent from the computer. (The (Job) indicator is on.) Press [ ]( : Online) to place the printer offline, and then select [Form Feed] in the Reset menu. "Outputting Data (Forced Output)" Solution If you print using an application that does not have a printing function, [Form Feed] is performed because the last page in which data is less than one page remains in the memory. 㻥㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LX Unreadable Characters Are Printed Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The data is printed from Windows without the supplied printer driver installed for Windows. Solution Install the supplied printer driver for Windows, and then print again. For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "Printer Driver Installation Guide." <Cause 2> The printer setting in the DOS application is not appropriate. Solution Specify the printer setting in the DOS application to the one that is compatible with this printer. 㻥㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0LY The Printout Is Different from What Is Displayed on Screen (Windows XP and Server 2003) Perform the following procedure. <Cause> This problem may occur in some applications depending on the processing type of the print data. If you are using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, performing the following procedure may be able to solve the problem. Solution 1. Display the [Finishing] tab. 2. Click [Advanced Settings]. 3. Change the [EMF Spooling] setting. 㻥㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R0 The Flap of the Printed Envelope Sticks Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The envelope is inappropriate. Solution Replace the envelope with that which can be used with this printer. "Usable Paper" 㻥㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R1 Multiple Sheets of Paper Are Fed at a Time Perform the following procedure. <Cause> You are using paper which tends to be fed at a time. Fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface. Solution 㻥㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0SL Printed Bar Codes Cannot Be Scanned Perform the following procedure. <Cause> Depending on the type or size of bar code, scanning may be difficult. Set [Density: K]* to a lighter setting ([-2] or [-1]). If the problem is not solved, set [Density K (Fine Adj)]* to a lighter setting ([-1] or [-2]). "[Setup] Menu ([Quality] Options)" Solution * Adjust the color used to print a bar code. When printing with a lighter toner density, the print may come out faint. 㻥㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0UF Paper falls out of the output tray Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The paper in the output tray may be pushed outward depending on its state, resulting in falling out of the tray. Take either of the following measures. Rotate the paper upside down, and reload it. Solution Turn over the paper, and reload it. 㻥㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R2 Other Problems The Keys on the Control Panel Do Not Function The SD Card Cannot Be Used Jobs Cannot Be Saved SSL Cannot Be Enabled When SSL Is Enabled, the Remote UI Does Not Start, or the IPP Printing Cannot Be Performed The Printer Cannot Be Accessed from the Remote UI or Network Related Utility Software Restricting the Users Is Not Possible 㻥㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R3 The Keys on the Control Panel Do Not Function Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1 > Here is data remaining in the memory. (The Solution Press [ ]( (Job) indicator is on.) : Online) to place the printer offline, and then select [Form Feed] in the Reset menu. "Outputting Data (Forced Output)" <Cause 2> The keylock function is enabled. (The "Pi" alarm sounds when the key is pressed and <Key locked.> appears in the display.) Solution Disable the keylock function from the Remote UI. Contact the printer administrator. 㻥㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R4 The SD Card Cannot Be Used Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> [SD Card] in the Control Menu options in the Setup menu is set to [Off]. Solution Set [SD Card] to [On], and then perform a hard reset. "[Setup] Menu ([Control Menu] Options)" "Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)" <Cause 2> An error has occurred in the SD card. Solution Perform formatting in [SD Card Maintenance] in the User Maintenance options in the Setup menu. If the same error still occurs, replace the SD card. "[Setup] Menu ([User Maintenance] Options)" "Installing SD Card" <Cause 3> The SD card is not installed properly. Solution Turn the printer OFF, and then check if the SD card is installed properly. "Installing SD Card" <Cause 4> The data cannot be saved on the SD card because there is not sufficient free space in the SD card. Solution Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card. "Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) " "Remote UI" <Cause 5> The SD card is write-protected. Solution Check that the SD card is not write-protected. If the card is write-protected, release the protection, and then insert the card. 㻥㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R5 Jobs Cannot Be Saved Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause. <Cause 1> The data cannot be saved on the SD card because there is not sufficient free space in the SD card. Solution 1 Solution 2 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ ]( : Online), ignoring the print data. The data of 3 GB or larger in total cannot be saved. Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card. "Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) " "Remote UI" <Cause 2> The number of the jobs exceeded the number of jobs you can save in the SD card. Solution 1 Solution 2 The printer is ready to print by pressing [ ]( : Online), ignoring the print data. Up to 1000 jobs can be saved all together. Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the SD card. "Saving a Document in the SD Card in the Printer (Stored Job Print) " "Remote UI" 㻥㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R6 SSL Cannot Be Enabled Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The key pair and its certificate to be used are not registered. Register the key pair and server certificate that are used. "Setting Keys and Certificates" Solution In order to use the SSL encryption communication function, it is necessary to create keys and certificates and to register the key pair and server certificate that are used. 㻥㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0R7 When SSL Is Enabled, the Remote UI Does Not Start, or the IPP Printing Cannot Be Performed Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The file related to key management is broken. Perform the following procedure. 1. 6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>5HPRWH8,6HWWLQJV@ĺ>66/@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHODQGWKHQPDNHVXUH that [SSL] is set to [Off]. Solution 2. Restart the printer. 3. Regenerate the key and certificate and specify the settings for SSL from the Remote UI. "Setting Keys and Certificates" 4. Restart the printer. 㻥㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0UC The Printer Cannot Be Accessed from the Remote UI or Network Related Utility Software Perform the following procedure. <Cause> The IP Address Filter or MAC Address Filter is set to On. 6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHODQGWKHQPDNHVXUHWKDW>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@LVVHW to [Off]. "[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)" Solution If you have once set it to [Off], set it back to [On] after confirmation of the setting. Use the control panel to make a setting for the address filter function. 㻥㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0UE Restricting the Users Is Not Possible <Cause> The IP Address Filter or MAC Address Filter is not set to On. Solution 6HOHFW>1HWZRUN@ĺ>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHODQGWKHQPDNHVXUHWKDW>$GGUHVV)LOWHU@LVVHW to [On]. "[Setup] Menu ([Network] Options)" Use the control panel to make a setting for the address filter function. 㻥㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RC If You Cannot Solve a Problem If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. Please have the following information ready when contacting the Canon: Product name (LBP7780Cx) Serial number (see the following illustrations to find the location of the serial number.) Place of purchase Nature of the problem Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results WARNING If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or an odd odor Turn OFF the power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact the Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself. IMPORTANT If you attempt to repair the machine by yourself It may void the limited warranty. 㻥㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RE Appendix Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows For Windows 8/Server 2012 Users The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode Font Samples 㻥㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RF Basic Operations/Various Information for Windows Displaying the Top Page of the User Manual CD-ROM Checking the IP Address Using the PING Command Checking the Processor Version of Windows Vista, 7, or Server 2008 Printing a Test Page in Windows Checking the Bi-directional Communication Displaying the Printer Folder Checking Printers in the Print Server Checking the Port Changing the Printing Protocol Setting for [Device Type] when Setting a Port Displaying the Top Page of the User Manual CD-ROM If the top page of the User Manual CD-ROM does not appear even after inserting the CD-ROM, perform the following procedure. The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using. 1. From the [Start] menu, select [Run]. 2. Enter "D:\Maninst.exe." 3. Click [OK]. 1. Enter "D:\Maninst.exe" in [Search programs and files] or [Start Search] under the [Start] menu. 2. Press the [ENTER] key on the keyboard. Checking the IP Address Using the PING Command 1 Run Command Prompt. )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>&RPPDQG3URPSW@ 2 Enter "ping <the IP address of the printer>", and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. Input example: "ping 192.168.0.215" Correctly enter the IP address which is set for the printer. If the wrong IP address is entered, you cannot obtain an appropriate check result. 3 Check the displayed result. When "Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss)," is displayed The IP address is set properly. 㻥㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 When "Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss)," is displayed Ask your network administrator about the problem. 4 Enter "exit", and then press [ENTER] on the keyboard to exit Command Prompt. NOTE When using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP Consult your network administrator and perform either of the following settings. Set the DNS Dynamic Update function. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" Configure DHCP or other settings so that the same IP address is always assigned to the printer when the printer is started. "Configuring the Protocol Settings" Checking and configuring the subnet Enter "ipconfig" as a command in Command Prompt. The network setting information of the computer appears. Confirm that the computer and printer are on the same subnet. Example: Setting in a computer Subnet mask: "255.255.255.0" IP Address: "192.168.0.10" The IP address of the printer needs to be "192.168.0.xxx". (xxx indicates an arbitrary number.) Checking the Processor Version of Windows Vista, 7, or Server 2008 If you are not sure whether you are using 32-bit Windows Vista/7/Server 2008 or 64-bit Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, you can check that using the following procedure. 1 From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel]. 2 Display [System]. &OLFN>6\VWHPDQG6HFXULW\@RU>6\VWHPDQG0DLQWHQDQFH@ĺ>6\VWHP@ Double-click [System]. 3 Check the processor version. For a 32-bit operating system [32-bit Operating System] is displayed. For a 64-bit operating system [64-bit Operating System] is displayed. 㻥㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Printing a Test Page in Windows You can check the operations of the printer driver by printing a test page in Windows. 1 Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper drawer. "Paper Loading and Output" 2 Open the printer folder. "Displaying the Printer Folder" 3 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 4 Print a test page. (1) Display the [General] tab. (2) Click [Print Test Page] to print a test page. 㻥㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Checking the Bi-directional Communication 1 Open the printer folder. "Displaying the Printer Folder" 2 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 3 Check the bi-directional communication. (1) Display the [Ports] tab. (2) Check the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is selected. 㻥㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 IMPORTANT Do not clear the [Enable bidirectional support] check box. If the check box is cleared, you cannot perform printing. Displaying the Printer Folder From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes]. )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>&RQWURO3DQHO@DQGWKHQFOLFN>3ULQWHUVDQG2WKHU+DUGZDUH@ĺ>3ULQWHUVDQG)D[HV@ From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printer]. From the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers]. From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then double-click [Printers]. Checking Printers in the Print Server 1 Display [Windows Explorer]. )URPWKH>6WDUW@PHQXVHOHFW>$OO3URJUDPV@RU>3URJUDPV@ĺ>$FFHVVRULHV@ĺ>:LQGRZV([SORUHU@ 2 Check printers in the print server. (1) Select the print server from [Network] or [My Network Places]. (2) Check the icon for this printer is displayed. 㻥㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Checking the Port 1 Open the printer folder. "Displaying the Printer Folder" 2 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 3 Check a port. (1) Display the [Ports] tab. (2) Confirm the port is selected properly. 㻥㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Changing the Printing Protocol Change the printing protocol to LPR and specify the setting for the LPR byte count using the following procedure. 1 Open the printer folder. "Displaying the Printer Folder" 2 Right-click the icon for this printer, and then select [Printer properties] or [Properties] from the popup menu. 3 Display the [Ports] tab. 4 Click [Configure Port]. 㻥㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 5 Perform the following procedure. (1) To change the printing protocol to LPR, select [LPR] for [Protocol]. (2) To enable the LPR byte count, select the [LPR Byte Counting Enabled] check box. 6 Click [OK]. Setting for [Device Type] when Setting a Port If the printer cannot be detected when setting a port, set [Device Type] as follows. (1) Select [Standard], and then select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100]. (2) Click [Next]. 㻥㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻥㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0UH For Windows 8/Server 2012 Users This printer supports Windows 8/Server 2012 operating system. For operation and description on Windows 8/Server 2012, refer to Windows Vista/7 sections. This section describes notes on using this printer with Windows 8/Server 2012. Read this section carefully before using the printer. Precautions Use the desktop mode when performing the followings. Installing/Uninstalling the printer driver Setting the printer driver * * Please note that the setting specified on the desktop may not be reflected to all Windows Store applications. For Windows 2000 Users This printer does not support Windows 2000. For details on the latest status of the supported operating systems and service packs, see the Canon web site (http://www.canon.com/). 㻥㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RH The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode Configuration Page Network Status Print Printing Position Adjustment Print IMPORTANT The following lists are samples. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by your printer. Configuration Page The printer information and the settings for printing environment are printed. 1. Make sure that the printer is online. ]( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu. 2. Press [ 3. Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page. 4. Select [Yes] using [ Network Status Print Prints the version number and the settings of the print server equipped with this printer. 1. Make sure that the printer is online. ]( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu. 2. Press [ 3. Select [Network Status Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page. 4. Select [Yes] using [ 㻥㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 Printing Position Adjustment Print Displays the current printing positions of each paper source. Adjust the printing positions referring to this print. For more details, see "Adjusting the Printing Position for Each Paper Source." 1. Press [ ]( : Feeder Selection). 2. Select [Paper Source] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 3. Select the paper source that you want to check the printing position using [ 4. Press [ ]( : Online). 5. Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is not online, press [ 6. Press [ ]( ]( ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. : Online). : Utility) to display [Utility Menu] menu. 7. Select [Printing Pos. Print] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page. 8. Select [Yes] using [ 㻥㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RJ The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode PCL Font List PS Configuration Page PS Font List IMPORTANT The following lists are samples. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by your printer. PCL Font List A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode is printed. 1. Make sure that the printer is online. ]( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu. 2. Press [ 3. Select [PCL Utility] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4. Select [Font List] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page. 5. Select [Yes] using [ PS Configuration Page The settings of the [PS] options are printed. 1. Make sure that the printer is online. ]( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu. 2. Press [ 3. Select [PS Utility] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4. Select [Configuration Page] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page. 5. Select [Yes] using [ 㻥㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 PS Font List A list of the fonts that can be used in the PS mode is printed. 1. Make sure that the printer is online. ]( : Utility) to display the [Utility Menu] menu. 2. Press [ 3. Select [PS Utility] using [ ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. ] and [ ], and then press [OK]. 4. Select [Font List] using [ ] in the [Execute?] display, and then press [OK] to output the page. 5. Select [Yes] using [ 㻥㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RK Font Samples The fonts lists printed from the [Utility Menu] menu are a comprehensive listing of all fonts currently available. The listing contains the names and print samples of the fonts stored on the printer. Scalable Fonts (PCL) OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL) Bitmapped Fonts (PCL) PCL Fonts for Windows Scalable Fonts (PCL) 㻥㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻥㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻝㻜㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL) Bitmapped Fonts (PCL) PCL Fonts for Windows 㻝㻜㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 NOTE 66 PCL fonts for Windows are included in the User Manual CD-ROM supplied with this printer. 㻝㻜㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 㻝㻜㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠 07YL-0RL Office Locations CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC. 16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan CANON U.S.A., INC. One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A. CANON EUROPA N.V. Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands CANON CHINA CO. LTD. 15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES http://www.canon.com/ 㻝㻜㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻝㻜㻜㻠
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project